FCR-2XX7 SME-A-new.pdf

MARINE RADAR/ARPA FCR-2107/2807 series

FCR-2117/2127 FCR-2817/2827 FCR-2827W FCR-2137S/2837S FCR-2837SW

The paper used in this manual is elemental chlorine free.

・FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer 9-52 Ashihara-cho, Nishinomiya, 662-8580, JAPAN Telephone : +81-(0)798-65-2111 Fax

: +81-(0)798-65-4200

All rights reserved.

Printed in Japan

A : JAN . 2009

Pub. No. SME-35590-A (NAYO )

FCR-2107/2807 SER.

*00017007610* *00017007610* * 0 0 0 1 7 0 0 7 6 1 0 *

Contents Contents

Introduction Chapter 1. General 1.1 General ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-1 1.1.1 List of FCR-2xx7-series Models with Main Functions ･･････････････････････ 1-1 1.1.2 Precautions･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-2 1.1.3 Unit Configuration ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-5 1. Radar Antenna Unit ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-5 2. Radar Processor Unit： RPU-016････････････････････････････････････････ 1-7 3. Chart Processor Unit: EC-1000C ････････････････････････････････････････ 1-7 4. Display Unit：MU-201CE/231CE ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 1-8 5. Control Units: RCU-020, RCU-015FEA, and RCU-016 ･･･････････････････ 1-9 6. LAN Adapter: EC-1010 ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-9 7. B-Adapter: EC-1020 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-9 8. Hub: HUB-100 ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-9 1.2 Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1-10

Chapter 2. Operation Overview 2.1 Finishing and Starting Chart Radar････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-1 2.1.1 Finishing Chart Radar ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-1 2.1.2 Starting Chart Radar Screen from Windows Screen ･････････････････････････ 2-2 2.2 Screen ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-3 2.2.1 Chart Radar Screen･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-3 2.2.2 Radar Screen ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-4 2.2.3 ECDIS Screen ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-5 2.3 Basic Operations ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-6 2.3.1 Menu Control･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-6 2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode･････････････････････････････････････ 2.4.1 Icon Box on Upper Left-hand Side････････････････････････････････････････ 2.4.2 Icon Box on Lower Left-hand Side ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 2.4.3 Icon Box on Upper Right-hand Side ･･････････････････････････････････････ 2.4.4 Icon Box on Lower Right-hand Side ･･････････････････････････････････････

i

2-14 2-14 2-19 2-21 2-26

Contents

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-31 2.5.1 NorthUp TM(RM) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-31 2.5.2 ECDIS ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-31 2.5.3 Route ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-32 1. Procedure for Creating New Routes ･････････････････････････････････････ 2-33 2. Selecting and Monitoring Created Routes ････････････････････････････････ 2-34 3. Deleting Created Routes････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-36 4. Alarms Page ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-36 5. Check Page ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-37 6. Parameters Page ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-37 7. Prepare Page ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-38 8. List of > MONITOR ROUT... menu items displayed on the data display box･ 2-38 2.5.4 UChart･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-39 1. Types of User Charts ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-41 2. Procedure for Creating New UChart ･････････････････････････････････････ 2-41 3. Selecting and Displaying Created UChart ････････････････････････････････ 2-44 4. Deleting Created User Chart ････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-45 2.5.5 Pilot Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-46 1. Description of Dialog Box ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-48 2. Procedure for Creating New Pilot Data･･･････････････････････････････････ 2-49 3. Selecting and Displaying Created Pilot Data･･････････････････････････････ 2-49 4. Deleting Created Pilot Data ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-50 2.5.6 Radar ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-50 2.5.7 Predictor (Predicted Position) ････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-51 2.5.8 Backing up Created Routes, UCharts, and Pilot Data････････････････････････ 2-52 1. Backup Control Procedure･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53 2. File Reading Procedure･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53 3. File Copying Procedure ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53 4. File Name Change Procedure ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 2-53

Chapter 3. Menu Tree 3.1 Summary of Menu ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-1 3.1.1 ECDIS Menu ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-1 3.1.2 Radar and Chart Radar Menu･････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-4 3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays･････････････････････････････ 3-6 3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 3-10 3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 3-21

ii

Contents

Chapter 4. Radar Settings 4.1 RPU-016 Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4.1.1 DIP Switch Setting for SPU Board ････････････････････････････････････････ 4.1.2 RPU-016 Menu Settings ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4.1.3 Execute Tune Initialize ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 4.1.4 Execute Radar Initialize ･････････････････････････････････････････････････

4-1 4-1 4-2 4-4 4-5

Chapter 5. Installation Parameter Settings 5.1 Before Making Installation Parameter Settings ･････････････････････････････････ 5.1.1 Installation Parameter Menu ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5.1.2 Selecting Sensors ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5.1.3 Sensor Input ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････

5-1 5-1 5-3 5-4

5.2 Installation Parameter Backup ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-5 5.2.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-5 5.2.2 Handling Installation Parameter Backup Data ･･････････････････････････････ 5-6 5.3 LAN Adapter ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-7 5.3.1 Connection Ports of LAN Adapter ････････････････････････････････････････ 5-7 5.3.2 Port Allocations and Specifications of LAN Adapter ････････････････････････ 5-9 5.3.3 Restrictions on Connection Channels of LAN Adapter ･･････････････････････ 5-9 5.3.4 Relay Output of LAN Adapter････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-10 5.4 B-Adapter ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-11 5.4.1 Connection Port of B-Adapter ････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-11 5.4.2 B-Adapter Connections ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-12 5.4.3 STO Signals 1 through 8 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-13 5.4.4 STI Signals 1 through 16 ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-14 5.4.5 Analog Signals ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-15 5.4.6 Gyro Connections･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-16 5.4.7 LOG Signal Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-16 5.4.8 System Failure･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-16 5.5 Installation Parameter Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-17 5.5.1 General ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-17 5.5.2 Positioning Equipment 1 through 6 ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 5-20 5.5.3 Gyro1 (2) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-23 5.5.4 Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN) ････････････････････････ 5-26 5.5.5 AIS transponder ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-32 5.5.6 Dual Axis Log (DAX) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-34 5.5.7 Log････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-37 5.5.8 Echo Sounder and Weather･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-39 5.5.9 Wind Sensor････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-44 5.5.10 Rate of Turn Gyro ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-47

iii

Contents

5.5.11 5.5.12 5.5.13 5.5.14 5.5.15 5.5.16 5.5.17 5.5.18 5.5.19 5.5.20 5.5.21 5.5.22 5.5.23 5.5.24 5.5.25 5.5.26 5.5.27

ARPA Processor Alarm Relays ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 5-49 Alarm Inputs/AMWSS ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-50 Central Alarm Text･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-51 Conning Display･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-52 Electronic chart (Laserplot) ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-53 Engine Control ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-54 Fuel Consumption ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-55 Heel and Trim ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-56 Main Engine Start Air Pressure･･････････････････････････････････････････ 5-57 Propeller 1 - 4 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-58 RENC Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-59 Rudders ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-60 SatCom/External Computer/Sindel Repeaters ･････････････････････････････ 5-61 Speedpilot ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-62 Thruster 1 to 4･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-63 Track Pilot ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-64 VDR ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 5-65

Chapter 6. Installation of Charts 6.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1 6.1.1 ENC, SENC, and RENC ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1 1. ENC ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-1 2. SENC ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-2 3. RENC ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-2 6.1.2 Permit ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-2 6.1.3 Outline of Chart Menu･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-5 6.1.4 Warning Display ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-6 1. Warning for Subscription License ･･･････････････････････････････････････ 6-6 2. Warning Display for Latest Charts･･･････････････････････････････････････ 6-6 6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key ･･････････････････････････････････････ 6-8 6.2.1 Installation of Public Key ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-8 6.2.2 Installation of Permit Key････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-10 6.3 Installation of Charts ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-12 6.3.1 Installation of Charts ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-12 Reference: Standard messages in S57 chart load ･････････････････････････････ 6-16 Reference: Checks on SENC Conversion History Log････････････････････････ 6-19 Reference: Automatic Conversion Settings･･････････････････････････････････ 6-21 6.3.2 Check on Installed Charts ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-23 Checks on Chart Information 1 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 6-24 Checks on Chart Information 2 ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 6-25 6.3.3 Chart Deletion ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-26 6.3.4 Chart Manipulation ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-27

iv

Contents

6.3.5 Making Groups of Chart Cells････････････････････････････････････････････ 6-29 1. Creating Groups in “Load or Update Charts from CD ROM” Window ･･････ 6-29 2. Creation in Chart Catalogue Window ････････････････････････････････････ 6-30 3. Deleting S57 Chart Cell from Group･････････････････････････････････････ 6-30

Chapter 7. RPU-016 Program Updating 7.1 Outline of Updating ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-1 7.1.1 Program Files･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-1 7.1.2 Program Number Check ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-2 7.2 Updating through Serial Port ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-3 7.2.1 Connections between PC and Radar Processor unit ･････････････････････････ 7-3 7.2.2 Precautions for Updating ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-3 7.2.3 Procedure for Program Updating ･････････････････････････････････････････ 7-5 7.3 Program Updating with Mini-Program Card ･･･････････････････････････････････ 7-8 7.4 Updating through LAN Port･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 7-9

Chapter 8. EC-1000C Program Updating 8.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-1 8.1.1 Checking of Program Version ････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-1 8.1.2 Preparations ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-2 1. Precautions ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-2 2. Preparations･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-3 8.2 Updating Procedure ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-4 8.3 Registry File Check ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 8.3.1 Outline of Registry File･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1. Registry ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2. Contents of Registry File ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8.3.2 Check Procedure for Registry File ････････････････････････････････････････

8-13 8-13 8-13 8-13 8-15

8.4 Contents of Program CD ROM ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 8-20

v

Contents

Chapter 9. LAN Adapter Settings 9.1 LAN Adapter Settings ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-1 9.1.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-1 9.2 Preparations (IP Address/Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter and Program Updating) ････････････････････････････････････････ 9-2 9.2.1 Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-2 9.2.2 Jumper Settings for LAN Adapter･････････････････････････････････････････ 9-3 9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter ･･･････････････････ 9-4 9.3.1 Outline of Settings ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-4 9.3.2 Connecting LAN Adapter (Starting 7188XW Program) ･････････････････････ 9-5 9.3.3 Checking and Making IP address Settings for LAN Adapter ･････････････････ 9-7 9.3.4 Checking and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter ･････････････････････････ 9-9 1. Parameter Checks･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-9 2. Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter･････････････････････････････････････ 9-10 9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-12 9.4.1 Overview ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-12 9.4.2 Updating LAN Adapter Program ･････････････････････････････････････････ 9-13 9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 9-16

Chapter 10. Network Settings for EC-1000C 10.1 Outline of Network Settings ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 10-1 10.2 Network Settings ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 10-3 10.2.1 LAN-1 Settings (Communication with ARPA Radar) ･･･････････････････････ 10-3 10.2.2 LAN-2 Settings (Communication with LAN Adapter) ･･････････････････････ 10-6 Reference: Check the Config. of the LAN port･････････････････････････････ 10-8

Chapter 11. Location of Parts 11.1 EC-1000C ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-1 11.2 RCU-020 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-10 11.3 LAN Adapter (EC-1010) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-12 11.4 B Adapter (EC-1020) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-13 11.5 HUB (HUB-100) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-14

vi

Contents

11.6 Monitor (MU-201CE) ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-15 11.7 RPU-016 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-16 11.8 Scanner Unit ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-23 11.8.1 X-Band (2 Unit type) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-23 11.8.2 S-Band (2 Unit type)････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-32 11.9 Radar Console･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 11-38

Chapter 12. Maintenance 12.1 Checking LAN Connections ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12.1.1 Checking LEDs････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1. LED for EC-1000C ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2. LEDs on HUB-100 ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3. LEDs on NET-100 of RPU-016 ･････････････････････････････････････････ 12.1.2 Ping Command ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････

12-1 12-2 12-2 12-2 12-2 12-3

12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter ･･････････････････････････････････････ 12.2.1 LAN-Adapter (EC-1010) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 1. LEDs in LAN-Adapter ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 2. LEDs on LAN Module ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 3. Jumper setting･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12.2.2 B Adapter (EC-1020) ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 1. LEDs in B-Adapter ････････････････････････････････････････････････････

12-7 12-7 12-8 12-8 12-8 12-9 12-10

12.3 Checking LAN Signal･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-11 12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-15 Procedure for putting EC-1000C into Selftest mode･･････････････････････････ 12-15 1. Version Numbers ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-15 2. Analog ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-16 3. Alarm ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-16 4. CPU and Memory ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-18 5. Display ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-18 6. Drivers ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-20 7. Network ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-20 8. Control Head･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-21 9. Exit Test ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-21

vii

Contents

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor Unit ････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-22 12.5.1 Normal Selftest ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-23 Selftest Items ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-24 Display of program numbers ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 12-24 ROM/RAM, DIP Switches････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-25 PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR ･･････････････････････････････････････ 12-26 RF UNIT MONITOR ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-26 Checking keys･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-28 Checking input sentences ･････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-28 12.5.2 Factory Test ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-29 Contents of Factory Test ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-30 FPGA Program Numbers and RFC Board Ver･･･････････････････････････ 12-30 Loop Back Tests ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-31 12.6 Replacing BIOS Battery on CPU Board of EC-1000C ･････････････････････････ 12-32 12.7 BIOS Setting ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-32 12.8 Replacing HDD of EC-1000C･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 12-33

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP Preparation ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-1 1. BIOS Setting ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-1 2. Loading Windows XP software ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-3 3. Formatting ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-4 4. Windows XP Setup･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-7 5. User Accounts Setting ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-11 6. Installing System Driver ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-13 7. Security Center Setting ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-18 8. Switching Windows XP to Classic ････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-19 9. Computer name, Work group, and Virtual memory Setting ･･････････････････････ 13-20 10. Display properties･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-23 11. Opening Windows Explorer to make C drive properties setting ･･････････････････ 13-29 12. Returning BIOS setting to its original state ････････････････････････････････････ 13-33 13. LAN setting ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-34 14. Installing Chart Radar software･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-34 15. Permissions setting･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-34 16. Automatically Log On setting ････････････････････････････････････････････････ 13-37

viii

Contents

Chapter 14. Q & A Q1. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Auto Pilot? ････････････････････ 14-1 Q2. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Conning Display? ･･････････････ 14-1 Q3. Can the C Map be used? ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-1 Q4. Let me know the maximum cable length between units. ･････････････････････････ 14-1 Q5. Let me know how to connect the EG-3000. ････････････････････････････････････ 14-1 Q6. Let me know about HUB-100.････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-1 Q7. Why is the HUB-100 connected between the EC-1000C and the RPU-016? ･･･････ 14-1 Q8. The error massage [Permanent Warning : At least one of used charts has more than 1 week----] is displayed.･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-2 Q9. What menu can I use to change the background color of the window? ････････････ 14-2 Q10. The mode status bar on the ECDIS window does not display “Route”. ･･･････････ 14-2 Q11. Where can I make selection of the data box display? ･･････････････････････････ 14-2 Q12. Where can I find the menu to eliminate the MOB or the Event mark?････････････ 14-2 Q13. A big letter of “XX” is displayed on the screen. What does this mark indicate? ･･･ 14-2 Q14. The Inter-switch function does not work while in Chart Radar mode. ････････････ 14-2 Q15. What kind of functions do “Set Std Display” of [Main Menu] in ECDIS mode and “Set Base Display” of [Main Menu] in Radar/Chart Radar mode have?･･････････ 14-2 Q16. What do the settings of Off, Std, and Oth in the Chart Display menu mean?･･････ 14-3 Q17. When I try to open the Installation parameter menu, “Cannot read disk” is displayed.･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3 Q18. “Unknown” is displayed in the Datum box under the position display box.･･･････ 14-3 Q19. Where can I set whether or not to make Gyro correction? I cannot set it by selecting [Menu] -> Sensor -> Other to “Gyro corr”. ･･････････････････････････ 14-3 Q20. Can I save Route Plan data to a floppy disk and further edit the saved dada on my PC? ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3 Q21. Are Route, User Chart, and Pilot data displayed on Radar Mode window? ･･･････ 14-3 Q22. Position data is displayed in red. What do letters inside the parentheses by the SOG and COG display represent? ･･･････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3

ix

Contents

Q23. How does the system draw echoes? ･･････････････････････････････････････････ 14-3 Q24. Can I make the cursor motion faster? ････････････････････････････････････････ 14-4 Q25. What is the Kalman filter? ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-4 Q26. Please let me know about charts. ････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-5 Q27. The system freezes. What measures do I need to take when the system is slow in motion?･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-6 Q28. Even if I turn ON the system power supply, the RPU-016 is not powered on.･････ 14-6 Q29. Let me know what measures I need to take when I have replaced HD. ･･･････････ 14-6 Q30. Let me know what measure I need to take when I have replaced the CPU board of the EC-1000C. ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-6 Q31. Sensor data such as position data are not entered. ･････････････････････････････ 14-7 Q32. Please let me know the method for checking of B-Adapter.･････････････････････ 14-7 Q33. Navigation parameters cannot be saved.･･････････････････････････････････････ 14-7 Q34. The VRM and EBL do not smoothly move. Does this problem result from faulty rotary encoder? Further, echoes do not smoothly switch when I make range setting change. ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8 Q35. How many hours of life the LCD of the display unit has? ･･････････････････････ 14-8 Q36. Let me know how I can make setting and connection of alarm output on the RPU-016 side (ARPA).･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8 Q37. Since sensitivity seems to have degraded, I want to check for magnetron current. How can I check?･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8 Q38. I replaced magnetron. Then, what shall I do? ･････････････････････････････････ 14-8 Q39. The Radar displays no image. Further, the error message “Connection Lost to ARPA CPU” is displayed. ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8 Q40. What are the differences between data on “Conning Position” setting made with the General setting in the Installation Parameters menu, GPS position set with Position Equipment, and Own Ship info shown on page 2 in the Radar Initialize menu? ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-8 Q41. Can RPU-016 setting be made by selecting Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize menu? ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9

x

Contents

Q42. No setting can be made even by changing the Radar number with the Radar Initialize menu. ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9 Q43. Where can I make adjustment of echo trail level? ･････････････････････････････ 14-9 Q44. Do I need to connect GYRO data to the LAN Adapter? ････････････････････････ 14-9 Q45. Could the Chart, Installation Parameter, Route, UChart, and Pilot Data be deleted by updating the program?･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9 Q46. ARPA targets are lost. ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-9 Q47. Let me know the method for checking the input of serial data in the LAN Adapter. 14-9 Q48. Can I monitor Sensor data vs. Serial data?････････････････････････････････････ 14-10 Q49. Let me know the method for checking the B Adapter.･･････････････････････････ 14-10 Q50. I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify position data, but no position data are displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays echoes. ･････････････････････････ 14-10 Q51. I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify AIS data, but no AIS targets are displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays as the AIS targets. ･･････････ 14-10 Q52. Is there any method for verifying the Installation Parameter file on my PC?･･････ 14-10 Q53. When I turn ON the power supply, a keyboard error is caused. When I plug the keyboard and press [F1] key, the system normally boots up. ････････････････････ 14-10 Q54. AIS targets are displayed, but I cannot transmit AIS message from the chart radar. 14-11 Q55. The key of the monitor unit does not work. ･･･････････････････････････････････ 14-11 Q56. Why is the RS232C port of the Monitor unit connected to the COM-1 port of the EC-1000C? ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････14-11 Q57. When I turn ON the power supply and connect DVI cable, no data are displayed. ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-11 Q58. Can I use both RGB signal and DVI signal? ･･････････････････････････････････ 14-11 Q59. Which do you recommend us to select DVI or RGB signal for the monitor signal? ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-11 Q60. I registered the wrong Computer name. Let me know how to make registration change. ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ 14-11 Q61. How to communication between the RPU-016 and the EC-1000C? ･････････････ 14-12

xi

Contents

Appendix 1) List of Alarms Description of the Alarm Priority System ･･････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-1 AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-2 AP1.2 Additional Navigation Alarms ･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-17 AP1.3 List of Chart Alarms ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-18 AP1.4 ARPA Alarms ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP1-20

Appendix 2) NMEA and IEC Sentences AP2.1 List of Talker name ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-1 AP2.2 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA to ECDIS ･････････････････････････ AP2-3 1. OSD – Own Ship Data ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-3 2. PAESP – Position Adjust ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-3 3. TTM – Target ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-4 4. RSD – Radar System Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-4 AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA ･････････････････････････ AP2-5 1. GLL – Position ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-5 2. GGA – Position ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-5 3. FUGLL – Future Position ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-5 4. DTM – Datum･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-6 5. OSD – Own Ship Data ･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-6 6. ZDA – UTC Time ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-6 7. DPT - Depth ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-7 8. MWV – Wind ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-7 9. PAESP – Position Adjust Acknowledge･･････････････････････････････････ AP2-7 10. PAESC – Curved EBL ････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-7 11. PAESF – Fix Target Acquire/Cancel ･･･････････････････････････････････ AP2-8 12. PLSPL – Chart Segment ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-8 13. PLSPS – Chart Symbol ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-9 14. PAESW – Waypoint List･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-9 15. PAESN - Notebook･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-9 AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2.4.1 Trackpilot ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2.4.2 GYRO1 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2.4.2.1. When source is a direct gyro with analog synchro or stepper interface ････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2.4.2.2. When source is a direct gyro ････････････････････････････････････ AP2.4.2.3. When source is a trackpilot ･････････････････････････････････････ AP2.4.3 GYRO2 ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2.4.3.1. When source is a trackpilot ･････････････････････････････････････

xii

AP2-10 AP2-10 AP2-10 AP2-10 AP2-11 AP2-11 AP2-12 AP2-12

Contents

AP2.4.4 Rate of Turn ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-12 AP2.4.4.1. When source is a direct gyro ････････････････････････････････････ AP2-12 AP2.4.4.2. When source is a trackpilot ･････････････････････････････････････ AP2-13 AP2.4.4.3. When source is a dual axis log with internal rate of turn gyro･･･････ AP2-13 AP2.4.5 Ground speed from a dual axis log (=DAX) ･････････････････････････････ AP2-14 AP2.4.5.1. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message･･･････････････ AP2-14 AP2.4.5.2. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message････････････ AP2-14 AP2.4.5.3. When source is a dual axis log with transverse bow and stern measurement using PSALL message･････････････････････ AP2-15 AP2.4.6 Water speed ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-15 AP2.4.6.1. When source is a pit log with closed contact interface ･････････････ AP2-15 AP2.4.6.2. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message･･･････････････ AP2-16 AP2.4.6.3. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message････････････ AP2-16 AP2.4.7 Position, datum, SOG and COG from a DGPS･･･････････････････････････ AP2-17 AP2.4.7.1. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1) ････････････････ AP2-17 AP2.4.7.2. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) ････････････････････････････････････ AP2-17 AP2.4.7.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) ････････････････････････････････ AP2-18 AP2.4.7.4. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1)･･････････････････････････････ AP2-18 AP2.4.7.5. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2)･･････････････････････････････ AP2-19 AP2.4.8 Position, datum, SOG and COG from any other source than DGPS ････････ AP2-19 AP2.4.8.1. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1) ････････････････････････････････････ AP2-19 AP2.4.8.2. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) ････････････････････････････････････ AP2-20 AP2.4.8.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) ････････････････････････････････ AP2-20 AP2.4.8.4. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1)･･････････････････････････････ AP2-21 AP2.4.8.5. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2)･･････････････････････････････ AP2-21 AP2.4.9 System time from a GPS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-22 AP2.4.9.1. System time･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-22 AP2.4.10 Water depth ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-22 AP2.4.10.1. When source is an echosounder ････････････････････････････････ AP2-22 AP2.4.11 Wind ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-23 AP2.4.11.1.When source is a wind sensor･･･････････････････････････････････ AP2-23 AP2.4.12 Water temperature ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-23 AP2.4.12.1.When source is a water temperature sensor･･･････････････････････ AP2-23 AP2.4.13 ARPA targets･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-24 AP2.4.13.1.When source is a radar using TTM message ･･････････････････････ AP2-24 AP2.4.13.2. When source is a Furuno radar with ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface････････････････ AP2-25 AP2.4.14 Speed and course from an ARPA radar ････････････････････････････････ AP2-25 AP2.4.14.1.When source is a radar using OSD message ･･････････････････････ AP2-25 AP2.4.14.2.When source is a Furuno radar with ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface････････････････ AP2-26 AP2.4.15 Optional signals for Conning Display from Engine Control･･････････････ AP2-26 AP2.4.15.1.When source is simulated SINDEL Engine Control ･･･････････････ AP2-26 AP2.4.15.2.When source is NORCONTROL Engine Control ･････････････････ AP2-26

xiii

Contents

AP2.4.16 Transmitted messages to an ARPA radar ･･････････････････････････････ AP2-27 AP2.4.16.1.Datum････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-27 AP2.4.16.2.Own ship position ･････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-27 AP2.4.16.3.Depth below transducer ････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-28 AP2.4.16.4.Wind･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-28 AP2.4.16.5. When ARPA radar uses Furuno ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface･･････････ AP2-28 AP2.4.16.6.When ARPA radar is a Selesmar radar･･･････････････････････････ AP2-29 AP2.4.17 AIS Targets ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-29 AP2.4.17.1.When source is AIS Transponder ･･･････････････････････････････ AP2-29 AP2.4.18 Route backup to external device ･･････････････････････････････････････ AP2-29 AP2.4.18.1.Datum････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-29 AP2.4.18.2.Waypoint ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-30 AP2.4.18.3.Route ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-30 AP2.4.19 Route restore from external device････････････････････････････････････ AP2-31 AP2.4.19.1.Waypoint ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-31 AP2.4.19.2.Route ････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-31 AP2.5 Sensor Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-32 AP2.5.1 Sensor and Installation parameter diagram ･･････････････････････････････ AP2-32 AP2.5.2 Source of Position ････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-34 AP2.5.3 HDG Data ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-35 AP2.5.4 ROT Data ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-35 AP2.5.5 SOG/COG Data ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-36 AP2.5.6 Source of Docking speed components: Conning and Docking ･････････････ AP2-37 AP2.5.7 Source of Drift ･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････ AP2-37 AP2.5.8 Source of Water Speed for drift calculation･･････････････････････････････ AP2-38 AP2.5.9 Summary of interfaces and optional components･････････････････････････ AP2-39

Appendix 3) Specifications 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

GENERAL･･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-1 RADAR/CHART RADAR ･･････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-2 ECDIS ･･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-3 I/O ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-4 POWER SUPPLY ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ･･････････････････････････････････････AP3-6 COLOR ･････････････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-6 PERFORMANCE MONITOR ･･･････････････････････････････････････････AP3-6 SWITCHING HUB ････････････････････････････････････････････････････AP3-7

xiv

Contents

Ref-1) Installation of C-Map ･･････････････････････････ Ref1 Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver ･･･････････････････ Ref2 Ref-3) Updating of HDD Firmware ････････････････････ Ref3 Electrical Parts List･･･････････････････････････････････････ E-1 Contents of Drawings ････････････････････････････････････ S-0

xv

Introduction Introduction

1. Checks after Installation Completion of installation

LAN connection check

- EC-1000C LAN1 -> RPU-016 LAN2 -> LAN adapter - RPU-016 - LAN adapter LAN port of LAN module

Record the contrast of the connecting channel and corresponding sensor.

Wiring check on LAN adapter

IP setting check - RPU-016 - LAN adapter - EC-1000C (LAN1, 2)

Old

Program check on EC-1000C and RPU-016

LAN adapter must coincide with EC-1000C in program number.

Installation parameter settings

No

Program updating

Updating of LAN adapter program

Must coincide in channel with the wiring of the LAN adapter.

Sensor settings Sensor data must be displayed.

Radar initialize settings

Chart installation

Final checks: Check that a proper Radar image is displayed with no errors. Be sure to make a data backup of Inatalation Parameter.

i

Introduction

Check-list No. 1 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Check item Check that DIP SW1 #3 on the SPU board of the RPU-016 is ON. The error message "Connection Lost to ARPA CPU" will be displayed and no communication with the EC-1000C or RPU-016 will be possible if it is OFF. Check that the LAN connector for the LAN adapter is connected to the LAN module. Check that the power supply to each unit is in conformity with the power supply specifications of the unit. Pay attention to the power supply specifications of the RPU-016, in particular. There are 100- and 220-VAC models. Check that the EC-1000C coincides with the LAN adapter in program number. Otherwise, update the program of the LAN adapter. - LAN adapter: Type "sercotr" after starting the 7188XW. - EC-1000C: Execute [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Selftest. Check that the LAN adapter is operating. The LAN adapter is okay if the LED on the LAN module blinks at 1-second intervals. Check that the LAN-1 and LAN-2 ports of the EC-1000C are operating (communicating). The LAN-1 port connects to the RPU-016 and LAN-2 port connects to the LAN adapter. Each port is in communication if the green LED is blinking. Note: You can check with the Ping command used on the DOS prompt screen to ascertain whether the LAN connections are correct. Check that the connection port of each sensor to the LAN adapter is proper. CH1: TX/RX(4800) CH2: RX(4800) CH3: TX/RX(4800) CH4: TX/RX(4800) CH5: TX/RX(4800/38.4k) CH6: RX(4800) CH7: RX(4800) CH8: RX(4800) Note: Always connect AIS to CH5. Check the LAN connection (IP address) settings. For No.1 Chart radar EC-1000C Network - LAN-1 (ARPA radar): 172.31.3.33 - LAN-2 (LAN adapter)：10.0.0.184 For RPU-016 Radar No. - Radar: 172.31.3.6 For LAN adapter IP address - No. 1 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.194 - No. 2 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.195 For No. 2 Chart radar - LAN-1 (ARPA radar): 172.31.3.34 - LAN-2 (LAN adapter): 10.0.0.185 - Radar: 172.31.3.7 - No. 1 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.196 - No. 2 LAN adapter: 10.0.0.197

ii

Reference page 4-1 5-7 11-15 11-20

9-9 12-15 9-3 12-7

12-2 12-3

5-9

10-3 9-7 4-2 4-8 12-3

Introduction

9

10 11

Check that installation parameter settings are made. - AIS transponder: Connect the AIS transponder to CH5 of the LAN adapter with the Device Interface set to IEC61162-2 (38400bit/s). - ARPA processor alarm relays: Make settings for alarm output from the RPU-016. - Dual Axis Log (DAX): Make settings if the DS-30 or 50 is connected. - Echo Sounder and Weather: Make settings if the FE-700 is connected. - General: Information on the vessel, based on which the position of drawing is offset. - Gyro: Connect gyro data to the RPU-016. Make connection device settings to either ARPA CPU AD-10 (Only Chart Radar) in AD format or ARPA CPU Serial in serial communication (at 38.4 kbps). - Log: Make settings if the DS-80 is connected. - Positioning Equipment 1-6 - Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN): Radar connections Set Own for Chart Radar for the local Chart radar on each Radar transceiver basis, set Chart Radar for other chart radars, and IMO Radar for the IMO Radar. - Wind Sensor: Make settings if the Wind Sensor is connected. Check that sensor settings are made in [Menu] -> Sensor. Check that the data displayed is for the connected sensor. **Check Sensor -> Pos, Spd/Cse page settings and display** Check that [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize is executed. Check that [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize settings are made.

12

Check that the sensitivity of each Radar as well as its image is proper.

13

Check that the AIS target is displayed.

14

Check that the ARPA is in proper operation.

15

Check that no error is generated. [Menu] -> Recode -> Current Alarm

16

Check that the installation parameter settings made are backed up.

17

Check that the necessary charts are installed.

18

Check that the program number of each unit is confirmed.

19

Check that the installation parameter settings are copied to the default file.

Chapter 5

3-16 4-4 4-5 3-16 3-9 3-9 4-10 AP1-1 3-10 5-5 Chapter 6 12-15 12-29 5-6

Important: Settings for the RPU-016 can be made from the EC-1000C. Connect the Control unit and Monitor unit to the RPU-016, however, and check the items Type, Mode, and Radar No., in particular, on the Initialize menu. Moreover, make ARPA and Trail settings and check that position data is displayed as well. Make the following settings for the above: OS POSN -> NAV AID -> LAN、 INITIALIZE -> NETWORK -> NET WORK SETTING -> RADAR -> INS ADDRESS -> 0000.0000.0000.0000

iii

Introduction

2. Boards Exchange Be sure to turn the LAN-connected equipment OFF and ON if IP address settings for the LAN adapter, RPU-016, or EC-1000C are changed. Exchange

EC-1000C

EC-1000C HDD

EC-1000C CPU board

Description

Chart radar software is usually installed. If ECDIS software is installed, replace it with the Chart radar software. Chapter 6 Other procedures are the same as the following HDD replacement procedure. The BIOS screen will be displayed with the power turned ON if the Chart radar software is not installed. Install the software in that case. If the software is installed: 1) The HDD is set for No. 1 EC-1000C and No. 1 LAN adapter. Reinstall the software if the software installed is for No. 2 EC-1000C and No. 2 LAN adapter. 2) Check that the LAN adapter coincides in EC-1000C program version, or otherwise update the LAN adapter software. 3) Check the network settings. 4) Make installation parameter and sensor settings. 5) Install the necessary charts. Implement Load Optimized Defaults -> BIOS setting initialization, and make the following settings. 1) Standard CMOS Features Halt on -> All, But Keyboard 2) Advanced BIOS Features -> First Boot Device: HDD-0 -> Set Second Boot Device: Floppy 3) Integrated Peripherals -> USB Keyboard Support: Enable 4) Integrated peripherals-> PWRON after PWR-Fail: Former-Sts 5) Power Management Setup -> Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN: Delay 4 Sec

CD Drive

No settings are required.

FDD

No settings are required.

LAN adapter

1) Check that the LAN adapter coincides in EC-1000C program version, or otherwise update the LAN adapter software. 2) Make LAN adapter settings.

B Adapter

No settings are required.

RPU-016

RPU-016 SPU board

Reference page

1) Check the power supply specifications. 2) Take the procedure of SPU board replacement. 3) Make GC-10 settings. Refer to the next page and reset the board to factory default settings. 1) Set the DIP SW1-#3 to ON (RPU-016). 2) Make settings for [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize. (EC-1000C) 3) Make settings for [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize. (EC-1000C) 4) Make eco trail level and ARPA detail data settings, if necessary. (RPU-016)

iv

Chapter 6 Chapter 5 Chapter 9 Chapter 10

13-33 13-2

9-12 9-7 9-9

Chapter 4

Introduction

RPU-016 PWR board 03P9339AD HV-9017 board RPU-016 GC-10 board

Magnetron

MIC, IF AMP, MD, and RFC boards PSU-007

Make specification checks. 03P9339A: 100 VAC/24 rpm 03P9339B: 100 VAC/42 rpm 03P9339C: 220 VAC/24 rpm 03P9339D: 220 VAC/42 rpm Make a specification check. HV settings: HV-9017A (12 kW); HV-9017B (25/30 kW)

11-20

11-19

Make GC-10 settings.

IM 5-24

1) Implement [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize. (EC-1000C) 2) Reset [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page2 TX Time. (EC-1000C) 3) Make settings for [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page1 (Echo Adjust). (EC-1000C) 4) Conduct a self-test to check the magnetron current and other monitoring values. (RPU-016)

4-4 4-6 12-23

1) Implement [Menu] -> Echo -> Tune Initialize. (EC-1000C) 2) Make settings for [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page1 Echo Adjust. (EC-1000C)

4-4 4-6

Make a specification check.

HUB-100

No settings are required.

PR-62

Check the specifications of power supply input and the output voltage (24 V). Make a transformer tap change, if necessary.

2.1 Handling of RPU-016 1. Option Menu - Going into INITIALIZE menu. Press the [MENU] key 5 times while pressing [1: HL OFF]. - Resetting to FACTORY DEFAULT. 1) Call the FACTORY menu by pressing the [2], [3], [4] keys in sequence while pressing the [1: HL OFF] key. 2) When the FACTORY menu is displayed, select 3. FACTORY DEFAULT and press the [ENTER] key 5 times. 3) The message “Wait now Formatting…” will be displayed, followed by the message “Completed!! Power on Restart,” at which time turn OFF the power. - Items kept on hold after factory default settings are made. - [Menu] -> 0 [INITIALIZE] -> 4 [INSTALLATION] -> 4 RADAR NO, 6 MODEL, 7 TYPE, 0 PM GAIN ADJ - [Menu] -> 0 [INITIALIZE] -> 7 [NETWORK] - [Menu] -> FACTORY -> 2 [LANGUAGE]

v

Introduction

2. SPU Board Exchange 1) Set the DIP SW1-#3 of the SPU board to ON. 2) Make factory default settings after taking a note of the INSTALLATION settings in the INITIALIZE menu along with the Radar pictuer-related settings. Setting items to be kept in mind: * INSTALLATION menu: Radar No., Model, Type, and ARPA-related items, in particular. Note: - The type must be IMO. - ARPA-related item: 6: ARP PRESET -> 7 [ACQ PRESET] -> 6 [ARP DETAIL DATA] * Radar pictuer-related menus: - Picture box menu settings - Trail box menu settings

Reference: INS Network Address Position data for the RPU-016 side is input from the EC-1000C. If no position data has been input, the signal processing of echo or other data on the RPU-016 will not be possible. Make OS POSN -> NAV AID -> "INS" position data settings. For INS communication, go into the Factory menu ([Menu] -> Initialize -> Network -> Network setting -> Radar -> INS ADDRESS) and check that the INS IP Address is set to 000.000.000.000 or the LAN-1 IP address of the EC-1000C. Set the RPU-016 to Factory default settings if no position data is input into the RPU-016 though position data is displayed on the EC-1000C.

vi

1.1 General Chapter 1. General

1.1 General The FCR-21x7 and FCR-28x7 Chart Radars are Automatic Radar Plotting Aids (ARPA) that adapted IEC60963-1/2/3 and IEC61174 standards. Each model consists of the FAR-2xx7-series Radar and the FEA-2xx7-series Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) in combination. A Chart radar mode is available, in which radar images are superimposed on charts, besides a Radar mode and ECDIS mode. No corning display mode is available. Interface switching(Inter SW) is possible, in which radar images connected are switchable, provided that the FCR-2xx7 and FAR-2xx7 are LAN connected together and used in Radar mode. Charts cannot be shared among FCR-2xx7 units. Install charts in each FCR-2xx7 unit. ENC charts S57 (ed3.0/3.1) are available as of February 2008, but C-Map (Ed.3.0) charts are not.

1.1.1 List of FCR-2xx7-series Models with Main Functions - Collision prevention display supported by the ARPA system and Automatic Identification System (AIS) - Route planning and route monitoring function - Continuous monitoring of the vessel’s position by two or more positioning sensors - Safe-depth surveillance and stranding warning function - Loading and updating of electronic charts - Various alarm functions to ensure safe navigation - Sharing of route information with the ECDIS

Table 1.1.1 List of FCR-2xx7-series Models Model FCR-2117 FCR-2127 FCR-2817 FCR-2117-BB RCF-2127-BB FCR-2827W FCR-2137S FCR-2837S FCR-2837SW FCR-2137S-BB

Band

Display 20.1 type

X Band

S Band

23.1 type User’s arrangement 23.1 type 20.1 type 23.1 type User’s arrangement

1-1

Output 10 (12) kW 25 kW 10 (12) kW 10 (12) kW 25 kW 25 kW

Transceiver unit

2-unit type

3-unit type 2-unit type

30 kW

3-unit type 2-unit type

1.1 General

1.1.2 Precautions 1. Vessels Requiring Chart Radar The Notation AW of Det Norske Veritas (DNV) demands the installation of Chart radars from vessels with the highest DNV class specifications. The following table shows the equipment demanded from DNV-classed vessels by the NAUT-OC and NAUT-AW. Typical minimum equipment installation for NAUT-OC and NAUT-AW NAUT- NAUTEquipment Remarks OC AW Course information system Gyro compass 2 2 Or other approved and equivalent means Bearing repeaters 2 2 Steering repeaters 1 1 Digital repeaters 2 4 Distribution 3 5 Steering system Manual system 1 1 1 Steering stand Manual system 2 2 4 Tiller or mini wheel Heading control system 1 Track control system 1 Rudder angle indicators 3 5 Rudder order indicator 1 1 Rate-of-turn indicators 1 (2) 1 (2) Speed measuring system Speed log, measuring speed through the water 1 1 Speed log, measuring speed over ground 1* 1* * Vessels of 50 000 gross tonnage and above Slave displays 1 3 Distribution 1 3 Depth measuring system Echo sounder 1 1 Slave displays 1 3 Radar system Radar 1 Radar with ARPA functions 1 2* * One radar, with chart facilities, part of integrated system Position-fixing system DGPS 2 2 1 combined GPS/GLONASS (with Differential 1 1 correction capabilities) may replace one DGPS GPS slave unit 1 When required at route planning workstation Watch monitoring and alarm transfer Included in the alarm management system Main system unit 1 1 Collecting signals and distributing alarms Operating unit On and off + select back-up/(intervals) Acknowledge buttons 1 1 In the wheelhouse only Distribution 8 8 Buzzers Central alarm panel 1 1 May be an integral part of the conning display Slave central alarm panels w/acknowledge of 2 Complete panel or group alarms only sound Sound reception system Main system 1 1 Microphones, amplifiers, speakers, control panel Electronic chart system ECDIS 1 Part of integrated system Back-up for ECDIS 1 When ECDIS is the legal chart system Route planning system 1 If ECDIS is not the only legal chart system Conning information display system Display unit 1 Weather information 1 Weather facsimile 1 1 Internal telephone system Automatic identification system (AIS) Voyage data recorder (VDR)

1-2

1.1 General

2. LAN Connection Restrictions Both the FCR-2xx7 and FAR-2xx7 are connectable over a LAN (100 Base-TX). Due to the LAN traffic of echo data, however, there are restrictions on LAN-connected equipment. The number of traffic routes of an IMO Radar is limited to 1 and that of a Chart radar is limited to 2, and the total number of traffic routes on the system is limited to 5. The traffic of the ECDIS, if connected, is counted as 0. (There is a record of accomplishment of a maximum of two units.) Note: The Radar inter-switch function does not work while the system is in Chart radar mode. The Radar inter-switch is available only when the system is in Radar mode. FCR-2xx7’s traffic routes RAR-2xx7’s traffic routes Total no. of traffic routes

0 4 4

1 3 5

2 1 5

3. Applicable Geodetic System The FCR-21x7 or 28x7 Chart radar uses standard ENC charts for the WGS-84 datum. Therefore, positioning devices connected to the unit must be compatible with the WGS-84 datum. IMO standards require the generation of an alarm unless positioning devices are compatible with the WGS-84 datum. 4. Gyro Data Connections Input gyro data into the RPU-016. It does not connect to the LAN Adapter. In order to satisfy ARPA tracking control requirements, input the data in AD format through the GC-10. In serial data is input, however, make sure that the data satisfies the required condition of IEC61162-2 (38.4 kbps). 5. VDR Connections Use a distributor so that digital video interface (DVI) output from the EC-1000C will be distributed for the display and the video digital recorder (VDR). Furthermore, connect the DVI-RGB conversion interface to the VDR port so that red, green, and blue (RGB) signals will be input into the VDR.

VDR

DVI/RGB interface

Distributor

DVI

RS-232

1-3

1.1 General

6. Power Supply Connections Be sure to supply power to the EC-1000C and MU-201CE/231CE through a UPS so that the equipment will not be damaged by instantaneous power interruptions. Make sure that the UPS has a minimum capacity of 500 VA. - EC-1000C: 0.5 A/230 VAC or 1.5 A/100 VAC - MU-201/231CE: 0.3 A/230 VAC or 0.6 A/100 VAC 7. Ranges Available to Chart Radar Mode When the system is in Chart radar mode, Radar ranges of 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, and 12 NM will be automatically available. While in Radar mode, ranges of 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96 NM will be available. 8. Mode When the system is in Chart radar mode, the “mode” display will be fixed in NU-TM. While in Radar mode, the “mode” will be set to NU-TM, NU, HU, HU-TB, CU-TM, or CU. 9. Comparison with FEA-2xx7 - The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate a multi-workstation function that shares route plans or sensor sources with LAN connected FEA-2xx7 units. - The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate track control function, and does not connect to FAP-2000 units. - The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate a conning display function. - The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar does not incorporate functions to display Automatic Route Control System (ARCS) charts. - The FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart Radar cannot share charts with LAN connected FEA-2xx7 or FCR-2xx7 units. - C-MAP ed3.0 cannot be used.

1-4

1.1 General

1.1.3 Unit Configuration 1. Radar Antenna Unit Antenna Unit models and Performance Monitor (PM) models used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar are the same as those for the FAR-2xx7 Series. The specifications of the Antenna Unit models are classified by TR Unit, Antenna, and Gearbox. For details, refer to the Service Manual for the FAR-2xx7.

List of Antenna Unit Models Model FCR-2117(-BB) FCR-2127(-BB)

FCR-2137S(-BB)

FCR-2817 FCR-2827 FCR-2827W

TR unit

Antenna

RTR-078 (X-10 (12) kW) RTR-079 (X-25 kW)

- XN-20AF: 6.5 ft - XN-24AF: 8 ft

RTR-080 (S-30 kW)

RTR-078 (X-10(12) kW) RTR-079 (X-25 kW) RTR-081 (X-25 kW)

- SN-30AF: 10 ft - SN-36AF: 12 ft

- XN-20AF: 6.5 ft - XN-24AF: 8 ft

1-5

Gearbox RSB-096 (24 rpm) RSB-097 (42 rpm)

RSB-098/099 (21/26 rpm) RSB-100/101/ 102 (45 rpm)

RSB-096 (24 rpm) RSB-097 (42 rpm) RSB-103 (24 rpm)

Antenna power supply Power at 24 V is supplied from the Radar Processor unit RSB-098/099 - 3-phase, 200 VAC, 50 Hz - 3-phase, 220 VAC, 60Hz - 3-phase, 380 VAC, 50 Hz - 3-phase, 440 VAC, 60 Hz RSB-100/101/102 - 3-phase, 220 VAC, 50 Hz - 3-phase, 220 VAC, 60 Hz - 3-phase, 440 VAC, 60 Hz

Power at 24 V is supplied from the Radar Processor unit

1.1 General

RSB-098/099 (21/26 rpm) FCR-2837S

RTR-080 (S-30 kW)

RSB-100/101/ 102 (45 rpm) - SN-30AF: 10 ft - SN-36AF: 12 ft

FCR-2837SW

RTR-082 (S-30 kW)

RSB-104/105 (21/26 rpm)

RSB-098/099 - 3-phase, 200 VAC, 50Hz - 3-phase, 220 VAC, 60 Hz - 3-phase, 380 VAC, 50 Hz - 3-phase, 440 VAC, 60 Hz RSB-100/101/102 - 3-phase, 220 VAC, 50Hz - 3-phase, 220 VAC, 60Hz - 3-phase, 440 VAC, 60 Hz RSB-104 - 3-phase, 200VAC, 50 Hz - 3-phase, 220VAC, 60 Hz RSB-105 - 3-phase, 380VAC, 50 Hz - 3-phase, 440 VAC, 60 Hz

Note: 1. Supply single-phase 100-115/220-230 VAC at 50/60 Hz to the Radar Processor unit (RPU-016), Chart Processor Unit (EC-1000C), and Display Unit (MU-201CE/231CE). Power supplies with DC specifications are not available. 2. In the case of the Antenna Unit for the FCR-2837S, the suffix of the PSU-007 Antenna Power Supply Control Unit varies with the applicable Gearbox model. List of PSU-007 Models PSU-007 model

Applicable Gearbox

PSU-007-70-23-S

RSB-098

PSU-007-80-10-S

RSB-099

PSU-007-72-28-50/60-S PSU-007-72-28-50/60-S PSU-007-82-12-60-S

RSB-100 RSB-101 RSB-102

Power supply specification 3-phase, 200 (50 Hz)/ 220 V(60 Hz) 3-phase, 380 (50 Hz)/ 440 V(60 Hz) 3-phase, 220 V (50 Hz) 3-phase, 220 V(60 Hz) 3-phase, 440 V (60 Hz)

1-6

Current set value

Thermal relay model

2.3 A

TR-ONH/3 1.7 A

1.0 A

TR-ONH/3 0.8 A

2.8 A 2.8 A 1.2 A

TR-ONH/3 2.2 A TR-ONH/3 2.2 A TR-ONH/3 0.8 A

1.1 General

2. Radar Processor Unit： RPU-016 The Radar Processor unit used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar is the same in model as that for the FAR-2xx7 Series. The name of the Radar Processor unit, however, is RPU-016 for the FCR-21x7 or 28x7 Chart Radar. Only the difference is that S1 #3 of the SPU board of the RPU-016 is set to ON for Chart radars. The Radar type is IMO. The PWR board and HV-9017 board for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radar vary with the power supply specifications, transmission output, and Antenna rpm. Refer to the Service Manual for the FAR-2xx7 for details. List of PWR Boards Input power supply specification

100 VAC

220 VAC

PWR board

Antenna revolutions per minute (rpm)

03P9339A

PWR board setting

Gearbox Model

JP161

JP162

24

Open

Open

03P9339B

42/36

Short

Short

03P9339C

24

Open

Open

03P9339D

42/36

Short

Short

RSB-096 RSB-103 RSB-097 RSB-096 RSB-103 RSB-097

Antenna motor D8G-516 D8G-571 D8G-516 D8G-571

List of HV-9017 Boards Radar model (TR Unit) FCR-2x17 (RTR-078) FCR-2x27 (RTR-079) FCR-2x37S (RTR-080) FCR-2827W (RTR-081) FCR-2837SW (RTR-082)

Transmissi on output

RPU-013 serial number

12 kW

4328-xxxx

Type A

HV-9017 Jumper setting Adjustment JP1 JP2 COMCOMMain inverter 300V 330V adjustment

Standard 310 to 350 V

25 kW 30 kW 4329-xxxx 25 kW

B

COM500V

30 kW

COM330V

Adjust VR1 so that the voltage between TP1 and TP2 will be set to 34.7 to 35.3 VDC.

520 to 580 V

3. Chart Processor Unit: EC-1000C The EC-1000C Chart Processor unit used for the FCR-21x7 or FCR-28x7 Chart radars is the same in model as that for the FEA-2xx7. A different program, however, is used. Note: When installing a program, select the ECDIS or Chart radars. The Radar overlay (ROV) board or video board is not equipped.

1-7

1.1 General

4. Display Unit：MU-201CE/231CE Display unit models used for the FCR-21x7 and FCR-28x7 Chart radars are the same as those for the FEA-2xx7. The MU-201CE is of 20.1 type and the MU-231CE is of 23.1 type. Use a DVI connecting cable (with a maximum length of 10 m) and RS-232C control signal cable. List of Display Units Function Size Resolution Display effective area Video signal interface Radar display effective diameter Power supply Backlight remote control interface

MU-201CE

MU-231CE

20.1" 23.1" 1280 x 1024 1600 x 1200 408.0 x 306.0 mm 470.4 x 352.8 mm DVI digital or VGA selectable. 250 mm

340 mm 100 to 230 VAC RS-232C

DVI or VGA ( Program -> Startup -> Control Head. Do not press the X button.

Normal mode. Press T to enter test mode

5. The “S57 chart draw is starting up” popup message will appear. After a while, the Chard radar screen will appear. Reference: The following method can be used as well. Select Program -> Startup -> Ecawatch from the Start menu. The Chart radar will start from the above step 4.

2-2

2.2 Screen

2.2 Screen 2.2.1 Chart Radar Screen

Limited to Northup TM up to a range of 12 NM while in Chart Radar mode.

Status bar: Change with scrollwheel for Pilot, UChart, or Route monitoring.

Mode selection: Chart Radar/Radar/ECDIS

Status bar: Predictor

Data display

Chart Radar screen

When the box with the arrow appearing is clicked, the relative menu will appear.

2-3

Guide Corresponds to the button and scrollwheel on the trackball.

2.2 Screen

2.2.2 Radar Screen Status bar: Change with scrollwheel for Status bar: Predictor Pilot, UChart, or Route monitoring.

2-4

2.2 Screen

2.2.3 ECDIS Screen

Status bar - NorthUp TM (RM): Chart display mode - ECDIS: Mode display - Route: Route name - UChart: User chart name - PilotData: Pilot data name - Radar: Radar video source - Predictor: Prediction time

All chart information is turned ON.

2-5

2.3 Basic Operations

2.3 Basic Operations 2.3.1 Menu Control 1.

The Main menu will be displayed and can be selected by clicking [Menu]. The Radar mode or Chart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in the contents of the Main menu.

ECDIS Mode

Radar or Chart Radar mode

Note: Installation Parameters or Radar Initialize in the [Initial Settings] -> INITIAL SETTINGS menu cannot be selected unless the Authorizing Key Disk is inserted into the FDD.

2-6

2.3 Basic Operations

2. Turn the scrollwheel and select the target item in the guidance area. Then select the menu with left/right button and/or scrollwheel control (clicking). The Radar mode or Chart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in the contents of the guidance area. 3. When a cursor is located on the target place in the data display area, the relative item (menu) will appear in the guidance area so that the menu can be selected quickly. 4. By clicking the box marked with the arrow symbol (Œ), e.g., the BRILL box, the corresponding set menu will appear and can be maneuvered. 5. When the cursor is located on the set data, the display color of the data will change by wheeling and clicking. 6. In the case of character input, select Options in the guidance area first. Then select On-Screen Keyboard in the Options menu. Then the keyboard screen will appear, where characters can be easily input.

7. The Display Selection menu in the data box will appear when Select Sidebar is selected in the guidance area after locating the cursor in the data box. The Radar mode or Chart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in the contents of the main menu. ECDIS

Chart Radar

Radar

Route

Route

Route

Autopilot

Autopilot

Autopilot

Conning

Chart Legend

Chart Legend

Docking Chart Legend

2-7

2.3 Basic Operations

Radar/Chart Radar Sidebar menu

Route

Autopilot

Chart Legend

Note: The Chart Radar does not connect to the Autopilot.

2-8

2.3 Basic Operations

ECDIS Sidebar menu

Route + Chart Legend

Autopilot + Chart Legend

Note: The Chart Radar does not connect to the Autopilot. Route

Route+Connin

Autopilot

Route+Docking

Autopilot+Conning

2-9

Autopilot+Docking

2.3 Basic Operations

8. Display Contents of Guide Box 1 The following table shows items that will be displayed when the cursor is located on the Radar or Chart screen. Radar/Chart Radar Mode Menu/info/Chart Menu Chart Display/Info/Base Display Info/ Nav Marks Tgt Acquire/Info/Tgt Cancel(L=All) Ref Mark/Info Info/Cursor Menu Event/Info/MOB TM Reset/Info/Ship Offcenter TM Reset/Info/Ship Center Range-/Info/Range+

ECDIS Mode Menu/info/Chart Menu Chart Display/Info/Standard Display Show Value/Info/Nav Marks Hide Value/Info/Nav Marks Set Chart Center/Info/Active Scroll Info/Cursor Menu Event/Info/MOB TM Reset/Info/Ship Offcenter TM Reset/Info/Ship Center Range-/Info/Range+

9. Display Contents of Guide Box 2 When the cursor is located in the data display area, the relative menu will be displayed as shown below. When the scrollwheel is turned, the displayed contents of the guidance area will change as shown in the above table.

. | | Sensors

Menu | | Chart Menu

.

| | Sensors

Menu | | Select Sidebar ・ECDIS Show Value | | Nav Mark ・Radar, Chart radar . | | Nav Mark

ECDIS Select Sidebar - Route - Autopilot - Conning - Docking - Chart Legend Radar and Chart Radar Select Sidebar - Route - Autopilot - Chart Legend

Local (UTC)Time | | Set Time CPA On/Off | | Menu | | Chart Menu .

| | Initial Setting Alarm Ack | | Alarm List

2-10

2.3 Basic Operations

10. The Chart Display menu shows Route, User chart, Pilot data, and Chart display items. The Radar or Cart radar mode is different from the ECDIS mode in the contents of the Main menu. Chart display set values can be saved and retrieved. ECDIS mode

2-11

2.3 Basic Operations

Chart Radar/Radar Mode

Meanings of Off, Std, and Oth - Off: The function of the selected item is turned OFF. - Std: The function of the selected item is turned ON when the standard display is effective. - Oth: The function of the selected item is turned OFF when the standard display is effective.

2-12

2.3 Basic Operations

Reference: Saving and retrieving chart display set values. Items that can be saved are Other1, Other2, Tracking, Mariner, and Route pages. 1. Create Open the Chart Display menu and make settings for each page. Next, when the cursor is put on the [>] mark, the [Chat Display] menu will appear. Select Create and input the set name. 2. Select, Save, Read Only To read the preset value, choose Select. Then select the name registered in the above step. Click Save if any correction is made. In the case of only reading the set value, select Read Only. 3. Backup and Restore To eliminate the registered set value, select Backup and Restore. Select Chart Display Settings in the file category, select the file to be deleted in the Hard Disk field, and click the [Delete] button. See 2-52.

Name registered in Chart Display. - ALL-OFF : The set value of the registered name is read. - *ALL-OFF : The read set value is changed. - (r)ALL-OFF : The set value is read only and cannot be changed.

2-13

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode 2.4.1 Icon Box on Upper Left-hand Side 1. Range Change Note: A maximum range of 12 NM is available while in Chart Radar mode. Range

0.125

0.25

0.5

0.75

1.5

3

6

12 ( See note)

24

48

96

Range ring

0.025

0.05

0.1

0.25

0.25

0.5

1

2

4

8

16

Number of rings

5

5

5

3

6

6

6

6

6

6

6

2. Display Mode Change 2) Mode change - Radar - Chart Radar - ECDIS

- NorthUp TM - NorthUp RM - HeadUp RM - HeadUp TB RM - CourceUp RM Note: Only NorthUp TM while in Chart Radar mode.

Settings in the PICTURE menu changes with the mode change and vice versa.

3. PULSE： Pulse Width Change The relation between ranges and pulse width varies with Radar Model settings. Make the following Radar Model settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Radar Initialize -> Page2 Range X-band 6, 12, 25, 30 kW S-band 50, 60 kW

0.125 0.25

0.5

0.75 - 1.5

3

6

12 - 24

48 - 96

S1

S1, S2

S1, S2, M1

S2, M1, M2, M3

M1, M2, M3, L

M2, M3, L

L

S, M1

S, M1, M2

L, M1, M2

M2, L

L

S

2-14

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

4. Radar Antenna Switch (Inter SW) The following description shows an example of the display configuration of the N1 X-BAND radar name. - N1: Displayed as registered with Label in the following settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameters -> Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA communication - X-BAND: Set for Radar Model in the following settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Radar Initialize -> Page2 - 6, 12, 25UP, 25DOWN, 50 -> X BAND - 30UP, 30DOWN, 60 -> S BAND ANT INFO The information on the Radar that is LAN connected is displayed. If the Radar cannot be connected, the error message “Conn fail” appears in the PULSE display box. In that case, nothing will be displayed in the [ANT INFO] box any more.

Reference: Local Ant No. settings Take the following steps to set the local Radar number to 2, for example; 1. Set Radar Number to “2” in the following settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Radar Initialize -> Page 2 2. Turn the power supply OFF, and then ON. 3. Furthermore, set Radar transceiver to “2”, Connected to “YES”, and Device Interface to “Own Chart Radar” in the following settings: [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameters ->Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA communication Others: Select a different Radar transceiver and check that Device Interface is not set to Own Chart Radar. Note: Make sure that the same IP address does not exist in the network. For example, the No.1 and No.2 chart radars cannot be set to the same Radar number.

2-15

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

Inter SW Priority Note: The inter switch (SW) settings are available only while in Radar mode. Priority can be attached to the operation of two or more Radars that are LAN connected. For example, if the Radar image displayed on two Chart radars is from the same Radar antenna and Priority for one of the Chart radar is set to ON, the Radar image cannot be controlled from the Chart radar with Priority set to OFF. Regardless of whether it is ON or OFF, where there is no difference in priority attached between the Chart radars, the operation of the Chart radars will be interlocked. That is, if the range of one of them is changed, the other one will be changed to the same range. No. 1 Chart Radar： Priority ON

Operable Not operable

No. 2 Chart Radar： Priority OFF

And Radar images, such as echo stretch, echo average, and echo trail images, are received and processed by the RPU-016. ARPA-related items, such as acquire and tracking items, are processed by itself, and the results are transmitted through the LAN. Acquire control, vector mode/time, tracking interval, and TCPA/CPA settings will be made by the RPU-016 on the selected side.

Functions under individual control of inter SW

Function under common control of inter SW

- Display mode - Echo stretch - Signal processing - Echo trail - Vector mode and vector time - ARPA ON/OFF - AIS ON/OFF - ARPA Alarm - ARP and AIS tailing interval - Ship’s speed data - Latitude longitude data - EBL and VRM - dimmer

- Range - GAIN, STC, A/C Rain - Tune - Pulse width - Picture settings - ST-BY/Transmission - ARPA ACQ - ARPA GZ

2-16

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

5. PICTURE 1: Radar Image Settings There are 12 types of radar image settings, i.e., PICTURE 1 through COAST, each of which is different in image setting.

Menu INT REJECT (OFF/1/2/3)

ECHO STRETCH (OFF/1/2/3) ECHO AVERAGE (OFF/1/2/3) NOISE REJ (OFF/ON) AUTO STC (OFF/ON) AUTO RAIN (OFF/1/2/3/4) VIDEO CONTRAST (1/2/3/4) (A/B/C) [PULSE] 0.5 NM, 0.75 NM 1.5 NM, 3 NM 6 NM, 12-24 NM [CONDITION] SEA CONDITION (1 - 5) ANT HEIGHT (5 - 50) STC RANGE (-10 - +10)

2-17

Outline Rejects Radar interference from other vessels. (3: Strong) Signal correlation is taken per sweep. The number of correlation taking times will increase if the set number increases. Increases the number of echo display dots for echo expanded display. 1: Expanded in the bearing direction 2: Expands in the range direction 3: Expands in the bearing direction and range direction. Use 1 or 2 if there is excessive sea clutter. Use 3 in a long range with weak echo. Rejects white noise when the function is turned ON. The integral processing of echo is performed for noise suppression. Divides each scan into 32 sectors and each sector is under optimum STC control automatically. Makes A/C Rain function settings. (4: Maximum) Performs the differential processing of echo. Adjusts the contrast of echo. Sets the inclination level of video projected as echo. If the value is set to 4 (small dynamic range) with C-curve, weak echoes can be projected clearly. Sets the pulse width of each range.

The optimal operation of STC control for the situation is realized by changing the condition of the sea, antenna, and STC range. The larger the STC range is, the wider the effective range of STC control will be.

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

PICTURE Initial Set Values INT REJECT PICTURE 1 PICTURE 2 PICTURE 3 PICTURE 4 NEAR FAR NEAR BUOY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR COAST

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

ECHO STRETC H OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF 2 1 2 OFF 2 OFF OFF

ECHO AVERAGE

NOISE REJ

AUTO STC

AUTO RAIN

VIDEO CONTRAST

OFF 1 2 OFF OFF 3 1 3 2 OFF OFF OFF(2)

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

OFF OFF OFF 2 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

B1 B2 B1 A2 B2 B3 B2 B3 A2 B2 B2 B2

Pulse

PICTURE 1 PICTURE 2 PICTURE 3 PICTURE 4 NEAR FAR NEAR BUOY FAR BUOY ROUGH SEA SHIP HARBOR COAST

0.5 NM

0.75 NM

1.5 NM

3 NM

6 NM

12-24 NM

S1 S2 S1 S1 S1 S2 S2 S2 S1 S1 S1 S1

S2 S2 S1 S2 S1 M1 M1 M1 S1 S2 S1 S2

S2 M1 S2 S2 S2 M1 M1 M1 S2 M1 S2 M1

M1 M2 M1 M1 M1 M3 M2 M3 M1 M2 M1 M2

M2 M3 M2 M2 M2 L L L M2 M3 M3 M3

L L L L L L L L M3 L L L

Condition ANT Sea STC Heigh Cond. Range t 2 5 +0 2 5 +0 3 5 +0 2 5 +0 2 5 +0 3 5 +0 2 5 +0 2 5 +0 4 5 +0 2 5 +0 5 5 +0 2 5 +0

Reference: ANT Height settings are interlocked with the Antenna height settings in [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Radar Initialize -> Page 1. For example, changes in PICTURE Antenna height settings are as effective as changes in Radar Initialize Page1 settings, and any changes will be reflected to all the PICTURE settings. Note: To return set values to initial settings, open the PICTURE menu on the radar side (RPU-016), and execute DEFAULT.

2-18

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2.4.2 Icon Box on Lower Left-hand Side

Operation of Index Line-1 and 2

Disp Dimmer settings

BRILL1 – 4: Four types of settings are possible. HL OFF: Elimination of Range Ring, IL, EBL, VRM, HD Mark, HD Line, and North mark EBL settings - EBL1 -> Dotted line with wide intervals - EBL2 -> Dotted line with narrow intervals Guidance area [/L=Delete | | ] [EBL on || ]

TX STBY

1. I L-1, 2: Index Line The set menu is common to Index-1 and 2. Set item

Set value

Stern Mark EBL Cursor bearing

On/Off

Range Rings

On/Off

Index Lines

1, 2, 3, 6

Index Line Mode

Horizontal/

Remarks

On/Off

Vertical

True or Relative settings and line interval settings are possible. Vertical or horizontal settings to the HD.

2-19

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2. BRILL1 – 4: BRILLIANCE The BRILLIANCE of the marks and characters on the Radar screen or Chart radar screen can be individually set to four types (BRILL-1 through BRILL-4). Set item Palette Panel Dimmer

Calibrated

Set value

Remarks

DAY/DAYBLUE /NIGHT

Color settings for the screen background. The same as DIMMER adjustments in the BRILL box. The set value will be reset to initial value (80%) with the item turned ON.

.

ON

Dsp Dimmer

.

Character

.

Cursor

.

Echo

Green/Yellow/ White .

Trail

.

HL

.

Index Line, Range Rings, EBL, VRM

.

BRG Cursor

.

Tgt Symbol

.

Mark

.

Chart

.

Monochrome

Dimmer ADJ.

ON/OFF

Reference: Make Palette settings for the ECDIS in [Menu] -> Chart Display -> Chart -> Palette.

2-20

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2.4.3 Icon Box on Upper Right-hand Side - GAIN - SEA: MAN/AUTO - RAIN: MAN/AUTO - TUNE: MAN/AUTO TUNE MAN: The TUNE voltage of the MIC is adjusted manually. The triangular mark indicates the voltage (24 V FS).

TRIAL setting [Menu] -> Arpa+AIS -> Trial -> Mode -> Displayed in dynamic or static mode.

CHART DISP MENU

1. CHART DISP The CHART DISP consists of Targets, Mariners, Route, Other, Chart, and Tracking pages. The menu is different from the Chart Display menu on the ECDIS screen. 1. Targets AIS Target and Fusion setting items will not be displayed unless AIS Function in [Menu] -> Arpa+AIS is set to ON.

Set item

Set value

ARPA Targets Off/Std/Oth Green/Blue/Yellow/ Color Cyan/Magenta/White Size STD/Small/Large AIS Targets Symbol Off/Std/Oth Max 20/40/100/200 Max 6/12/24/48nm Green/Blue/Yellow/ Color Cyan/Magenta/White Symbol

Size

STD/Small/Large

Targets Gap Rng Dff Spd Dff

Fusion Targets ON/OFF 0.000 – 0.999 nm 0.000 – 0.999 nm 0.0 – 9.9 kt

Cse Dff

0.0 – 9.9 deg T

Remarks Used to make settings for the handling of ARPA symbol. To display the ARPA symbol, set Symbol to Std. Used to make settings for the number of displayed AIS items and the display range of AIS targets for the handling of the AIS symbol. To display the AIS symbol, set Symbol to Std. Used to make settings for the fusion conditions of AIS and an ARPA targets. Only the AIS symbol is displayed as an ARPA target under set conditions.

2-21

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2. Mariners Set item Position Range Text Points Lines Symbols, Tidats Areas

Set value Pilot data Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth User chart Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth

Only radar of Symbol, Areas

Off/Std/Oth

Remarks

Used to select the display of data created by the Pilot Plan.

Used to select the display of data created by the UChart Plan.

Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth

25% Transparent/ 50% Transparent/ 75% Transparent/ No Color Fill Manual Updates Manual Off/Std/Oth Updates Ship 1 : 10000/ Ship 1 : 20000/ True symbol 1 : 50000/ scale limit 1 : 100000/ 1 : 200000 Vectors Std ECDIS/ Vectors Conventional

Used to set the shade of the display of areas created by the User Chart.

Make ARPA settings and the vessel’s vector form settings.

2-22

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

3. Route Set item

Set value

Monitored route Center line Off/Std/Oth Channel Off/Std/Oth borders WP Off/Std/Oth Leg marks Off/Std/Oth Wheel over line Off/Std/Oth Planed routs Center line Off/Std/Oth Channel Off/Std/Oth borders WP Off/Std/Oth Leg marks Off/Std/Oth

Remarks

Used to make Route display settings in the Radar or Chart Radar screen.

Used to make Plan display settings in the Radar or Chart Radar screen.

4. Others Set value Depth contour label Depth contours, Magnetics, Currents Soundings Lights Light descriptions

Setting

,X

Remarks

Used to turn the display of symbols in charts ON/OFF on the Chart Radar screen.

2-23

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

5. Charts Set value Dsp Dimmer

Setting

Remarks

. CALIB/UNCAL

Shallow contour Safety depth Safety contour Deep contour

0 – 99 m 0 – 99 m 0 – 99 m

TM Reset

0 – 99%

Palette Symbols Depths Boundaries Light sectors Shallow pattern Update highlight

0 – 99 m

DAY/NIGHT/ DAYBLUE Simplified/ Paper chart Two color/ Multi color Plan/Symbolize Limited/Full

Used to make settings for the depth-sounding display on charts. Used to reset of screen display.

Used to make display color settings

None/Diamond All effects/ Detailed

2-24

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

6. Tracking

Sett value

Setting

Past tracks Ship Sys Off/Std/Oth Ship Pri Off/Std/Oth Ship Sec Off/Std/Oth Length 1 – 120 min Labels 0 – 60 min Targets Off/Std/Oth Use 5/10 point Interval Off/30s/1/2/3/6 min Event User Off/Std/Oth Event Auto Off/Std/Oth Event Positions Off/Std/Oth Newer than 12 hours/ Newer than 24 hours/ Show Newer than 1 week/ Newer than 2 week/ Newer than 1 month/ Newer than 3 month/ All

Remarks

Used to make the vessel’s track display settings.

Used to make settings for AIS and ARPA track display.

Used to turn Event display ON/OFF.

Used to make settings for Event time display.

Event mark and MOB

By selecting the Event mark and clicking Info in the guidance area, information on the mark will appear.

Reference: A check can be made with the Event list or Menu -> Recode.

2-25

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2.4.4 Icon Box on Lower Right-hand Side TGT LIST: ARPA target and AIS target list display. AIS Disp/Off: Used to turn AIS target display ON/OFF.

ARPA Man, Auto, AutoMan/Off: Used to decide the acquire method of ARPA targets and turn ARPA target display ON/OFF.

GZ1, 2 SET/WORK/SLEEP:

True Trail/Rel Trail: OFF to 30 min, CONT (True Train in the case of NorthUp TM2)

TM Reset ALM ACK

Note: The icon box menu of Trail is the same as that of [MENU] -> Radar.

VRM settings : - VRM1 -> Dotted line with wide intervals - VRM2 -> Dotted line with narrow intervals Guidance area [/L=Delete | | ] [VRM on | | ]

1. ARPA, GZ1, and GZ2 These areas are used for ARPA/AIS GZ settings, and common to the automatic acquire area of the ARPA. - GZ 1: Set in an arbitrary direction with a width of 0.5 to 1 nm within a range of 3 to 6 NM. - GZ 2: Set in an arbitrary direction with a width of 0.5 to 1 nm within a range of 24 NM. GZ2 settings are not possible unless GZ1 settings are made. Furthermore, unless GZ2 settings are deleted, GZ1 settings cannot be deleted. To delete GZ settings, locate the cursor in the GZ icon box and continue pressing the left button. In the case of performing the automatic acquire of ARPA targets, set the number of targets automatically acquired in the ARPA icon box menu, and set the ARPA to Auto or AutoMan.

Cancel All: Used to eliminate all the ARPA targets captured.

2-26

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

2. TGT LIST When the TGT LIST icon menu is opened, the ARPA target and AIS target lists will appear. Each target can be sorted in order of CPA, TCPA, Speed, BCR, BCT, and Range. Reference: The total number of ARPA targets is 100. The total number of AIS targets can be up to 200 targets in CHART DISP -> Target -> AIS Target.

Sort By: CPA/TCPA/Speed/BCR/ BCT/Range - CPA : Cross Point Approach - TCPA: Tme Cross Point Approach - BRG : Bearing - RNG : Range - BCR : Bow Cross Range - BCT : Bow Cross Time

ARPA target : Numbers 1 through 100 are allocated in order of acquier. The numbers will be kept on hold until the power is turned OFF even if the targets are deleted.

- : The LIST is scrolled UP/DOWN - Refresh: The LIST is refreshed.

2-27

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

In the case of displaying ARPA or AIS targets individually, locate the cursor on the targets to be displayed so that Info: [xx |Info| xx] will be displayed in the guidance area, and click the scrollwheel. Up to four ARPA or AIS targets can be displayed. To display further detailed target information, locate the cursor in the data area so that Show Details：[Show Details | | xx] will be displayed in the guidance area. Then click the left button. > TGT DETAILS - Show Tgt Name - Show Tgt Call Sign Used to select the vessel’s name or call sign for an AIS target. Target numbers are always displayed in the case of the ARPA.

X : Active (AIS targets are activated.) ： Sleep (Sleep target)

ARPA data

AIS data

Detailed ARPA data Show Details

Detailed AIS data

2-28

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

3. AIS Disp Menu

Outline

Sleep All Target Activate All

Used to set all AIS targets to Sleep mode. Used to set all AIS targets to Activate mode.

Auto Disp Msgs

This function is used to tell AIS incoming messages automatically. When a message is received, the envelope icon above the TGT LIST icon box will inform the user of the reception of the message. The incoming message will be displayed by clicking the envelope icon.

Received msgs

Messages received by the AIS are displayed. When this screen is selected, the MESSAGE screen will appear and Filter will be automatically set as Received. Incoming messages are selected by Name.

Transmit msg

A message is transmitted by the AIS. When this function is selected, the MESSAGE screen will appear. When making transmission settings, set the check mark in the Enable changes box first.

Received msgs - Filter: All/Received/Read/Unread/ Own/Sent/Unsent - Name: R(S) yyyymmdd-hhmmss (R -> Reception; T -> Time and date of transmission) Message status

The message list in a message category that is selected by Filter is displayed on the Name box. When a message is selected, the message will appear in the message list box.

Message type Set into the "Transmit msg" when this item is checked.

Message display box

2-29

2.4 Box Menu for Chart Radar or Radar Mode

Transmit msg The screen that is the same as the following one will appear by selecting [Menu] -> Safety Message. 1. When transmitting a message with the AIS, check the X Enable changes box and create a message type or message to be sent. 2. When the edition of the message to be transmitted is finished, click Send Message in the > SAFETY MESSA... menu.

Step-7

Transmission check

Step-6

Step-5

Create Message Used to create outgoing AIS messages Delete Message Used to delete the message in the Name box. Send Message Used to transmit created messages. Auto Disp Msgs Used to inform the user of incoming AIS messages with the envelope icon.

Used to make MMSI settings for the destination if the message type is set to Addressed to MMSI. Reference: If the guidance area is set to [Edit Insert | Info| ], the MMSI, call sign, and vessel’s name as the target of the selected AIS will be input by selecting the AIS target and clicking the scrollwheel. Message type settings - Addressed to MMSI, Broadcast to All - Safety Message, Binary Message - Channel A, Channel B, Channel A and B, Don’t care of channel

Step-2

Step-3

Step-1

Step-4

2-30

Note: The status of transmission is checked in the Status display. - Sent and Ack: OK - If Sent Wait Ack -> Sent but Time out is displayed, the transmission of the message has failed.

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar The Chart Radar screen and Radar screen have the following mode status display. Status bar: Changed with the wheel. Pilot, Uchart, and route monitoring Status bar: Predictor

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Status bar - NorthUp TM (RM): Chart display mode - ECDIS: Mode display - Route: Route name - UChart: User chart name - PilotData: Pilot data name - Radar: Source of radar video - Predictor: Prediction time

2.5.1 NorthUp TM (RM) This is used to change the chart display mode to Course up RM, North up RM, or North up TM.

2.5.2 ECDIS This is used to change the operation mode to ECDIS, Chart Radar, or Radar. The operation mode also can be changed with Mode in the [Menu] -> Radar menu.

2-31

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

2.5.3 Route Open the Plan Route dialog box from Plan in the status bar so that the Route Plan menu will be displayed, where a route can be selected, unselected, or created. Use the Chart Display menu to make settings for displaying or not displaying registered routes on the screen. Refer to 2.5.8 for the operation of files.

Item Select Unselect Create Exchange with Monitor Copy from Monitor Backup and Restore Report Full WP Report Passage Plan Report

2-32

Description Used to select and edit existing routes into new routes. Used to unselect routes presently selected. Used to create new routes. Used to exchange planned routes with monitored routes. Used to copy monitored routes to planned routes. Used to back up or overwrite routes on floppy disks. Used to generate reports on planned routes. Used to generate detailed reports on planned routes. Used to generate comprehensive reports from active planned routes and active pilot data.

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

1. Procedure for Creating New Routes 1) Open the Route Plan in the status bar and select Create. 2) Input the name of the target route. 3) Check Enable changes in the WP page in the Plan Route dialog box.

4) Locate the cursor in the required position on the chart screen, click the left button, and set the WP positions in sequence. A WP correction can be made by dragging and dropping the WP.

Related settings: Chart Display -> Route -> Planed Route

- Enable changes: Put a check mark to edit each waypoint (WP). - WP: WP number - Name: WP name - Lat: The latitude of each WP in the selected datum. - Lon: The longitude of each WP in the selected datum. - Leg/°: Direction in each section

2-33

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

- Leg/NM: - Str mode: - Rad/NM: - Chl limit/m: - Spd min: - Spd max: - Insert before: -

Next WP: Delete: Import: Reverse: All Visible:

Range between adjacent routes (nm) Steering mode between adjacent sections (rhumb line or great circle) Turning radius in each WP Channel border (in meters) between adjacent sections Minimum ship's speed between adjacent sections Maximum ship's speed between adjacent sections Inserts a new WP before an existing WP by clicking the WP number in the WP field and clicking this button. Changes the direction and range of the WP next to the selected WP. Deletes the selected WP. Insets the selected WPs from existing routes into the present route. Reverses the voyage order of routes. Displays center lines, channel borders, WP marks, and leg marks on the chart screen.

5) After a WP is input, edit the name, steering mode, radius, channel limit, and speed (minimum and maximum) data. Edit the same on all WPs in the route.

2. Selecting and Monitoring Created Routes To select a created route to be monitored, locate the cursor on Monitor of Route in the status bar and select the prepared route. To delete the route, click the right button and select Unselect in the guidance area (Route Monitor).

Select Route Monitor.

Route being monitored

Unselect: Route elimination from Monitor.

2-34

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

Route data being monitored appears in the data display box.

Reference: Use the Route tag in the Chart Display menu to select necessary display items (Centerline, Channel borders, Leg mark, and wheel over line) for the route created in the chart screen.

2-35

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

3. Deleting Created Routes Click Plan in the status bar and select Backup and Restore in the Plan Route menu. Select Route Plans in the [Category] field on the Backup and Restore screen first. Then select the route to be deleted from the [Hard Disk] field, and click Delete button. Unselect the route, however, if it is in use.

4. Alarms Page Before making changes, check Enable changes. Set safe water areas and other specific conditions to make route checks.

- Enable changes: - Ignore during monitoring:

Check this item to enable edition. No chart objects in the box are used for chart ALM calculation. - Indication during monitoring: Chart objects in the box are used for chart ALM calculation, and ALM is displayed. - Alarm during monitoring: Chart objects in the box are used for chart ALM calculation. Both the display ALM and voice ALM are generated for the selected chart object. - Safety contour: Used to indicate depth contours set for chart ALM calculation. - Copy from used settings: Used to copy ALMs set for the system.

2-36

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

5. Check Page Before making changes, check Enable changes. It is possible to check whether there are any areas shallower than that of the safety contour or specific dangerous areas on created routes. A check will start by clicking on the Start button.

6. Parameters Page Select the target optimization mode in the Optimize window and set relevant parameters.

- Description: Input memos about the route. - ETD/UTC: WP-based estimated time of departure (ETD) - ETA/UTC: The first part shows the planned estimated time of arrival (ETA) at the last WP. ETA calculation is possible between two WPs. The different calculated ETA value will be shown on the second line if the planned ETA does not coincide as a result of selected optimization. The full length of the route will be displayed as well. - Speed limit: Set the speed limit for the route. - Income Input the budget of the voyage (in 1000-dollar units). - Optimize: There are four types of optimization items (i.e., Max speed, Timetable, Max Profit, and Min cost).

2-37

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

7. Prepare Page Before making changes, check Enable changes. The ETA of the specified WP in the present monitored route appears in the Prepare page.

8. List of > MONITOR ROUT... menu items displayed on the data display box.

2-38

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

2.5.4 UChart Select Monitor or Plan from UChart in the status bar, and open the UChart dialog box, where user charts are handled. Use the Chart Display menu for necessary settings, such as the registration of user charts and the display of registered user charts on the screen. Refer to 2.5.8 for the operation of files.

Area

Line

Point

Tidal

2-39

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

Monitor: Displayed in black.. Plan: Displayed in red.

Monitor

Item

Go Monitor (or Plan) mode

Select Unselect Create Backup and Restore Combine Point report: Line report Area report Symbols report Full report Report for radar

Description Used to select the Plan mode or Monitor mode for user charts. - Monitor (Go Plan mode) - Go Plan mode: Switches to Plan mode from Monitor mode. - Move Mon to Plan.: User charts used in Monitor mode can be switched to those in Plan mode directly. - Plan (Go Monitor mode) - Go Monitor mode：Switches to Monitor mode from Plan mode. - Move Plan. to Mon: User charts used in Plan mode can be switched to those in Monitor mode directly. Used to specify charts to be used. Used to unselect the active use of the present chart. Used to create new user charts. Used to make backups from the user chart file or read user charts from backup devices. Used to combine two or more charts. Used to make point reports on user charts. (User Chart menu -> Point Report) Used to make line reports on user charts. (User Chart menu -> LINE Report) Used to make reports on user chart objects. (User Chart menu -> AREA Report) Used to make reports on user chart symbols. (User Chart menu -> Symbols report) Used to make full reports on all user chart objects. (User Chart menu -> Full report) Used to make reports on all the displayed user chart objects on the radar screen. (User Chart menu -> Report for radar)

2-40

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

1. Types of User Charts User charts consist of Line, Area, Symbol, Tidal, and Point items. A single user chart can include 4,000 lines and 2,000 symbols (including characters and numbers). These user charts appear on the ECDIS, Radar, and Chart Radar screens.

2. Procedure for Creating New UChart 1) Open UChart in the status bar and select Plan. 2) Locate the cursor on the triangular mark in the Plan USER CHA... dialog box, and select Create. 3) Input an appropriate User Chart name. 4) Select the user chart Line, Area, Symbol, Tidal, Point tags to be created in the Plan USER CHA… dialog box. 5) Check Enable change in each tag for the necessary user chart to be created. The Line, Area, Symbol, Tidal, and Point points can be in any combination. 6) The user chart created will be registered when the dialog box is finally closed.

Explanation of UChart Dialog Box Point Page

Item Enable changes Point box Name Position Add Import Delete

Description Check this item to register or correct the user chart. Present point number/Number of all points Used to name the present point. Used to make latitude/longitude input manually. Used to add a new record with the same information next to the present record. Used to select user charts from which points are taken in. Used to delete the present point.

2-41

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

Symbol Page Item Enable changes Symbol box Style Name Symbol Position Dsp on radar Danger Symbol Add Delete Import

Description Check this item to register or correct the user chart. Present symbol number/Number of all symbols Used to make Label settings (displayed on the ECDIS only) or Symbol settings (displayed also on the ARPA screen). Used to name the present symbol. Used to name the displayed text on the ECDIS. Used to make latitude input and longitude input manually. Check this item to display symbols on the radar screen. Check this item to use symbols for chart calculation. Used to add a new record to the end of the symbol list. Used to delete the present symbol. Used to select user charts from which symbols are taken in.

Tidal Page

Item Enable changes Tidal box Name Position

Type

Add Delete Import

Description Check this item to register or correct the user chart. Present tide observation point/Number of all tide observation points Used to name the present tide observation point. Used to make latitude/longitude input for tide observation points. Used to select tide types (present or predicted ones). Orientation, Strength, and Time: The speed, course, and time of the tide can be input. Note: The time of the tide is always displayed in local time. Used to add a new record next to the present record. Used to delete the present tide record. Used to select and take in files from the list of user charts to the present tide file.

2-42

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

Line Page Item Enable changes Line box Name

Element type

Danger Line Start position End position New start position

Add

Area Page

Import Delete

Description Check this item to register or correct the user chart. Present line number/Number of all lines. Used to name the present line. Used to select one from four line types (Navigation line, Route line, Depth contour, and Coast line) Note: The navigation lines and route lines can be displayed on the Radar ARPA screen. Depth contours and coast lines can be displayed on the ECDIS screen only. Check this item to use lines for chart alarm calculation. Used to input the latitude and longitude of the line starting point. Used to input the latitude and longitude of the line end point. Check this item to draw new lines. When this checkmark is deleted, a new line input will be connected to the previous line. Used to add a new record next to the present record. The position can be edited with new latitude and longitude input or the specification of a new position with the trackball and left button used. Used to select and take in user charts to lines. Used to delete the present record.

Item Enable changes Area box Name On Radar Danger Area Add Import Delete

Description Check this item to register or correct the user chart. Used to display the present area number. A necessary area can be selected with the number changed or a new area can be created. Used to name the present area. Check this item to display areas on the Radar ARPA screen. Check this item to include the present area in chart alarm calculation. Used to set different areas. Click the button to set a new area. Used to take in areas. Used to delete areas.

2-43

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

3. Selecting and Displaying Created UChart Select Monitor from UChart in the status bar and select the created user chart. Monitor: Displayed in black. Plan: Displayed in red.

To select the target user chart objects to be displayed, go to the Mariner page in the Chart Display dialog box.

2-44

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

4. Deleting Created User Chart Select Monitor or Plan from UChart in the status bar to open the UChart dialog box, and select Backup and Restore. Select User Chart from Category on the Backup and Restore screen, select the user chart to be deleted from the Hard Disk field, and click the Delete button. Unselect the user chart to be deleted if the user chart is in use.

Deleting Object: 1. Open the page of the target user chart object. 2. Select the user chart object to be deleted. 3. Click the Delete button on the page of the selected user chart object.

2-45

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

2.5.5 Pilot Data A navigation-related notebook is called "pilot data." Pilot data is a notebook data file that collects messages to the operator relevant to the specific ship position while the system is in Route Monitor mode. Pilot data will be displayed when the vessel goes into a range set as pilot data. Pilot data is compared with the vessel's position at 1-minute intervals, and applicable pilot data items will be displayed. Furthermore, when the vessel passes a WP, the relation with the vessel's position will be compared. When a new page of pilot data is reached, the alarm message "5001 Pilot Data: New Record" will be generated. Use the Chart Display menu for necessary settings, such as the registration of pilot data and the display of registered pilot data. Refer to 2.5.8 for the operation of files.

Types of Pilot Data - Displays only position marks:

i

- Displays position marks and characters:

i

THIS IS TEST

- Displays range ring marks in addition to position marks:

i

- Displays range ring marks in addition to position marks and characters:

2-46

i

THIS IS TEST

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

Select Monitor or Plan from PilotData in the status bar, and open the Pilot Data dialog box, where pilot data is handled.

Item

Description

Used to select Plan Pilot Data or Monitor Pilot Data. * Monitor (Go Plan mode) - Go Plan mode: Switches from Monitor mode to Plan mode. - Move Mon to Plan.: User charts used Go in Monitor mode can be switched to Monitor/Plan those in Plan mode directly. mode: * Plan (Go Monitor mode) - Go Monitor mode：Switches to Monitor mode from Plan mode. - Move Plan. to Mon: Pilot data used in Plan mode can be switched to that in Monitor mode. Used to select pilot data in Monitor mode Select or Plan mode. Unselect Used to unselect pilot data in used. Used to create new pilot data. Pilot data Create can be named with a maximum of eight characters. Backup and Used to make backups from pilot data or Restore read pilot data from backup media. Used to make report in tabular form from Report selected pilot data.

2-47

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

1. Description of Dialog Box Monitor Pilot Data Current Record Page: If the vessel is within a range set for pilot data with View all records checked, the present record data will appear in the dialog box as shown right. View Record Page: If the arrow key is clicked with View all records checked, an arbitrary pilot data record can be displayed. Enable changes: The Monitor Pilot data mode can be set to Plan Pilot Data mode with this item checked.

Plan Pilot Data Item Enable changes Rec .

box

Position Range

Description

Add

Import Delete

Description Check this item to enable changes. Note: Pilot data can be changed only under North-up or Course-up mode. Used to display the present selected record number and all the number of records. Displays the latitude and longitude of the present record. Used to display the distance from the vessel when the present pilot data is active on the screen. Used to edit pilot data message records. This record will appear on the screen, after the vessel passes a calculation point. Use this item to edit text data. Used to add a new record next to the present record. The position can be edited with new latitude and longitude input or the specification of a new position with the track ball and left button used. Used to select and take in all or part of existing files into the present pilot data file. Used to delete the present record of pilot data.

2-48

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

2. Procedure for Creating New Pilot Data 1) Open PilotData in the status bar and select Plan. 2) Click the Plan button and open the Plan PilotData dialog box, select Create, and input pilot data name. 3) Check Enable changes on the Edit page in the Plan Pilot Data dialog box. 4) Locate the cursor on the position of displaying pilot data on the ECDIS screen and click the left button. 5) Input the distance from the vessel in the Range box in order to activate the pilot data. 6) To display text message on the ECDIS screen, input the appropriate message into the text window. 7) When the dialog box is closed, the created pilot data will be registered.

3. Selecting and Displaying Created Pilot Data Select Monitor from PilotData in the status bar and select the created pilot data.

Select pilot data to be displayed on the Mariner page in the Chart Display dialog box.

2-49

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

4. Deleting Created Pilot Data Select Monitor or Plan from PilotData in the status bar to open the Pilot Data dialog box, and select Backup and Restore. Select Pilot Data from Category in the Backup and Restore screen, select pilot data to be deleted from the Hard Disk field, and click the Delete button. Unselect the pilot data to be deleted if the pilot data is in use.

2.5.6 Radar Not used.

2-50

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

2.5.7 Predictor (Predicted Position) This function makes it possible to display the vessel's position on the ECDIS, Chart Radar, or Radar screen after an elapse of a specified time of 30 to 180 seconds. It is necessary to use real scale symbols for the vessel's markings in order to display the predicted position. The predicated position is displayed by five yellow symbols. Setting Procedure 1. Turn the trackball on the characters of Predictor in the status bar. The guidance area will display Predictor ON or Predictor OFF. 2. Click the left button and select ON or OFF. 3. Turn the trackball and locate the cursor on the time display of Predictor. 4. Turn the wheel, select the required time, and press the left button. By turning the wheel,30, 60, 90, 120, 150, and or 180 seconds can be selected.

Time settings 30 to 180 seconds

Predicted position of time set by Predictor

Predictor ON/OFF

2-51

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

2.5.8 Backing up Created Routes, UCharts, and Pilot Data The Backup and Restore dialog box is used to back up, copy, rename, and delete data. The Backup and Restore function is accessible from the Route, Uchart, and Pilot Data menu or [Menu] -> Recode.

Category：Selection of the target category Route Plans/ User Charts/ Pilot Data/ Installation Parameters/Chart Display Settings/ Paper Chart Setup/ Presentation Libraries/Logs/Manual Update/All Charts and Updates Hard Disk: Selection of files in the category selected by Category All the files in the category will be selected if All is checked. Backup Format: Selection of the target backup format for Route and User Chart. Select ANTS basically. Backup Format will not appear if the category selected is not Route or User Chart. - Route: INC/ANTS/ASCII PROPRIETARY/ASCII WPNAME POSITION/ ASCII POSITION WPNAME/ORION WEATHEROUTINGT/ASCII FULL - User Chart: INC/ANTS Drive: A: ¥ -> FDD, D:¥ -> CD, E:¥ -> Removable Disk

2-52

2.5 ECDIS Mode Status Bar

1. Backup Control Procedure 1) Select the target category file from the Category field. 2) Select the target file from the Hard Disk field. 3) Select ANTS from Backup Format field in the case of the Route or User Chart category. 4) Select the target drive from Drive field. 5) Click the Backup button.

2. File Reading Procedure 1) Select the target category file from the Backup and Restore dialog box. 2) Select the target drive from Drive. 3) Select ANTS from Backup Format in the case of the Route or User Chart category. The format specified in Backup Format will be used. 4) Select the target file from Backup Device. 5) Click the Restore button.

3. File Copying Procedure 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Select the target category file from Category in the Backup and Restore box. Select the target file from Hard Disk. Select ANTS from Backup Format in the case of the Route or User Chart. Click the Copy button. Use the wheel and input a new name for the file, and click the OK button.

4. File Name Change Procedure 1) Select the target category file from the Category field in the Backup and Restore dialog box. 2) Select the target file from the Hard Disk field. 3) Click the Rename button. 4) Use the wheel and input a new name for the file, and click the OK button.

2-53

Chapter 3. Menu Tree 3.1 Summary of Menu 3.1 Summary of Menu 3.1.1 ECDIS Menu

See next page

3-1

3.1 Summary of Menu

Route, User Chart, Pilot Data menu

3-2

3.1 Summary of Menu

Initial Settings menu

3-3

3.1 Summary of Menu

3.1.2 Radar and Chart Radar Menu

See next page

3-4

3.1 Summary of Menu

3-5

3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays

3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays Icon Box Item

Sub Menu-1

Range

0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1.5/ 3/6/12/24/48/96 Chart Radar: Max. 12NM

Presentation Mode

Radar/Chart Radar/ECDIS

Display Mode PULSE Radar Select (Inter SW)

PICTURE

LI 1, LI 2

Sub Menu-3

NorthUpTM(Chart radar)/ NorthUp RM/ HeadUp RM/ HeadUp TB RM/ CourceUp RM S1, S2, M1, M2, M3, L ANT No.1 – ANT No.4

PICTURE 1, PICTURE 2, PICTURE 3, PICTURE 4, NEAR, FAR, NEAR BUOY, FAR BUOY, ROUGH SEA, SHIP, HARBOR, COAST Stern Mark EBL Cursor bearing Range Rings Index Lines Index Line Mode Palette Panel Dimmer Calibrated Dsp Dimmer Character Cursor Echo

BRILL1 – 4

Sub Menu-2

Trail HL Index Line, Range Rings, EBL, VRM BRG Cursor Tgt Symbol Mark Chart Monochrome

Band, Model, Pos. INT REJECT ECHO STRETCH ECHO AVERAGE NOISE REJ AUTO STC AUTO RAIN VIDEO CONTRAST [PULSE]

[CONDITION] On/Off On/Off On/Off 1, 2, 3, 6 Horizontal/Vertical DAY/DAYBUE/NIGHT .

0-4/4

OFF/ON . . .

Geen/Yellow/White . . . . . . . .

ON/OFF

3-6

(OFF/1/2/3) (OFF/1/2/3) (OFF/1/2/3) (OFF/ON) (OFF/ON) (OFF/1/2/3/4) (1/2/3/4) (A/B/C) 0.5NM/0.75NM/1.5NM, 3NM/6NM/12-24NM -> S1, S2, M1, M2, M3, L SEA CONDITION (1 - 5) ANT HEIGHT (5 - 50) STC RANGE (-10 - +10)

3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays

Symbol ARPA Targets

CHART DISP

AIS Targets

Fusion Targets

Pilot data

User chart

[Mariner]

Manual Updates Ship Vectors

Monitored route CHART DISP

[Route] Planed routs

CHART DISP

[Other]

Size Symbol Max Max Color

[Targets]

CHART DISP

Color

Depth contour label Depth contours, Magnetics, Currents Soundings Lights Light descriptions

Size Targets Gap Rng Dff Spd Dff Cse Dff Position Range Text Points Lines Symbols, Tidats Areas 25% Transparent/ 50% Transparent/ 75% Transparent/ No Colour Fill Only radar of Symbol, Areas Manual Updates Ship True symbol scale limit Vectors Center line Channel borders WP Leg marks Wheel over line Center line Channel borders WP Leg marks ,X ,X ,X ,X ,X

3-7

Off/Std/Oth Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/ Magenta/White STD/Small/Large Off/Std/Oth 20/40/100/200 (point) 6/12/24/48nm (Range) Green/Blue/Yellow/Cyan/ Magenta/White STD/Small/Large ON/OFF 0.000 – 0.999nm 0.000 – 0.999nm 0.0 – 9.9kt 0.0 – 9.9 deg T Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth

Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth 1 : 10000/1 : 20000, 1 : 50000/1 : 100000, 1 : 200000 Std ECDIS/Conventional Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth

3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays

Dsp Dimmer

CHART DISP

[Chart]

Shallow contour Safety depth Safety contour Deep contour Palette Symbols Depths Boundaries Light sectors Shallow pattern Update highlight

Past tracks

CHART DISP

[Tracking]

. CALIB/UNCAL 0 – 99m 0 – 99m 0 – 99m 0 – 99m DAY/NIGHT/ DAYBLUE Simplified/Paper chart Tow color/Multi color Plan/Symbolize Limited/Full None/Diamond All effects/Detailed Ship Sys Ship Pri Ship Sec Length Labels Targets Use Interval User Event Auto Event Positions

Events Show

Sort By: TGT LIST

CPA/TCPA/Speed/BCR/ BCT/Range

「Ship name/ARPA No. CPA/TCPA/BRG, RNG/BCR/BCT」 >

3-8

Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth 1 – 120min 0 – 60min Off/Std/Oth 5/10 point Off/30s/1/2/3/6min Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Off/Std/Oth Newer than 12 hours/ Newer than 24 hours/ Newer than 1 week/ Newer than 2 week/ Newer than 1 month/ Newer than 3 month/ All

3.2 Icon Box Menu on Radar and Chart Radar displays

Sleep All Target Activate All Auto Disp Msgs Filter: Name: Status Send Org. Vessel Received msgs “Displayed Type of Msg.”

.Ｘ

Enable changes

“Edit message.” AIS Disp

Filter: Name: Status Send Org. Vessel

Transmit msg “Displayed Type of Msg.”

.Ｘ

Enable changes

“Edit message.”

> Safety Message

ARPA

Trail

Create Message Delete Message Send Message Auto Disp Msgs

Manual 100 Auto 25 Auto 50 Auto 75 Auto 100 Ref target vector Cancel All OFF/15M/30M/1H/3H/6H/ 15H/30H/CONT

3-9

All/Received/Read/Unread/ Own/Sent/Unsent R yyyymmdd-hhmmss Read yyyymmdd-hhmmss Call Sign, MMSI Broard cast to All/ Addressed to MMSI Safety Message/ Binary message Don’t care Channel, Channel A, Channel B, Channel A and B Broard cast to All/ Addressed to MMSI Safety Message/Binary message Don’t care Channel/Channel A, Channel B/Channel A and B All/Received/Read/Unread/ Own/Sent/Unsent S yyyymmdd-hhmmss Unsent yyyymmdd-hhmmss Ship name/Call Sign/MMSI Broad cast to All/ Addressed to MMSI Safety Message/ Binary message Channel A/Channel B/ Channel A and B/ Don’t care of channel Broad cast to All/ Addressed to MMSI Safety Message/Binary message Don’t care Channel/Channel A, Channel B/Channel A and B Same as “Transmit msg” OK/Cancel Same as “Transmit msg”

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar Main Menu

Sub menu-1

Sub menu-2

Sub menu-3

Go Back

Chart Menu >

S57 Legend

Cell name: Navigational purpose: Issue date: Edition number: Last displayed update: Update issue date: Last update appl. Date: Projection: Horizontal: Vertical datum: Sounding datum: Quality of data: Magnetic Ver.: Depth: Height:

Close MOB

Event

Event Description . OK Cancel Go Back Current Alarm

Alarm Queue [ ] Log interval min Log signal Target ARPA AIS

[Danger Targets]

>

>

Limits kt Speed o Course Log interval hours Alarms Recode

Settings [Voyage]

.

Don’t Recode

Record

.

Reset >

Go Back Voyage Log Danger Target Log Distance Counter Trip Counter Logs + Counters

OK Cancel

3-10

Sub menu-4

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

> Safety MESSA... Filter .

>

Create Message Delete Message Send Message Auto Disp Msgs All/Received/Read/ Unread/Own/Sent/Unsent

Name .

>

Status: xxxx Send: xxxx Org.: xxxx Safety Message

Vessel “Displayed Add.” > “Displayed type of Msg.” > “Displayed Ch.”

Ship name Call Sign MMSI Address to MMSI Broadcast to All Safety Message Binary Message Don’t care of Channel Channel A Channel B Channel A and B

“Msg. Box” .

.

Enable changes

Set Base Display

3-11

OK Cancel

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

F1: F2: F3:

NOT SET/ ALARM ACK/ CHART DISPLAY/ SENSOR/ MENU/ STANDARD DISPLAY/ TM, CU RESET/ TOGGLE SHIP CENTER/ RANGE+/RENGE-/ INITIAL SETTINGS

Function keys F4:

Initial Settings

> INITIAL SETTINGS

Cont’d

Cont’d

Enable changes Go Back

Key Beep >

Operation >

Wheel Drive >

Alarm Level >

3-12

Go Back Off Low Mid High Go Back Normal Reverse Go Back Off Low Mid High

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

Initial Settings

> INITIAL SETTINGS

Cont’d

Cont’d

“Displayed Setting Items” Installation params

Set parameter default Sensor Channel Usage Yes No

3-13

AIS transponder// Alarm Inputs/AMWSS // ARPA Processor Alarm Relays// Central Alarm Text// Conning Display// Dual Axis Log(DAX)// Echo Sounder and Weather// Electronic chart(Laseplot)// Engine Control// Fuel Consumption// General//Gyro1//Gyro2// Heel and Trim//Log// Main Engine Start Air Pressure// Positioning Equipment 1// Positioning Equipment 2// Positioning Equipment 3// Positioning Equipment4// Positioning Equipment 5// Positioning Equipment 6// Propeller 1(stern)// Propeller 2(bow)// Propeller 3(bow)// Propeller 4(bow)// Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication(LAN)// Rate of Turn Gyro// RENC Connections// Rudders// SatCom/External Computer/ Sindel Repeqters// Speedpilot//Thruster 1(Stern)// Thruster 2(Stern)// Thruster 3(bow)// Thruster 4(bow)//rack pilot// VDR//Wind Sensor Yes

Edit parameters – xxx OK

Cancel

No

“Display Sio Channel”

Ch1: - Chn18: , B-Adapter

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

[Page 1] Echo Adjust

[Page 1] Scanner [Page 1] Others

[Page 2] Installation

Initial Settings Cont’d

> INITIAL SETTINGS Cont’d

Radar Initialize

[Page 2] Own Ship Info

[Page 3] ARPA Preset

[Page 3] ACQ Preset

[Page 3] Track Preset

Cable att adj HD Align Timing adj MBS Antenna height Near STC Curve Mid STC Curve Far STC Curve Ring suppress

Antenna Revol Antenna SW Antenna stopped EAV w/o Gyro

MANUAL/AUTO xx 000.0 – 359.9o 0 - 4095 0 - 255 5 - >50 2/2.5/3/3.5 3/4/5/6 6/7/8 0 - 70 1: Start x Angle x 2: Start x Angle x AUTO/MANUAL ON/OFF TX/ TBY ON/OFF

Dem Echo

OFF/EG

Radar Radar Number

MAIN/SUB 1/2/3/4 MAIN TOP/MAIN2nd/ MAIN3rd/AFT/PORT/STBD/ FORE/ 6/12/25UP/25DOWN/50/30UP/ 30DOWN/60 0.0 – 999999.9 0.0 – 999999.9 0 - 255 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 0 - 999 OFF/TRUE/REL 24/32NM 1 - 31 OFF/ON 100 - 1000 XN4A/XN5A/SN30AF/SN36AF/ SN4ASN5A/XN12AF/XN20AF/ XN24AF/ 3 - 10 1-5 S/M/L/LL 1/2/3/4/ 1 - 20 40 - 150 Mode: TIME, SCAN Sec: 20 - 100 Scan: 8 - 40

Blind Sector

Radar Posn Radar Mode On Time TX Time PM Gain Adj Length Width Scanner, bow Scanner, port GPS1, bow GPS1, port GPS2, bow GPS2, port Conning, bow Conning, port TTM Output Max Range Echo Level QV Display Land Size Ant select Auto Acq Corre Auto Acq Weed Gate Size Filter Lost Count Max Speed Start Time Tgt Vect Default

3-14

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

Go Back Ship parameters Nav param >

Ship and Route

Gyro correction

Route parameters > INITIAL SETTINGS Initial Settings

Selftest

Arpa Test

OK Cancel

Set values

Max speed Max hight Max draught Source Spd/lat corr. Max corr. Man corr. Max r.o.t WP app

OK Analog/Alarm/ CPU and Memory/ Display/Drivers/ Network/ Control Head/ Ext Test Datum

*Unknown datum

Position discrepancy limit

0.00 – 1.00nm

Close Watch Alarm ON/OFF WGS72, WGS84 Set Values | [Datum] Unknown datum Set Values [Position 0.00 – 1.00nm discrepancy limit]

3-15

0 – 80 kt 0.0 – 100.0 m 0.0 – 100.0 m Off/Auto/Manual On/Off 1.0 – 5.0o -5.0 – 5.0o 5 – 200o/min 30/60s

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

Guard Zone

Stabilization Mode

Arpa+ AIS

Trial

Trial Speed Rate Trial Turn Rate

AIS Function

Spd/Cse

On/Off . Manual speed Ref tgt . Dual log . Dual log . Ref tgt . Gyro 1 . Rate gyro . Chart Align . Enable .

Deadrec

Kalman Filter

Posn GPS1 Sensor Cont’d

GPS2

xx kt xx kt / xx o xx kt (water) xx kt, xx kt (bottom) xx kt xx o xx o/min xx o / xx nm xx oxx.xxx’N xxx oxx.xxx’E ON OFF OFF Sec Primary SecNoAlm PrNoAlm OFF Sec Primary SecNoAlm PrNoAlm

Set and Drift

.

Gyro Corr

xx o kt, m/s True Wind, Rel Wind Bow xx m, Aft xx m, Echo alarm . m Water xx o Course xx o Speed xx kt . Danger & Lost Alarm . Safety/Msg Alarm Record data Display Storage

Wind

Other

Stab Hdg/ Stab North Dynamic/Off/Static x kt x.xx kt/s x kt x.xx kt/s x kt x.x o/s x kt x.x o/s

Depth below trans Temperature Water Current

AIS Target

Manual

3-16

xx oxx.xxx’N/S xxx oxx.xxx’E/W xx o, xx kt xx oxx.xxx’N/S xxx oxx.xxx’E/W xx o, xx kt

xx oxx.xxx’N/S xxx oxx.xxx’E/E xx o, xx kt Angle xx o Set xx o Drift xx kt

OK OK OK

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

Position Recording Sensor

Record Distance Counting

Picture

PICTURE 1/ PICTURE 2/ Filter PICTURE 3/ PICTURE 4/ NEAR/ FAR/ NEAR BUOY/ FAR BUOY/ ROUGH SEA/ SHIP/ Pulse HARBOR/ COAST

Condition

Mark

Echo

Stem Mark EBL Cursor bearing Range Rings Index Lines Index Line Mode Go Back 2nd Echo Rej PM SART Tune Initialize

Device xx oxx.xxx’N xxx oxx.xxx’E Record Over Ground Through Water Int Reject ECHO STRETCH ECHO AVERAGE NOISE REJ AUTO STC AUTO RAIN VIDEO CONTRAST 0.5NM. 0.75NM 1.5NM 3NM 6NM 12-24NM Sea Cond ANT Height STC Range

On/Off On/Off On/Off 1, 2, 3, 6 Horizontal/ Vertical

3-17

DGPS Kalman Filter Dead Reckoning Visual Astronmical MFDF Distance counter Trip counter Distance counter Trip counter Off/1/2/3 Off/1/2/3 Off/1/2/3 Off/On Off/On Off/1/2/3/4 A1-4 B1-4 C1-4 S1/S2 S1/S2/M1 S1/S2/M1 S2/M1/M2/M3 M1/M2/M3/L M2/M3/L 1/2/3/4/5 5 ->50 -10 - +10

xx nm x.x nm xx nm x.x nm

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

> MONITOR ROUT…

Monit

Route Monitor

Alarms

Selections

Waypoints

Select Unselect Close To ETA Final

“Displayed List” > OK

WP . WP . WP .

, ,

Distance Distance

nm nm

min Suggested spd kt Trial spd kt Spd profile .> Planned as: Ignore during . Indicating during . Alarm during monitoring . Safety m Planned User Chart Planned Pilot Data WP LAT LOG SPD CSE M Rad NAME Planned ETA .

Go Back Go Monitor mode > Select > PLAN USER CHA…

Unselect Create

User Chart Cont’d

Combine

Plan User Chart Cont’d Point

Line

Go Back Go Monitor mode Move Plan to Mon. “USER CHART” > OK

Close . / Name . Position . Enable changes . / Name . Element type > . Danger Line Start Position End position Enable changes

3-18

“Write name of the new User Chart” OK “USER CHART” OK

. .

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

Area Area Comer Point of Area Enable changes . / Style Name Symbol Plan User Chart

Symbol

Position Display on radar Danger Symb Enable changes . / Name Type

User Chart

Tidal

> Monitor User Chart Monitor User Chart

Point Line Area Symbol Tidal

Position

. / Name . On Radar Danger Area . / . .

> . . . .

. . . . o

Orientation Strength Time Enable changes

kt UTC

Go Plan mode

Go Back Go Plan mode Move Mon. to Plan

.

Select Unselect Close Same as “Plan User Chart” menu Deleted: Enable changes

Go Back Go Monitor mode > > PLAN PILOT DAT… Pilot Data Cont’d

Plan Pilot Data

Edit Recode Position

Select Unselect Close . . .

Range

.

Description ADD Import Delete Enable changes

.

nm

3-19

Go Baclk Go Monitor mode Move Plan to Mon.

3.3 MAIN Menu of Radar and Chart Radar

Go Plan mode > > MONITOR PILOT.. Pilot Data

Monitor Pilot Data >

Current Record Position Range Description View all record

Radar Overlay source Gain Sea clutter Rain clutter

.

Processor

Echo trail Mode

Unselect Close . . . . nm .

>

. . . IR Clean

Radar

Select

Echo Average Echo stretch Current Length Mode ECDIS/Chart Radar/Radar

IR OFF/R1/R2/R3 OFF/LOW/HIGH EAV OFF/EAV1/EAV2/EAV3 ES OFF/ES1/ES2/ES3 0:00 min 00:30 – 30:00, CONT True/Rel

Close

3-20

PILOT DATA > OK

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display Main Menu Help

Sub menu-1

Sub menu-2

Sub menu-3

Sub menu-4

Sub menu-5

Shown “Operator Manual FCR-2xx7” KEYBOARD FOR ECDIS HELP

Set Std Display MOB Event

Event Description . OK Cancel Go Back Open Log Select all Unselect all

LOG FILE VIEW

Details Log

“Log File loading > LOG FILESDETAILS LOG may take time and prevent Shown Log Files monitoring. Do you like to Date --------Corro continue?”

Record OK

Cancel

Save as User Chart

Print Log Print All

Cont’d Print Font

LOG FILE VIEW

Voyage Log

OK > LOG FILESVOYAGE “Log File loading LOG may take time Shown Log Files and prevent monitoring. Do Date you like to -----Description continue?” OK

Cancel

Enable changes

3-21

Open File Select all files Unselect files User Chart Conversion - User Chart name . Select points with distance > 0.3NM Elements will be displayed on radar Save

Close Open Log Select all Unselect all Save as User Chart Print Log Print All Print Font Close

Go Back Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11

Same as “Details Log”

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

LOG FILE VIEW

Danger Target Log

“Log File loading may take time and prevent monitoring. Do you like to continue?” OK

Alarm Log

Cancel

OK > LOG FILESDANGER TARGETS LOG Shown Log Files Date -----Description Find Insert String to search for: OK

> TEXT VIEW-ALARMS LOG

Print Text Current Alarm

Chart Usage Log

Alarm Queue Shown “Alarm List” > TEXT VIEW Find Insert String to search for: . OK

Record

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10

Print Font Size: 11

Print Text

Cont’d

Category

Backup and Restore Hard Disk .

All

>

Copy Rename Backup Delete Backup Format

>

Route Plans/ User Charts/ Pilot Datas/ Installation parameters/ Chart Display Settings/ Paper Chart Setup/ Presentation Libraries/ Logs/ Manual Update/ All Charts and Updates Backup Format INC/ANTS/ ASCII PROPRIETARY/ ASCII WPNAME POSITION/ ASCII POSITION WPNAME/ ORION WEATHER ROUTINGT/ ASCII FULL

3-22

Open Log Select all Unselect all Save as User Chart Print Log Print All Print Font Close

Same as “Details Log”

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Backup Device . All > Backup and Restore

Drive: A:¥, D:¥ View… Delete Restore Format

>

Voyage

Record VOYAGE RECODE Settings

Danger Target

Reset

Safety Message

Go Back Voyage Log Danger Target Log Distance Counter Trip Counter Logs+Conters

Restore Format INC/ANTS/ ASCII PROPRIETARY/ ASCII WPNAME POSITION/ ASCII POSITION WPNAME/ ORION WEATHER ROUTINGT/ ASCII FULL Limits Speed kt o Course Log Interval . hours Alarms Recode . Don’t Recode . Log Interval . min Log signal target ARPA > AIS >

OK

Cancel

Same as “Safety message” of the Radar and Chart Radar Menu. Refer to page 3-11. Go Back Go Back Browse From CD-ROM

Chart Menu Cont’d

Load and Update Chart > Manual

LOAD

Default load dir Reset Set Drive: A:¥, C:¥, D:¥ SubDirs Contents . . Load Chart

3-23

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Chart Menu Cont’d

Convert List: . Cells / Groups . . RENC . CD SENC Convert . HD Convert Cancel Conv. Conv. History CD History . Automatic SENC SENC Convert conversion Settings . Automatic Display Until SubDirs Contents . Remove Charts . Remove Chart Source of Chart Catalogue . CD RENC SENC . C-Map . > View filters . Name Permit RENC . Canceled Chart . Group Navigation purpose . Overview Chart . General Catalogue . Coastal . Approach . Harbour . Berthing Select Chart Cell: Add Frame Close Edit Group Edit Group

Inside .

Outside .

New Save As Text Remove

3-24

New Group Name .

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Shown charts data list “Cell ID// RENC edt/upd// SENC edt/upd// Updates Displ. until//Updates Approv. Until”

Set Chart viewing dates

Latest RENC Product List// Oldest date// Newest date// Manual Updates Display Until Approve. Until

.

. .

Sync Manual Update Dates All SENCs

Chart Menu

.

Cont’d

Manual Update Dates

Select All Clear Public Key

Chart Permits

Non-HO

View Current Load New Accept New Non-HO User Code . Zones Areas Selected Non Selected . . User/Auth Code Load CD SerNo Create User Code Enter Auth Code

Remove Load File Backup Enter Man.

Open Save AS Enter Permit . OK

3-25

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Overview Info about the chart display Shore features, Port Depth, Currents Obstructions, Seabed, Pipelines Routes ECDIS Chart 1 Special areas Lights, services, radar, small craft Buoys, Beacons Mariner’ symbols Colour differentiation diagram Sub Dirs Open Chart by . . Cell name Open Chart Cell: > CD: > . RECN CD HD

Shown Chart symbols

- Status Last edition/Last issue date/ Last Base Upd. Included/ Last update number

Chart Menu Cont’d

Details Chart Cell Status Cont’d

Create SENC Cont’d

[Shown Chart Cell details] Cell/Item/ Displayed Update/ Approved Update/ Latest Update SENC CONVERT Conversion List: . . Cells Groups . > . RECN HD Convert Cancel Conv

Conv. History

CD

>TEXT VIEW Shown convert History Find Print Text

3-26

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11 Insert String to search for; . OK

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

>TEXT VIEW Shown Load History Create SENC

CD History

Chart Cell Status

Find

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11 Insert String to search for; . OK

Print Text ADD Update Conv Log Go Back Drawing Type

NEW

Category

Copy Modify

Accept New Object Cell . Objects in display priority order .

Chart Menu Cont’d Manual Updates

Planning

Delete

Cont’d Manual Updates

Accept List . Edit Properties Remove from List Accept Manual Updates as Permanent

Undo Last Clear Backup and Restore.

OK Cancel Same as Record menu -> Backup and Restore. Refer to page 3-22

3-27

Point/Line/Area Standard Orange/Single/Nav Aid/Easy Lateral Sea Mark/ Easy Cardinal Sea Mark/ Easy Other Sea Mark/ Easy Obstruction/Easy Light

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Go Back >TEXT VIEW Shown Log files Log File Find Print Text Chart Menu >

System >

S52 Presentation Library User Permit Refresh Chart after Backup Reset Files Restart drawing process

Chart Display Set Chart Center

Initial Settings

Set Center Sama as Radar and Chart Radar menu. Refer to 3-7 page.

Trial Maneuver Trial Setup

Chart Radar On

Restart

Close Sama as Icon menu. Refer to 3-7 page. Lat: . Lon: .

Current Trial

Sensors

Shown “User permit:”

Speed kt o Hdg T Delay > Mode: Dynamic/Off/ Static Mode : Dynamic/Off/Static Trial Speed Rate x kt x.xx kt/s x kt x.xx kt/s Trial Turn Rate x kt x.x o/s x kt x.x o/s

Sama as Radar/Chart Radar menu. Refer to 3-16 page. Changing Display mode, “ECDIS to Radar”

3-28

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11 Insert String to search for; . OK

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Select Monitor > MONITOR ROUTE…

Monitor Monit Monitor .

>

Monitor Alarms

Monitor Selections

Route Cont’d

Monitor Waypoints

Select

Unselect

Report

min Suggested spd kt Trial spd kt Spd profile .> Planned as: Ignore during . Indicating during . Alarm during monitoring . Safety m Planned User Chart Planned Pilot Data WP/LAT/LOG/ SPD CSE M/ Rad/NAME Planned ETA .

PLAN ROUTE

>

Cont’d Unselect Create

> TEXT VIEWROUTE MONITORING REPORT Find Print Text

Close To ETA Final

Plan .

“Displayed List” > OK

Same as PLAN ROUTE (see above)

Exchange with Monitor Copy from Monitor

3-29

WP . Enable changes Insert before Next WP Delete Import Reverse All Visible Alarm . Enable changes Check . Enable changes Parameters . Enable changes Prepare

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Backup and Restore

Plan

Report

Route .

Same as Record menu -> Backup and Restore. Refer to page 3-22. > TEXT VIEWROUTE PLANING REPORT

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11

> Full WP Report Passange Plan Report

Find Print Text Same as above > TEXT VIEWFind

Print Text

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11

Close Go Plan mode Select Unselect

> MONITOR USER…

User Chart Cont’d

Monitor .

>

Cont’d Point

Line

Backup and Restore Point report Line report Area report Symbols report Full report Report for radar Close . / Name . Position . , . . Enable changes . / Name . Element type . > . Danger Line Start position . ,. End position . ,. . Enable changes

3-30

Go Back Go Plan mode Move Mon. to Plan . > Same as Record menu -> Backup and Restore Refer to page 3-22. > TEXT VIEW – USER CHART REPORT Find

Print Text

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Area

User Chart Cont’d

Monitor >

Symbol

Tidal

[Area] . / Name . . On Rader . Danger Area [Corner Point of Area] . / . , . . Enable changes . / Style . > Name . Symbol . > Position . , . . Display On Rader . Danger symbol . Enable changes . / Name . Type . > Position . , . o Orientation Strength kt UTC . . Enable changes

3-31

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Go Monitor mode > Select Unselect

Go Back Go Monitor mode Move Plan to Mon. . > Same as MONITOR USER CHART

Create

> PLAN USER CHA…

User Chart Cont’d

Backup and Restore Combine Point report Line report Area report Symbols report Full report Report for radar Close . / Name . Position . , . Add

Plan > Cont’d

Point Import

Additional Items: Add Import Delete Same as Record menu -> Backup and Restore Refer to page 3-22.

> TEXT VIEW Find

Print Text

Copy from Chart > Element category: Point Total record count: xx First recode to copy: xx Number of records: xx Copy to Chart: xx Element category: xx Copy

Delete . Enable change

3-32

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

. / Name . Element type

Line

User Chart Cont’d

Plan >

Area

>

. Danger Line Start position . ,. End position . ,. . New start position Add Import Delete . Enable change [Area] . / Name . . On Rader . Danger Area Add Import Delete [Corner Point of Area] . / . , . Add Delete . Enable change

3-33

Coast line/Depth contour/Rout line/Navigation line

Same as Point Refer to page 3-32.

Same as Point Refer to page 3-32

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Symbol

User Chart

. >

Monitor

. >

Plan

Tidal

. / Style . > Name . Symbol . > Position . , . . Display On Rader . Danger symbol Add Import Delete . Enable change . / Name . Type . > Position . , . o Orientation Strength kt UTC . Add Import Delete . Enable change

3-34

Same as Point Refer to page 3-32

Same as Point Refer to page 3-32

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Go Plan mode > Select

Go Back Go Plan mode Move Mon. Plan PILOT DATA . > OK

Unselect > MONITOR PILOT…

Backup and Restore

Monitor >

Report

Same as Record menu -> Backup and Restore Refer to page 3-22. > TEXT VIEW – ILOT DATA REPORT Find

Current Record

Go Monitor mode >

Pilot Data Cont’d

Select > PLAN PILOT DAT…

Plan >

Edit Record

Go Back Go Monitor mode Move Plan to Mon. PILOT DATA . OK

Unselect

Create

> PLAN PILOT DAT…

Print Text

Close . / Position . , . Range . nm Description . . Enable changes . View all record

Backup and Restore Report Close . / Position . , . Range . nm Description . Add Import Delete . Enable changes

3-35

Write name of the new Pilot Data . OK Same as “Edit Record” Same as Record menu -> Backup and Restore Refer to page 3-22.

Print Font Size: 8 Print Font Size: 9 Print Font Size: 10 Print Font Size: 11

3.4 MAIN Menu on ECDIS display

Radar Overlay source > Gain . Sea clutter . Rain Clutter Gain . IR Radar

Clean Process

Echo Average Echo stretch Current

Echo Trail

Mode

Length Mode ECDIS/Chart Radar/Radar

IROFF/IR1/IR2/ IR3 OFF/LOW/HIGH EAVOFF/EAV1/ EAV2/EAV3 ESOFF/ES1/ES2/ ES3 0:00 min 00:30 – 30:00, CONT True/Rel

Close

3-36

RPU-016 Settings Chapter 4. Radar 4.1Settings

4.1 RPU-016 Settings Radar settings are required if the RPU-016 unit or SPU board is replaced.

4.1.1 DIP Switch Setting for SPU Board Make settings for DIP switch S1 on the SPU board of the RPU-016. Set S1-#3 to ON. The Chart radar will not be set if this switch pin is set to OFF. Moreover, the error message “Connection Lost to ARPA CPU” will appear on the Radar Status screen and the message “6119 RadOv ARPA CPU Warning” will appear in the error box.

SPU board

SPU board

RPU-016

DIP switch: S1

RPU−016

Location of S1

Reference: S1 settings S1 MODEL FAR-21x7 (MU-201CR) FAR-28x7 (MU-231CR)

#1

#2

#3

#4

Remarks

OFF ON

OFF OFF

OFF OFF

SXGA UXGA

FCR-21x7 (MU-201CE)

OFF(N/A)

OFF

ON

FCR-28x7 (MU-231CE)

ON(N/A)

OFF

ON

Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used

4-1

SXGA UXGA

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

Reference: If S1-#3 is set to ON, “ARPA CPU DISPLAY” will appear on the screen on the Radar side.

4.1.2 RPU-016 Menu Settings Most RPU-016 settings can be made on the EC-1000C side except the following settings, which should be made on the RPU-016 side. When making these settings, change the connection of the monitor from the EC-1000C to the DVI port of the RPU-016. Connect the operation unit of the FAR-2xx7-series Radar to KEY of the TB board.

TB board: KEY

DVI

DVI-1

DVI

Add RCU-014 Wiring change

1. [MENU] -> 0 -> 4 -> 4: RADAR NO Check that the Radar numbers on the Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN) in the parameters in [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Installation of the EC-1000C coincide. Radar number 1 2 3 4

4: RADAR NO (Initial IP address) -> 1 (172.31.3.6) -> 2 (172.31.3.7) -> 3 (172.31.3.8) -> 4 (172.31.3.9)

2. Detailed ARPA-related Settings: [ARP DETAIL DATA] Make settings if needed. Refer to page 4-10. 3. Settings for Trail Icon Box Menu Make settings if needed.

4-2

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

4. Settings for Picture Icon Box Menu Make settings if needed. 5. IMO Radar Type Settings Set [Menu] Please set -> Initialize -> Installation -> 7.Type to “IMO”. 6. Radar Model Settings Make “Radar model” settings in [Menu] -> Initialize -> Installation -> 6. Model although they can be made on the EC-1000C side.

Reference: If the RPU-016 does not operate well, set the RPU-016 to factory default settings. In that case, all settings will be restored to factory default settings except settings for [Menu] -> Initialize -> Installation -> 4. Radar No. or 6. Mode -> 7. The following settings related to Radar images will be restored to factory default settings as well. - Picture settings on the EC-1000C side - Settings for the Trail menu on the RPU-016 side - Detailed ARPA-related settings on the RPU-016 side: [ARP DETAIL DATA] Make a note so that the settings can be returned to the previous values.

4-3

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

4.1.3 Execute Tune Initialize Open [Menu] -> Echo in Radar or Chart radar mode, and execute tune initialize. While tune initialize is executed, the message “Tune initialize active” will appear on the data display box (Date/UTC) and the TUNE display will fluctuate.

4-4

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

4.1.4 Execute Radar Initialize Open Radar Initialize menu from [Menu] -> Initial Settings (f) and make radar settings. Note: If two or more chart radars are LAN connected, be sure to disconnect the chart radars from the LAN before hand to make radar settings individually.

Default: The settings on page 3 will be restored to default settings with Default clicked.

4-5

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

Setting Details Item

Setting range

CABLE ATT ADJ

AUTO/ MANUAL 30 (:0 - 73)

HD ALIGN

000.0 (0-359.9)

TIMING ADJ

1 (0-4095)

MBS

0 (0-255)

DEFAULT ANT HEIGHT

5/7.5/10/ 15/20/25/ 30/35/40/ 45/ more 50m

Echo

NEAR STC CRVE MID STC CRVE FAR STC CRVE RING SUPPRESSION

2/2.5/3/3.5

Remarks The video signal level input into the control unit varies with the Antenna cable length between the Radar Processor unit and RF unit. This item is used for a compensation adjustment to the attenuation of the video signal level. - AUTO： Automatically adjusted to an optimal level. - MANUAL: Set GAIN to 80 and STC/FTC to OFF so that only a little noise will be generated. Used to make heading marker adjustment in order to compensate the direction difference between a target and the echo of the target. Make sure that the direction difference within 0.2°. Settings are processed on the basis of the Antenna HD pulse. Makes adjustment of TX delay by the electrical circuit and antenna cable. Adjust range of echo so that a straight target such as a pier is presented as an straight picture on short range. Or makes adjustment so as to allow main bang of about 5 mm radius (20 inch monitor) or 7 mm (23 inch monitor) from the center on the 0.5 NM range when MBS (listed below) is set to “0”. Used to make adjustment to Main bang suppression (MBS). Make adjustment so that the MBS echo will be eliminated in an S1 range of 1.5 NM or below. Used to select the Antenna height from the sea surface, which influences the manual and automatic STC working ranges. Reference: The value is set as an initial value for [Menu] -> PICTURE -> Condition: Ant Height.

6/7/8

STC curve slope settings, which usually need not be changed. The STC curve is set by this value and other factors, such as settings for [PICTURE] ->9: CONDITION and [Menu] ->0->4->6: MODEL.

1 (0-255)

Used to adjust to eliminate the ring-shaped image outside the MBS echo.

3/4/5/6

4-6

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

BLIND SECTOR 1

BLIND

SECTOR 2

START 000° ANGLE 000° START 000° ANGLE 000°

Scanner Antenna REVOLUTION

Others

Installation

LO/HI/AUTO

Antenna SW

OFF/ON

Antenna Stopd

STBY/TX

EAV W/O GYRO

OFF/ON

DEMO ECHO

OFF/EG

RADAR

MAIN/SUB

RADAR NO

1/2/3/4

Used to stop transmission in specific directions. Set the target direction where transmission is stopped. Set START and ANGLE to 0° if transmission should be continued.

Used to select 36 or 42 rpm provided that the RSB-097 (with a DC motor at 42 rpm) is used. - LO: 36 rpm; HI: 42rpm - AUTO: HI when the transmission pulse width is S1 or S2, and LO when the transmission pulse width is M/L. Reference: The Antenna revolving speed is classified by Antenna motor model and PWR board. The type of Power supply board with 42 rpm specifications is 03Pxxxxx-B and D, with a D8G-571 motor used. Used to turn antenna rotation ON/OFF. Usually turn this switch ON. Used to set ST-BY or TX when the antenna rotation stops. Used to make EAV settings without HDG data. This item is provided on the assumption that the Radar is installed ashore. Used to select demonstration images. - EG：EG-3000/2000 Used to make monitor (SUB) settings. Transmission will be forbidden if this item is set to SUB. The monitor signal is input into the terminal board: J616 (Master Radar) from the Master radar. The number of the local Radar (ANT) when the Radar is LAN connected. When the number is set, turn the Chart radar system OFF and ON. - Inter switch function: LAN-connected Radar information can be checked with the [ANT INF] icon menu. Note: LAN-connected Radar numbers can be set to 1 to 4 (with the ANT unit provided). Reference: The Radar IP address can be checked with [Menu] -> 0 -> 7: NETWORK on the RPU-016. The IP address is interlocked with the radar number and allocated automatically.

4-7

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

RADAR POSN

Radar Model

6/12/25UP/ 25DOWN/ 50/30UP/ 30DOWN/60

ON TIME

000000.0H

TX TIME

000000.0H

PM GAIN ADJ

0-255

LENGTH/ WIDTH SCANNER POSN

Own Ship Info

FORE/ MAINTOP/ MAIN2ND/ MAIN 3RD/ AFT/ PORT/STBD

GPS1 ANT POSN

GPS2 ANT POSN

CONNING POSN

LENGTH 0m (0-999) WIDTH 0m (0-99) BOW 0m (0-999) PORT 0m (99) BOW 0m (0-999) PORT 0m (0-99) BOW 0m (0-999) PORT 0m (0-99) BOW 0m (0-999) PORT 0m (0-99)

Used as a reference for the setting position of the Antenna. This information is displayed in the [ANT INF] icon menu. Preset values are not used for signal processing. Used for model settings. Make settings according to the RF unit. Items, such as the transmission pulse waveform (MD board) and STC curve, changes according to the settings. - X band：6/12/25UP/25DOWN - S band：50/30UP/30DOWN/60 Note: - UP： The RF is built into the Antenna unit. - DOWN: The RF unit is installed externally. Used to display the total operating hours of the Radar. The SPU board counts the time of power supply. Used to display the total transmission hours of the Radar. Used as a reference for the replacement of the magnetron. When the magnetron is replaced, reset this item to 0H. The magnetron lasts for approximately 3,000 hours. Transmission hours are counted on the SPU board. Used to make performance (PM) gain adjustment. Range and signal processing settings will be automatically made for PM gain adjustment in this menu. The PM echo is checked with [Menu] -> Echo -> PM. Used for the display size of the own ship symbol. Interlocked with settings for Installation Parameter -> General. Used to set the location of the Radar antenna. These settings are used for data on the position of the Radar antenna in the display of the own ship symbol. Used to set the location of the GPS antenna. This data is used for the position (latitude and longitude) calculation of the cursor. Interlocked with Installation Parameter -> Positioning Equipment 1 and 2.

Used to set the position of navigation. These settings are used for data on the position of navigation in the display of the own ship symbol.

4-8

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

ARP Preset

ACQ Preset

Track Preset

TTM OUTPUT

OFF/REL/ TRUE

Max Range

24/32

Echo Level

16 (0-31)

QV Display

OFF/ON

Land Size

800M (100-1000)

Ant Select

XN12AF/ XN20AF/ XN24AF/ XN4A/XN5A/ SN30AF/ SN36AF/ SN4A/SN5A

Auto Acq Corre

5 SCAN (3-10)

Auto Acq Weed

1 SCAN (1-5)

Gate Size

S/M/L/LL

Filter

1/2/3/4

Lost Count

9 SCAN (1-20)

Max Speed

Start Time Tgt Vect

100KTS (40-150) TIME/SCAN/ 50SEC(20-1 00) /20SCAN(840)

Used to set the tracking data output of the ARPA. Used to set the maximum acquisition range of the ARPA. No setting changes are required. Received echoes are classified into 32 levels. Used to set the threshold of the level of echoes handled by the ARPA. Used to display echoes handled by the ARPA according to the above setting. No setting changes are required. Used to set target sizes. Targets below this set level are handled as ARPA echoes.

Used to select the type of antenna installed in order to secure ARPA echoes because the horizontal beam width varies with the Antenna.

Used to acquire echoes detected if the echoes are the same continuously during the number of scan times preset while in auto acquisition operation. Used to set the number of echo omissions while in auto acquisition operation. This setting is related to the above AUTO ACQ CORRE set value. For example, if the AUTO ACQ CORRE set value is 5 and the AUTO ACQ WEED set value is 1, the ARPA will start acquiring echoes as long as it detects five echoes provided that there is only one omission among them, i.e., the five echoes need not be continuous. Specifies the tracking range. This is the setting of estimated position of ARPA echoes. The range differs dependeing on distance. When the number of target swaps in the ARPA is large, set GATE SIZE to “S”. And then, when the number of lost targets is large, set GATE SIZE “L or LL”. Used to make processing settings for the tracking response of waypoints. Used to make lost target processing if there are no tracking echoes continuously during the number of scan times preset. Used to set the maximum relative speed of ARPA echoes that can be acquired and tracked. Used to set the time or the number of scans until the vector is displayed after the start of acquisition.

4-9

4.1 RPU-016 Settings

Reference: ARPA-related detailed settings are made on the RPU-016 side. Go into Factory mode (1+2, 3, and 4), use the Initialize menu, and make settings in 6: ARP PRESET -> 7 [ACQ PRESET] -> 6 [ARP DETAIL DATA]. Do not make settings for this parameter, however, unless otherwise instructed.

4-10

Chapter 5. Installation5.1 Parameter Settings Before Making Installation Parameter Settings 5.1 Before Making Installation Parameter Settings Insert the Authorizing Key Disk into the FDD in order to execute [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Installation Parameter. The message “Cannot read disk” will appear if an attempt is made to open the Installation Parameter without this disk. This key disk is common to the FCR-2xx7 and FEA-2cxx7.

[Service.pas] file

5.1.1 Installation Parameter Menu

Select the item to be set.

Set parameter default: The preset values will return to default values Remarks: If a file with preset values is copied to the default folder, the set values can be loaded with ease.

Check the preset channels and set items.

5-1

5.1 Before Making Installation Parameter Settings

Parameter List Item AIS transponder Alarm Inputs/AMWSS ARPA Processor Alarm Relays Central Alarm Text Conning Display Dual Axis Log(DAX) Echo Sounder and Weather Electronic chart (Laseplot) Engine Control Fuel Consumption General Gyro1 Gyro2 Heel and Trim Log Main Engine Start Air Pressure Positioning Equipment 1 Positioning Equipment 2 Positioning Equipment 3 Positioning Equipment4 Positioning Equipment 5 Positioning Equipment 6 Propeller 1(stern) Propeller 2(stern) Propeller 3(bow) Propeller 4(bow) Radar Echo Overlay / ARPA Communication(LAN) Rate of Turn Gyro

Contents Parameter settings for AIS connections (connecting to CH5 of the LAN Adapter). Not used for the Chart radar. Selection of ALM output generated from the Radar side (output from the RPU-016). Not used for the Chart radar. Not used for the Chart radar. Parameter settings for Dual Axis Log (DAX) connections. Parameter settings for Echo Sounder and Weather settings. Not used for the Chart radar. Not used for the Chart radar. Not used for the Chart radar. Port settings for the B-Adapter and hull information settings. Not used for the Chart radar. Parameter settings for Gyro connections to the Radar side. Data for conning display. Not used for the Chart radar. Parameter settings for Log connections. Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar. Parameter settings for Main Engine Start Air Pressure connections (connecting to the B-Adapter).

Parameter settings for GPS connections (connecting to the LAN Adapter).

Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar. Parameter setting for Propeller parameter settings (connecting to the B-Adapter). Parameter settings for Radar processor connections (connecting to the LAN). Parameter settings for Rate-of-Turn settings (connecting to the LAN or B-Adapter). Not used for the Chart radar. Displayed for Conning Display/Docking purposes.

RENC Connections Rudders SatCom /External Computer/ Not used for the Chart radar. Sindel Repeqters Speed pilot Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar. Thruster 1(Stern) Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar. Thruster 2(Stern) Parameter settings for Thruster connections (connecting to the Thruster 3(bow) B-Adapter). Thruster 4(bow) Track pilot Data for Conning Display. Not used for the Chart radar. Not used for the Chart radar. VDR Parameter settings for VDR connections (connecting to the LAN Adapter). Parameter settings for Wind Sensor connections (connecting to the LAN Wind Sensor Adapter).

5-2

5.1 Before Making Installation Parameter Settings

5.1.2 Selecting Sensors Use Installation Parameters to make sensor connection settings in [Menu] -> SENSOR. The displayed contents of each page in the SENSOR menu varies with whether sensor connections made or not with Installation Parameter settings. That is, only related items set with Installation Parameters will be displayed.

5-3

5.1 Before Making Installation Parameter Settings

5.1.3 Sensor Input Keep in mind that terminals (channels) that can be connected to the LAN Adapter vary with each sensor.

Heading Data Heading data is input into the Radar (RPU-016) side. Input data in AD format through the serial or AD converter. In order to satisfy the ARPA function sufficiently, make sure that the input baud rate is 38.4 kbps when the data is input in serial. (Only a baud rate of 38.4 kbps is received if the SPU version is 02.36 or later ones.) IEC-61162 Data IEC-61162 data items, such as EPFS, LOG, AIS, are connected through the LAN Adapter. The LAN Adapter has eight input channels. If more input channels are required, add another LAN Adapter through the Hub. Input GGA/GLL, VTG, ZDA, and DTM data items from the GPS. Analog Signal and Alarm I/O Signal The B-Adapter handles analog signals and alarm output. Contact signals, such as 200P/NM log output, and rudder and thruster analog signals, are connected to the B-Adapter. RPU-016

LAN-Adapter (EC-1010)

EC-1000C HUB

Digital signal x 8 CH (TX/RX: 4 CH, RX: 4 CH)

HUB

Relay contact x 3 GC -> AD Sync/Step type

IEC61162

Analog signal x 8 CH

Gyro B-Adapter (EC-1020)

Note: Connect two LAN Adapters, if used, to the EC-1000C through the Hub. In that case, connect the B-Adapter to the second LAN Adapter.

5-4

ALM output x 8 CH ALM input x 8 CH

5.2 Installation Parameter Backup

5.2 Installation Parameter Backup The Installation Parameter file is stored in the C:\ants_system\params folder. It is recommended to back up this file in a floppy disk (FD) or removable disk. The backup can be made on the following OS level basis or in Record -> Backup and Restore.

5.2.1 Overview Finish the Chart radar and open the C:\ants_system\params folder. The sensor.prm, ship.parm, wstation.prm files are stored in this folder. The sensor.prm, ship.parm, and wstation.prm files include data set with the Installation Parameters. Moreover, the default folder has the same files, i.e., the sensor.prm, ship.parm, and wstation.prm files. These files have the default installation parameter values of the EC-1000C.

Set data files - sensor.prm - ship.parm - wstation.prm

Default

Contents of the default folder.

params Data files with default values - sensor.prm - ship.parm - wstation.prm

- Saved contents of sensor.prm Menu -> Initial setting -> Installation parameter - Saved contents of ship.parm Menu -> Initial setting -> Navigation parameter -> Ship and Rout parameter - Saved contents of wstation.prm (work station) This is used for the ECDIS but not used for the Chart radar.

5-5

5.2 Installation Parameter Backup

5.2.2 Handling Installation Parameter Backup Data 1. Saving data in FD or Removable disk. Select the set file, select Copy in the Edit menu, and paste the data to the FD (drive A) or a Removal disk. 2. Pasting data from FD or Removal disk. Open the FD or Removal disk, select the set file to be pasted, select Copy in the Edit menu, and paste the data to the C:\ants_system\params folder. 3. Replacing the files in the default folder with set data. Move the set data file to the default folder to overwrite the existing one. Note: Do not change the file name, or otherwise the file cannot be read as data.

Checking the contents of the saved Installation Parameter file with the PC The set sensor.prm file for the installation parameter cannot be opened on the PC. In order to open the file, take the following procedure. Procedure 1. Finish the Chart radar and open the C:\ants_system folder. 2.

Open the bin folder in the above folder, and copy “ecbhiprm.exe” to a Removal disk.

3.

Go to the C:\ants_system folder, open the “params” folder, and copy the sensor.prm file to the Removal disk.

4.

Create a folder named “ants_system” on the desktop or drive C of the PC, and make the “bin” folder and “params” folder in it.

5.

Paste the copied files to the above folder created. “bin” folder Æ ecbhiprm.exe “params” folder Æ sensor.prm

6.

Click the ecbhiprm.exe file so that the Installation Parameter screen will appear and the contents of each parameter can be checked. However, there is a window tone problem. Furthermore, the “Sensor Channel Usage” screen cannot be opened.

5-6

5.3 LAN Adapter

5.3 LAN Adapter 5.3.1 Connection Ports of LAN Adapter The LAN Adapter and EC-1000C (LAN-2 port) are connected through the HUB-100 over a crossing or straight LAN cable. All the ports of the HUB-100 incorporate an Auto-MDIX function, thus performing automatic cable discrimination. Use a crossing cable in the case of connecting the LAN Adapter directly to the LAN-2 port of the EC-1000C without using the HUB-100. Connect the B-Adapter to CH4 of the LAN Adapter. If the second LAN Adapter is used, connect the B-Adapter to CH11 (CH3) and CH12 (CH4) of the second LAN Adapter.

First LAN Adapter

LAN 2

Second LAN Adapter

Connection Not available

Connection Not available

CH4

CH11 (CH3) and CH12 (CH4)

If the second LAN Adapter is used, connect the B-Adapter to the second LAN Adapter.

TS13 or J1 TS13 or J1

B-Adapter B-Adapter

5-7

5.3 LAN Adapter

Connection Terminal Layout of LAN Adapter +15V

RX8 LED

RX1 LED

+5V

J1: CH1

J3: CH3

J5: CH5

J7: CH7 (Rx, RL2)

RL +24V RL1

J2: CH2 (Rx)

J4: CH4 (Tx/Rx)

J6: CH6 (Rx, RL1)

J8: CH8 (Rx, RL3)

RL

J9 (Power) RL1 – 3 LED

Electric specifications of each CH - RX1 to RX8+/-: RS-422 input - TX1 to TX8+/-: RS-422 output - TX1 to TX5: RS-232C output - GND: RS-232C GND - RL1 to RL3: Relay output - LAN RX/TX+/-: 100 Base - +24V_IN/R: 24-VDC power supply input

Note: - The J9 LAN RX/TX+/- terminals are not used. The LAN connector on the PCB is not used either. - The RX1 LED through RX8 LED will be lit according to the cycle of the reception signals at the corresponding ports, respectively.

5-8

5.3 LAN Adapter

5.3.2 Port Allocations and Specifications of LAN Adapter No.1 (First) LAN Adapter

No.2 (Second) LAN Adapter

Channel (J x) 1 (J1) 2 (J2) 3 (J3) 4 (J4)

Type

Bit/s

TX/RX RX TX/RX TX/RX

5 (J5)

TX/RX

4800 4800 4800 4800 38400 /4800 4800 4800 4800

6 (J6) 7 (J7) 8 (J8)

RX RX RX Contact: C-A/B Relay 1(J6) (Operator fitness) Contact: C-A/B Relay 2 (Any ECDIS (J7) alarm) Relay 3 Contact: C-A/B (J8) (Backup navigator)

Channel (J x) 9 (J1) 10 (J2) 11 (J3) 12 (J4)

Type

Bit/s

TX/RX RX TX/RX TX/RX

13 (J5)

TX/RX

14 (J6) 15 (J7) 16 (J8) Relay 1(J6)

RX RX RX Contact: C-A/B (Waypoint approach) Contact: C-A/B (Outside channel limit) Contact: C-A/B (Depth below limit)

4800 4800 4800 4800 38400 /4800 4800 4800 4800

-

Relay 2 (J7)

-

Relay 3 (J8)

-

5.3.3 Restrictions on Connection Channels of LAN Adapter [Important!!] The following table shows connectable (TX/RX) channels and sensors. The B-Adapter must connect to CH4, and the AIS must connect to CH5 at a baud rate of 38,400 bit/s, for example. Connectable channels are displayed when making sensor connection port setting. Therefore, the connection availability of each channel will be known. Sensor AIS (AIS transponder) B-Adapter GPS, Log, Echo sounder, ROT, Wind sensor AMWSS (Alarm Inputs/AMWSS)

First LAN Adapter

Second LAN Adapter

CH5

CH13 (CH5)

CH4

CH11 (CH3), CH12 (CH4), and CH13 (CH5)

CH1 to CH8

CH9 (CH1) to CH16 (CH8)

CH1 and CH4

CH9 (CH1), CH11 (CH3), and CH12 (CH4)

Note: Items in parentheses show sensors displayed in the Installation Parameter menu.

5-9

5.3 LAN Adapter

5.3.4 Relay Output of LAN Adapter The content of each relay output signal is fixed. 1) First LAN Adapter: Relay 1 (Operator fitness) The relay will work when the ECDIS is operated. The work of the relay is confirmed with the RL1 LED. This relay is OFF if the ECDIS is not operated. 2) First LAN Adapter: Relay 2 (Any RADAR alarm) The relay will work if an alarm, such as a Pos. alarm, is generated. This relay will be OFF if the ALM is generated. 3) First LAN Adapter: Relay 3 (Backup navigator) Not used. 4) Second LAN Adapter: Relay 1 (4) (Waypoint approach) A waypoint approach alarm. The alarm will be output when the set starting time of course change for WP app. in Initial Settings -> Ship and Rout parameter comes while monitoring a route created in Route -> Plan -> Create. 5) Second LAN Adapter: Relay 2 (5) (Outside channel limit) An outside channel limit alarm. The alarm will be output if the point of the own ship is in excess of the set “Ch limit/m” range in a created route while monitoring the route in Route -> Plan -> Create. 6) Second LAN-Adapter: Relay 3 (6) (Depth below limit) A depth below limit alarm. The alarm will be output when a depth shallower than that set for Depth below trans in Initial Settings -> Sensor -> Other is detected. Make settings for Initial Settings -> Installation Settings -> Echo sounder and Water. Reference: Relays 1 through 3 of the Second LAN Adapter are allocated to STO channels 2 through 4.

5-10

5.4 B-Adapter

5.4 B-Adapter 5.4.1 Connection Port of B-Adapter

LEDs +5V 12ISO +15V +24V IN 1-16 OUT 1-8 LOG GYRO

J1: Serial port (Connecting to LAN Adapter)

The LED of the operating port is lit.

TS13: - 24V IN, - Serial port (Connecting to LAN Adapter)

* The J1 and TS13 of the serial port are the same.

5-11

5.4 B-Adapter

5.4.2 B-Adapter Connections Connect the TS13 terminal or J1 (9-pin D-sub connector) of the B-Adapter to the CH4 of the LAN Adapter. If two LAN Adapters are installed, connect CH11, CH12, and CH13 of the second LAN Adapter. The TXn terminal of the LAN Adapter has RS-232C specifications and the RX+/terminal of the B-Adapter has RS-422 specifications. Therefore, it is recommended to limit the cable length between both Adapters to a maximum of 5 m. Reference: To make connection port settings for the B-Adapter, select General in Installation Parameter, specify the desired connection port (CH4, CH11, CH12, or CH13) in [B-Adapter SIO Channel], and set YES for [B-Adapter connected]. First LAN-Adapter CH4 HUB

Second LAN-Adapter

B-Adapter B-Adapter

TS13 First LAN-Adapter (J4)CH4 SEcond LAN-Adapter (J3)CH11, (J4)CH12, (J5)CH13

1. 24V 2. 24VR 3. RX+ 4. RX-

TXn GND

5. RX RET 6. TX+ 7. TX8. TX RET

RXn+ RXn-

LAN-Adapter (EC-1010)

B-Adapter (EC-1020)

Connecting to TS terminal

TX+/-: RS-422 RX+/-: RS-422

TXn: RS-232C RXn+/-: RS-422

J1 (9 pin D-sub) First LAN-Adapter (J4)CH4

1.

SEcond LAN-Adapter (J3)CH11, (J4)CH12, (J5)CH13

LAN-Adapter (EC-1010)

2. 3. 4. RX+

TXn

5. RX6. 7. 8. TX 9. GND

GND

RXn+ RXn-

TX: RS-232Cs

TXn: RS-232C RXn+/-: RS-422

RX+/-: RS-422

5-12

B-Adapter (EC-1020)

Connecting to D-sub connector

5.4 B-Adapter

5.4.3 STO Signals 1 through 8 The following signals are allocated to STO (status output) channels 1 through 8. The STO signal terminals have relay contact output. STO Allocations Channel

Status signal

1 (STO 1)

Not used Route monitor: Outside Channel Limit

2 (STO 2)

3 (STO 3)

Route monitor: Way point approach

4 (STO 4)

Echo depth below limit

5 (STO 5)

7 (STO 7)

Not Used Navigation sensor ALM Operator fitness

8 (STO 8)

Any RADAR ALM

6 (STO 6)

Remarks Alarm output that turns ON if the vessel is outside a route created in Route -> Plan -> Create. Alarm output that turns ON when the set starting time of course change for WP app. in Initial Settings -> Ship and Rout parameter comes while monitoring a route created in Route -> Plan -> Create. Alarm output that turns ON when a depth shallower than that set for Depth below trans in Initial Settings -> Sensor -> Other is detected. Alarm output that turns ON if the Navigation sensor runs out of data. Output when the Radar is operated. Alarm output that turns ON if the Radar generates an alarm.

Note: STO channels 6 to 8 are allocated to Relays 1 through 3 of the first LAN Adapter.

5-13

5.4 B-Adapter

5.4.4 STI Signals 1 through 16 The following signals are allocated to STI (status input) channels 1 through 16. The STI signal terminals receive signals through photo couplers. STO Allocations Channel

Status signal

1 (STI 1) to 8 (STI 8)

Status

9 (STI 9)

ALM ACK

BUZZER STOP 11 (STI 11) to 16 (STI 16) Not used 10 (STI 10)

Remarks The status of EXT Navigation Equipment. A close contact signal that acknowledges an alarm if the alarm is generated. A close contact signal that stops an alarm if the alarm is generated.

Reference: 1. BUZZER STOP and ALM ACK The BUZZER STOP signal only suspends the ALM buzzer for the phenomenon. If the phenomenon still exists after a step is taken to clear the status (e.g., deleting the ALM (error) message display or turning ON the ALM ACK), the display priority of the ALM message will be lowered. 2. 1 (STI 1) to 8 (STI 8) To enable input channels 1 (STI 1) through 8 (STI 8), select [Menu] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameter and set Device Interface in Alarm Input/AMWSS to STI1.8 input (Uses B-adapter), and check STIn for EXT Navigation Equipment. If alarm signals (close contacts) from EXT Navigation Equipment are input, alarm numbers 4201 through 4208 will be output.

Alarm number 420x: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ ERROR NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT X HAS INTERNAL FAILUE

Open is Alarm: Normally closed when this item is checked.

5-14

Indicates (STI 1) through (STI 8) so that the ALM port will be known.

5.4 B-Adapter

5.4.5 Analog Signals The number of analog signals (voltage signals) is eight. The connection ports are A1IN through A8IN. Analog signals output from the Fuel Consumption, Propeller, Thruster, and other items are connected. The B-Adapter performs the A/D conversion of the connected analog signals and input the signals through the LAN Adapter to the EC-1000C. Analog signals are connectable to arbitrary ports, provided that the connecting sensors and channels are set in [Menu] -> INTIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameter. In the following example, if the analog sensor has resistance output, the REF voltage is added from the B-Adapter to obtain analog voltage. Usually, voltage signals are output from the analog sensor. Therefore, connect only the A1IN and SGND.

Analog Sensor

2k ohm

1

1. A1IN

B-Adapter

3 2. SGND 3. FREF+

2 4

4. REF5. STI1 6. GND

5-15

Usually, connect only the A1IN and SGND if the sensor has voltage output.

5.4 B-Adapter

5.4.6 Gyro Connections The FCR-2xx7's data on the ship's heading is input in series or in AD format into the Radar (RPU-016). Therefore, the J38 port (S1, S2, S3, S0, R1H, R1L, or R2 terminal) will not be used. This port, however, will be used if gyro signals on the FEA-2xx7 are in Synchronous type or Step by Step type. Relevant settings: Make Device Interface settings for Gyro1 in [Menu] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameter.

5.4.7 LOG Signal Connections Connect LOG data that is output as contact signals at the rate of 200 pulses/nm to the J39: LOG+, LOG-, F/A+, and F/A- terminals. Usually, LOG signals are input in serial into the LAN Adapter. Terminal LOG+ LOGF/A+ F/A-

Signal LOG signal terminal Forward/Astern signal terminal (Close = Astern)

Relevant settings; Make Device Interface settings for Gyro1 in [Menu] -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Installation Parameter.

5.4.8 System Failure System failure signals are output from the J507 #1 and #2 of the RCU-020 Control unit. A check signal is periodically sent to the EC-1000C from the Control unit. If there is no response from the EC-1000C, the Control unit judges that there is a communication error and outputs a system failure from the Control unit. To test this function at the time of ship inspection, select Initial Settings -> Selftest -> OK -> Control Head, and click the SYSTEM FAILURE OFF button. The system failure signal will be output in about 30 seconds .

5-16

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings 5.5.1 General Set information on the ship for general settings. The conning position set here is the displayed position of the own ship. The above settings is interlocked with the settings in Radar Initialize -> Page 2 -> Own Ship Info.

Setting Details 1. Ship's name Register the ship's name. If an installation parameter is copied from another Chart radar, the ship's name for the Installation Parameter can be checked by opening General. 2. Sensor Message interval: 1 to 99 This item is used to set data retrieval cycles in order to read in data from each sensor. The default value (4) is appropriate.

5-17

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

3. B-Adapter SIO Channel: 4/11/12/13 This item is used to make connection port settings for the B-Adapter, which is connected to the LAN Adapter. Channels 11 to 13 are for second LAN Adapter. 4. B-Adapter connected: YES/NO Set this item to YES when connecting the B-Adapter to the LAN Adapter. The A-Adapter will not communicate with the LAN adapter if this item is set to NO. “B-Adapter” will be displayed for the above set channel in the Sensor Channel Usage screen of the Installation Parameter. 5. Trim indicator: Disconnected/Connected This item is not used for the Chart radar. Set this item to Disconnected. 6. Docking Disp. Spd Vector Max Value: 1 to 20

5-18

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

** From Center Position to ** Information on the ship's hull is displayed on the ECDIS, Radar, and Chart Radar screens. Displayed items are centered on the conning position. Set the following parameters. 7. Bow Position 0 to 500

Radar bANT positionj Breadth=30m

8. Stern Position -500 9. Length Bow Position+ Stern Position

GPS ANT position Conning position From center position to Bow position=100m

10. Dual Axis Log Position -500 to 500

12. Side Position 5 to 50

From center position to Dual Axis Log position=70m

Length=200m

11. Conning Position -500 to 500

Dual Axis Log Position

Center position

From center position to conning positi=-60m

13. Breadth 10 to 100 (2 step) From center position to stern position=-100m

14. Sidewise Conning Position -500 to 500

Side Position=15m

15. Total height from keel to mast -500 to 500

From center position to sidewise conning position=-10m

5-19

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.2 Positioning Equipment 1 through 6 Six types of positioning equipment sensors, such as the DGPS, GPS, and LORAN, can connect to the LAN Adapter. Positioning equipment 1 through 6 are the same in setting item. To display position data, make POS settings in [Menu] -> Sensor menu.

Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to set the data retrieval of the EC-1000 from sensors connected to the LAN Adapter. 2. Adapter Chl: 1 through 16 This item is used to make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which sensor data is connected. Channels 1 through 8 are for the first LAN Adapter and channels 9 through 16 are for the second LAN Adapter. If the item Connected is set to YES, positioning equipment 1 thorough 6 set here will be displayed in the Ch area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the Sensor Channel usage screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with channel settings.

5-20

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

3. Device Interface: IEC 61162 ed1/Syledis/Furuno CIF/IEC 61162 ed2 This item is used to make GPS specification settings. “IEC 61162 ed2” is suitable. IEC 61162-1-ed1 and ed2 are different in DTM and GLL position message. Ed2 specifies that the GLL message must indicate whether GPS or DGPS is used for position measurement. Moreover, the IMO specify that the Radar must receive positions only in WGS84. 4. Identification: GLL/GGA/PAT/21 through 28 This item is used to make sentence selection of position data. Select GLL or GGA position data. The COG and SOG show VTG sentence data. If there is no VTG sentence, the value set manually (MAN) will be displayed. Therefore, the GPS must output GLL, GGA, VTG, ZDA, DTM sentences. 5. Talker Identifier: xx=don’t care/GP/etc This item is used to make talker identifier settings for sentences. Set GP for the GPS, and set XX in the case of retrieving data with the talker identifier ignored. 6. Speed Talker ID: xx=don/care/GP/etc This item is used to make speed talker ID settings for VTG sentences when calculating SPD display from VTG sentence data. Set GP for the GPS, and set XX in the case of retrieving data without the talker ID specified. SPD display obtained from calculation is SPD(CALC) xx kt. 7. Device Name This item is used to make displayed position sensor name settings in [Menu] -> Sensor -> Pos menu. 8. Device Type: Kalman/GPS/Transmit/Decca/Omega/Loran/Syledis/Fixtgt/DGPS This item is used to select devices to be connected to the sensor port. The device type set here will appear below the position display so that the position sensor in use will be known to the user. 9. Weight Factor: 0 to 1.0 It is recommended to set 0.4 for the DGPS, 0.2 for the GPS, and 0.1 for the Loran. Reference: While in track pilot mode, the user must select Kalman filter on for the Posn settings in the Sensor menu. In that case, two GPS data items will be compared with the Kalman filter turned ON. The EC-1000C will output an alarm if the value exceeds the set weight factor. 10. Cmg Deley: 0 to 999 “Cmg” stands for “Course made good”. Usually set this item to 0.

5-21

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

11. Offset from Antenna position to Conning position: -500 to 500 (+Stbd, -Port), -500 to 500 (Bow, -Stern) This item is used for offset settings for the Conning Position based on the installation position of the GPS antenna. That is, the position displayed on the screen is not the position of the GSP antenna but the Conning Position. Reference: Set the Conning Position in the general settings for the Installation Parameter. 12. Device Datum: WGS72/WGS84/Europeqaan 1950/*Postdam/Adindan/Afgooye/ Ainel Abd 1970/Anna 1 Astro 1965/Antigua Island Astro 1943/ ---- etc This item is used to make settings for the present Datum in use. The standard ENC chart is WGS84. Therefore, select WGS84. Reference: Datum changes are possible with the wheel used after locating the cursor on the Datum display below the position display. The Datum settings can be made in the Initial Settings menu as well. Use this item when changing the Datum to the one displayed on the paper chart presently in use. 13. Roll and Pitch Receive: Disable/Able Usually set this item to Disable. 14. IEC 61162-1 Transmit checksum: Not used/Used Usually this item is not selected. This item is used to add a checksum to each IEC 61162-1 sentence received from a preset Adapter channel when the sentence is output from the same port. Regardless of the settings, a checksum will be always added. 15. $ char included in transmit checksum: Not included/Included Usually this item is not selected. This item determines the calculation method of the checksum for the above output sentence with or without the first character “$” used. Usually, a checksum is calculated with the character “$” included.

5-22

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.3 Gyro1 (2) This item is used for gyro data settings. The chart radar uses data input into the Radar (RPU-016).

Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO Set this item to YES. This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in NMEA data (heading data) connected to the LAN Adapter. Data from the RPU-016 will not be taken in unless this item is set to YES.

5-23

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

2. Adapter Chl: 1 to 16 This item is not used for the Chart radar. The present channel can be left as it is. Reference: FEA-2xx7 Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which sensors are connected. Channels 1 through 8 are for the first LAN Adapter and channels 9 through 16 are for the second LAN Adapter. If the item Connected is set to YES, the gyro will be displayed in the Ch area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the Sensor Channel usage screen for the Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the LAN Adapter coincides in channel. 3. Gear Box: 1:360/1:180 This item is not used for the Chart radar. The present channel can be left as it is. Reference: FEA-2xx7 Gyro data in both analog gyro and NMEA signals can be accepted. This item is used to make speed increment ratio setting for analog gyro signals connected to the B-Adapter. Set the device interface to Stepper/Synchro (Uses B-Adapter). No settings are required if NMEA data is input. 4. Talker Identifier: xx=don’t care/HE/etc Make talker identifier settings if serial HDG data settings are made, i.e., the next device interface is set to ARPA CPU Serial (Only Chart Radar). Set XX if no talker identifiers are specified. Any talker will do if the device interface is set to ARPA CPU AD-10(Only Chart Radar). Reference: FEA-2xx7 Make talker identifier settings for NMEA data connected to the LAN Adapter. Usually set this item to HE. Set XX to take in data with talker identifiers ignored.

5-24

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5. Device Interface: The Heading data for the Chart radar is input in AD format or NMEA data into the Radar (RPU-016). Set ARPA CPU AD-10 (Only Chart Radar) or ARPA CPU Serial (Only Chart Radar) according to the input data specifications. Note: In the case of ARPA CPU Serial (Only Chart Radar), use serial data at a baud rate of 38.4 kbps. Setting item

Stepper/Synchro(Uses B-Adapter)

IEC-61162-1($xxHDT) DAX: IEC-61162-1 ($ｘｘVHW)

Trackpilot

Trackpilot (double gyro/Gyro1)

ARPA CPU AD-10 (Only Chart Radar)

ARPA CPU Serial (Only Chart Radar)

IEC-61162-1 ($xxHDT with MAG)

Description

Not used for the Chart radar. This item is used to connect Stepper/Synchro data to the B-Adapter. Not used for the Chart radar. Reference: This item is used to connect NMEA data into the LAN Adapter. Not supported. Not used for the Chart radar. Reference: This item is used to take in heading data that is output from the track pilot of the P EMRI. In that case, only one gyro unit is connected to the track pilot. The same as above except the number of gyro units connected to the track pilot, i.e., two gyro units are connected, and takes in Gyro-1 data. Chart radar settings. Reference: This item is selected if heading data is input in AD format into the Radar (RPU-016). When this item is selected, the HDG source on the Radar side will be automatically set to AD-10. Chart radar settings. This item is selected if heading data is input in IEC61162-2 data format into the Radar (RPU-016). When this item is selected, the HDG source on the Radar side will be automatically set to Serial. Not used for the Chart radar. Reference: This item is selected when MAG compass data is input in NMEA data format into the LAN Adapter.

5-25

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.4 Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN) The LAN traffic of echo data limits the number of EC-1000C units and RPU-016 Radar Processor units connected as shown below according to the processing of echo data. For example, a single Chart radar can connect to three IMO Radars over LAN. Chart Radar

None

1 unit

2 units

IMO Radar

4 units

3 units

1 unit

Note: The Inters-switch function operates only while in Radar mode.

5-26

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

Setting Details 1. Radar transceiver: 1/2/3/4 This item is used to make Radar number settings to enable Radar connections over LAN. That is, this item is an Inter-switch function to select Radars. To check the connection (setting) state, open the Radar ANT Box menu on the Radar screen. However, the Inter-switch function will work only while the system is in Radar mode.

Band, Model, and Pos data items displayed are those from the connecting equipment.

In the case of the own Chart radar, set 1 in Radar Initialize→ [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Page 2 Radar Number. To connect two or more IMO Radars, make settings in [Menu] -> 0 -> 4. INSTALLATION -> 4. RADAR NO. IP address ・No.1 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.6 (No.1 Chart radar: Own for chart radar) ・No.2 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.7 (No.2 Chart radar, IMO Radar) ・No.3 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.8 (IMO Radar) ・No.4 Radar IP Address: 172.31.3.9 (IMO Radar) 2. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to select to connect or not with the Radar the number of which is set for Radar transceiver.

5-27

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

3. Device Interface IMO ARPA/Own for Chart Radar/Chart Radar/Own for Chart Radar with INS This item is used to make Radar connection mode settings. 1) Installation Mode 1 No.1 Radar (Chart Radar)

No.2 Radar (Chart Radar)

No.3 Radar (IMO Radar)

Radar Transceiver (X-band)

Radar Transceiver (X-band)

Radar Transceiver (S-band)

No.34Radar (Non)

LAN

No.1 Chart Processor (EC-1000C)

No.2 Chart Processor (EC-1000C)

Settings on No.1 Chart Radar (EC-1000C) Side Settings on chart radar (EC-1000C) side Radar Transceiver setting 1

Settings on radar side

Connected setting

Device Interface setting

RADAR NO.

YES

Own for Chart Radar

1

2

YES

Chart Radar

2

3

YES

IMO Radar

3

4

NO

N/A

4

Settings on No.2 Chart Radar (EC-1000C) Side Settings on chart radar(EC-1000C) side Radar Transceiver setting 1

Settings on radar side

Connected setting

Device Interface setting

RADAR NO.

YES

Chart Radar

1

2

YES

Own for Chart Radar

2

3

YES

IMO Radar

3

4

NO

N/A

4

5-28

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

2) Installation Mode 2 This mode is used to connect the Chart radar and ECDIS over LAN in order to monitor route information created on the ECDIS. No.1 Radar (Chart Radar)

- TTM: Target Data ([Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize-> Page 3 -> TTM Output) - OSD: Own Ship Data

Radar Transceiver (X-band) TX: TTM, OSD

172.31.3.6

HUB

HUB RX: Route

172.31.3.33

No.1 Chart Processor (EC-1000C)

172.31.3.29

ECDIS (EC-1000C)

RX: TTM, OSD TX: Route

Settings on chart radar(EC-1000C) side Radar Transceiver setting Radar No. 1

Connected Device Interface setting setting YES

Own for Chart Radar with INS

Settings on radar side

INS IP Address

RADAR NO.

Set the IP address of INS (ECDIS) (172.31.3.29)

1

Reference: When using the route information created on the ECDIS, the route monitored on the ECDIS will be displayed on the Chart radar. The route menu on the Chart radar will be deleted. Set the IP address of the Chart radar with the same setting item on the ECDIS side.

INS IP Address will be added when Own for Chart Radar with INS is selected.

5-29

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

4. Label: This item is used to make label settings for Radars displayed in the Radar ANT Box on the Radar and Chart radar screens. Besides, this label is used also for the name of the Ant No.x in the ANT INFO item in the icon menu. Make settings so that the user will know which Radar is connected. Radar Initialize -> Page2 -> Radar Mode settings

Label settings

5. From Radar antenna to Conning position: xx m (+Stbd, -Port)/ xx m (+Bow, -Sterm) This item is used to set conning position distance from the Radar antenna. The Radar image will be rectified to the image seen from the Conning position. Reference: The settings are interlocked with those in [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize-> Page2 -> Own Ship Info. 6. IP address: 172.31.3.X This item cannot be set. This item displays the IP address of the Radar number set in Radar transceiver. If Radar transceiver is set to1, “172.31.3.6” will be displayed. 7. Port numbers: 10024 for Radar echo output/10028 for ARPA communication This item cannot be set. This item displays the communications ports used for the EC-1000C and RPU-016. Radar echo output is the port on the EC-1000C side to receive Radar echo signals. ARPA communication shows the port number used for the EC-1000C to communicate with the RPU-016. 8. ARPA display number: 1 This item cannot be set. This item is interlocked with the Radar number set in Radar transceiver. If Radar transceiver is set to 1, “1” will be displayed.

5-30

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

9. INS IP Address: The INS IP address will be added if Device Interface is set to Own for Chart Radar with INS. The port number displayed below indicates the port number used for the EC-1000C to communicate with the INS.

5-31

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.5 AIS transponder

Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO Set this item to YES if the AIS is connected. This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in AIS data (CDM and DCO data) connected to the LAN Adapter. 2. Adapter chl: 5/13 Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which AIS data is connected. Channel 5 is for the first (No. 1) LAN Adapter and 13 for the second (No. 2) LAN Adapter. The baud rate on these channels is 38,400 bps and allocated to AIS-dedicated connection channel. If the item Connected is set to YES, the AIS will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen for the Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the LAN Adapter coincides in channel. 3. Device Interface: IEC61162-2(38400bit/s)/IEC61162-1(4800bit/s) Set IEC61162-2(38400bit/s) when connecting the AIS for the baud rate settings on the set channel. AIS-related sentences used are “!AIVDM (UAIS VHF data-link message)” and “!AIVDO (UAIS VHF Data-link Own-vessel report)”. Reference: If the baud rate is set to IEC61162-1(4800bit/s), data at a baud rate of 4800 bit/s, such as position sensor data, can be accepted.

5-32

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

4. Device mode: Allow illegal values/Normal IEC61993-2 Set this item to Normal IEC61993-2. IEC61993-2 specifies AIS rules and only data satisfying the rules will be accepted. If Allow illegal values is set, data not satisfying the AIS rules will be accepted as well. 5. IEC61162-1 Transmit checksum: Not used/used Set this item to Not used. 6. Checksum: $char not included (IEC61162-1 EMRI)/ $char included (Some old NMEA) Usually this function is not used. Set this item to $char not included (IEC61162-1 EMRI).

5-33

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.6 Dual Axis Log (DAX) Connect the DS-30 and DS-50 to measure the speeds of two axis (i.e., in the Ahead or Astern direction and Starboard or Port direction). The sentence used is “VBW”. When Conning or Docking in the Select Sidebar menu is selected, this item will be displayed on the corresponding screen. Reference: Refer to the settings in 5.5.7 Log. Check Dual log (bottom) in Sensor -> Spd/Cse. If the system is in speed over ground (SOG) mode at that time, the ship's speed for Conning or Docking is displayed under BOTTOM. If the system is in speed through water (STW) mode, Error 4009 Dual-Axis Log (BT) Error will be output. If the VTG sentence is input, the ship's speed will be displayed with this data used. At that time, the display will change from BOTTOM to POSN. Therefore, if Dual log (bottom) in Sensor -> Spd/Cse is unchecked, POSN will be always displayed. Therefore, no error will result even if the system is changed into STW mode. Moreover, the SPD display in the position display area will show SPD(WAT) xx kt. If there is no Log data, SPD(CALC) xx kt will be displayed.

Log -> YES

Ship's speed in the Starboard or Port

Ship's speed in the Ahead or Astern direction

BOTTOM: SOG POSN: VTG

Dual Axis Log -> YES

Ship's speed in the Starboard or Port direction

Spd/Cse Screen Docking Screen

5-34

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in dual axis log data (VBW data) connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, the Dual axis log will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. 2. Adapter Channel: 1 through 16 Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which Dual axis log data is connected. If the item Connected is set to YES, the Dual axis log set here will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the channel settings. 3. Device Interface: IEC61162-1($xxVTG)/IEC61162-1($XXVBW)/IEC61162-1($xxPSALL) Set this item to IEC61162-1($XXVBW). Reference: - VTG: Course over ground and ground speed - VBW: Dual ground/water speed - PSALL: P sentence

5-35

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

4. Sing Positive: for Ahead/for Astern (longitudinal speed)/ This item is used to make Ahead or Astern settings with the reception of positive signal input. The positive or negative symbol for the SOG display in the Ahead or Astern direction will change. 5. Sign Positive: for Starboard/for Port (transversal speed) This item is used to make Starboard or Port settings with the reception of positive signal input. The positive or negative symbol for the SB display in the Ahead or Astern direction will change. 6. Status Flag Check: No Check, all flags accepted/Check-only "A," "B," or "W" accepted Usually set this item to No Check, all flags accepted. This item determines whether the status contained in sentences is checked or not. 7. Talker Identifier: xx The talker identifier VD is a standard talker identifier. The talker identifier will be ignored if this item is set to XX.

5-36

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.7 Log Connect the DS-80 to measure the speed of a single axis (i.e., in the Ahead or Astern direction). Make sure that the adapter channel for the lot is set to the same adapter channel set with the Dual Axis Log (DAX) parameter. As a matter of course, connect the signals from the log to this channel. The Dual Log (Water) will be displayed as data from the log in [Menu] -> SENSOR -> Spd/Cse. The SPD display in the position display area shows SPD(WAT) xx kt. If there is no log data, SPD(CALC) xx kt will be displayed.

Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in log data (VBW and VHW data) connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, the Dual axis log will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters.

5-37

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

2. Adapter Channel: 1 through 16 Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which log data is connected. If the item Connected is set to YES, the log set here will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the channel settings. If Device Interface is set to (DAX )---, the data will be displayed for the adapter channel set in the Dual Axis Log (DAX) on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of installation parameters. 3. Device Interface: Analog Pulse (uses B-Adapter)/ (DAX )IEC61162-1($xxVHW)/ (DAX)IEC61162-1($XXVBW)/(DAX )internal test only Set this item according to the log output sentence to be connected, i.e., either “(DAX)IEC61162-1($XXVBW)” or “(DAX )IEC61162-1($xxVHW)”. Reference: - VHW: Water speed and heading - VBW: Dual ground/water speed 4. Measurement Unit: NM/Yards/m This item is invalid if serial data is input. If log signals are input in analog pulses, set this item on a single-unit basis. 5. Prefiltering: 0/4/6/64 Usually set this item to 0. 6. Pulse per Unit: 1 to 32000 If log signals are input in analog pulses, set the number of pulses peer unit set for Measurement Unit. Connect log signals to the B-Adapter. Relevant settings: Set B-Adapter settings for General Parameter to YES. 7. Talker Identifier: Setting this item to XX may be appropriate. Then the talker identifier will be ignored. The talker identifier VD is a standard talker identifier.

5-38

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.8 Echo Sounder and Weather Connect the FE-700 for depth measurement. Use the sentences “DBT” and “DBS”. When Conning or Docking in the Select Sidebar menu is selected, this item will be displayed on the corresponding screen. The data will be displayed in SENSOR -> Other as well.

Reference; The data will be added to [Menu] -> SENSOR -> Other and Select Sidebar -> Conning Display.

Echo sounder -> YES Echo sounder -> YES Water/Air Temperature -> YES and Conning Display BOW Water Current -> YES AFT

Select Sidebar -> Conning Display

SENSOR -> Other

5-39

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

1. Echo Sounder Setting Details 1. Echo sounder (BOW) and Echo sounder (AFT) In the case of the following system configuration as shown in case-1, where an Transducer each is installed in the BOW and AFT transducers that are selected with a switch, make sure that the Echo sounder (BOW) and Echo sounder (AFT) are the same in device interface and adapter channel. If case-2 applies, make device interface and adapter settings individually for each sensor.

Case-1

Echosounder (FE-700)

Transducer (BOW)

Case-2

Transducer (AFT)

Echosounder (FE-700)

Transducer

Settings Details 1. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in Echo sounder data (DBT, DBS, and DPT data) connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, ECH SOUNDER will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. 2. Device Interface: IEC61162-1($xxDBT)/Simrad N200/IEC61162-1($xxDBS)/ FE-700(xxDPT, $PFEC) Set this item to FE-700 (xxDPT, $PFEC), if the system select one of the two transducers with the switch as shown in case-1. If the Echo sounder (BOW) is set to this parameter, the Echo sounder (AFT) will be automatically set to the same parameter, which cannot be changed. If case-2 applies, set this item to IEC61162-1($xxDBT). Reference: - DBT: Depth below transducer - DBS: Depth below surface - DPT: Depth

5-40

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

3. Adapter Chl: Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which Echosounder data is connected. If the item Connected is set to YES, the log set here will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the channel settings. 4. Talker Identifier: Setting this item to XX may be appropriate. Then the talker identifier will be ignored. The sounder- and depth-related talker identifier is SD. 5. Median Filter: YES/NO 6. Sensor to keel distance: -100 to 100 This item is used to set the distance between the keel and sensor (Transduser). Positive values are used if the sensor protrudes from the keel.

2. Water Current Connect the DS-30. Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in Water current data (VDR data) connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, the water current will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. 2. Device Interface: IEC61162-1($xxVDR) The parameter is fixed at IEC61162-1($xxVDR). Reference: - VDR: Set and drift(Current speed, Direction) 3. Adapter Chl: Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which water current data is connected. If the item Connected is set to YES, the water current set here will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the channel settings. 4. Talker Identifier: Setting this item to XX may be appropriate. Then the talker identifier will be ignored.

5-41

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

3. Water Temperature, Air Temperature, Air Pressure, and Air Humidity Usually, these sensors are not used. Connect IEC or analog signal sensor data. Water temperature and air temperature data values are shown in [Menu] -> SENSOR -> Other. Although the conning monitor display air pressure data and air humidity data, the conning display cannot be connected to the chart radar. Therefore, the air pressure data or air humidity data cannot be used. Item Parm Connected Device Interface Adapter Chl Output (See note) (-320.2 to 320.2) Output per Volt (-320.2 to 320.2) Prefiltering B-Adapter Chl

Water Temperature YES/NO - IEC61162-1($xxMTW) - Analog(Uses B-Adapter) - VISAL 1 to 16

Air Pressure (Not available) YES/NO YES/NO - IEC61162-1($xxMDA) - Analog(Uses B-Adapter) - VISAL Air Temperature

Air Humidity (Not available) YES/NO

V (at 0°C)

V (at 0°C)

V (at 800hPs)

V (at 0%)

xx (°C /Volt)

xx (°C /Volt)

xx (hPa/Volt)

xx (% Volt)

0/4/8/64 1 through 8

Note: The maximum voltage of analog signals input into the B-Adapter is +15 VDC. If a voltage in excess is used, convert the voltage within the specified range by dividing the voltage with appropriate parts, such as resistors. Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in sensor data. Set this item to YES when making sensor connections regardless of whether the sensor data is IEC or analog signal input. If YES is selected, the sensor name will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Relevant settings: If analog sensor data signal is connected to the channel of the B-Adapter, set General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES. 2. Device Interface: Select IEC, Analog, or VIASAL according to the input data. Reference: MTW: Water temperature - MDA: - VIASAL:

5-42

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

3. Adapter Chl: If Device Interface is set to IEC or VISAL, i.e., serial signals are selected, set the sensor connection channel of the LAN Adapter. If the item Connected is set to YES, the sensor name will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen for the Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the LAN Adapter coincides in channel. If analog signal are used make settings in B-Adapter Chl. Furthermore, set General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES. 4. Output: Set the voltage of the sensor reference point. For example, set the voltage at 0°C in the case of water temperature. 5. Output per Volt: Set the voltage variation width of sensor data. For example, set °C/Volt in the case of water temperature. 6. Prefiltering 7. B-Adapter Chl If Device Interface is set to Analog, i.e., analog signals are selected, set the channel connected to the B-Adapter. If the item Connected is set to YES, the sensor name will be displayed in the [B− Adapter] area, which corresponds to the B-Adapter set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen for the Installation Parameter. Check that the connection terminal of the B-Adapter coincides in channel. Relevant settings: Set General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES.

5-43

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.9 Wind Sensor This data is shown in [Menu] -> SENSOR -> Other.

Settings Details 1. Connected: YES/NO This item is used to enable the EC-1000C to take in wind data connected to the LAN Adapter. If YES is selected, Wind will be displayed in the [Ch] area on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. 2. Adapter Channel: 1 through 16 Make channel settings for the LAN Adapter, to which wind data is connected. If the item Connected is set to YES, Wind will be displayed in the [Ch] area, which corresponds to the channel set here, on the [Sensor Channel usage] screen of Installation Parameters. Check that the connecting terminals of the LAN Adapter coincide with the channel settings. 3. Device Interface: IEC 6116201($xxMWV)/THIES Set this item to IEC61162-1($XXMWV). 4. Identification: MWV/MWD/VWR/VWT This item is used to make sentence selection for use. Reference: - MWV: - MWD: - VWR: Relative (Apparent) wind speed and angle - VWT: True wind speed and angle

5-44

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5. Interpretation of received angle: wind blows from direction of angle/ wind blows to direction of angle This item is used to make wind direction settings. Usually set this item to wind blows from direction of angle. 6. Source of true Wind: Receive (T)heoretical Wind(HDG) and Calculate True wind/ Receive (R)el/Apparent Wind and Calculate True wind/ Receive (T)rue Wind(North) and use it directly This item is used to make settings for input serial data. Usually set this item to Receive (R)el/Apparent Wind and Calculate True wind. See the next page. 7. Style of Display: Display Rel(=Apparent) or True(=North)/ Display Rel(=Apparent) or True(=Theoretical)/ Display Rel (=Theoretical or True(=North)/ This item is used to make settings for data selected and displayed for Rel Wind/Ture Wind. Usually set this item to Display Rel (=Theoretical or True(=North). See the next page. 8. Style of send to ARPA: Send T(=True/North) only/ Send T(=True/Theoretical) only/ Send R(=Rel/Apparent) only/ Send R(=Rel/ Theoretical) only/ Send T(=True/North) or R(=Apparent)/ Send T(=True/North) or R(=Theoretical)/ Send T(=True/ Theoretical) or R(=Apparent)/ This item is used to make settings for data that the ECDIS outputs to the ARPA. Usually set this item to Send T(=True/Theoretical) only. See the next page.

5-45

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

Source of true Wind Selection Receive (T)heoretical Wind(HDG) and Calculate True wind Receive (R)el/ Apparent Wind and Calculate True wind Receive (T)rue Wind(North) and use it directly

Description R (relative) data on the MWV sentence is received and handled as apparent data for North and Theoretical calculation. T (True) Data on the MWV sentence is received and handled as Theoretical data for North and Apparent calculation. T (True) Data on the MWV sentence is received and handled as North data for Apparent and Theoretical calculation.

Style of Display Selection Display Rel (=Theoretical) or True (=North) Display Rel(=Apparent) or True (=North) Display Rel(=Apparent) or True (=Theoretical)

SENSORS dialog box/Other page Rel Wind selection True Wind selection Theoretical North Apparent North Apparent

Theoretical

Style of Send to ARPA Selection Send T (=True /North) only Send T(=True/Theoretical) only Send R(=Rel/Apparent) only Send R(=Rel/Theoretical) only

Description The reference field is set to T (True) for the MWV sentence to output North data. Fixed to a single sentence. The reference field is set to T (True) for the MWV sentence to output Theoretical data. Fixed to a single sentence. The reference field is set to R(Relative) for the MWV sentence to output Apparent data. Fixed to a single sentence. The reference field is set to R(Relative) for the MWV sentence to output Theoretical data. Fixed to a single sentence. SENSORS dialog box/Other page

In the following settings, the output and sentence vary with the Rel Wind and True Wind Rel Wind selection settings. The reference field is set to Send T(=Ture/North) or R (Relative) for the MWV R(=Apparent) sentence to output Apparent data. The reference field is set to Send T(=Ture/North) or R (Relative) for the MWV R(=Theoretical) sentence to output Theoretical data. The reference field is set to Send T(=Ture/ Theoretical) or R (Relative) for the MWV R(=Apparent) sentence to output Apparent data.

5-46

Ture Wind selection The reference field is set to T(True) for the MWV sentence to output North data. The reference field is set to R T(True) for the MWV sentence to output North data. The reference field is set to T(True) for the MWV sentence to output Theoretical data.

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.10 Rate of Turn Gyro The ROT is displayed in the Spd/Cse area of the Sensor menu, and displayed on the Conning and Docking screens.

Setting Details 1. Connected: YES/NO, Calculated from Gyro source Usually set this item to NO, Calculated from Gyro source. If this item is set to YES, data from the ROT will be displayed. If this item is set to NO, Calculated from Gyro source, the ROT will be calculated using the gyroscope bow direction. Set this item to YES in the case of using analog signal input or the ROT sentence from the gyro. 2. Adapter Channel: 1 to 16 If Device Interface is set to an item other than Analog, i.e., serial signals are selected, set the sensor connection channel of the LAN Adapter. In the case of analog signals, input the data to the channel set for the B-Adapter Channel. Set General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES.

5-47

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

3. Device Type: Analog(uses B-Adapter)/DAX Dolog23($PKDRU)/ Gyro1 IEC61162($xxROT)/Trackpilot) In the case of analog input, set this item to Analog(uses B-Adapter) along with the following parameter. Set this item to Gyro1 IEC61162($xxROT) in the case of using the ROT sentence from gyro. In that case, set Connect to YES. 4. B-Adapter Channel: 1 to 8 This item is used to make port settings that connect analog signals to the B-Adapter. Set Device Type to Analog(uses B-Adapter) and General -> B-Adapter Connected to YES. 5. Output at 0/min: -320.0 to 320.0 This item is used to set the voltage of the sensor reference point (0/min) for analog signal input. 6. Output Volt: -320.0 to 320.0 Set the voltage variation width of sensor data based on the unit used for the data. 7. Prefitering: 0/4/8/64

8. Max Scale: 30 to 200

5-48

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.11 ARPA Processor Alarm Relays The Radar Processor unit has four alarm output terminals (J612#1 through J612#8), and their functions can be allocated to the Alarm, Ack Out, or Fitness Out. Check items that are required for alarms. Moreover, the polarity of each output signal is reversible. - Alarm: Turns ON if a radar alarm signal is generated. - Ack Out: Turns ON when the ALARM ACK key is pressed. - Fitness Out: Turns ON when any key is pressed.

Out1 – 4 - Alarm - Ack out - Fitness out

5-49

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.12 Alarm Inputs/AMWSS This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

5-50

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.13 Central Alarm Text This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

5-51

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.14 Conning Display This item is not connected to the Chart radar.

No. 1 2 3 4 5

Setting item Conning Mode Default Palette Display: Left Right Upper/Middle/Bottom

Parameter Harbour-1/ Harbour-2/Navigate-1/ Navigate-2/Standalone BULUE BACKGROUND/BLACK BACKGROUND Refer to the following Display table.

Traditional/small size/Double speed/Small with double speed Position device indication Traditional/Detailed

Center Speed

** Display ** Upper

Middle

Bottom

Alarm messages/Azimuth propulsion 1/ Azimuth propulsion 2/ Azimuth propulsion 3/ Azimuth propulsion 4/Bow thruster and Propeller/Depth 50m/ Depth 100m/ Depth 200m/Drift, Radius/Dual CPP Prop with RG/Dual Propulsion with RG/Empty/ Engine start Air Pressure/Fuel Consumption/Position/Propeller/ Propeller and Engine/ Propulsion and Thruster/Route/Route Next Leg/ Route Next Leg B/ Route Present Leg/ Route Present Leg B/ Route with next Leg/Service Course keep test/Service Hdg, Hsc, ROT/ Service XET, Rud, Mode/ Serv large XET, Rud, Mode/ Service steering Drift/ Serv long Hdg, Hsc, ROT/ Serv long XET, Rud, Mode/ Serv long large XET, Rud, Mo/ Service long steering Drift/Singe CPP Prop with RG/ Singe Propulsion with RG/Speed pilot/Thruster/Trackpilot/Trackpilot extended/ Trackpilot Order/Water temp and Propeller/Waypoint/Weather/ Weather and Wind/Wind, depth, Destinations

5-52

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.15 Electronic chart (Laserplot) This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

No.

Setting item

1

Connected:

2

Device Interface

3

Adapter Channel IEC61162-1 Transmit checksum $ Char Included in Checksum Chart Line Colour Datum Device Datum Cursor Position Receive

4 5 6 7 8 9

Parameter YES/NO IEC61162-1/ IEC61162-1(SPECIAL)/ IEC61162-1(TRANSAS) 1 to 16 Used/Not Used Included/Not Included C/D/T/O Uses Local Datum of ECDIS/Changed to Device Datum WGS72/KKJ/EUROP-50/NAD-27/WGS-84 Disable/Enable

5-53

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.16 Engine Control This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

No. 1 2

Setting item Connected Adapter Channel

3

Device Type

4

Switch Input

Parameter YES/NO

1 to16 Not used/IEC 61162-1(time out 30s) Not used/IEC 61162-1(time out 4 min)

Inuse

Open is OFF

Fixed use for

5-54

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.17 Fuel Consumption This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Setting item Connected: Device Type VOS Used VOS Green Area VOS Lower Cons Goog Unit HFO Used

Parameter YES/NO Analog (use B-Adapter)/Engine Control YES/NO 0 to 50 YES/NO L/kg YES/NO

** Parameter ** Item Param InUse B-Adapter Channel Output at 0 Position Output per Volt Prefiltering Minimum Maximum

Main Flow 1 -- 8 -320.0 – 320.0 -320.0 – 320.0 0/4/8/64

Ret Flow YES/NO 1 -- 8 -320.0 – 320.0 -320.0 – 320.0 0/4/8/64

5-55

Temperature YES/NO 1 -- 8 -320.0 – 320.0 -320.0 – 320.0 0/4/8/64 -40 -- 80 1 -- 500

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.18 Heel and Trim Heel refers to the inclination of the ship. Trim refers to difference between the fore and aft in draft. This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Setting item Connected: Device Interface Adapter Chl Output Output per Volte Prefiltering: B-Adapter Chl

Parameter YES/NO Analog (use B-Adapter) 1 to 16 -320.2 to 320.2 V(at 0°) -320.2 to 320.2 °/Volt 0/4/8/64 1 to 8

5-56

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.19 Main Engine Start Air Pressure This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Setting item Connected Device Type B-Adapter Channel Output at o kg/cm2 Output per Volt Prefiltering Alarm Maximum Value

Parameter YES/NO Analog (use B-Adapter)/Engine control 1 to 8 -320.0 to 320.0 -320.0 to 320.0 0/4/8/64 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 to 100.0

5-57

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.20 Propeller 1 – 4 This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for the Conning Display of the ECDIS.

No. 1 2 3 4

Setting item Connected Device Type Label Parameter

** Parameter ** Item Param In use B-Adapter channel Output at 0 Output per Volt Prefiltering Minimum

Maximum

RPM

Parameter YES/NO Analog (use B-Adapter)/Engine control See the Parameter table below.

Pitch

Power

Torque

M/E Rpm

-320.2 to 320.2 kW/V

-320.2 to 320.2 Nm/V

-320.2 to 320.2 RPM/V

YES/NO 1 to 8 -320.2 to 320.2V -320.2 to -320.2 to 320.2 320.2 RPM/V unit/V 0/4/8/64 -320.2 to -10000 to 10 320.2 RPM unit -320.2 to 10 to 10000 320.2 RPM unit

-10000 to 10 RPM 10 to 30000 kW

5-58

10 to 50000 Nm

10 to 10000 RPM

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.21 RENC Connections This item is not used for the Chart radar.

5-59

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.22 Rudders This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for the Conning Display of the ECDIS.

No.

Setting item

1

Connected

2

Device Type

3

Number of Rudders Navigation Display Scale Max

4

Parameter YES/NO Analog(uses B-Adapter)/Trackpilot/Engine Control Actual analog, Order Trackpilot Actual Engine Control, Order Trackpilot Analog SIN/COS(uses B-Adapter) No Actual, Order Trackpilot/IEC61162-1($xxRSA) Actual IEC61162-1($xxRSA), Order Trackpilot 1/2/3/4 1 to 93

5-60

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5

Harbour Display Scale Max

6

Rudder type

7

Numerical value

8

Label

9

Display method

1 to 93 Conventional/Water Jet(no scale) Azimuth Propulsion(no scale)/ Conventional(double scale) Not used//Connected//Cornered// Only ORD/Centered//Only ORD/Cornered Normal/Azimuth 0 up/ Azimuth 0 down/ Azimuth 180 up/ Azimuth 180 down

5.5.23 SatCom/External Computer/Sindel Repeaters This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. Reference: The route can be sent from Device Interface: Route backup FURUNO GP-80GPS to the ECDIS or from the ECDIS to the GP.

No.

Setting item

1

Connected

2

Device Interface

3

Adapter Channel: IEC 61162-1 Transmit checksum $ Char Included Checksum

4 5

Parameter YES/NO SatCom IEC61162-1/Ext.Computer IEC 61162-1/ SINDEL Repetaers/ Ext. Com IMO Msg. IEC 61162-01/ SAL SD2-1 Docking log Display/ Route backup IEC 61162-1 1/3/4/9/11/12/13 Use/Not used Not included/Included

5-61

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.24 Speedpilot This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

No.

Setting item

1 2 3 4 5

Connected Adapter Chl Device Interface Device Mode IEC 61162-1 Transmit checksum

6

Checksum

Parameter YES/NO 9/11/12/13 Speedpilot (EMIRI) Normal Not used/Used $ char not included (IEC61162-1 & EMIRI)/ $ char included (Some old NMEA)

5-62

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.25 Thruster 1 to 4 The thruster is equipment to move the ship sideways. Set this item to Stern-1, Stern-2, bow-1, or bow-2. This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for the Conning Display of the ECDIS.

No.

Setting Item

1

Connected

2

Device Type

3 4 5 6 7 8

B-Adapter Channel Output at 0 rpm Output per Volt Prefiltering Maximum Power Maximum rpm

Parameter YES/NO Not used/Analog (use B-Adapter)/ Engine control 1 to 8 -320.2 to 320.2 V -320.2 to 320.2 rpm/V 0/4/8/64 10 to 10000 10 to 10000

5-63

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

5.5.26 Track Pilot This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO. This item is used for the Conning Display of the ECDIS.

No.

Setting item

Parameter IEC61162-1(HSC 1des CTS 0des) EMIRI (COURSE)/ASPO-EMRI EMIRI (COURSETRACK) IEC61162-1(HSC 0des CTS 1des) IEC61162-1(Yokogawa HTC/HTD) IEC61162-1(Tokimec HTC/HTD) IEC61162-1(Yokogawa HTC/HTD CatC) YES/NO 3 NONE/BSH/DNV/IEC62065 Trackpilot/Trackpilot and Raders No device limitations/Steermaster compatible 0.1 to 3.0 5 to 30

1

Device Interface

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Connected Adapter Channel WP Approach Rule Steering Sources Radius Values Minimal Turning Radius Lowe Off Course Alarm Limit Higher Off Course Alarm Limit and 10 to 60 25 Drift Compensation Limit Minimum Route Speed 1.0 to 8.0 Traditional/Program Track Steering Style Program Track Lo Assistant Program Track Hi Assistant

9 10 11

5-64

5.5 Installation Parameter Settings

12

14 15 16

Trackpilot SW type From Conning position to XTE Calculation position (+Bow, -Stem) Turn Endine in Route Steering Received Message IEC61162-1 Transmit checksum

17

Checksum

13

Traditional//Uses Turn/Linear bit -500 -- 500 Wp+wop/Wp+wop+f.dist/wp No check or Alarms/Enable Check and Alarm Not used/Used $ char not included(IEC61162-1 EMRI) $ char included(Some old NMEA)

5.5.27 VDR This item is not connected to the Chart radar. Set Connected to NO.

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Setting item Connected Adapter Device Interface Device Mode IEC 61162-1 Transmit checksum Checksum

Parameter YES/NO Chl: 1 to 16 IEC 61162-1 (FURUNO proprietary) Normal Not used/Used $ char not included (IEC61162-1 & EMRI)/ $ char included (Some old NMEA)/

5-65

6.1 Overview Chapter 6. Installation of Charts

6.1 Overview The world's 7C charts are preinstalled into the Chart radar. The coastlines in the charts, however, are not precise enough for actual navigation. Therefore, install further charts covering necessary areas for voyages. The Chart radar can use S57 ENC (electronic navigation charts). C-MAP Ed-3.0 or ARCS charts cannot be used. If two Chart radar units are installed on board, be sure to install charts into the respective Chart radars. These Chart radar units cannot share the charts.

6.1.1 ENC, SENC, and RENC 1. ENC Paper charts use S57ed3 coding, and they are called vector charts. These charts satisfy requirements of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea (SOLAS), and they are adopted by the International Maritime Organization (IMO). S57ed3 charts published by national hydrographic departments are called electronic navigation charts (or ENC charts). S57ed3 charts published by private enterprises are called non-ENC charts (C Maps). ENC charts contain data in standardized format with standardized contents and configurations issued under permission from relevant hydrographic departments so that the data can be used for the ECDIS and Chart radar. ENC charts include all information required for safe navigation. In addition to information provided by paper charts, supplemental information judged to be required for safe navigation may be included (for example, the directions of navigation). The standard name for charts coded for ENC use is "S57ed3." ENC charts are coded in order to prevent the unauthorized use of the ENC charts. The display of ENC charts needs an authentication procedure. In order to use ENC charts for the equipment, load the ENC charts into the hard disk (HD) and convert them into SENC format. Some ENC charts may be date dependent. For example, an ENC chart may be displayed on and after a certain set-up date or only during a restricted period. In the electronic chart system, all date-dependent data can be displayed only during the set periods in [Display Until] and [Approve Until]. Moreover, hydrographic departments issue the following two kinds of updating data for original basic information. - Updating data as a slight addition to the original basic information. - Updating data that overwrites the original basic information completely and issued as a new edition. All the updating data is added with date information including date-dependent part. Updating data can be used with date input into [Display Until] and [Approve Until]. Charts can be displayed on a post-dated or future-dated basis as well.

6-1

6.1 Overview

2. SENC A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by Chart radar for appropriate use, updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data added by the mariner. It is this database that is actually accessed by the Chart radar for display and other navigational functions. The SENC may also contain information from other sources. 3. RENC A service provider offering ENC delivery and update service as defined in IHO standard S52e3. Often an RENC provides both CD ROM and telecommunications-based service to Chart radar users. One example of an RENC is an RENC in Stavanger, Norway, operating under the marketing name PRIMAR.

6.1.2 Permit A permit key and a public key are used for authorization. The permit key is included in the digital signature in each chart. The public key is saved in the equipment and open to the public. When installing S57 charts into this equipment, an FD or CD-ROM, where the information on the permit key is saved, is required. When installing S57 charts published by the Hydrographic Department of Japan, an FD that includes public key information downloaded from the website of the IHO is required along with another FD where the information on the permit key is saved. - Public Key : PRIMAR's information on the public key is installed automatically when the program of the EC-1000C is updated. Therefore, it is necessary to install information on the public key issued by the Hydrographic Department of Japan when reinstalling charts published by the Hydrographic Department. -

-

Permit Key At the time of chart purchase, inform the chart seller of the number of the dongle attached to the equipment. A permit key FD corresponding to the dongle number of the equipment is attached to the CD-ROM of charts (base charts) sent by the chart seller. The permit key FD includes the contracted chart information. Only contracted charts can be installed.

6-2

6.1 Overview

Dongle: Attached to the parallel port.

Note: New-type dongle An USB dongle is used because the production of parallel dongles has been discontinued. The casing for the USB dongle has a single USB connector on the back (instead of two USB connectors provided conventionally).

USB dongle

6-3

6.1 Overview

Supplementary Information: S57 Chart Service from an RENC Before you can use an RENC service, you have to be authorized as a customer of an RENC. To be authorized you have to contact an official distributor (chart agent) of RENC. Then, the following services are available: Permits Permits are used to control the permission to use a chart. A permit in RENC security is connected to an edition. Permits are issued as two different types: ･ Subscription permit. These include updates for subsequent 12 months. It is assumed that a typical user is a SOLAS class ship, which is required to use up-to-date charts. ･ One-Off permit. These include only updates up to the issue date of the permit. It is assumed that a t ypical user is a non-SOLAS class ship, which is not required to use up-to-date charts. Each permit also includes the expiry date. The expiry date of a permit controls the ENC to SENC conversion. If the issue date of a chart or update is older or equal to the permit expiry date, then the system can convert an ENC into the SENC. There are no viewing time limits as used in some other security systems. The user has a right to view a chart forever and moreover he has a right to convert a chart from its ENC format into the SENC forever. An RENC can issue permits in two formats: ･"*.pmt" format. This format does not include the applicable chart edition nor does it include applicable permit type. ･ PERMIT.TXT format. This format includes the applicable chart edition as well as applicable permit type. Both permit formats are fully operational, but the older “*.pmt” format creates confusion because it cannot support the user when chart edition changes. The system display warnings associated with expiry date. Examples are “will expire” warning 30 days before the expiry date and “have expired” after the expiry date. These warnings are relevant only for Subscription permits. Only the new PERMIT.TXT format supports the system to suppress irrelevant warnings associated with expiry date.

6-4

6.1 Overview

6.1.3 Outline of Chart Menu Chart-related menu items are selected in Menu -> Chart Menu while in ECDIS mode. While in Radar or Chart radar mode, the contents of the Chart Menu will be “S57 Legend”, which will display chart information. Item Load and Update Charts SENC Convert SENC Convert Settings Remove Charts Chart Catalogue Set Chart viewing dates

Chart Permits ECDIS Chart 1

Description This item is used to load ENC charts onto the HD of the equipment. This item is used to convert ENC into SENC format. This item is used to enable automatic ENC-SENC conversion at the time of loading charts onto the HD. Furthermore, this item makes it possible to set the displayed term of validity to the present date after SENC conversion. This item is used to delete cells from the HD. This item is used for S57 chart management. This item is used to display the date-dependent function of cells on SENC charts. The name of an updated chart will be displayed green, while it will be displayed orange if it has not been updated. This item is used to load the permit of coded charts so that the charts can be used for the equipment. PRIMAR's code is by default set. This item is used to display chart symbols currently used by the equipment.

Open Chart by Cell name

This item is used to open S57 charts based on the chart numbers. This item is used to display the conditions of cells saved on the HD, CD-ROM, or RENC. The newest Chart Cell Status cell data can be compared with the latest updating data in use. Manual Updates This item is used to update charts manually.

System

- Log file:This item is used to troubleshoot system defects. - S52 presentation library：This item is used to check S52 revision numbers for S57 charts. - User permit: This item is used to check the user license (dongle number). - Refresh charts after backup: This item is used to refresh charts and updating data available after all the charts and updating data on another ECDIS unit are backed up in the equipment. The chart radar cannot share charts. - Reset files: This command is used to make uploading and downloading checks on chart data. - AML: This item is used to input the AML password. - Restart drawing process: This item is used to draw charts again. Implement this item if the movement, enlargement, or contraction of charts becomes disabled.

6-5

6.1 Overview

6.1.4 Warning Display 1. Warning for Subscription License 1) The following warning will appear at 12-hour intervals when the remaining period is less than 30 days.

S57 Message Subscription licence will expire in less than 30 days. Contact your RENC service for a subscription renewal

OK

2) When the subscription license is expired, the following warning will appear at 12-hour intervals. The upper half of the text of the message warns that the list is not up-to-date.

S57 Message RENC Product List is more than 30 days old. Used charts may not be up-to-date. Contact your RENC service for updated Product List. Subscription licence has expired . Used charts may not be up-to-date. Contact your RENC service for a subscription renewal.

OK

2. Warning Display for Latest Charts 1) The following warning will appear on the chart screen if Display Until or Approved Until data on charts presently in use differs in date from the system by 1 week or more. Use Set Chart viewing dates in the Chart Menu to make displayed valid date settings.

Permanent Warning At least one of used charts has more than 1 week "Approved Until" and/or "Display Until" and current date. Use Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates.

6-6

6.1 Overview

2) The following warning will appear if new updating data loaded onto the HD is not included in the SENC data. The names of the charts are displayed orange (on the chart boundary lines). Use SENC Convert in the Chart Menu to implement SENC conversion.

Permanent Warning At least one of used charts in not up-to-date. At least one update is loaded in harddisk, but not in SENC. Used Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates to check charts.

3) If the following permanent warning appears, it means that the charts include data that are not up-to-date. The available charts and the latest status of the charts can be checked with the Catalogue window and Chart viewing dates window. To check that the charts are up-to-date, check that the names of the all the charts in the catalog are displayed green (on the chart borderlines). Charts that are not up-to-date are displayed orange.

Permanent Warning At least one of used charts is not up-to-date. Get or load latest updates from your RENC service. Use Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates to check chart.

4) The following warning will appear if an attempt is made to use cancelled charts, provided that the removal of cancelled charts is not set at the time of loading updating data including chart removal data. To remove the canceled charts, use Remove Charts in the Chart Menu.

Permanent Warning At least one of used charts is canceled Use Chart Menu-Catalogue to check charts. Use Chart Menu-Remove to remove canceled charts.

6-7

6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key

6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key 6.2.1 Installation of Public Key Note: The installation of the public key is required when installing S57 charts issued by the Hydrographic Department of Japan. PRIMAR's public key has been already installed.

Procedure Setp-1 1. Insert the Public Key FD into the FDD. 2. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Chart Permits. 3. Click Public Key on the Chart Permits screen.

4. Click Load New in the Public key menu.

5. Select Internal Public key File [SAY.TXT] from the Files of type pull-down menu.

6-8

6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key

6. The SAY.TXT file will be displayed. Select the file and click Open.

Select SAY.txt.

Internal Public key File [SAY.TXT]

- Public key file [*.pub] - Internal Public key File [SAY.TXT]

7. The read data will appear on the Public Key screen. Click the Accept New box.

8. The Public Key screen will close.

6-9

6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key

6.2.2 Installation of Permit Key Setp-2 1. Insert the Permit Key FD into the FDD. 2. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Chart Permits. 3. Click Load File on the Chart Permits screen.

4. Open the displayed directory.

5. Select Internal Permit File [PERMIT.TXT] from the Files of type pull-down menu and click Open.

- Permit File [PERMIT.TXT] - Basic Public file [*.pmt]

6-10

6.2 Installation of Public key and Permit key

6. When the S57 Message: Test before SENC convert failed appears, click OK. A list of permitted charts will appear on the Chart Permits screen.

- Cell: Cell number - Expires: Expiration date of license - Type: S (Subscription license) O (Permanent license) - Edt: The updating number of each licensed chart

7. Close the Chart Permits screen.

6-11

6.3 Installation of Charts

6.3 Installation of Charts Chart data in use cannot be replaced unless it is overwritten with the latest base cell or updating data. To reload old data, delete the chart data on the HD first.

6.3.1 Installation of Charts Step-3 1. Insert the chart CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. 2. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Load and Update Chart, and select from CD-ROM in the submenu. 3. The CD catalog will be loaded to the HD from the CD-ROM first, and the list of charts will appear.

Note: Only the latest version data will be maintained in the equipment. If the existing data in the equipment is newer, the following error message will appear. Click OK.

Load CD Catalogue. TIF or TXT file failure for (1 of 2) files, See more details in Chart Menu > System > Log File JPREADME.TXT」 OK

6-12

6.3 Installation of Charts

4. Select the target charts to be installed. The charts will be highlighted. To select the chart, click the frames of the charts.

Charts in the CD-ROM and selected charts are highlighted.

Chart Selection Method Use Load Selector and determine the method of selecting required charts. - Name: The names of charts will appear on the graphic screen. - Permit: Only permitted charts will appear. - RENC Canceled Charts: Charts cancelled with the ENC or CD-ROM will appear. - Group: Groups available from the CD-ROM will be highlighted if the groups are predetermined.

6-13

6.3 Installation of Charts

- Manual Selection: Each listed chart can be manually selected one by one. - Missing only: Unloaded charts and updating data will be loaded if the checkbox is checked. To display all the contents of the CD-ROM, uncheck the Missing only item. - Navigation purpose: Selected charts for navigation purposes will appear. - View CD-ROM Publisher Notes: Important data issued by the chart publisher will appear when this button is clicked. - View CD-ROM content Summary: A list of chart available from the CD-ROM will appear when this button is clicked. - Load and Conv. History: Data loaded from the CD-ROM or converted will appear when this button is clicked. - Remove: This item is used to delete the CD-ROM catalog completely from the equipment. - Edit Group: This item is used to create or change groups. - Load: This item is used to start loading.

5. Click the Load box. 6. The following message will appear. “Loading may take time and prevent monitoring. Do you like to continue?” Click Yes.

6-14

6.3 Installation of Charts

7. The chart will be read automatically, and SENC data conversion will start (see note). Cells finished with conversion will disappear from the Conversion List.

Note: The item Automatic SENC conversion for Chart Menu -> SENC Convert Settings is usually checked to enable automatic conversion. Refer to page 6-21.

Disappear from the list.

Reference: If there is a problem in ENC-to-SENC conversion, the Failed SENC conversion window will appear and the list of ENC with problems will appear. Status display: Errors Failed SENC conversions × This status indicates that there is an error in ENC-SENC conversion. Click Conv. History or Cell status and check ENC Status the details of the error. DE416050.000 Errors If it is a fatal error, NON ENC will appear in the DE416050.002 Errors GB500001.001 Failed Conv.History dialog box. Reinstall the latest charts. Status display: Failure This status indicates a total failure in ENC-ENC conversion and no ENC charts are available. Reinstall the latest charts.

Cell Status

Conv. Histrory

8. The CD History screen will appear on completion of chart reinstallation. Close the screen.

9. Take out the CD-ROM.

6-15

6.3 Installation of Charts

Reference: Standard messages in S57 chart load 1. You do not have a valid permit 1) A chart was not converted into SENC because the permit for it has expired. S57 LOAD SES 15: Permit expired

Consider renew of Permit GB304010.000

OK

2) A chart was not converted into SENC because a permit is for a different edition. You can check edition of the permit using the Chart Permits window in the Chart menu and the edition of the chart by using the Cell Status window. Typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as new edition instead of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent. S57 LOAD Decrypt failed for encrypted Cell from RENC. Permit may be for different edition of Cell. Check edition using Permit Management and Cell Status. If unsuccessful contact your ERNC service. GB304010.000 OK

3) A chart was not converted into SENC because your permit was for different edition. You can check edition of a permit using the Chart Permits and the edition of a chart using the Chart Cell Status window, both in the Chart menu. The common reason for this message is that the chart has been updated too many times as new edition instead of update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent. S57 LOAD Permit is for different edition of Cell. Check edition using Permit Management and Cell Status. If you have unexpired Subscription Permit, you can get a free new Permit either from Telecomm or from your RENC service. GB304010.000 OK

4) A chart was not converted into SENC because the software, data and system time in the chart radar indicates tampering. The common reason for this message is that RENC released a chart before the issue date of the chart. S57 LOAD SSE 14: Permit cannot be used because of incorrect System Date. Perform Initial Set -> Set Time. If unsuccessful contact your ECDIS service. GB304010.000 OK

6-16

6.3 Installation of Charts

2. Authentication of chart failed 5) The chart was not loaded because of missing signature. S57 LOAD SSE 07: Cannot find signature. Use another CD-ROM or try again in Telecomm. If unsuccessful contact your RENC service GB304010.000 OK

6) The chart was not loaded because of coding error in Signature. S57 LOAD SSE 04: Signature has coding error. Use another CD-ROM or try again in Telecomm. If unsuccessful contact your RENC service GB304010.000 OK

7) The chart was not loaded because of tampered Signature or invalid Public Key. S57 LOAD SSE 03: Public Key Authenticate failed. Either Signature is tampered or Public Key is invalid. Contact your RENC service to check valid Public Key GB304010.000 OK

8) The chart was not loaded because of invalid or tampered Signature. S57 LOAD SSE 09: Signature Authenticate failed. Use another CD-ROM or try again in Telecomm. If unsuccessful contact your RENC service GB304010.000 OK

3. Additional messages in S57 SENC conversion 9) You do not have a permit. SENC CONVERT SSE 11: Permit missing GB304010.000

OK

10) Permit for a chart has expired. SENC CONVERT SSE 15: Permit expired. Consider renew of Permit GB304010.000

6-17

OK

6.3 Installation of Charts

11) You have a permit, but it is valid for another edition of the cell. You can check edition of the permit using the Chart Permits window and the edition of a chart using the Cell Status window, both in the Chart menu. A typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as a new edition instead of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent. SENC CONVERT Decrypt failed for encrypted Cell from RENC. Permit may be for different edition of Cell. Check edition using Permit Management and Cell Status. If unsuccessful contact your RENC service GB304010.000 OK

Chart Permits

Chart Cell Status

6-18

6.3 Installation of Charts

Reference: Checks on SENC Conversion History Log Open SENC Convert from [Menu] and click Conv. History. Then the Conv. History window will appear. When Load and Conv. History is clicked, a history check can be made on the Load History and SENC Conversion Log windows.

Load History

SENC Conversion Log History

Analysis of SENC Conversion Log Messages 1. Perfect chart Successful auto. conv: ENC: GB203000.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 4 3

2. Perfect chart which is produced by a private chart producer (i.e., chart doesn't have ENC status) A private chart cannot fulfil SOLAS requirements Successful auto. conv: ENC: AS31MATT.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 4 8 NON E

3. Conversion errors, but the chart is partly usable Use cell status to check details of errors. Note that the chart is still ENC. Successful auto. conv with errors: ENCD ROME416050.000, edt: 3, upd: 0 / 1998 6 12

4. Conversion errors, but the chart is partly usable as NON ENC Use cell status to check details of errors. Note that the chart is no longer ENC if it was produced by a Hydrographic Office. Successful auto. conv with errors: ENC: n1302322.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 1 4 NON ENC

5. Failed conversion Chart is not usable and you cannot view the chart. Failed automatic conversion: ENCD ROMK3EI0XE.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 2 17

6-19

6.3 Installation of Charts

6. Failed conversion of an update Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date and you need the latest edition of the chart from its publisher. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement.. Failed auto. conv: ENC: GB500005.001, edt: 2, upd: 1 / 1997 9 26 Updating impossible before new edition of base cell

7. Failed conversion. Checksum is not correct Chart is not usable and you cannot view it. Try to reload the base cell or update from the original media. And if that doesn't work order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: SG5CONTL.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1996 2 25 CHECKSUM ERROR

8. Failed conversion. Checksum of an update is not correct Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date. Try to reload the update from the original media. And if that doesn't work order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.002, edt: 1, upd: 2 / 2005 1 1 CHECKSUM ERROR

9. Failed conversion. At least one of the previous updates has failed in its SENC conversion The system cannot accept additional updates unless all previous updates have been successfully converted into the SENC. Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date. Try to reload the failed previous update from the original media (in this example the failed previous update is GB5X01SW.002). And if that doesn't work, order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.003, edt: 1, upd: 3 / 2005 9 8 PREVIOUS Update MISSING

10. Failed conversion. The base cell has failed in its SENC conversion The system cannot accept updates unless the base cell has been successfully converted into the SENC. Chart is not usable and you cannot view it. Try to reload the base cell from the original media (in this example the failed base cell is GB5X01SW.000). And if that doesn't work, order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.001, edt: 1, upd: 1 / 1998 9 8 PREVIOUS Base CELL OR Update MISSING

6-20

6.3 Installation of Charts

Reference: Automatic Conversion Settings 1. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] and select SENC Convert Settings. The SENC Convert Settings dialog box will appear. 2. Check Automatic SENC Conversion and Automatic Display Until. Automatic SENC Conversion: Automatic SENC data conversion is performed when the chart data is loaded onto the hard disk. If this item is unchecked, SENC data conversion will be performed manually. To implement SENC data conversion, open SENC Convert from [Menu] and use the SENC Convert dialog box. Automatic Display Until: The system date of the equipment is automatically set as the date of issuance and displayed. Reference: To set the displayed date of updating data, open the Chart Menu from [Menu], select Set Chart viewing dates, and make date settings for Display Until and Approve Until. The “Permanent Warning” message will appear if Display Until or Approved Until data on charts presently in use differs in date from the equipment by 1 week or more. To use this chart in that case, set the above date 1 week later.

6-21

6.3 Installation of Charts

Set the date 1 week later than present setting.

Permanent Warning At least one of used charts has more than 1 week "Approved Until" and/or "Display Until" and current date. Use Chart Menu-Set Chart viewing dates.

6-22

6.3 Installation of Charts

6.3.2 Check on Installed Charts Step-4 1. Open the Chart Menu from [Menu] in ECDIS mode and select Chart Catalogue. 2. Click SENC in Source of chart catalogue. Reference: - CD: Displays charts available from the CD-ROM. - RENC: Displays charts available from RENC. - SENC: Displays charts saved in SENC format on the HD. - C-Map: Displays C-Map Ed3 charts. Note: This item is not supported as of July 2008. C-MAP Ed2, however, will be displayed if SENC is selected. 3. Installed SENC charts will be displayed.

Meanings of Colors of Chart Boundary Lines Green The chart is available for use in SENC format. If the source of the chart is an RENC then the chart is also up-to-date. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC, then all loaded updates are included into the SENC. Orange

The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been cancelled. Either the SENC is from a former edition, the SENC is missing the latest updates or the chart has been cancelled.

Red

If the chart is permit free, you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently. The chart requires a permit but you do not have the permit for the chart therefore you cannot use the chart currently.

Blue

The chart is available either in ENC format, in SENC format for another software version or in SENC format for another chart radar. For example, the chart is blue during SENC conversion and when you loaded a chart into the chart radar and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format.

Magenta

You have a permit to use the chart, but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot use the chart currently.

6-23

6.3 Installation of Charts

Checks on Chart Information 1 Click select in the guide area, locate the cursor on the boundary lines of the chart, and click the left mouse button (Select). Then the information will appear in the Select Chart area. By clicking Cell Status, the Chart Cell Status window will appear. Click Open so that the chart will appear.

Locate the cursor on the boundary lines of the chart then select.

Select

Reference: If a striped pattern appears on the chart, it means that the scale of the chart is too small and not appropriate.

6-24

6.3 Installation of Charts

Checks on Chart Information 2 While in ECDIS mode, locate the cursor to the Plan Speed or To WP box area, select Select Sidebar, and select Chart Legend from the Sidebar menu. While in Chart Radar mode, select S57 Legend from the Chart Menu. When the cursor is moved to the chart, information on the chart will appear.

Item Cell name Navigational purpose Issue date Edition number Last displayed update Update issue date Last update appl. date Projection Horizontal datum Vertical datum Sounding datum Quality of data

Magnetic var.

Depth Height

6-25

Description Chart name Purpose of S57 chart: Overview, General, Coastal, Approach, Harbour, or Berthing will appear Issuance date of chart base cell Chart edition number Latest updating number (displayed on the chart screen) Date of last updating date (displayed on the chart screen) Valid date of the latest updating (displayed on the chart screen) Always in Mercator projection Chart datum：WGS84 Chart vertical datum Datum used for sounding Quantitative rough accuracy of chart function (provided by chart creator) Quantity of magnetic deviation A positive value is for eastward deviation and a negative value is for westward deviation. Unit of water depth measurement Unit of height above sea level

6.3 Installation of Charts

6.3.3 Chart Deletion While in ECDIS mode, open the Chart Menu in [Menu] and select Remove Chart. When a sub directory item in the “Sub Dirs” list is clicked, the contents of the directory will be spread out. The contents of the directory will appear in the Contents area. The level of the directory will become a rank higher when Go Up is clicked.

Charts that can be eliminated are the base cell (xxx.000), updating data (xxx.001), and charts in SENC format (xxx.snc).

Procedure 1. Select the target chart to be deleted. 2. Click Remove Chart. 3. The S57 Remove screen will appear. Click Yes.

6-26

6.3 Installation of Charts

6.3.4 Chart Manipulation To select a chart, take the following steps while in ECDIS mode. - Open Chart Catalogue from the Chart Menu. - Select the chart in [Menu] -> Open Chart by Cell name. To manipulate the chart, locate the cursor on the chart screen while in ECDIS mode and select the following items in the guide area. - Range+/-: Chart range expansion or contraction. - Ship OffCenter: Movement to the center of the ship. - Set Chart Center: Movement to the center of the chart. - Active Scroll: Scrolling on the chart screen. - TM Reset: Resetting on the ship's position. - [Menu] -> Set Center: Movement on the chart according to longitude and latitude settings. Select Chart Display in the guide area for the chart display function. The display settings of the chart can be registered or retrieved.

6-27

6.3 Installation of Charts

Registration oｒ reading of Chart Display.

6-28

6.3 Installation of Charts

6.3.5 Making Groups of Chart Cells Two or more related charts can be grouped in the following two windows.

1. Creating Groups in “Load or Update Charts from CD ROM” Window Insert the chart CD into the drive, select Load or Update charts from the Chart Menu. Then select From CD-ROM. The Load or Update Charts from CD ROM window will appear.

Frame definition

Uncheck the Group button first.

Outline of Grouping Procedure 1: Edit Group -> New Group -> Text Input (Group name) -> Add Frame -> (Frame definition) -> Done -> (Display of selected cell in Inside box) -> Close Edit -> Check mark on Group -> Load -> Starts SENC with the chart loaded -> End ** Check the grouped contents in the Chart Catalogue window **

6-29

6.3 Installation of Charts

2. Creation in Chart Catalogue Window Select Chart Catalogue from the Chart Menu to display the Chart Catalogue window.

Uncheck the Group button first.

Overview of Loop Procedure 2： Check Edit Group -> New -> Text Input (Group name) -> Add Frame -> (Frame definition) -> Done -> Group to display the group name in the Chart Catalogue window.

3. Deleting S57 Chart Cell from Group Deletion of Grouped Chart Cell: Check Group in the Chart Catalogue window, select the group name to be edited, and select the group to be deleted. - Edit Group -> Remove frame: Delete the chart in the frame. - Edit Group -> Remove: Delete the group.

6-30

Outline of Updating Chapter 7. RPU-016 Program 7.1Updating

7.1 Outline of Updating The RPU-016 (used for Radar Processor unit of the FCR-2xx7) is intrinsically the same as the RPU-013 (used for the Radar Processor unit of the FAR-2xx7). There is no difference in program updating procedure between the RPU-016 and RPU-013. Use either a PC's serial port or LAN port to perform program updating. Besides, program updating is possible with a Mini-program card used. When you perform program updating through the serial port, connect the Control unit and the Display unit to the Radar Processor unit. RPU-016: TB PCB-J602 (KEY) RCU-014 The output cable for the Control unit of FCR-2xx7 uses 9-pin D-sub connector, which cannot be connected direct to the Radar Processor unit. Therefore, utilize the Control unit of the FAR-2xx7 or make a conversion adapter and connect the Control unit. The Display unit for the FCR-2xx7 may be used instead.

7.1.1 Program Files The following programs are subject to updating. - Radar Processor unit: SPU board -> MAIN CPU, ARPA CPU, DRAW CPU, and FPGA - Antenna Unit: RFC board -> RFC CPU The following table shows program folders and the contents of the files in the folders. Information on each size is a reference only. Table 7.1.1 List of Program Files (SPU Ver.02.40 or older ones) SPU board in control block File name Arparom.hex Drawrom.hex Fpgarom.hex Fr2107r.hex Ldarpa.bin Lddraw.bin Ldmain.bin Ldfpga.bin uparpa.bat updraw.bat Upfpga.bat upmain.bat uppg.exe

Size 174kB 346kB 1,030kB 2,025kB 23kB 23kB 23kB 29kB 1kB 1kB 1kB 1kB 94kB

RFC board in antenna block File name Fr2107rf.bin Uppg.exe Uprfc.bat Uprfc.txt

Size 105kB 94kB 1kB 1kB

Note: A batch file for the LAN port is added for SPU Ver. 02.41 or later ones so that a program can be renewed through the LAN port. For details, refer to page 7-9.

7-1

7.1 Outline of Updating

7.1.2 Program Number Check The Authorizing Key Disk is not required. Select [Main menu] -> Initial Settings -> Selftest and click OK button. Then the Self Test screen will appear. The program version is displayed on the screen.

ARPA CPU: SPU Program Ver ARPA RFC: RFC Program Ver

7-2

7.2 Updating through Serial Port

7.2 Updating through Serial Port 7.2.1 Connections between PC and Radar Processor unit As shown in the following diagram, connect the 9-pin D-sub crossing cable (with female-to-female connectors) to the serial port of the PC and the RS-232C port of the Radar Processor unit. RPU-016

RS-232C port

7.2.2 Precautions for Updating 1) When updating the DRAW program, never turn OFF the power or stop the program updating midway. If the program updating fails, nothing will appear on the screen. In that case, the updating needs the use of the Mini-program card. For details, refer to page 7-8 2) Redo the updating of Chart radar programs if the next step is not available 30 seconds after the message “NOW ERASING Message….” is displayed. 3) The MAIN, ARPA, DRAW CPU, and FPGA programs are used for the SPU board. 4) The following typical updating periods are required. Updating program MAIN CPU ARPA CPU DRAW CPU

Updating program FPGA RFC CPU

Updating time 25 minutes 2 minutes 5 minutes

Updating time 10 minutes 5 minuets

5) Unless the programs for the SPU board are greatly changed, the set values will remain unchanged. 6) The serial port of the PC does not require data transfer settings. The baud rate is 9600 bps at the time of updating booting. The baud rate will change to 38.4 kbps after the updating starts. The following protocol is used. * Format - Data bit: 8 - Stop bit: 1 - Parity bit: None * Flow control - None

7-3

7.2 Updating through Serial Port

7) If the serial port number of the PC is other than “1”, the batch file will be rewritten. For example, in the case of program updating with the USB and RS-232C interface, check the COM port of the driver and overwrite the COM port number specification of the updating batch file. Otherwise, overwrite the COM port number of the PC to COM-1. Procedure for Overwriting COM Port of Batch File 1) Open [Control panel] – [System] – [Device manager], and check the COM port number (e.g., COM4) of the installed USB - RS-232C driver. 2) Select the batch file to be updated, and open the batch file from [File] –>”Edit”. 3) For example, in the case of the uparpa.bat batch file for the ARPA CPU, the text uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf arparom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999 will appear. 4) Overwrite the above Port 1 with COM port number 4 (uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf arparom.hex /port 4 /sp 9600 /t 9999). 5) Select [File] – “Save as” and save the edited text. Note: If the edited text cannot be overwritten, click the right button of the mouse on the icon of the batch file, select the [Property] – [General] and check that the Read only box for [Property] is unchecked. Reference: Batch file SPU board：0359204-02.xx - uparpa.bat uppg /lf ldarpa.bin /hf arparom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999 - updraw.bat uppg /lf lddraw.bin /hf drawrom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999 - upmain.bat uppg /lf ldmain.bin /hf fr2107r.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999 C-MAP support

uppg /lf ldmain.bin /hf fr2107rc.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999 - Upfpga.bat uppg /lf ldfpga.bin /hf fpgarom.hex /port 1 /sp 9600 /t 9999 RFC board：0359202-01.xx - uprfc.bat uppg /lf uprfc.txt /hf fr2107rf.bin /port 1 /cpu 1 /sp 9600 /t 999999999

7-4

7.2 Updating through Serial Port

7.2.3 Procedure for Program Updating Procedure 1. Turn off the Radar (RPU-016). 2. Connect the 9-pin D-sub crossing cable to the serial port of the PC and the RS-232C port of the Control Unit. 3. Open the program folder to be updated. 4. Double click the icon of the batch file of the updating program. Note: The MAIN, ARPA, DRAW CPU, and FPGA programs are used for the SPU board. Perform program updating directed by Furuno technical information provided. SPU board 0359204-02.xx uparpa.bat updraw.bat upmain.bat Upfpga.bat

RFC board 0359202-01.xx uprfc.bat

5. The updating file will start automatically.

7-5

7.2 Updating through Serial Port

6. Turn ON the Radar when the message “[Waiting For Target Wake up …] Time: xx (sec)” appears on the PC screen.

Example of DRAW CPU updating

Turn ON the Radar after the message "[Waiting For Target Wake up --]" appears.

7. Program updating will start automatically. The message “Now Initializing…” on the Radar screen will remain unchanged.

The program file to be updated is displayed. The updating lapsed time is displayed.

7-6

7.2 Updating through Serial Port

8. The updating will be finished when the message “Upload complete” appears on the PC screen. The Radar screen will change to the normal screen on completion of updating.

The updating is finished when the "Upload complete" is finished.

9. Turn OFF the Radar and renew the next program. Repeat from step 4. 10. On completion of program updating, turn OFF the Radar and restore the connections to the original connections.

7-7

7.3 Program Updating with Mini-Program Card

7.3 Program Updating with Mini-Program Card The mini-program card has a SPU-related program. Note that RFC program is not included. Procedure 1. Turn OFF the Radar (RPU-016). 2. Card slot on SPU board: Insert a Mini-program card to J206. 3. Turn ON the Radar. Nothing will be displayed on the screen at this moment. 4.

The renewal of all the programs on the SPU board will start automatically. CR4 on the SPU board is OFF while the programs are updated. Nothing will be displayed on the screen.

5.

The updating will be finished when CR4 on the SPU board blinks. It takes approximately 5 minutes until the end of updating. Nothing will be displayed on the screen even after the updating is completed.

6. Turn OFF the Radar and extract the Mini-Program card.

The updating will be finished when CR4 on the Main CPU blinks.

Card slot: J206

Card

7-8

Furuno's 8-MB Mini-program card (Write the programs with the MC-50.)

7.4 Updating through LAN Port

7.4 Updating through LAN Port The BOOT program has been changed so that the updating of SPU program version 02.43 (part of version 02.41) or later ones will be possible through either the serial port or LAN port. The program folder includes batch files for serial and LAN port use. SPU Program Ver. 02.41 or Later Ones for PC Program to be updated ARPA CPU DRAW CPU MAIN CPU RFC CPU FPGA C Map compatible MAIN CPU

Batch file for serial ports

Batch file for LAN port

Uparpa.bat Updraw.bat Upmain.bat Uprfc.bat Upfpga.bat

setuparpa.bat setupdraw.bat setupmain.bat Setuprfc.bat setupfpga.bat

―

setupmainc.bat

Important: If the CPU board (version 33 or older one) with SPU program version 02.40 or older one installed is used, program updating through the LAN port will not be possible due to the difference in boot program. Once SPU program version 02.41 is installed with the Mini-program card used, however, the new boot program will be updated as well. Then the updating of SPU program version 02.41 or later ones will be possible through the LAN port. The new or old boot program is cannot be checked.

7-9

7.4 Updating through LAN Port

Procedure 1. Connect the LAN ports of the PC and RPU-016 through the Hub provided with power. Unless the Hub incorporates an Auto-MDIX function, use a LAN crossing cable. PC

HUB

RPU-016

Power supply

2. Set the IP address for the LAN connections of the PC to 172.31.3.100. 1) Select [Start] -> Network connection -> Local area connection and open Property. 2) Open [General], select Internet protocol (TCP/IP), and click Properties (R). 3) Check Select IP address (S), and set the following IP address and subnet mask. • IP address: 172.31.3.100 • Subnet mask: 255.255.0.0 3. Click the batch file of the program to be updated. The DOS prompt screen will appear on the PC. 4. Turn on the Radar (RPU-16). When the Radar and PC are LAN connected, the message “P0>connection IP address 172.31.3.x” will appear and program updating will start automatically. Note: The IP address displayed here is the set number (IP address) of the Radar.

7-10

7.4 Updating through LAN Port

5. When the program updating is completed, the message “finish upload program.(size =XXXXXXX)” will be displayed and the Radar will start.

6. Turn OFF the Radar and return the connections to the original connections.

7-11

Chapter 8. EC-1000C Program Updating 8.1 Overview 8.1 Overview 8.1.1 Checking of Program Version The Authorizing Key Disk is not required. The Self Test screen will appear with the program versions displayed by clicking the [OK] button after selecting [Main menu] -> Initial Settings -> Selftest.

The program version for the EC-1000C on the right-hand side is displayed along with the program version for the LAN adapter on the left-hand side.

Reference: The versions are also displayed on the information display area. The program version for the EC-1000C on the right-hand side is displayed along with the program version for the LAN adapter on the left-hand side.

Display

Program Ver.

EC-1000C

05.xx

05.xx

ARPA CPU ARPA RFC

0359204-02.xx 0359202-01.xx

Control Head

359203-01.xx

Remarks The program version for the EC-1000C is displayed. These numbers on the left-hand side and right-hand side are the same in number. The SPU program version for the RPU-016. The RFC program version for the RF unit. Control Unit: The program version for the RCU-020/015FEA/016

8-1

8.1 Overview

8.1.2 Preparations 1. Precautions 1) Log data will be deleted at the time of program updating. Back up necessary data. Input the following items on the ECDIS screen. Main menu -> Record -> - Details Log - Voyage Log - Danger Target Log Reference: The log file can be deleted in procedure 17 of program updating by checking [Log files] on the system cleanup screen. 2) There are files that will not be deleted as a result of program updating, such as Installation parameter, Route, User Chart, and Pilot Data files. Be sure to back up these files, however, before program updating. Refer to page 5-6 and 2-52 for the back-up procedure. 3) Installed charts will not be deleted. 4) When the program for the EC-1000C is updated, be sure to update the program for the LAN adapter. These programs must be same in version. Refer to page 9-12 for the back-up procedure. Otherwise, the message “4097 LAN adapter1(2) version error” will be output.

8-2

8.1 Overview

2. Preparations Connect the service keyboard and mouse to the EC-1000C. The Authorizing Key Disk is not required. Furthermore, disconnect the LAN cables from the LAN adapter (LAN-2) and LAN port (LAN-1) of the Radar. The Chart radar may not start normally if program updating is implemented with the LAN cable connected. Forced power SW RPU-01

CD drive FD drive

EC-1000C Connect the service keyboard .

Disconnect the two LAN cables.

LAN-2: Disconnect the cable from the LAN adapter connection port. LAN-1: Disconnect the cable from the RPU-016 LAN connection port.

8-3

8.2 Updating Procedure

8.2 Updating Procedure Procedure 1. Turn ON the power supply switch on the rear panel of the EC-1000C. Then turn ON

EC-1000C power SW

Control block power SW

the power supply switch on the control block. 2. When the following chart screen appears, press the Windows key on the service keyboard to finish the application so that the Windows screen will appear. Refer to page 2-1 for the method of finishing the application.

1. Select [Alt]+ [Tab] -> ECAWATCH. 2. Click [Shutdown the Chart Radar]. 3. Close the Control Head screen. 4. Select [Alt] + [F4] -> Windows.

3. Set the program CD-ROM in the CD drive of the EC-1000C. 4. Select Run from the [Start] menu.

RUN

8-4

Windows screen

8.2 Updating Procedure

5. Click BROWSE, specify the d:¥install¥setup.exe file and click OK or type "d:¥install¥setup.exe" in the Open field.

d:¥install¥setup.exe

6. Click Yes on the bottom of the screen when the System Information screen appears.

The present system information on the EC-1000C is displayed.

YES

8-5

8.2 Updating Procedure

7. Click Next when the ECDIS/ChartRader Setup screen appears.

NEXT

8. Click Next after checking that [CHART RADAR] screen.

is selected on the Setup Type

Select CHART RADAR.

NEXT

Reference: - CHART RADAR Installation of a chart radar program. - ECDIS Installation of an ECDIS program. - ECDIS With Conning (1 Display) Installation of a program that enables the display of ECDIS information and conning information on a single display. - ECDIS With Conning (2 Display) Installation of a program that enables the display of ECDIS information and conning information on respective displays. The EC-1000C needs a video card in this case. - PC ECDIS Installation of a PC ECDIS program.

8-6

8.2 Updating Procedure

9. Input "ecdis" in the Password field on the User Info screen and click Next.

Password: ecdis

NEXT

10.

Check that the destination folder is C:¥ants_system on the Choose Destination Location screen, and click Next.

C:¥ants_system

NEXT

11. Check that Enable C-Map ed3 features is not selected. on the C-Map ed3 Settings screen. Then click Next. Presently the chart radar does not support C-Ma Ed3. Therefore, do not check Enable C-Map ed3 features.

NEXT

8-7

8.2 Updating Procedure

12. Input “2371” in the Hasp Pin field on the HASP Info screen and click Next.

Input "2371".

NEXT

13. Input the following item on the Share Info screen and click Next. - Input “ANTS_SYSTEM” in the AntsSystem field. - Input “cd_drive” in the CD-ROM field.

Input "ANTS_SYSTEM". Input "cd_drive". NEXT

14. Set the following items on the Set Control Head parameters screen, and click Next. - COM Port : COM2 (COM1, COM2, NONE) - Brilliance : 1 255 (0 – 255) - Alarm Tone :4 (0 – 7) - Alarm Volume :17 (0 – 7)

NEXT

- COM Port: Select COM2. - Brilliance: Input "1 255". - Alarm Tone: Select 4. - Alarm Volume: Select 1 7.

8-8

8.2 Updating Procedure

15. Set one of the following items according to your requirement on the Monitor Parameters screen, and click Next. Default Color Calibration: - LCD FEA-2807 MU-231CE -> Select if the MU-231CE (FCR-2807) is installed. - LCD FEA-2107 MU-201CE -> Select if the MU-201CE (FCR-2107) is installed. - Leave unchanged (upgrade) -> Select if no setting changes are made. Monitor Port: [COM1]

NEXT

COM1 COM2 NONE

Reference: The screen size and display color will change if incorrect settings for Default Color Calibration are made. For example, if the FEA-2807 MU-201CE is set while the MU-231CE is installed, the circular on the Radar screen will be a little distorted in a transverse direction. The image of the EC-1000C is output in SXGA mode. The MU-231CE has a UXGA monitor. If the LCD FEA-2807 MU-231CE is set, the SXGA image output will be a little compressed in a transverse direction. The MU-201CE has an SXGA monitor. Therefore, the image on the EC-1000C will be output as it is in SXGA mode.

8-9

8.2 Updating Procedure

16. Set “Interface address type” on the ChartRadar parameters screen, and click Next. - Interface address type: Default For First (Second) ChartRadar -> Specify No.1 and No.2 chart radars. Note: The user is to assign each IP address if User Defined is selected. - Chart Radar IP for LAN adapters: 10.0.0.184 (Second -> 10.0.0.185) -> The IP is automatically assigned according to the Interface address type setting. - LAN adapter IP: [10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1 [10.0.0.195 ] x Install 2 -> The IP is automatically assigned according to the Interface address type setting. When connecting the No. 2 LAN adapter, check Install 2. - Select IP Address for LAN ARPA: 172.31.3.33 -> The IP is automatically assigned according to the Interface address type setting.

NEXT

Note: Registry data changes with the Interface address type settings. Network settings (LAN IP settings) in the EC-1000C will not be made automatically. Refer to Chapter 10 to make LAN IP settings.

Interface address type First ChartRadar Second ChartRadar

Chart Radar IP for LAN Adapters 10.0.0.184 10.0.0.185

LAN adapter IP Install 2

Select IP Address for LAN ARPA

10.0.0.194

10.0.0.195

172.31.33

10.0.0.196

10.0.0.197

172.31.34

Install 1

8-10

8.2 Updating Procedure

17. Check the Log files box on the “System Cleanup” screen, and click Next. Only the log file will be deleted.

-

NEXT

x

Chart Display Setting Files ARCS/S57 Group file S57 Senc files S57 CD Chart Catalog files Log files

18. Check that the Current Settings is set to “Install” on the Start Copying Files screen, and click Next. When the Aladdin Device Installation Utility screen appears, click OK. Then program installation will start. Note: In the case of correcting set items, use the [Back] key and return to the previous page.

NEXT

8-11

8.2 Updating Procedure

When the “Locked File Detected” screen appears while the program updating is in progress, click Ignore and continue program updating. 19. When the “Aladdin Device Driver Installation Utility” screen is displayed, click OK. When the next screen appears, the program installation will be completed. Check “Yes, I want to restart my computer now” and Click Finish. Then the PC will be rebooted automatically.

20. Eject the program CD-ROM.

8-12

8.3 Registry File Check

8.3 Registry File Check 8.3.1 Outline of Registry File 1. Registry Do not edit or set registry data incorrectly.

Information on a variety of items including the following ones, which are regularly referred to when Windows is running, will be stored in the registry: The profile of each user, types of applications installed on the PC and types of documents creatable in each application, property sheet settings for folder and application icons, types of hardware existing on the system, and occupied ports. The OS may result in operational error, and the OS may not start in the worst case if the registry data is edited or set incorrectly.

2. Contents of Registry File At the time of program installation, the contents of the registry file will be overwritten according to selecting of the Interface address type of Chart Radar parameters. Check that the program is installed correctly. If the registry data varies with that on the next page, LAN adapter or radar communication will be disabled even if there are no LAN setting problem. In that case, reinstall the program.

8-13

8.3 Registry File Check

Table 8.3.1 Registry Data

Item

No.1 FCR (Default for first ChartRadar)

No.2 FCR (Default for second ChartRadar)

LAN Arpa Local Address

172.31.3.33

172.31.3.34

LAN Arpa Local Address Type

Default For first ChartRadar

Default For Second ChartRadar

0X000000002 (2)

0X000000004 (4)

LAN if adapter 1 ID Address

10.0.0.194

10.0.0.196

LAN if adapter 2 ID Address

10.0.0.195

10.0.0.197

LAN if adapter 1 ID

LAN if adapter 2 ID LAN if adapter 3 ID LAN if adapter 4 ID

LAN if Address

LAN if Local IP Address

0X000000003 (3) 0X000000004 (4) 0X000000005 (5)

An IP address for the EC-1000C to communicate with the RPU-016. Used to display the Interface address type settings at the time of program updating. The Device Number of the LAN adapter. Used to display the IP address of the No.1 LAN adapter. Used to display the IP address of the No.2 LAN adapter. (Additionally displayed at the time of program updating if the item Install 2 for the LAN adapter IP is checked.

0X000000005 (5) 0X000000002 (2)

LAN adapter's Device Number

0X000000003 (3)

Default For first ChartRadar

Default For Second ChartRadar

10.0.0.184

10.0.0.185

8-14

Remarks

Used to display the Interface address type settings at the time of program updating. An IP address for the EC-1000C to communicate with the LAN adapter.

8.3 Registry File Check

8.3.2 Check Procedure for Registry File Procedure 1. Select Run from the Start menu and type “regedit” in the Open field.

regedit

2. Select “HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE¥SOFTWARE¥FFOY¥ECDIS¥LANAdapter¥ ” from the Registry Editor folder in My Computer, open the LAN adapter folder, and check the data with [Table 8.3.1 Registry] Data.

8-15

8.3 Registry File Check

Case 1: The following Interface address type is set at the time of program updating. - Interface address type: Default For First ChartRadar - LAN adapter IP: [10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1 [10.0.0.195 ] Install 2

8-16

8.3 Registry File Check

Case 2: The following Interface address type is set at the time of program updating. - Interface address type: Default For First ChartRadar - LAN adapter IP: [10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1 [10.0.0.195 ] x Install 2

8-17

8.3 Registry File Check

Case 3: The following Interface address type is set at the time of program updating. - Interface address type: Default For Second ChartRadar - LAN adapter IP: [10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1 [10.0.0.195 ] Install 2

8-18

8.3 Registry File Check

Case 4: The following Interface address type is set at the time of program updating. - Interface address type: Default For Second ChartRadar - LAN adapter IP: [10.0.0.194 ] x Install 1 [10.0.0.195 ] x Install 2

8-19

8.4 Contents of Program CD ROM

8.4 Contents of Program CD ROM

8-20

8.4 Contents of Program CD ROM

8-21

Adapter の概要 Chapter 9. LAN Adapter4.1 LAN Settings

9.1 LAN Adapter Settings 9.1.1 Overview The IP address of the LAN adapter is factory set to 10.0.0.194. The user (engineer) should make IP address and parameter settings for the LAN adapter in the case of connecting the No. 2 LAN adapter or connecting the LAN adapter to the No. 2 Chart radar. Furthermore, be sure to update the LAN adapter program when the EC-1000C program is updated. Reference: In the case of connecting the No. 2 LAN adapter, reinstall the EC-1000C program. At that time, check Install 2 in the LAN adapter IP window. Refer to Step 16 (page 8-10) in Chapter 8 EC-1000C Program Updating. * In Registry file, “LAN if adapter 2 ID Address” will be added. Refer to Case 2 in 8.3.2(page8-17).* List of IP Addresses No.1 Radar: 172.31.3.6

No.2 Radar: 172.31.3.7 No.1 EC-1000C LAN1 IF Network: 172.31.3.34

No.1 EC-1000C LAN1 IF Network: 172.31.3.33 LAN1 LAN2 No.1 EC-1000C LAN2 IF Network: 10.0.0.184

No.1 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.194 e0=10.0.0.184

LAN1 LAN2 No.2 EC-1000C LAN2 IF Network: 10.0.0.185

No.2 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.195 e0=10.0.0.184

No.1 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.196 e0=10.0.0.185

Fig. 9.1.1 IP address Settings

9-1

No.2 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.197 e0=10.0.0.185

9.2 Preparations

9.2 Preparations IP Address/Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter and Program Updating

9.2.1 Connections Turn OFF the power and make the following connections. The LAN adapter can be turned OFF by disconnecting J9 on the LAN adapter as well (see the next page). - Use a serial crossing cable to connect J13 (9-pin D-sub female terminal) of the LAN adapter and COM1 (9-pin D-sub female connector) of the EC-1000C. - Disconnect the LAN cable to the LAN adapter. - Connect the service keyboard and mouse. DVI

DISPLAY UNIT (MU-201/231CE)

EC-1000C

DVI1

Not requered

RADAR UNIT 9 pin Dsub (Female)

CONTROL UNIT (RCU-020/015FEA)

Radar Precessor Unit (RPU-016 POWER (100 - 230CAC)

CONTROL HEAD (COM2) 9 pin Dsub (Female)

J13

COM1

SERVICE KEY BOARD

9 pin Dsub (Male)

KEY BOARD Front panel

LAN2 RJ45

MOUSE

9 pin - female 9pinDsub: Dsub:female femele-femele (Closs Crosscable) cable Closs cable Cross cable

LAN ADAPTER (EC-1010) RJ45

Disconnect

MOUSE/KEYB Not requered

If you need.

LAN1

POWER (100 - 230CAC)

POWER (24VDC)

HUB-100

RJ45

[COM1] ----- [J13] # 2(RXD) ---- # 3(TXD) # 3(TXD) ---- # 2(RXD) # 5 GND) ---- # 5(GND)

Disconnect the LAN cable.

LAN Adapter

Rear panel of EC-1000C COM-1 Connect the crossing cable.

J13: Connect the crossing cable.

Fig. 9.2.1 Connections for LAN Adapter Setting Change

9-2

9.2 Preparations

9.2.2 Jumper Settings for LAN Adapter As shown in the following table, change the jumper settings to put the LAN adapter into program mode.

J16 J13 J17

J9: Power supply

J14

D43 J15

Jumper

Factory setting

Setting change

J14 J15 J16 J17

TXD1 side RXD1 side Between INIT and INT H Between CTS1 and CTS1 H

TXP side RXP side Between INIT and GND Between CTS1 and GND

Fig. 9.2.2 Make Settings Changes to Put LAN Adapter into Program Mode

Reference: The LED blinking cycle of the LAN Module will change when the LAN adapter is in program mode. - Normally: Turns ON and OFF at 1-second intervals. - Program mode: Turns ON for 0.5 seconds and OFF for 1 second repeatedly.

- ON: Not operating - OFF: The program is not operating.

LED on LAN Adapter

9-3

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter 9.3.1 Outline of Settings

In case of; - Add No. 2 LAN Adapter to No. 1 FCR. or - Add LAN Adapter to No. 2 FCR.

In case of; Communication between the EC1000C and LAN Adapter is establish.

Start changing the IP address and parameters of the LAN Adapter.

Preparations for updating (Refer to 9.2 Preparations) 1) Disconnect the LAN cable from the LAN Adapter. 2) Connect the LAN Adapter and EC-1000C over serial crossing cable. 3) Jumper changes on LAN Adapter：J14, J15, J16, and J17

Start the 7188XW program. 1) Finish the Chart radar. 2) Open C:\LAN Adapter\Shortcut to 7188WX.EXE. 3) Turn ON the LAN adapter. 4) The i7188E> prompt appears.

Set the IP address. i7188E>IP ---ÆIP check i7188E>SETIP ---ÆIP

Set the parameter. i7188E>SERCOTR /command

Restore the conditions before rebooting.

Fig. 9.3.1 Outline of IP and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

9-4

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

9.3.2 Connecting LAN Adapter (Starting 7188XW Program) Procedure 1. Finish the Chart radar, open the LAN adapter folder in the C drive, and double click Shortcut to 7188xw.exe. Finishing Chart Radar; Refer to page 2-1 to finish the Chart radar. 1) Press the [Tab] key while pressing the [Alt] key and select ECAWATCH. 2) Click Shutdown the Chart Radar on the ECAWATCH screen. 3) Close the Control Head screen. 4) The Windows screen will appear with the [F4] key pressed while pressing the Alt key.

C:¥LANAdapter

Shortcut to 7188xw.exe

9-5

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

2. The i7188E> prompt will appear on the DOS screen when the [Enter] key is pressed after the 7188XW program starts.

I7188E>

Note: Turn the LAN adapter OFF and ON if the i7188E> prompt does not appear. Furthermore, check the connections of the EC-1000C and LAN adapter and the jumper changes on the LAN adapter.

Disconnect and connect the J9 power connector to turn the LAN adapter OFF and ON.

Supplement: Typical commands executable on 7188xw.exe. DIR

Shows the information of all files download in the Flash-Memory.

VER

Shows the information of MiniOS7.

DEL

Deletes all files stored in the Flash-Memory. It will delete all files.

RESET

Resets the CPU.

DIAG

Hardware Diagnostic.

? F1-key F2-key F8-key F10-key SERCOTR

Shows help messages of MiniOS7. Shows help messages of 7188xw.exe. Sets the file name for download (without download operation). Downloads the file specified by F2 into FLASH_ROM and execute it. Downloads the file specified by F2 into SRAM and execute it. Shows the settings of LAN-Adapter software.

9-6

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

9.3.3 Checking and Making IP address Settings for LAN Adapter Use “ip” and “setip” commands as shown in the following example.

Check the IP registration with i7188 E>ip.

Use i7188E>setip to display the method of IP registration.

i7188E>setip 10.0.0.190: Register the IP.

Use i7188E>ip to check IP registration.

Procedure 1. Start the 7188XW program. Type “ip” after the i7188E> and press the [Enter] key. The IP address set for the LAN adapter will appear.

Use i7188E>ip to check IP registration.

9-7

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

2. For example, To change the IP address to the No. 1 LAN adapter's IP address, type “setip 10.0.0.194” after the i7188E> and press the [Enter] key. Type “setip 10.0.0.195” in the case of the No.2 LAN adapter.

i7188E>setip 10.0.0.194: IP registration

Table 9.3.1 IP Addresses of LAN Adapter IP address of LAN adapter

IP address

No.1 Chart Radar

No.1 LAN adapter

10.0.0.194

No.1 Chart Radar

No.2 LAN adapter

10.0.0.195

No.2 Chart Radar

No.1 LAN adapter

10.0.0.196

No.2 Chart Radar

No.2 LAN adapter

10.0.0.197

9-8

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

9.3.4 Checking and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter 1. Parameter Checks Start the 7188XW program. Type “sercotr” after the i7188E> prompt and press the [Enter] key. The parameter of the LAN adapter will appear.

Check points

Check Points - LAN Adapter 05.41 The program version of the LAN adapter is displayed. The version must be the same as that of the EC-1000C. If they differ, update the program referring to “9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program”. - Own IP: 10.0.0.19x The IP address of the LAN adapter is displayed. The IP address of the No. 1 LAN adapter, which is connected to the No. 1 Chart radar must be10.0.0.194. - Conf d=5 P=15001 --The parameter of the LAN adapter is displayed. - Hosts e0=10.0.0.18x --The LAN adapter displays the IP address of the EC-1000C. The setting is e0=10.0.0.184 --- in the case of the No. 1 Chart radar.

9-9

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

2. Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter Start the 7188XW program. According to the LAN adapter to set, type the following commands and parameters (e.g., “sercotr /d=2 /p=15001 /r=” followed by the parameter) after the i7188E> prompt and press the [Enter] key.

Table 9.3.2 Parameters of LAN Adapter

LAN adapter

Command and parameter to be typed

No.1 Chart Radar No.1 LAN Adapter

Sercotr_/d=2_/p=15001_/r=15000_/f=1_/n=8_/m=0_ /e0=10.0.0.184_/e1=0.0.0.0

No.1 Chart Radar No.2 LAN Adapter

Sercotr_/d=3_/p=15001_/r=15000_/f=9_/n=8_/m=0_ /e0=10.0.0.184_/e1=0.0.0.0

No.2 Chart Radar No.1 LAN Adapter

Sercotr_/d=4_/p=15001_/r=15000_/f=1_/n=8_/m=0_ /e0=10.0.0.185_/e1=0.0.0.0

No.2 Chart Radar No.2 LAN Adapter

Sercotr_/d=5_/p=15001_/r=15000_/f=9_/n=8_/m=0_ /e0=10.0.0.185_/e1=0.0.0.0 Note: The symbol “_” between parameters means a space.

Parameter

Press the Enter key on completion of parameter input.

｛ Parameter registration is finished.

9-10

9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter

Reference: In the case of changing a specific parameter, specify the parameter after the i7188E>. That is, the parameter to be changed can be corrected with the SERCOTR switch command only. For example, if the LAN adapter is connected to the No.2 EC-1000C, the IP address must be changed to that of the No.2 EC-1000C. Therefore, type i7188E> SERCOTR one space /e0=１0.0.0.185.

Table 9.3.3 Meanings of Parameters Parameter

Meaning

Setting 2: First adapter of first EC-1000C

d

Device number

3: Second adapter of first EC-1000C 3: First adapter of second EC-1000C 4: Second adapter of second EC-1000C

p

LAN Adapter port

15001: Mandatory port number

r

Radar port

15000: Mandatory port number

f

Number of first serial port

n

Number of serial channels

m

Operating mode

e0

IP address of first client

e1 – e4

IP address of another client

1: First LAN Adapter 9: Second LAN Adapter 8: Mandatory of serial channels 0: Normal operation mode 1: Debug mode First EC-1000C: 10.0.0.184 Second EC-1000C: 10.0.0.185 0.0.0.0

9-11

9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program

9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program 9.4.1 Overview Update the LAN adapter program as well in the case of updating the EC-1000C program. Load the LAN adapter program from the EC-1000C. When the LAN adapter is updated, the registered set values in the LAN adapter will return to default values. Make IP address and parameter settings again. If the EC-1000C and LAN adapter are different from each other in program version, the message “4097 LAN adapter1(2) version error” will appear in the Alarm Queue box.

Incase of; The EC-1000 program was updated.

Incase of; The message "LAN adapter1 (2) version error" is displayed in the Alarm Queue box.

Renewal of LAN adapter program

Preparations for updating (Refer to 9.2 Preparations) - Disconnect the LAN cable from the LAN adapter. - Connect the LAN adapter and EC-1000C over a serial crossing cable. - LAN adapter jumper change: Make J14, J15, J16, and J17 changes.

Start the7188XW program. 1. Finish the Chart Radar. 2. Execute C:\LAN Adapter\Shortcut to 7188WX.EXE 3. Turn on the LAN adapter. 4. The I7188E> prompt appears.

Updating steps 1. 7188E>DEL 2. i7188E>LOAD 3. i7188E>LOAD Æ filename: autoexec.bat 4. [Alt]+[E] 5. i7188E>LOAD 6. [Alt]+[E] Æ filename: sercotr.exe

Refer to 9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings IP address and parameter for the LAN adapter.

Restore the conditions before rebooting.

9-12

9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program

9.4.2 Updating LAN Adapter Program Refer to 9.2 Preparations to connect the LAN adapter and EC-1000C or make setting changes for the LAN adapter. Procedure 1. Finish the Chart radar and start the 7188XW program. To start the 7188XW program, refer to 9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter. 2. Type “sercotr” and press the [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear. The IP address and parameter settings for the LAN adapter are displayed.

3. Type “del” and press the [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear. The message “….. to delete (y/n) ?” will appear. Press the [Y] key.

i7188>del

9-13

9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program

4. The LAN adapter program is deleted. Therefore, only the message “Command not supported !” will appear when “sercotr” is typed after the i7188E> prompt. 5. Type “load” and press [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear. The message “Press ALT_E to down load File !” will appear.

i7188>load

6. Press the [E] key while press the [Alt] key. The item “Input filename:” will appear. Then type “autoexec.bat” and press the [Enter] key.

Type "autoexec.bat" after the item "Input filename:" on the screen.

7. Type “load” and press the [Enter] key after the i7188E> prompt appear. The message “Press ALT_E to down load File !” will appear. 8. Press the [E] key while pressing the [Alt] key. The item “Input filename:” will appear. Then type “sercotr.exe” and press the [Enter] key.

9-14

9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program

9. The last line “Block xx” is counted up. The procedure is finished when “i7188E>” is displayed.

"Block xx" is counted up and "i7188E>" appears.

Failure: If “i7188E>**” is displayed, it means an error occurred. Repeat from step 5.

If "i7188E>**" is displayed, repeat from step 5.

Note: A timeout error will result unless the command is input in and after step 5. The error message “…. NOT enough space to store” will be displayed. Repeat from step 5.

9-15

9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS

9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS Take the following procedure if the LAN adapter does not operate normally, the LAN adapter is not recognized with an error message (e.g., “4059 LAN ADAPTER 1 ERROR”) displayed, or the operating system (OS) of the LAN adapter has been updated. In order to check the OS Version, start 7188XW program, type “ver” after the i7118E>prompt, and press [Enter] key.

Procedure 1. Refer to 9.2 Preparations to connect the LAN adapter and EC-1000C or change settings for the LAN adapter. 1) Turn OFF the EC-1000C and LAN adapter. 2) Connect the EC-1000C (COM1) and LAN adapter (J13) over RS-232C crossing cable. 3) Pull out the LAN cable from the LAN adapter. 4) Change the LAN adapter jumpers: J14=TXP, J15=RXP, J16=GND, and J17=GNG 5) Turn ON the EC-1000C and LAN adapter. 2. Finish the ECDIS. (Display ECAWATCH and execute Shutdown the ECDIS.) 3.

Start Explorer.

9-16

9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS

4. Decompress the data downloaded from the “Notes: Furuno TecNet” and copy all the files in the folder to C: \LANAdapter\. File name: os.bat, e-070124.img、lan.bat IPE1L1.bat, IPE1L2.bat, IPE2L1.bat, and IPE2L2.ba

Contents of the LAN adapter folder

Copied files

5. Double-click and start Shortcut to 7188xw.exe in the LAN adapter folder.

9-17

9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS

6. Press the [F2] key.

7. The name of the executable file can be input. Type “OS.BAT” and press the [Enter] key.

8. Press the [F8] key. The batch file will be transferred to the FLASH_ROM and executed. 9. The batch file will be executed and the message “Press ALT_E to download file!” will be displayed. Press the [E] key while pressing [Alt] key. 10. The name of the OS file can be input. Type “e-070124.img” and press the [Enter] key.

11. The OS will be rewritten in approximately 20 seconds. The OS will be once transferred to the SRAM. If there are no checksum problems, the OS will be written to the FLASH_ROM. 12. On completion of writing the OS, check that the version has been changed with the message “Ver. 2.00 build 002 Jan 24 2007” displayed.

9-18

9.5 Updating LAN Adapter OS

13. Write the LAN adapter program again. Refer to 9.4 Updating LAN Adapter. 14. Make LAN adapter settings. Refer to 9.3 Changing IP Address and Parameter Settings for LAN Adapter. 15. Turn OFF the LAN adapter and restore the conditions to the original state. Be sure to return the jumper settings for the LAN adapter to the previous settings. Refer to 9-3.

9-19

Outline of Network Settings Chapter 10. Network Settings10.1for EC-1000C

10.1 Outline of Network Settings The chart radar has the following two LAN interfaces. - LAN-1: Used for communication between the RPU-016 (ARPA radar) and EC-1000C. - LAN-2: Used for communication between the LAN adapter and EC-1000C. Connect the LAN-1 port of the EC-1000C to the RPU-016 through the HUB-100, and connect the LAN-2 port to the LAN adapter.

LAN-2: LAN adapter port

LAN crossing cable

LAN-1: FAR LAN port LAN crossing cable Note: Either LAN crossing or straight cable is available through the HUB-100.

If No. 1 and No. 2 Chart radars are LAN connected, keep in mind that these Chart radars are different in network IP address set value. Set the following values. Local Area Connection

No.1 Chart radar

No.2 Chart radar

LAN-1 (ARPA radar) LAN-2 (LAN adapter)

172.31.3.33 10.0.0.184

172.31.3.34 10.0.0.185

Reference: When installing EC-1000C program, set the Interface address type for the ChartRadar parameters settings in the No. 1 Chart radar to “Default For First ChartRadar”, and set it in the No. 2 Chart radar to “Default For Second ChartRadar.” Refer to page 8-10 The IP address of the LAN adapter is allocated to the registry of the EC-1000C automatically. If an additional LAN adapter is used, reinstall the EC-1000C program and check Install 2 in the Interface address type. Refer to page 8-10

10-1

10.1 Outline of Network Settings

No.1 Radar: 172.31.3.6

No.2 Radar: 172.31.3.7 No.1 ECDIS LAN1 IF Network: 172.31.3.34

No.1 ECDIS LAN1 IF Network: 172.31.3.33 LAN1

LAN1

LAN2 No.1 ECDIS LAN2 IF Network: 10.0.0.184

No.1 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.194 e0=10.0.0.184

LAN2 No.2 ECDIS LAN2 IF Network: 10.0.0.185

No.2 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.195 e0=10.0.0.184

No.1 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.196 e0=10.0.0.185

Fig. 10.1.1 IP Address Settings

10-2

No.2 LAN adapter: IP=10.0.0.197 e0=10.0.0.185

10.2 Network Settings

10.2 Network Settings 10.2.1 LAN-1 Settings (Communication with ARPA Radar) Procedure 1. Refer to 2-1 and finish the Chart radar, and move to the Windows screen. 1) Press the [Tab] key repeatedly while pressing the [Alt] key until ECAWATCH is selected. 2) Click “Shutdown the Chart Radar” in the ECAWACH screen. 3) Close the Control Head screen. 4) The Windows screen will appear when the [F4] key is pressed while pressing the [Alt] key. 2. Select Settings -> Network Connections -> “Local Area Connection" from the Start menu and open [Properties].

Local Area Connections

Properties

3. Uncheck “Client for Microsoft Networks” and “File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks” in the setting item [This connection uses the following item:].

Uncheck the items

10-3

10.2 Network Settings

4. Select “Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)”, open [Properties], and make IP address and Subnet mask settings. LAN-1

IP address

Subnet mask

Default gateway

No.1 chart radar No.2 chart radar

172.31.3.33 172.31.3.34

255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0

Blank Blank

10-4

10.2 Network Settings

5. Open [Advanced..] in the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) screen and select the [WINS] tag. Check “Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP” in the NetBIOS setting.

Check Disable NetBIOS over TCP/IP.

6. OK ボタンをクリックしていき、Local Area Connection 画面に戻します。

6. Continue clicking OK button to return to the “Local Area Connection” screen.

10-5

10.2 Network Settings

10.2.2 LAN-2 Settings (Communication with LAN Adapter) Take the following procedure after 10.2.1 LAN１ Settings (Communication with ARPA Radar). 1. Select “Local Area Connection 2” and open [Properties]. 2. Check the all the items shown under the title “This connection uses the following items”.

3. Select Internet Protocol(TCP/IP), open Properties, and make IP address and subnet mask settings. LAN-2

IP address

Subnet mask

Default gateway

No.1 chart radar No.2 chart radar

10.0.0.184 10.0.0.185

255.255.0.0 255.255.0.0

Blank Blank

10-6

10.2 Network Settings

4. Open “Advanced”, select the WINS tag, and check “Default” in “NetBIOS setting”.

Check Default.

5. Continue clicking OK to return to the Local Area Connection screen.

10-7

10.2 Network Settings

Reference: Check the Config. of the LAN port Procedure 1. Finish the Chart radar (Refer to Introduction) and open [Start] -> Programs -> Accessories -> Command Prompt.

Program

Accessories

Command Prompt

2. Type "ipconfig /all" after the command prompt and press the [Enter] key. The IP address and subnet mask settings for LAN-1 and LAN-2 can be checked.

EC-1000C (Host)

LAN1

LAN2

10-8

Chapter 11. Location of Parts 11.1 EC-1000C 11.1 EC-1000C

E-Token

Fig. 11.1.1 EC-1000C

CD Drive

Power SW

Keyboard Terminal

FDD

Power ON ＆ HDD LED E-Token

USB

Fig. 11.1.2 FDD, CD Drive

11-1

11.1 EC-1000C

Power Switch

Fig. 11.1.3 Rear side

9p D-sub (CONTROL HEAD)

9p D-sub (COM1 to Monitor)

USB

Keyboard Terminal VGA LAN-2 (LAN Adapter)

LAN-1 (ARPA)

9p D-sub （RADAR Power Switch） Power Switch 5 A Fuse AC IN (100-230 VAC)

DVI

Parallel Port

Fig. 11.1.4 Rear side Connectors

11-2

11.1 EC-1000C

Power Supply unit Memory Card: 512MB (KVR400X64C3A/512) HDD: 40.0GB (MHV2040AC) CD Dｒive/FDD

Fig. 11.1.5 Cover removed

HDD vibration dampener

HDD

HDD cover

Fig. 11.1.6 HDD Cover removed

11-3

11.1 EC-1000C

Dongle

CPU board

Memory Card

Fig. 11.1.7 Inside View-1

24P0092

Fig. 11.1.8 Inside View-2

11-4

11.1 EC-1000C

Memory board x 2

CPU board

Fig. 11.1.9 CPU board: SBC PCG-820

Fig. 11.1.10 CPU board removed

11-5

11.1 EC-1000C

Motherboard

LED (+12 V, +5 V, -12 V, -5 V, +3.3 V)

Fig. 11.1.11 Motherboard

Buzzer

CR-2032 (Lithium battery for BIOS) (more than 3 V)

Fig. 11.1.12 CPU board (1/3)

11-6

11.1 EC-1000C

Fig. 11.1.13 CPU board (2/3)

Fig. 11.1.14 CPU board (3/3)

11-7

11.1 EC-1000C

Reference: new type “EC-1000C” Shielded HDD cable (between HDD and CPU board) , and changed the dongle to USB type.

Dongle (USB type)

11-8

IDE1 from Hard Disk (10)

Connecter from Power supply

Power Connecter for Fan (1)

(2) DVI

11-9

(4)

J2

LAN Adapter LAN1 from Radar (RPU-016)

LAN2 from

VGA

J4

Fig. 11.1.15 SBC PCI-951 or PCG-820

(6) COM2 from Control Head Cable

COM1

J1

KBMS from Front side Keyboard (7)

FDC from Floppy Drive (8) for parallel Port LPT1 (Dongle)

(5) J3 (3) from [Power ON] USB1 from Rear Panel USB2 from Front Panel

IDE2 from CD Drive (9)

11.1 EC-1000C

11.2 RCU-020

11.2 RCU-020

9p D-sub (male)

Fig. 11.2.1 RCU-020

Fig. 11.2.2 RCU-020 Panel

Trackball

Buzzer Board (03P9362) 03P9343

Fig. 11.2.3 RCU-020 with Cover Removed

11-10

11.2 RCU-020

J502 (REMOTE) for RCU-020

J505 (For PROGRAM Update port, Factory use)

J501 (PROCESSOR) for EC-1000C

CR10 (U8 CPU RUN) (Blinks every second.)

Not Used J506 (EMRI) for EMRI Trackpilot

J507 (SYSTEM FAIL)

S36 (DIP SW)

J504: TB

JP1 Open: Write Program Short: Ordinary

1 2 3 4

Function SYSTEM FAIL ALARM (ON: Output from J507) RELAY STATUS (ON: Reversed polarity of the above signal) Not Used Not Used

Fig. 11.2.4 Control Board (03P9343) , A side

Fig. 11.2.5

Fig. 11.2.6 Panel, Rear View

Control Board (03P9343), B side

11-11

11.3 LAN Adapter (EC-1010)

11.3 LAN Adapter (EC-1010) Check the LAN module for operation. Normal mode: ON/OFF every 1 second.

LANmodule (i-7188EX) LAN connection port

Not Used TX1, 3, 4 and 5 LEDs (Check for TX)

J16 J17 J14 J15

RX1 to 8 LEDs (Check for RX)

RS232C port (For Setting port)

D43 (Check for +15VDC) D44 (Check for +5 VDC) CH1 (T/RX)

CH3 (T/RX)

CH5 (T/RX)

CH7 (RX)

CH2 (RX)

CH4 (T/RX)

CH6 (RX)

CH8 (RX)

D42 (Check for +24VDC) Power supply connection terminal (+24 VDC)

RL2 (Any ECDIS alarm) RL1 (Operator fitness)

Fig. 11.3.1 LAN Adapter

11-12

RL3 (Backup navigator)

11.4 B Adapter (EC-1020)

11.4 B Adapter (EC-1020)

LEDs +5V 12ISO +15V +24V IN 1-16 OUT 1-8 LOG GYRO

DC/DC power (+15 VDC)

9pin Dsub (LAN Adapter Connection)

LEDs of ports in operation light up.

Power Input Terminal (+24VDC) & LAN Adapter Connection

GYRO

STI9-12

STO1-4

AIN5, 6 AIN1, 2

STI1-4

A1, 2 out Log

AIN7, 8

STO5-8 STI13-16

AIN3, 4

STI5-8

Fig. 11.4.1 LAN Adapter

11-13

11.5 HUB (HUB-100)

11.5 HUB (HUB-100)

Port Number: 1 to 8 (Lights when in use.) Link/Act FDx/Col 10M/100M

RJ-45 (Auto-MDIX function)

Fig. 11.5.1 HUB-100

Flip up rotary-lock (a) to release lock and remove flat cable.

(a)

03P9364

Fig. 11.5.2 HUB-100 cover removed

11-14

11.6 Monitor (MU-201CE)

11.6 Monitor (MU-201CE) - MU-201CE: 20-inch - MU-231CE: 23-inch

11-15

11.7 RPU-016

11.7 RPU-016

PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-016 4329-0103 25KW . 30KW 1.35

0.85

Fig. 11.7.1 RPU-016 Top View DVI-D Connectors for LCD Display Unit (Both are identical. For Chart Radar, not used.)

F1 100 VAC: 10 A (125 V) 220 VAC: 5 A (250 V) 24 VDC: 20 A (125 V)

LAN Port (RJ45)

Fig. 11.7.2 RPU-016 Bottom View

11-16

11.7 RPU-016

LAN Port (100BASE-T)

Digital Video Output (DVI-D) GND Terminal

Power Supply Terminal

Fig. 11.7.3 Processor Unit, bottom chassis

DVI-RGB I/F Board

DVI-RGB I/F Board Stopper

RGB BUFF (03P9229B)

Hinge ** Possible to separate between bottom and upper chassis.

GC-10 Board (64P1106A, Optional)

Terminal Board (03P9342)

GYRO Input Terminal (Optional)

Fig. 11.7.4 Processor Unit, bottom chassis

11-17

11.7 RPU-016

S1 (Selection of monitor type)

CR4 (Blinks every second.)

CR8 (Blinks every 0.5 second.)

Model FAR-21x7 (MU-201CR) FAR-28x7 (MU-231CR) FAR-21x7-BB FCR-21x7 (MU-201CE) FCR-28x7 (MU-231CE)

1 OFF ON OFF N/A N/A

2 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

3 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF

MAIN CPU (U21)

Mounting part of NET-100

ARPA CPU (U74)

DVI-D J204

S2 Reset SW

DVI-D J205 DRW CPU (U19)

ＴＰ58 (2 Vp-p) R401 (OP Video IN ADJ.: TP58 2 Vp-p)

CR2/CR3 (Always ON) CR5 (Blinks every second.) CR Check for CR2 VCC (+5 V) CR3 3.3 V CR4 MAIN CPU (U21) CR8 ARPA CPU (U74) CR5 DRW CPU (U19)

Fig. 11.7.5 SPU Board (03P9337-33)

11-18

11.7 RPU-016

100BASE-T (RJ-45) CR1 (LED-B) (Blinks when LAN port is used.)

CR2 (LED-A) (Lights when data flows through LAN port.)

** This board is also used in RPU-013 and CU-200.

Fig. 11.7.6 NET-100 Board (03P9332)

11-19

11.7 RPU-016

TP1 to TP4 VR1: Main Inverter Output Adj. Between TP1 and TP2, 34.7 to 35.3 VDC

TP1: Main Inverter Output Voltage (VR1 ADJ.) TP2: SW Reg. Common Line TP3: Sub Inverter SW Freq. (42.75 to 47.25 kHz) TP4: Main Inverter SW Freq. (42.75 to 47.25 kHz)

CR23 (GRN) CR21 (RED) JP1 COM

300 V 500 V

Suffix mark (A or B)

JP1 JP2

A SPEC (12 KW) COM-300 V COM-330 V

B SPEC (25 KW) COM-500 V COM-330 V

JP2 COM

300 V 330 V

Fig. 11.7.7 HV-9017A/B Board

100 VAC: 10 A (125 V) 220 VAC: 5 A (250 V)

Fig. 11.7.8 AC FIL Board (03P9341)

Fuse 20 A

Fig. 11.7.9 DC FIL Bpard (03P9352)

11-20

11.7 RPU-016 Setting of Antenna Rotation 24 rpm: 144 Hz at TPI7 with R168, J161 and J162 opened 42 rpm: 252 Hz at TPI7 with R168, J161 and J162 shorted JP161 (42 rpm) JP162 (42 rpm)

R168 (RT)

TP17 (BP)

TP13 TP14 (32 V)

TP15

R106 J105

TP12 (14 V)

J106

TP16 (5 V) TP11 (12 V） TP18 TP19 J104 CR63 (MTR) CR64 (RF)

TP9

CR65 (Tx-HV)

TP2(PR0V)

J103 R48 (45 kHz) TP-1 (S-5V) CR23 (IN-ER) TP3 (PR12 V)

R88

TP4 (PR5 V) TP5 (PR5 V)

TP7

R21 (OVER) TP6

J101

J108 220 VAC: No jumper 100 VAC: Jumpers between 1-2, 4-7 and 5-8

CR63: ANT Motor Over current CR64: ANT24 V Over current CR65: TX-HVOver current CR23: Input Over/Low-Voltage Board Name 03P9339A 03P9339B 03P9339C 03P9339D

Fig. 11.7.10 AC PWR Board, 03P9339A/B/C/D

11-21

Power Supply 100 VAC 100 VAC 220 VAC 220 VAC

Antenna speed 24 rpm 42 rpm 24 rpm 42 rpm

11.7 RPU-016

J652: PWR

J654: SPU J653: PSU

J651（HV） - 12kW: 310-350 V - 25kW: 520-580 V J613: SCANNER J609: IF VIDEO

J601: RS-232C (9P D-SUB)

J614: CARD I/F J615: OPTION J616: From Master

J610:SCANNER

J617: To Slave_1

J602: KEY J604:PSU

J618: To Slave 2

J605:HEADING (IEC-61162-2)

J656 J619: ECDIS

J603: GC-10 J611: AIS J606: NAVIGATOR

J655

J622: KEY J620: TRACK CONTROL

J607: LOG

J621: SERIAL I/F

J608: AD CONVERTER

J612: EXT ALARM

J656: HEADING(IEC-61162-2) Selection of 110-ohm terminator on HDG Data line. (Default: Jumper between 1 and 2; terminated) J655: AIS (IEC-61162-2) Selection of 110-ohm terminator in AIS Data line. (Default: Jumper between 1 and 2; terminated)

Fig. 11.7.11 TB Board (03P9342)

11-22

11.8 Scanner Unit

11.8 Scanner Unit 11.8.1 X-Band (2 Unit type)

Performance Monitor (PM-31) Antenna

Fig. 11.8.1 Scanner Unit (RSB-096 with PM-31)

11-23

11.8 Scanner Unit

FAN: 24VDC Internal heat is agitated.

J921: Tx_HV RTR-079（25 kW）

VR1 (Power) This hole is used to access VR1 on MD board （03P9244A/B） for magnetron current adjustment at factory.

Fig. 11.8.2 Scanner Unit with Cover Removed (1)

IF AMP: 03P9335A

PM-31 Connection

J92 (HV)

Fig. 11.8.3 Scanner Unit with Cover Removed (2)

11-24

11.8 Scanner Unit

O-Ring

Rotary Joint

Guide Pin Hole

Guide Pin Hole

Fig. 11.8.4 Antenna Bracket

PM-31 Antenna （03P9361）

PM-31/B3RX1626

Fig. 11.8.5 PM-31

11-25

11.8 Scanner Unit

Motor Brush Holder (x2)

Motor Brush (MG120-5x6x11) (When bush wears to white line, it must be replaced.)

Motor Type D8G-516 D8G-571

Antenna Speed 24 rpm 42 rpm

Scanner Unit RSB-096 RSB-097

Fig. 11.8.6 Antenna Motor

Magnet for Heading Lead Switch

Antenna Turning Gear Gear Retainer

Rotary Joint

Fig. 11.8.7 Antenna Motor Gear

11-26

11.8 Scanner Unit

Heading Lead SW

J916 (HD/B.P)

B.P GEN board (03P9347) IF AMP Board OUTPUT Terminal

J918: FAN 24V RT TB Board (03P9349) J914: ANT 24V J915: Tx_HV TB803

TB80

J917 (FAR-2837SW: RTR-082) TB-804 (Antenna Motor Power Supply)

Fig. 11.8.8 Antenna Terminal Board

B.P GEN board (03P9347)

Antenna Drive Gear

Fig. 11.8.9 Antenna Drive Gear

11-27

11.8 Scanner Unit

RFC Board (03P9346A)

Circulator

Diode Limiter

IF Board (03P9335A)

PWR(RF) Board - 03P9348A: 12 kW - 03P9348B: 25 kW MIC: RU-9601

Fig. 11.8.10a RTR-079 (25 kW)

Fig. 11.8.10b RTR-079 (25 kW)

11-28

11.8 Scanner Unit

Common use: RTR-078/079

IFAMP OUT （J823）

J3 1. Mag.Cur 3. GND

03P9346-33A and after; Added 2P connector

Fig. 11.8.11 RFC Board (03P9346-00A)

CR9 (Blinks every second, CPU (U19) operations)

Mag. Heater Volt ADJ.：（J833-#11） R28 (Maｇ. H)

マグネトロン MG5439

R32 (Mag. L) J833 R62（ADJ） （MIC TUNNIING, +32 V at J833#6）

マグネトロン MG4010 or MAF1425B

- 03P9348A: 12 kW - 03P9348B: 25 kW - 03P9348C: 30 kW （S-Band） R57 (-12 V at J833-#1)

Fig. 11.8.12 PWR(RF) Board (03P9348)

11-29

11.8 Scanner Unit

J823 (IF Output)

J824 (IF Output)

Fig. 11.8.13 IF AMP Board (03P9335A)

60 MHz IF Output

VR1 (Power) Used to adjust magnetron current at factory.

Fig. 11.8.14 MD Board (03P9244A/B)

11-30

03P9244A: X band 10 kW 03P9244B: X band 25 kW 03P9244E: S band 30 kW

11.8 Scanner Unit

MD Board （03P9244B）

Pulse Transformer (RT9023) Magnetron (MG5436)

Fig. 11.8.15 RTR-079 (25 kW)

MD Board （03P9244A）

Magnetron (MG4010 or MAF1425B)

Pulse Transformer (RT9025)

Fig. 11.8.16 RTR-078 (10 kW)

11-31

11.8 Scanner Unit

11.8.2 S-Band (2 Unit type)

Performance Monitor Antenna Antenna Motor (SW) Cable Gland

Fig. 11.8.17 RSB-098

IF AMP Board (03P9335B) with shield cover removed

MIC (RU-9427) TB Board (03P9349A) Antenna Motor (RM-7398)

Fig. 11.8.18 RSB-098 with Cover Removed

11-32

11.8 Scanner Unit

TB Board (03P9349A)

Fig. 11.8.19 RSB-098 with TB Board Removed

Performance Monitor Antenna

PM-51

Diode Limiter

Fig. 11.8.20 RSB-098 with MIC Removed

11-33

11.8 Scanner Unit

Antenna Motor Power Supply Terminal

RFC Board (03P9346-33A)

Fig. 11.8.21 RSB-098 with Cover Removed

MSS-7497 Board

PWR (RF) Board (03P9348C)

Fig. 11.8.22 RSB-098 with RFC Board Chassis Removed

11-34

11.8 Scanner Unit

MD Board （03P9244E）

Magnetron (MG5223F)

Pulse Transformer (RT9273)

Fig. 11.8.23 RSB-098 with Shield Cover Removed

Magnetron Cooling Fan

Fig. 11.8.24 RSB-098 with Magnetron Removed

11-35

11.8 Scanner Unit

Antenna Motor SW

Circulator

Fig. 11.8.25 RSB-098 with Pulse Mounting Chassis Removed Transformer and MD Board

Ｂ.Ｐ ＧEN Board (03P9347)

Fig. 11.8.26 RSB-098, Rotary Joint

11-36

11.8 Scanner Unit

Antenna Motor Mounting Plate MD Board

Antenna Motor

(MSS-7497 Board Removed) TB Board

Fig. 11.8.27 RSB-098 Antenna Motor

11-37

11.9 Radar Console

11.9 Radar Console 600

- CCN-003 (23-inch Display) - CCN-004 (20-inch Display) * The dimension of both consoles is the same.

1100 960

570

Fig. 11.9.1 CCN-003

Fig. 11.9.2 CCN-004

11-38

11.9 Radar Console

RPU-016

EC-1000C

Fig. 11.9.3 Cover Removed

Fig. 11.9.4 Cover (Rear panel) Removed

RPU-016

Mounting part of B-Adapter

LAN-Adapter

Wiring

Fig. 11.9.5 EC-1000C with Cover Removed

11-39

11.9 Radar Console

Fig. 11.9.6 EC-1000C Removed

HUB-100 PSU-008

PR-62

Fig. 11.9.7 EC-1000C, Top View

11-40

11.9 Radar Console

Fig. 11.9.8 Console, bottom view

11-41

Checking LAN Connections Chapter 12. 12.1 Maintenance

12.1 Checking LAN Connections

No.2 FCR-2xx7

No.1 FCR-2xx7

•RPU-016: 172.31.3.7 •EC-1000C LAN-1: 172.31.3.34 •EC-1000C LAN-2: 10.0.0.185 •No.1 LAN Adapter: 10.0.0.196 •No.2 LAN Adapter: 10.0.0.197

LAN IP: 172.31.3.6

LAN-1 IP: 172.31.3.33 LAN-1 LAN-2 IP: 10.0.0.184

LAN-1

LAN-2

No.1 LAN Adapter IP: 10.0.0.194 Option

Option

CH4

Note: LAN cables Since the HUB-100 has the MDIX function, either cross or straight cables can be used for LAN connections. If the HUB-100 is not used, use cross cables for LAN connections.

B Adapter

No.2 LAN Adapter IP: 10.0.0.195

Fig. 12.1.1 Typical LAN Connection

12-1

12.1 Checking LAN Connections

12.1.1 Checking LEDs 1. LED for EC-1000C Make sure that the LED (green) in the LAN connector for the EC-1000C is blinking. If the LED is not blinking, this trouble does not result from IP address setting, but from electrical defect. For example, a defect in LAN cable or machine failure is supposed.

LAN-2: 10M bps (LAN Adapter) Green (data): Blinking / Orange: OFF

LAN-１: 100M bps (RPU-016) Green (data): Blinking / Orange: Lit

2. LEDs on HUB-100 LEDs of ports connected to LAN light up or blinking.

3. LEDs on NET-100 of RPU-016

100BASE-T (RJ-45)

NET-100

CR1 (LED-B): (Blinking while LAN is connected)

CR2 (LED-A): (Blink when data exist on LAN)

12-2

12.1 Checking LAN Connections

12.1.2 Ping Command You can check the connections of LAN Adapter, RPU-016 and EC-1000C to LAN by using the Ping command. If you receive no response from the destination, check IP addresses. Procedure 1. Referring information on page 2-1, exit the Chart Radar, and then select [Start] -> Programs -> Accessories -> Command Prompt to open the window Command Prompt.

Programs

Accessories

Command Prompt

2. For example, to check LAN connection to No. 1 LAN Adapter of No. 1 FCR, type the IP address of No. 1 LAN Adapter in the Ping command following C:¥ ----------- >. In other words, typing “Ping 10.0.0.194”, and then pressing [Enter] key will display response from the destination. Unit

RPU-016

IP address

Remark

No.1 Chart Radar No.2 Chart Radar No.3 IMO Radar

172.31.3.6 172.31.3.7 172.31.3.8

No.4 IMO Radar

172.31.3.9

Make Radar No. setting on the RPU-016 side. ([Menu] -> INITIALIZE-> INSTALLATION -> RADAR NO)

No.1 LAN Adapter No.2 LAN Adapter No.3 LAN Adapter No.2 EC-1000C No.4 LAN Adapter No.1 EC-1000C LAN 1 Port No.1 EC-1000C LAN 2 Port No.2 EC-1000C LAN 1 Port No.2 EC-1000C LAN 2 Port No.1 EC-1000C

10.0.0.194 10.0.0.195 10.0.0.196 10.0.0.197 172.31.3.33 10.0.0.184 172.31.3.34 10.0.0.185

12-3

Make IP setting of LAN Adapter. For detail, see page 9-7. Make network settings of LAN-1 and -2 Ports. For detail, see pages 8-10 and 10-3.

12.1 Checking LAN Connections

Note: Even with “Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA communication (LAN)” Connected parameter in the Installation Parameter menu set to “NO”, LAN connection statuses can be checked by using the Ping command. In other words, when LAN is connected, “Reply” will be made from the RPU-016.

Case-1) LAN is connected to the RPU-016: OK

Reply from 172.31.3.6 Reply from the RPU-016 (172.31.3.6) has been received.

Case-2) LAN is not connected to the RPU-016: NG (Disconnect/IP Error)

Destination host unreachable

12-4

12.1 Checking LAN Connections

Case-3) LAN is connected to the LAN Adapter: OK

Reply from 10.0.0.194 Reply from the LAN Adapter (10.0.0.194) has been received.

Case-4) LAN is not connected to the LAN Adapter: NG (IP Error)

Request timed out

12-5

12.1 Checking LAN Connections

Case-5) LAN is not connected to the LAN Adapter: NG (LAN Disconnect)

Hardware error

Reference: To check the configuration of the LAN port of EC-1000C, type “ipconfig /all”. For detail, see page 10-8.

12-6

12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter

12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter 12.2.1 LAN-Adapter (EC-1010)

Check the LAN module for operation Normal mode: ON/OFF every 1 second

LAN module (i-7188EX)

LAN connection port

Not used

J16

TX1, 3, 4, 5 LED (Check for TX)

J17 J14 J15

RX1-8 LED (Check for RX)

RS232C port (Setting port)

D43 (Check for +15VDC)

D44 (Check for +5VDC) CH1 (T/RX)

CH3 (T/RX)

CH5 (T/RX)

CH7 (RX)

CH2 (RX)

CH4 (T/RX)

CH6 (RX)

CH8 (RX)

D42 (Check for +24VDC) Power supply connection terminal (+24VDC)

RL2* (Any ECDIS alarm) RL1∗ (Operator fitness)

Fig. 12.2.1 LAN Adapter

12-7

RL3∗ (Backup navigator)

12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter

1. LEDs in LAN-Adapter LED

Function

D34 D41 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40

RX1 RX2 RX3 RX4 RX5 RX6 RX7 RX8

D49

RL1

D50

RL2

D51

RL3

D45 D46 D47 D48 D42 D43 D44

TX1 TX3 TX4 TX5 +24V +15V +5V

Operation

Remark

This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH1. This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH2. This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH3. This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH4. This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH5. This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH6. This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH7. This LED lights up by input signal of RX CH8. 1st LAN-Adapter: Operator fitness 2nd LAN-Adapter: Waypoint approach 1st LAN-Adapter: Any ECDIS alarm: 2nd LAN-Adapter: Outside channel limit 1st LAN-Adapter: Backup navigator: 2nd LAN-Adapter: Depth below limit This LED lights up by output signal of TX CH1. This LED lights up by output signal of TX CH3. This LED lights up by output signal of TX CH4. This LED lights up by output signal of TX CH5. This LED is used to check +24V power supply output. This LED is used to check +15V power supply output. This LED is used to check +5V power supply output.

J1:TX/RX J2: RX J3:TX/RX J4:TX/RX J5:TX/RX J6: RX & RL1 J7: RX & RL2 J8: RX & RL3 J6: RX & RL1 J7: RX & RL2 J8: RX & RL3 J1:TX/RX J3:TX/RX J4:TX/RX J5:TX/RX

Note: 1. The LEDs RX1 to RX8 are used to check whether or not signal is input and have nothing to do with the setting of the Connected parameter in the Installation Parameter menu to Yes or No. To check input data, see page 12-14. 2. For detail of the functions RL1 to RL3, see page 5-10. 3. To check output data on TX1 to TX5, see page 12-14.

2. LEDs on LAN Module Normal mode : ON/OFF every 1 second LAN-Adapter program mode : ON rapidly

3. Jumper setting Jumper

Factory set value

J14

TXD1 side

Setting for setting change (Program mode) TXP side

J15

RXD1 side

RXP side

J16

Between INIT and INT H

Between INIT and GND

J17

Between CTS1 and CTS1 H

Between CTS1 and GND

12-8

12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter

12.2.2 B Adapter (EC-1020)

LEDs +5V 12ISO +15V +24V IN 1-16 OUT 1-8 LOG GYRO

DC/DC Power supply (+15VDC)

DC/DC Power supply (+5V, +12VDC)

9pin Dsub (LAN Adapter connection)

The LEDs of ports in operation light up.

ALM

OUTPUT

RL8 ------------------------------ -RL1 Power supply connection terminal (+24VDC) & LAN Adapter connection

GYRO

AIN5, 6

STO1-4

STI9-12 AIN1, 2

STI1-4

A1, 2 out Log

AIN7, 8

STO5-8 STI13-16

AIN3, 4

STI5-8

Fig. 12.2.2 B Adapter

12-9

12.2 Checking LAN Adapter and B-Adapter

1. LEDs in B-Adapter +5V 12ISO GND +15V − − − 24V STI IN 1 STI IN 2 STI IN 3 STI IN 4 STI IN 5 STI IN 6 STI IN 7 STI IN 8

+5V power supply display +12V power supply display Power supply display +15V power supply display Received message indicator (Flashing every 1 second) Normally ON Software RUN (Blinking rapidly) +24V power supply display

EXT Navigation Equipment Status

STI IN 9 ALM ACK STI IN 10 BUZZER STOP STI IN 11 STI IN 12 STI IN13 Not used STI IN 14 STI IN 15 STI IN 16 ALM OUT 1

Not used

ALM OUT 2 ALM OUT 3 ALM OUT 4 ALM OUT 5 ALM OUT 6 ALM OUT 7 ALM OUT 8

Route monitor: Outside Channel Limit Route monitor: Way point approach Echo sounder below limit Backup navigation ALM Navigation sensor ALM Operator fitness Any ECDIS ALM

LOG

Forward Astern

GYRO

Reference Phase 3 Phase 2 Phase 1

12-10

12.3 Checking LAN Signal

12.3 Checking LAN Signal Press the [TAB] key while pressing the [Alt] key on the keyboard to select “LANINS”. The “LANINS: display 0 (Press S, D, or C)” screen will appear.

Every time the [TAB] key is pressed, the icon of application to be executed is changed. LANINS

Pressing the D or S key will change items to be displayed. 1. List of operation keys - D and S: Used to change display items (change to the previous or the next page). - F and G: Used to change display contents of the item selected (change to the previous or the next page). - T: Used to select Tx or Rx data. - P: Used to turn ON or OFF the screen pause. - R: Used to move to the first and last display contents of the item selected. - C: Used to clear display contents. - X: Used to close the TX Channel. - J: Used to select mode for SIO Diagnostic. - H: Used to select mode for SIO Diagnostic.

12-11

12.3 Checking LAN Signal

2. List of display items The following section lists display items. Terms inside the parentheses represent valid operation keys for item selected. A description below an item represents the contents of the relevant item, respectively. 1.

Display 0 (Press S, D, or C)

2.

Nav. Equipment (Press S, D, or C)

3.

Kalman (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Kalman, Kalman 16 to Kalman 1

4.

Gyro (Press S, D, or C)

5.

Log (Press S, D, or C)

6.

Position (Press S, D, or C)

7.

Weather (Press S, D, or C)

8.

Analog (Press S, D, or C)

9.

Propulsion & Rudder & Engine (Press S, D, or C)

10. Draught & Alarms & AMWSS Basic (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Basic, Alarm Relay counters, Relays 11. Steering (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Basic, TrackLogic, TurnLogic, CurvedEBL, AlarmProcvess, Drift, Radius for Rout 12. Trackpilot (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Basic, 7, Radius for Rout, Transfer to Local, Prigram Track, CurvedEBL, Position prosess, Process 13. ARPA/Radar Overlay (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, Radar Pverlay Translate table, Antenna ID from ARPA radar, ARPA target source 14. ARPA Comm (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Basic, Chart Align, User Chart, Not Exe, ARPA Frees process, LANdll targets part2, Comm Err, LANdll targets part2, Msg to FURUNO 15. Reftgt (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Basic, Process, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 1, Gyro Corr 16. Lanins Message ch1 RX (Press S, D, F, G, T, P, R, X or C) F/G --> Ch32 RX(TX)∼Ch1 RX(TX), LANserial INS RX(TX), LANserial ARPA4 RX(TX) to LANserial ARPA1 RX(TX)

12-12

12.3 Checking LAN Signal

17. Lanins Protocol (Press S, D, F, G, T, P or C) F/G --> Show alive msg, Shown version PAUSED, Use of UDP blocks PAUSED, UDP blocks for priority 4 Adapter 1 to UDP blocks for priority 0 Adapter 1, Protocol 15, Protocol 14, Shown all receive, Shown all send, Shown host msg, LAN ADAPTER SHARING, Shown alive, Build config, 18. Radar Overlay (Press S, D or C) 19. Route Monitor (Press S, D or C) 20. SIO diagnostic (Press S, D, F, G, H, J, X or C) F/G --> Chl 18 Mode 0 to Chl 1 Mode 0 21. AIS (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Safety msg, RPC clients, Unkown msg, Target details, DeadRec process, Freeze process, Received msg, Basic, 15, 14, 13, Target List, Guard Zone, Fusion, Harmonized Safety msg, Own vessel 22. SpeedPilot (Press S, D or C) 23. INS connections (Press S, D or C) 24.

SIO386 Development Debug Msg (Press S, D or C)

25. INS connections 1 (Press S, D or C) 26. INS connections 2 (Press S, D or C) 27. ECRif INS (Press S, D or C) 28. IMO arpa (Press S, D, F, G or C) F/G --> Basic, Uchart line 41..60, Uchart line 21..40, Uchart line 1..20, Uchart symbols, Route sync

12-13

12.3 Checking LAN Signal

3. Verifying data on RX Channel of LAN Adapter For example, to check sentenses input from GPS when GPS is connected to the CH1 of LAN Adapter, select “Lanins Messages Ch1 RX”. Data on the channel 1 can be verified in real time. Setting the Channel Connection (Connected) parameter in the Installation Parameter menu to “No” will display nothing even if data are input. Reference-1; Example of data on LANINS: Lanins Messages Ch (with GPS connected)

RX data

Reference-2; Example of data on LANINS: AIS (Displayed regardless of whether the AIS Function is set to ON or OFF)

12-14

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C Procedure for putting EC-1000C into Selftest mode Select [Main menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS (Bar menu) -> Selftest, and then press OK. The SELF TEST screen will appear. Click on a test item to start the relevant test.

1. Version Numbers Used to display installed program versions. - EC-1000C : 05.xx 05.xx The EC-1000C program number appears on the right-hand side, while the LAN Adapter program number appears on the left-hand side. Normally, the same number appears on each side. - ARPA CPU : 0359204-02.xx The program of SPU board of the RPU-016 appears. - ARPA RFC : 0359202-01.xx The program of RFC board of the RF unit appears. - Control Head : 359203-01.xx The program of RCU-020, RCU-016, and RCU-015FEA appears.

12-15

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

2. Analog This test is conducted to check suitability for reading the input signal and analog signal of the B-Adapter. Unless the “B-Adapter connected” parameter out of General setting in the Installation Parameter menu is set to “Yes”, this test becomes invalid and all items are left blank. For example, even if a short circuit is established between ST11 and GND, the items will be left blank. 1. STI1 to STI16: When status input (STI) checked by the B-Adapter is connected to GND, the status turns ON from OFF, thus indicating that the input of the relevant terminal has been read. The status inputs can be also checked by the LEDs (IN 1 to 16) in the B-Adapter. 2. A1IN to A8IN: These items display analog voltages input in the B-Adapter. With nothing connected to the B-Adapter, the voltages fluctuate in the range of ±0.00 to 0.07V. Since applying an analog voltage to AxIN to check will display the corresponding voltage, it turns out that an analog signal of the relevant terminal has been read.

3. Alarm This test is conducted to check suitability for the alarm output control of the LAN Adapter (RL1 to 3) and the B-Adapter (STO1 to 8). STO1 to STO8 outputs of the B-Adapter are not displayed unless the “B-Adapter connected” parameter out of General setting in the Installation Parameter menu is set to “Yes”.

12-16

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

1) STO1 to STO8: Setting the radio button to ON/OFF will turn ON/OFF the corresponding STO (status output) of the B-Adapter. The status outputs can be also checked by the LEDs (OUT 1 to 8) in the B-Adapter. 2) 1/RL3 to 1/RL1: Setting the radio button to ON/OFF will turn ON/OFF the corresponding RT output of the LAN-Adapter. The status outputs can be also checked by the LEDs in the LAN-Adapter. (LED D49 -> RL1, LED D50 -> RL2, LED D51 -> RL3)

Set the radio button to ON/OFF

LAN Adapter RL1 to RL3 and their check LEDs

B-Adapter STO1 to STO8 check LEDs

LED (OUT 1-8)

12-17

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

4. CPU and Memory This test is conducted to display CPU and memory information.

5. Display Clicking on an item selected will clear the Display menu from the screen and display the relevant item on the whole screen. To display the Display menu, put the pointer outside the Display menu display area. See next page.

12-18

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

Draw each item in the specified color. To clear the drawing, click Clear.

Draw each item by the specified line. To clear the drawing, click Clear.

Draw each item by changing the intensity of the specified color. To clear the drawing, click Clear.

12-19

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

6. Drivers This test is conducted to display Information on Hard, Floppy, and CD-ROM drives available.

7. Network This test is conducted to display Information on Network adapter and protocol available.

12-20

12.4 Selftest on EC-1000C

8. Control Head Pressing any of the keys will cause the display corresponding to the key to respond. Check EBL, VRM, GAIN A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, BRLL, trackball, and scroll wheel with increase or decrease of the relevant figure. In addition, this test includes the following tests. 1) ALARM BUZZER ON/OFF: This test is conducted to check ON/OFF of the alarm buzzer. To check that, click the ALARM BUZZER key displayed. 2) SYSTEM FAILURE OFF: This test is conducted to check the system failure buzzer. Pressing the SYSTEM FAILURE key will output the system failure buzzer after a lapse of 30 seconds. Pressing the SYSTEM FAILURE key again will stop the buzzer sounding. Reference: The System Failure signal is output at normal close contact interlocking with the System Failure signal between #1 and #2 of J507 of the operation unit (RCU-020).

9. Exit Test Used to exit the test mode. This display returns to the Mode screen from which the Selftest was commenced.

12-21

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit To conduct the Selftest on the Radar side, connect the Monitor unit to the RPU-016: Radar Processor unit. For the Motor unit, it is only needed to change the connection. Do not disconnect LANs connected between EC-1000C and LAN Adapter, and EC-1000C and RPU-016. Note: Connection between the [RADAR UNIT] port of the EC-1000C and the [KEY] connector of the RPU-016 is made for the power supply switch signal of the RPU-016. Since the RCU-014 is connected to the [KEY] connector, even if the power supply of RCU-020 is turned ON, that of the RPU-016 will not be turned ON. Turn ON/OFF the power supply from each processor unit.

Change wiring. DVI TB board: KEY RADAR UNIT Disconnect wiring

DVI-1

DVI

CONTROL HEAD

RPU-016 Power ON

Add RCU-014.

XH 10P

KEY TXD_B KEY TXD_A KEY RXD_B KEY RXD_A PWR SW GND +12V GND SYS_FAIL_H SYS_FAIL_C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

9 Pin D-sub Female 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

KEY TXD_B KEY TXD_A KEY RXD_B KEY RXD_A PWR SW GND +12V GND NC

Reference: To connect the RCU-020 to the RPU-016, use the “9pin D-sub (Male) XH10P” conversion adapter manufactured as shown on the left.

The Selftest has two functions. One is to be conducted from the normal operation. The other is a factory test entering from Option Menu. The contents of these tests are the same as those of the FAR-2xx7 series. This Manual describes Selftest needed to perform minimum maintenance. For detail, refer to information in the Service Manual of the FAR-2xx7 series.

12-22

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

12.5.1 Normal Selftest Procedure 1. Select [MENU] -> 9 -> 8 -> 2 ->2: START to conduct the Selftest. 2. An alarm will sound and the screen shown below will appear. This screen is used to check program number, the monitor of the processor unit and RF unit, and keys.

SPU RFC KEY REMOTE1 REMOTE2 CARD

PROGRAM No.

ROM

RAM

DIP SW

0359204-02.xx 0359202-01.xx 0359203-01.xx 0359203-01.xx 0359203-01.xx 0359209-01.01

OK OK OK

OK OK OK

0100

* * * * * *

* * * * * *

PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR -12V 3.3V 5V 12V SCANNER MOTOR

0

0

0

* * * *

-12V 3.2 4.8 12.0 22.5

RF UNIT MONITOR TEMPERATURE TUNE IND HV R.MONITOR MAG CURRENT HEATER 12V -12V 5V 32V TUNE OUT TRIGGER FREQ ANT SPEED 0

Check the program number, ROM/RAM, and DIP switch.

PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR

33.2   1.3 517.4   1.4   2.5   4.1 11.9 -11.5   4.8

RF UNIT MONITOR

 31.6  15.0 1058 22.3 0

0

0

0

28

0

88

0

ARPA CPU DISPLAY To quit press [F1] key twice

Typical Selftest Monitor Screen

3. To proceed to the next screen, press the [F1] key twice.

12-23

Key check

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

4. The screen shown below will appear. Pressing the [F1] key again will make it possible to check input sentences on the second page.



   GGA      GLL RMC RMB VTG ZDA DTM BWR BWC    GGA GLL RMC RMB VTG ZDA DTM BWR BWC     VBW VHW VDR     HDT     WPL RTE MWV   ECMWV, , T, , N, V*2A VWT VWR DPT     ECDPT, , *46 DBT  DBS MTW VDM

[F1]

   VDO VDM    ZDA        ECZDA, 0601156.15.24, 01, 2008, 000, 00*4C GGA GLL         ECGLL, 3444.458, N, 13521.259, E, , A, A*5F OSD        ECOSD, 000.0, A, 025.8, P, 00.1, P, , , N, 00.0, V*2B DPT         ECDPT , , *46 MWV       ECMWV, , T, , V*2A DTM        ECDTM, W84, , 00.000, S, 00.000, E, -000.0, W84*4E FUGLL     FUGLL, 3444.481, N, 143521.258, E, A, 000.0*28 PAESP     PAESP, V, 0000.000, 000.0*1D PAESC     PAESC, , , , , , , , , N*26 PAESF PLSPL      PLSPL, , , , , , , , , , 999, *46 PLSPS     PLSPS, , , , , 999, , *59 PAESW    PAESW, , , , , , 6, , ,V*1C PAESN    

There are no restrictions on the display of input sentences depending on versions.

To quit  press [F1] key

To quit  press [F1] key

Typical Selftest NMEA Check Screen

5. After the completion of this check, press the [F1] key to return to the Selftest main menu screen. Display of program numbers

Selftest Items Display of program numbers The same program is available for any model of radars, such as S band or X band radar.

Display of program numbers Display SPU RFC KEY REMOTE 1 REMOTE 2 CARD

Program number PROCESSOR UNIT (SPU BOARD: MAIN、ARPA、DRAW CPU) 0359204-02.xx TRANSCEIVER UNIT (RFC BOARD: RFC CPU) 0359202-01.xx STANDARD CONTROL UNIT: RCU-020 0359203-01.xx TRACKBALL UNIT: RCU-015FEA REMOTE CONTROL UNIT:RCU-016 CARD I/F UNIT: CU-200 0359209-01.xx Available program

12-24

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

ROM/RAM, DIP Switches ROM and RAM are checked when the Selftest and factory test are conducted. RAM is checked by the Read/Write function, while ROM is checked by the Check-sum function. Important: DIP Stitches DIP switches are used to display the set status of the SPU board: S1. For the Chart radar specification, the DIP switch S1-#3 must be set to ON. Setting it to OFF will disable the function as Chart radar. Furthermore, “Connection Lost ARPA CPU” error is displayed on the EC-1000C side. However, since LAN is connected, position data from the EC-1000C can be received, and further HDG data from the RPU-016 are output to the EC-1000C side. S1 #1 #2 #3 #4

FCR-21x7 (MU-201CE): SXGA OFF (N/A) OFF (N/A) ON Not used

FCR-28x7 (MU-231CE): UXGA ON (N/A) OFF (N/A) ON Not used

Note: For example, if “0100” is displayed, S1-#3 is set to ON and other DIP switches are set to OFF. In other words, S1-#1 represents the rightmost DIP switch, and “0” means that the switch is in the OFF state.

S1 (DIP SW)

Arrangement of DIP Switches on CU-200/SPU Board

12-25

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR This is a voltage monitor for the Processor Unit RPU-016.

Processor Unit Monitor Circuit Diagram Displays on Processor Unit Monitor Display

Description

Used to display −12V output from the 3-pin power supply on the PWR board. Used to display 3.3V output, which is generated by converting 5V output from the PWR 3.3V board through the SPU board. 5V Used to display 5V output from the PWR board, which is set within the range of ±5%. Used to display 12V output from the PWR board, which is regulated within the range of 12V ±5% by R26. Used to display ANT MOTOR voltage output from the PWR board if the Antenna motor is designed for 24V. The Antenna motor power supply incorporates a feedback circuit that detects Antenna motor revolutions to keep the revolutions constant. Consequently, the voltage values vary with wind pressure received by the Antenna or voltage drops SCANNER caused by the Antenna cable. The voltages normally range from 21V to 27V. MOTOR Note: 24V Antenna motor power supply output from the PWR board of the RPU-016 is also output from both S- and X-band Radars. However, since the S-band Radar does not use this power supply on the Antenna side, an approximately 0V voltage is displayed. -12V

RF UNIT MONITOR This is a monitor of voltages detected by the transceiver unit. Monitor values are detected under the current set conditions such as range and pulse width, and thereby TRIGGER FREQ and MAG CURRENT monitor values and others vary with ranges. TEMP OUT AD

U20 TEMP sensor

RU IF

RFC p.c.,b

R.MON(D MON)  AD

MIC TUNE

A/D TUNE IND AD

Antenna

IF AMP p.c.b

TUNE

From/To SPU pc.b 32V AD 12V AD -12V AD

PWR p.c.b

U19: Gate Arrey

5V AD HEATER AD

TRIGGER 1-4

Mag.

MD p.c.b MAG CURRENT (MAG CURRENT LVL)  AD HV(HV PROTECT) AD

Pulse  Transformer

HD/BP   GEN p.c.b

ANT SPEED(B.P)

Transceiver Unit Monitor Circuit Diagram

12-26

U17: RFC CPU

RF RXD RF TXD

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

Displays on Transceiver Unit Monitor Display

Description

TEMPERATURE Used to detect the temperature of the RFC board. Used to display TUNE detected voltage output from the IF AMP board. This TUNE IND voltage is used to Tune indicator the display unit. Used to display HV voltage output from the TX-HV board of the processor unit. HV This voltage is applied to magnetron. 10kW: 310 to 350V, 25kW or more: 520 to 580V R.MONITOR Used to display Di monitor voltage from MIC. MAG CURRENT Used to display magnetron current. HEATER Used to display magnetron heater voltage output from the RF PWR board. 12V Used to display 12V voltage output from the RF PWR board. -12V Used to display −12V voltage output from the RF PWR board. 5V Used to display 5V voltage output from the RF PWR board. Used to display 32V voltage output from the RF PWR board. 32V This voltage is used as power supply for the tune circuit of MIC. TUNE OUT Used to display TUNE controlled voltage of MIC. This voltage varies with MIC. TRIGGER Used to display transmit trigger frequency. This frequency varies from 450 Hz to FREQ 3,000 Hz with pulse width or range. Used to find antenna motor revolutions from bearing pulse detected by the H.D/B.P board. ANT SPEED The revolutions come to 24/42 rpm at the X band and 21/26/45 rpm at the S band, which varies with the type of gearbox.

Examples of actual measurement ** FAR-2x27, 2827W **

TUNE IND R MONITOR MAG CURRENT HEATER TUNE OUT

L: 48NM 1.6 3.9 4.6 1.4 16.0

M2: 6NM 1.6 3.9 3.6 1.4 16.0

M1: 3NM 1.5 3.9 2.8 1.7 16.3

S2: 1.5NM 0.7 3.9 2.5 1.7 16.2

S1: 0.125NM 1.0 3.9 1.9 1.7 16.2

M2: 6NM 1.7 4.3 3.9 1.5 10.0

M1: 3NM 1.6 4.3 3.2 1.5 10.1

S2: 1.5NM 1.4 4.3 2.7 1.8 10.1

S1: 0.125NM 2.6 4.3 2.0 1.8 9.8

** FAR-2x37S, 2837SW **

TUNE IND R MONITOR MAG CURRENT HEATER TUNE OUT

L: 48NM 1.5 4.3 4.3 1.5 9.9

Note: On the RF monitor, HEATER displays 1.4V voltage, but the actual heater voltage ranges from 7.4V to 9.4V. The voltage is measured between J833-#11 and -#12 of the RF PWR board. 12-27

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

Checking keys Check panel keys. Turning the rotary control and trackball will change the keys in the range of “0 to 255”. Pressing a key will highlight the display of the corresponding key box.

Checking input sentences Sentences to display are fixed and data on input sentences are displayed. 〈GPS1〉: Data related to positions input from the [NAVIGATOR] port of the TB board are displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data. 〈GPS2〉: Data related to positions input from any port other than the [NAVIGATOR] port of the TB board are displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data. 〈SPEED〉: Data related to speed regardless of input ports are displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data. 〈HEADING〉: Data related to heading regardless of input ports are displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data. 〈NAV DATA〉: Data related to NAV regardless of input ports are displayed. The Chart radar displays MWV and DPT sentences. 〈AIS〉: Data from AIS are displayed. The Chart radar does not display these data. 〈ISN〉: Data related to INS are displayed. The Chart radar displays ZDA, GLL, OSD, DPT, MWV, DTM, FUGLL, PAESP, PAESC, PLSPL, PLSPS, and PAESW sentences. Note: The setting of [Menu]->0->8->5:INS is made to LAN. However, setting that to OFF will disable loading data from the EC-1000C.

12-28

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

12.5.2 Factory Test Procedure 1. While pressing the [1:HL OFF] key, press the [2], [3], and [4] keys in the order described. 2. The [Factory] menu will appear. Then, select “4. Factory test”. The 〈FACTORY TEST〉 shown below will appear.

SPU RFC KEY REMOTE1 REMOTE2 CARD

PROGRAM No. 0359204-02.4x 0359202-01.3x 0359203-01.xx 0359203-01.xx 0359203-01.xx 0359209-01.01

ROM OK OK OK * * * * * *

RAM OK OK OK * * * * * *

1 2 3 BOARD 005C 0015 0006 2 0008 002C

SPU Board Version 2: Version 44 and later * * * *

FPGA Program No. and RFC Board Version

PROCESSOR UNIT MONITOR -12V 3.3V 5V 12V SCANNER MOTOR

DIP SW 0100

-12V 3.2 4.8 12.0 0.0

SIO AIS HDG LOG *NAV TRK RS-232C KEY_IO RF_IO ALARM_IO

- - - - - - OK OK 1000

Results of loop back test (Testing port requires jumpers.)

To quit press [F1] key

FACTORY TEST Screen

3. To exit this screen, press the [F1] key.

12-29

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

4. The buzzer will sound and the screen will turn to red (8 patterns). Pressing the [F1] key will stop the buzzer sounding and display a green pattern. Subsequently, every time the [F1] key is pressed, the screen will turn to blue, white, and black. Then, pressing the [F1] key again will return the display to the former screen.

Red pattern + Buzzer

Green pattern

Blue pattern

White

Black

Screen Test

Contents of Factory Test: FPGA Program Numbers and RFC Board Ver FPGA Program Numbers of the SPU and RFC Boards are displayed 1 005C 0008

2 0015 002C

3 0006

BOARD 2

Display number FPGA Ver on SPU Board and SPU Board Ver RFC Board Ver and its FPGA Ver

FPGA Program Numbers and RFC Board Ver Display

1

2 U12: Echo FPGA Ver

SPU

U46: SPU FPGA Ver

RFC

Display RFC Board Ver in hex U17: FPGA Ver

12-30

SPU Board Ver - 1: Ver-22 U13: DRW FPGA Ver - 2: Ver-44 3

12.5 Selftest on Radar Processor unit

Loop Back Tests Loop back tests on ports are conducted to determine the acceptance of input and output ports. As shown below, make jumper settings for ports to loop back on the TB board of the RPU-016. SIO check items are changed sequentially. If the port for which jumper setting is made is good, “OK” will be displayed. If it is abnormal, “−” will be displayed. ** AIS port test **

** NAV port test **

J611 AIS

J606 NAVIGATOR

J619 ECDIS

AIS TD-A

1

NAV H

1

1

AIS TD-B

2

NAV C

2

2

ARPA TD B

AIS RD-A

3

N.C

3

3

GND

AIS RD-B

4

AIS COMMON

5

** TRACK port test ** J620 TRACK CONTROL

ARPA TD A

** HDG port test ** J621 SERIAL I/F

J605 HDG SENSOR

TRK TD-A

1

RSV1 TD A

1

1

HDG A

TRK TD-B

2

RSV1 TD B

2

2

HDG B

TRK RD-A

3

GND

3

3

GND

TRK RD-B

4

RSV2 TD A

4

GND

5

RSV2 TD B

5

GND

6

** RS-232C port test **

** LOG port test ** J621 SERIAL I/F

J601 RS-232C

J607 LOG

N.C

1

RSV1 TD A

1

1

LOG A

RS-232C RX

2

RSV1 TD B

2

2

LOG B

RS-232C TX

3

GND

3

3

N.C

N.C

4

RSV2 TD A

4

GND

5

RSV2 TD B

5

N.C

6

GND

6

N.C

7

N.C

8

N.C

9

Jumpers for Loop Back Tests

12-31

12.6 Replacing BIOS Battery on CPU Board of EC-1000C

12.6 Replacing BIOS Battery on CPU Board of EC-1000C The life of the BIOS battery on the CPU board is 3 to 6 years. If this battery runs out, the BIOS setting will return to its default. When the following message appears at the start up of power supply, replace the BIOS battery. When the battery is replaced, fix it with silicone rubber (KE-348T). “Keyboard error or no keyboard present CMOS checksum error - Defaults loaded” “Press F1 to continue, DEL to enter SETUP.”

Lithium battery: CR-2032 (Not less than 3V)

12.7 BIOS Setting When the battery is replaced, the BIOS value has returned to its default. In this case, make changes to the following settings. For the procedure, refer to information in Chapter 13 “1. BIOS Setting”. Load Optimized Defaults 1. Standard CMOS Features Halt on 2. Advance Bios Features 3. Integrated Peripherals 4. Integrated Peripherals 5. Power Management Setup

-> Initialize the BIOS setting, and then -> Set to “All, But Keyboard”; -> Set to “First Boot Device: HDD-0”; -> Set to “Second Boot Device: Floppy”; -> Set to “PWRON after PWR-Fail: Former-Sts” -> Set to “USB Keyboard Support: Enable”; and -> Set to “Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN: Delay 4 Sec”.

12-32

12.8 Replacing HDD of EC-1000C

12.8 Replacing HDD of EC-1000C Replacing HDD Dismount the HDD cover, and then replace the HDD with a new one. The HDD is just placed on the vibration dampener. To connect a HDD connector, be sure to follow the instruction label affixed to the HDD cover. Use the red and black cables of the connector for power supply line.

The red and black cables must be used for the power supply line and located far right.

Replacing with a HDD storing no applications for the Chart radar and turning ON the power supply will display the BIOS screen shown below.

12-33

12.8 Replacing HDD of EC-1000C

1. When replacing with a HDD storing no applications: Referring information in Chapter 13, start with installation of the OS of Windows XP. Brief procedure: Make BIOS setting -> Install the OS of Windows XP -> Install various system drivers -> Make environmental setting -> Make BIOS setting -> Install software for FCR-2xx7 -> Make equipment setting

2. When replacing with a HDD storing application: Make equipment setting in accordance with equipment configuration. 1) Make sure that equipment setting is made to No.1 or No. 2 EC-1000C. Relevant information: - “8.3 Verifying Registry File” - If equipment setting is made to No. 2 EC-1000C or No. 2 LAN Adapter is equipped, refer to information in “Chapter 8 Updating EC-1000C Program” to update the EC-1000C program. 2) The Program Version of the LAN Adapter must correspond to that of the EC-1000C. Relevant information: - Refer to information in “Chapter 8 Updating EC-1000C Program”. - Refer to information in “9.4 Updating LAN Adapter Program”. 3) Verify network setting. Relevant information: - Refer to information in “Chapter 10 EC-1000C Network Setting”. 4) Make installation parameters setting. Relevant information: - Refer to information in “Chapter 5 Installation Parameters Setting”.

12-34

Chapter Installation of Windows XP Chapter 13. Installation of13.Windows XP

Preparation Disconnect the LAN Adapter (LAN2) and the LAN (LAN1) from the Radar. In addition, connect the mouse and the service keyboard to the EC-1000C. 1. BIOS Setting 1.1 Perform key operation on the service keyboard. While pressing the [DEL] key, turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C. Press and hold the [DEL] key until the BIOS Setup screen appears.

> Standard CMOS Features > Advanced BIOS Features

Load Optimized Defaults

1.2

Select “Load Optimized Defaults” on the BIOS Setup screen, and then press the [Enter] -> [Y] -> [Enter] keys. The objective of this operation is to initialize the BIOS setting.

1.3

Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features” on the BIOS Setup screen, make changes to the settings shown below, and then save the change. Make these setting changes using the [Pg Up] or [Pg Dn] key. The objective of these settings is to select a drive from which the device is booted. - First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to CD-ROM - Second Boot Device: Change from Floppy to HDD-0

- First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to CD-ROM - Second Boot Device: Change from FDD to HDD-0

13-1

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

1.4

Open the setting of “Standard CMOS Features” on the BIOS Setup screen, and then verify / make a change to the setting shown below. The objective of this setting is to output no error message even if the keyboard is unplugged. - Halt on: Set to All, But Keyboard

1.5

Open the setting of “Integrated Peripherals” on the BIOS Setup screen, and then verify and make a change to the setting shown below. - PWRON After PWR-Fail -> Former-Sts

PWRON After PWR-Fail -> Former-Sts (Final row)

1.6

Pressing the [F10] key will display the message “SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N)?”. Then, press [Y] -> [Enter] key to save the set value.

1.7

By the operation shown above, the system is automatically rebooted. Insert the “Recovery Disc for EC-1000C” CD into the CD drive, and then turn OFF the power supply of the EC-1000C.

13-2

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

2. Loading Windows XP software Following the procedure under the preceding section, 2.1

Turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C.

2.2

When booting the system, press the [Enter] key while the message “Press any key to boot from CDROM” is displayed on the screen.

2.3

After a period of time, the “Welcome to Setup” window will appear.

Welcome to Setup.

To set up Windows XP now, Press ENTER.

13-3

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

3. Formatting Following the procedure under the preceding section, 3.1

Press the [Enter] key to start making Windows XP setting.

3.2

The “Windows XP Licensing Agreement” window will appear. Then, press [F8] key to specify “I Agree”.

Windows XP Licensing Agreement.

3.3

The “Windows XP Professional Setup” window will appear. Then, press [Esc] key to specify “Don’t Repair”. Windows XP Professional Setup

F3=Quit R=Repair ESC=Don’t Repair

13-4

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

3.4

On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, press the [Enter] key to install “C: Partition1 [NTFS]”.

C: Partition1 [NTFS] ENTER=Install D=Delete Partition F3=Quit

3.5

On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, press the [C] key to continue setting.

C=Continue Setup ESC=Cancel

3.6

On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, select “Format the partition using the NTFS file system (Quick)”, and then press the [Enter] key to continue setting.

Select “Format the partition using the NTFS file system (Quit)”

ENTER=Continue ESC=Cancel

13-5

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

3.7

On the following “Windows XP Professional Setup” window, press [F] key to initiate formatting the C drive.

To format the drive, press F.

F=Format

3.8

ESC=Cancel

“Setup is copying files…” will be initiated. After the completion of copying, the system will be automatically rebooted to also automatically initiate “Installing Devices”. It takes approximately 10 minutes to complete this procedure.

“Setup is copying files…” is complete.

Installing Devices (It takes some time to display this.)

13-6

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

4. Windows XP Setup Following the procedure under the preceding section, 4.1

When the “Installing Devices” step is complete, the “Regional and Language Options” window will appear.

Regional and Language Options

Customize

4.2

Click the Customize.. button, and then open the “Regional Options” tab. Select “English(United States)” from the Language list and “United States” from the Location list, and the click [OK] button.

Regional Options

English (United States)

[Location]

United States

13-7

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

4.3

The display will return to the “Regional and Language Options” window. Then click the [Next] button.

4.4

The “Personalize your Software” window will appear. Type “ECDIS” in the Name box, leave the Organization box blank, and then click the [Next] button.

Type ECDIS” in the Name box.

4.5

The “Computer Name and Administrator Password” will appear. Then, type - “EC1000C-xxxx” in the [Computer name] box (“xxxx” represents the serial number of the EC-1000C or equipment number); - “ administrator” in the [Administrator password] box; and - “administrator” in the [Confirm password] box. After that, click the [Next] button.

Type “EC1000C-xxxx” in the Computer Name box.

- Type “administrator” in the Administrator password box. - Type “administrator” in the Confirm password box.

13-8

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

4.6

Select “[GMT] Greenwich Mean Time: Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London” from the Time Zone list. Further, check “Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes”, and then click the [Next] button.

Select “[GMT] Greenwich Mean Time: ”.

Check here.

4.7

Each set value will be automatically saved (the window will be switched one after another). When saving is complete, the system will be automatically rebooted to display the “Thank you for purchasing Microsoft Windows XP” Screen. It takes approximately 15 minutes to complete this procedure.

“Thank you for purchasing Microsoft Windows XP” Note: The window size is not correct.

The window will be switched one after another.

13-9

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

4.8

Click the [Next] button displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the “Thank you for purchasing Microsoft Windows XP” screen.

[Next]: Displayed in the lower right-hand corner. (If you cannot see this button, scroll the window.)

4.9

Check “Not right Now”, and then click the [Next] button.

Check “Not right Now”.

4.10 Type “ECDIS” in the [Your name] box, and then click the [Next] button displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the window. Furthermore, click the [Finish] button on the next window.

Type “ECDIS” in the Your name box.

[Finish]: Displayed in the lower right-hand corner. (If you cannot see this button, scroll the window.)

[NEXT] [Next]: Displayed in the lower right-hand corner. (If you cannot see this button, scroll the window.)

13-10

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

4.11 Windows XP will be automatically booted. Click X button to erase the pop-up box displayed.

Erase this pop-up box.

5. User Accounts Setting Following the procedure under the preceding section, 5.1

Select Control panel -> User Accounts from the [Start] menu.

User Accounts

13-11

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

5.2

Click the icon for ECDIS Computer administrator, and then click on “Create a password”.

5.3

Type “ecdis” in the “Type a new password” box and also “ecdis” in the “Type the new password again to confirm” box, both in lower-case letters, and then click the Create Password button.

Type a new password -> “ecdis” Type the new password again to confirm: -> “ecdis”

Create Password

13-12

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

5.4

Click the Yes, Make Private button. Click X to erase dialogs displayed one after another, and then return the display to Windows screen.

Erase windows displayed until Windows screen appears. Yes, Make Private

6. Installing System Driver Following the procedure under the preceding section, 6.1

Replace the CD-ROM with the Chart Radar: FCR-2xx7 Software.

6.2

Select “Run” from the [Start] menu.

Browse

Start

13-13

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Installing Chipset Driver 6.3 Click the Browse… button to specify Chipset Driver from Browse. To specify it, select Browse -> Desktop -> My Computer -> 05_4x (D:) -> Support -> PCI-951 -> Chipset -> infinst_autol, and then click the Open button. It is also acceptable to directly specify the file. In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ Chipset¥ infinst_autol.exe”.

6.4

The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The Chipset Driver install wizard will be automatically booted. Follow the instruction displayed to proceed with installation of the Chipset Driver.

6.5

On the “InstallShield(R) Wizard Complete” window, check the radio button for “Yes, I want to restart my computer now”, and click the Finish button to complete installation. Windows will automatically restart.

“InstallShield(R) Wizard Complete”

Check “Yes, I want to restart my computer now”.

Finish

13-14

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

6.6

When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the [Enter] key. Windows screen will appear.

Type “ecdis”.

Installing VGA Driver For installation procedure, follow the same procedure as 6.3 to 6.6 Installing Chipset Driver. 6.7

Select “Run” from the [Start] menu.

6.8

Click the Browse… button to specify VGA Driver from Browse. To specify it, select Browse -> Desktop -> My Computer -> 05_4x (D:) -> Support -> PCI-951 -> video -> win2k_xpm1141, and then click the Open button. It is also acceptable to directly specify the file. In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ video¥ inf win2k_xpm1141.exe”.

6.9

The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The VGA Driver install wizard will be automatically booted. Follow the instruction displayed to proceed with installation.

6.10

On the “InstallShield(R) Wizard Complete” window, check the radio button for “Yes, I want to restart my computer now”, and click the Finish button to complete installation. Windows will automatically restart.

6.11

When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press [Enter] key. Windows screen will appear.

13-15

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Installing Network Driver For installation procedure, follow the same procedure as 6.3 to 6.6 Installing Chipset Driver. 6.12 Select “Run” from the [Start] menu. 6.13 Click on the Browse… button to specify Network Driver from Browse. To specify it, select Browse -> Desktop -> My Computer -> 05_4x (D:) -> Support -> PCI-951 -> ethernet -> pro2kxpm, and then clock the Open button. It is also acceptable to directly specify the file. In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ ethernet¥ pro2kxpm.exe”. 6.14 The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The Network Driver install wizard will be automatically booted. Follow the instruction displayed to proceed with installation.

License Agreement Location to Save File Check “I accept the terms in the license agreement”, and then click [Next].

C:¥IntelPRO

Install now Finish

13-16

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Installing Audio Driver For installation procedure, follow the same procedure as 6.3 to 6.6 Installing Chipset Driver. 6.15 Select “Run” from the [Start] menu. 6.16 Click on the Browse… button to specify Audio Driver from Browse. To specify it, select Browse -> Desktop -> My Computer -> 05_4x (D:) -> Support -> PCI-951 -> audio -> setup, and then click the Open button. It is also acceptable to directly specify the file. In this case, type “D:¥Support¥ PCI-951¥ audio¥ setup.exe”. 6.17 The display will return to the Run window. Then, click OK. The Audio Driver install wizard will be automatically booted. Follow the instruction displayed to proceed with installation. 6.18 On the “Install Shield Wizard Complete” window, check “Yes, I want to restart my computer now”, and click on the Finish button to complete installation. Windows will automatically restart. 6.19 When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the [Enter] key. Windows screen will appear.

13-17

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

7. Security Center Setting Following the procedure under the preceding section, 7.1

Select Security Center from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu, and then make the following settings. - Set to Windows Firewall -> General -> “Off(nor recommended)”. - Set to Automatic Updates -> “Turn off Automatic Updates”.

Security Center

Automatic Update

Windows Firewall

To make setting, click this icon.

General

Check “Turn off Automatic Updates”, and then click OK.

Automatic Update

Check “Off (not recommended)”, and then click OK.

Windows Firewall

13-18

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

8. Switching Windows XP to Classic Following the procedure under the preceding section, 8.1

Select Switch to Classic view from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu.

Switch to Classic view

Taskbar and Start Menu

8.2

Select Taskbar and Start Menu.

8.3

Click on the “Start Menu” tab, check “Classic Start menu”, and then click OK.

Start Menu

Classic Start menu

13-19

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

9. Computer name, Work group, and Virtual memory Setting Following the procedure under the preceding section, Computer name, Work group 9.1 Select System from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu. 9.2

Click on the “Computer Name” tab, and then the Change button.

9.3

Type “ecdis” in the [Workgroup] box, and then click OK. In the Computer name box, “EC1000C-xxxx” that is the name registered in Step 4.5 is displayed. Following the instruction on the window, restart the system once.

Computer Name

Change

Type “ecdis” in the Workgroup box. ecdis

13-20

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Visual Effects 9.4 Select System from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu. Click the “Advanced” tab, and then click the Settings button in the Performance box. 9.5

Open the “Visual Effects” tab.

9.6

Check “Custom:” to check off all items displayed in the box.

9.7

Click on Apply -> OK.

9.8

Following the instruction on the window, restart the system once. When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the [Enter] key. Windows screen will appear. Advanced Visual Effects

Performance Settings Custom

Check off all items.

13-21

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Virtual memory 9.9 Select System from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu. 9.10 Click the “Advanced” tab, and then click the Settings button in the Performance box. 9.11 Open the “Advanced” tab. 9.12 Click the Change button in the Virtual memory box. 9.13 Check “No paging file”. 9.14 Click Set -> OK. 9.15 Following the instruction on the window, restart the system once. When Windows is booted, type “ecdis” in the Password box, and then press the [Enter] key. Windows screen will appear.

Advanced

Settings

Check “No paging file”. Change

13-22

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

10. Display properties Following the procedure under the preceding section, Display Tab 10.1 Select Display from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu.

Themes

Display

10.2 Click on the “Themes” tab. 10.3 Select “Windows Classic” from the “Themes:” menu, and then click Apply -> OK.

Select Windows Classic.

Screen Saver Tab-1 10.4 Select Display from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu.

Screen Saver

10.5 Click on the “Screen Saver” tab. 10.6 Select “(None)” from the “Screen saver” menu, and then click Apply -> OK.

Select (None).

13-23

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Screen Saver Tab-2 10.7 Select Display from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu. 10.8 Open the “Screen Saver” tab. 10.9 Click the Power button. 10.10

Open the “Power Schemes” tab, and then make the following settings. - Power schemes : Home/Office Desk Presentation - Turn off monitor : Never - Turn off hard disks : Never - System stand-by : Never

10.11

Click Apply -> OK.

Screen Saver Power Schemes

Set to Power schemes -> Home/Office Desk Presentation.

Make settings as follows. - Turn off monitor -> Never - Turn off hard disks -> Never - System stand-by -> Never

Power

13-24

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Appearance Tab-1 10.12 Select Display from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu. 10.13

Click on the “Appearance” tab, and then make the following settings. - Windows and buttons : Windows Classic style - Color scheme : Windows Classic - Font size : Normal

10.14

Click Apply -> OK. Appearance

Make settings as follows. - Windows and buttons -> Windows Classic style - Color scheme -> Windows Classic - Font size -> Normal

13-25

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Appearance Tab-1 10.15 Select Display from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu. 10.16

Click on the “Appearance” tab, and then the Advanced button. According to the set values listed in the table below, make settings of “Font:” and “Size” by each “item:”.

10.17

After the completion of settings, click OK, and then the Apply button. Appearance

Advanced

Set values Item;

Font:

Font Size

Active Title Bar Inactive Title Bar Menu Message Box Select Items

Arial Narrow

12

13-26

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Settings Tab-1 10.18 Select Display from the Windows Control Panel in the [Start] menu. 10.19

Open the “Setting” tab, and then click the Advanced button.

10.20

Open the “Adapter” tab, and then click the List all Mode button.

10.21

Select “1280 by 1024, 256 Colors, 60 Hertz” from [List of valid modes].

10.22

Click OK. This window will disappear to return to the previous screen.

Settings Adapter

List all Modes Select “1280 by 1024, 256 Colors, 60 Hertz”. Advanced

13-27

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Troubleshoot Tab 10.23 Open the “Troubleshoot” tab. 10.24

Set the level bar for “Hardware acceleration” to 40%.

Settings Troubleshoot

Set the level bar for “Hardware acceleration” to 40%.

10.25 Click OK. 10.26

The Monitor Settings window will appear. Then, click the Yes button over until Reverting in xx seconds is set to 0 seconds.

Counting down the time

13-28

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

11. Opening Windows Explorer to make C drive properties setting Following the procedure under the preceding section, [File] Menu setting 11.1 Press the [E] key while pressing the [Windows] logo key on the service keyboard to open the Explorer window. Then, select “Local Disk (C:)”. 11.2 Select “Properties” from the “File” in the menu bar. 11.3 Open the “General” tab, and then check off “Allow Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching”. 11.4 Clicking OK to display the “Conform Attribute Changes” window. Check “Apply change to C;¥, subfolders and files”, and then click OK.

Settings

Check “Apply changes to C;¥, subfolders and files”. Check off “Allow Indexing Service to index this disk for fast file searching”.

13-29

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

11.5 When the “Error Applying Attributes” window appears, click on the Ignore All button.

Ignore All

11.6 Upon completion of setting, the display will return to the Explorer window. [View] Menu Setting 11.7 Open Local Disk (C:) to select “Choose Details” from the “View” menu in the menu bar. 11.8 Check the items shown below, and then click OK. The display will return to the Explorer window.

X Name X Size X Type X Date Modified X Attributes

13-30

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

[Tools] Menu Setting-1 11.9 Select “Folder Options” from “Tools” in the menu bar. 11.10

Open the “General” tab to check “Use Windows classic folders” in the Task box, and then click OK. The display will return to the Explorer window.

General

Check “Use Windows classic folders”.

[Tools] Menu Setting-2 11.11 Select “Folder Options” from “Tools” in the menu bar. 11.12

Open the “View” tab to check items of “Advanced settings:”. Check nine items.

13-31

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

View

Apply to All Folders

X Automatically search for network folders and printers X X X X X

Display file size information in folder tips Display simple folder view in Explorer’s Folders list Display the contents of system folders Display the full patch in the address bar Display the full patch in the title bar

◎ Show hidden files and folders X Hide protected operating system files (Recommended) X Show encrypted or compressed NTFS file in color 11.13

Clicking on Apply to All folders key will display the “Folder views” window. Then, click Yes and then OK.

13-32

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

12. Returning BIOS setting to its original state Following the procedure under the preceding section, 12.1 Turn OFF the power supply of the EC-1000C once. 12.2 While pressing the [DEL] key, turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C. Press and hold the [DEL] key until the BIOS Setup screen appears.

> Advanced BIOS Features

12.3 Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features“ on the BIOS Setup screen, and make changes to the settings shown below. Make these setting changes using the [Pg Up] or [Pg Dn] key. The objective of these settings is to select a drive from which the device is booted. - First Boot Device: Change from CD-ROM to HDD-0 - Second Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy

- First Boot Device: Change from CD-ROM to HDD-0 - Second Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy

At the same time, verify the following settings. - Standard CMOS Features Halt on -> All, But Keyboard - Integrated Peripherals -> USB Keyboard Support : Enable - Power Management Setup -> Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN : Delay 4 Sec

13-33

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

12.4

12.5

Pressing the [F10] key will display the message “SAVE to CMOS and EXIT (Y/N)?” Then, press [Y] -> [Enter] key to save the set value.

By the operation shown above, the system is automatically rebooted.

13. LAN setting Following the procedure under the preceding section, and referring to information in Chapter 10, make LAN1 and LAN2 settings.

14. Installing Chart Radar software Following the procedure under the preceding section, and referring to information in Chapter 6, install the software.

15. Permissions setting Following the procedure under the preceding section, 15.1 When the Chart radar software is installed and the power supply is turned ON, the Chart Radar window will appear. 15.2 Exit the Chart radar according to the procedure shown below. 1) While pressing the [Alt] key, press the [Tab] key over to select “ECAWATCH”. 2) When the ECAWACH window shown below appears, click [Shutdown the Chart Radar]. 3) The Prompt window of Control Head will appear. Then, press the X button to exit this window. 4) Press [F4] key while pressing the [Alt] key to display Windows screen.

13-34

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

15.3 Press the [E] key while pressing the [Windows] logo key on the service keyboard to open the Explorer window. 15.4 Select Properties from the “ants_system” in Local Disk (C:). 15.5 Click on the Security tab, and then Click the ADD button. The “Select Users or Group” window will appear. 15.6 Click the Advanced button on the “Select User or Group” window.

Ant_system Local Disk (C:) Security

Properties window of Ant_system

Add

Select User or Group window

Advanced

13-35

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

15.7 Click the Find Now button. 15.8

Select “Everyone” from the list displayed below, and click OK and then OK on the previous window.

Find now

Select “Everyone”.

15.9

Check the items shown below (on the Allow side) in the “Permissions to Everyone” box on the Security Tab window, and then click OK. Security

Allow

13-36

X

Modify

X

Read & Execute

X

List Folder Contents

X

Read

X

Write

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

16. Automatically Log On setting Following the procedure under the preceding section, Command Prompt 16.1 Select Run from the [Start] menu, type “cmd”, and then click OK.

Type “Cmd”.

16.2 The Command Prompt window (C:¥Documents and Settings¥ECDIS>) will appear. Type “control userpasswords2” and then press the [Enter] key.

16.3 When the command is accepted, the “User Accounts” window will appear. User Accounts 16.4 check off “Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer”, and then click Apply -> OK.

Check off “Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer”.

13-37

Chapter 13. Installation of Windows XP

Automatically Log 16.5 The Automatically Log On window will appear. Type as shown below, and then click OK. - User name: ecdis - Password: ecdis - Confirm Password: ecdis

Type “ecdis” in all boxes.

This is the end of the installation of Windows XP.

13-38

Chapter 14. Q & A Q1. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Auto Pilot? The Chart radar is not designed to connect it. The connection is restricted by the Chart radar program. Q2. Is the Chart radar available for the connection of Conning Display? The Chart radar is not designed to connect it. The connection is restricted by the Chart radar program. Q3. Can the C Map be used? As of February 2008, the C-MAP ed 3.0 chart cannot be used. Only the ENC chart: S57 (ed3.0/3.1) can be used. Q4. Let me know the maximum cable length between units. - Between EC-1000C and Control unit: Max. 30 m - Between RPU-016 and TR unit: Max. 100 m (300 m with RJB-001) - Between EC-1000C and Display unit: Max. 10 m (The maximum cable length under the DVI standard is 5 m. It is 10 m for supplied cables. For further extension, you can use DVI-DVI repeaters that are available on the market.) - LAN cable: The maximum length for optional cables is 30 m. Reference: Under the 100BASE-T(100 Mbps) Standard, LAN cables are to be Category 5 and the maximum length is to be 100 m. Q5. Let me know how to connect the EG-3000. You need to set [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page1 -> Dem Echo to EG. Q6. Let me know about HUB-100. The HUB-100 has the Auto-MDIX specification for all ports and automatically identifies cables connected. Consequently, while cross cable is used for LAN cable between the EC-1000C and the RPU-016. HUB-100 enables to use either straight or cross cable. Q7. Why is the HUB-100 connected between the EC-1000C and the RPU-016? The HUB-100 is necessary for using the Inter-switch function or connecting to No. 2 Chart radar or ECDIS. Furthermore, since using unauthorized HUB to connect to external equipment may disable the system not to function as Chart radar, we have incorporated the HUB-100 as part of the system.

14-1

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q8. The error massage [Permanent Warning : At least one of used charts has more than 1 week----] is displayed. (6-22) This message alert you that the chart in current use is using “Display Until” or “Approved Until” having date different from the system date of this Marine Radar by not less than one week. To avoid this message displayed, you need to select “Set Chart viewing dates” from the chart menu to set the expiration date of display to later than the current date. Q9. What menu can I use to change the background color of the window? You need to select “Chart Display” in the guidance area, and select the Chart tab from the “Chart Display” to make setting of a display color. Q10. The mode status bar on the ECDIS window does not display “Route”. (5-29) You have selected [Menu] -> Initial Setting -> Installation Parameter, and then made setting of the Device menu of Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication (LAN) to “Own for Chart Radar with INS”. This setting is used to monitor the Route prepared by INS: ECDIS. Q11.Where can I make selection of the data box display? (2-9) Putting the cursor in the data box and selecting “Select Sidebar” in the guidance area will display the data box display selection menu. Then, select Route or Conning. Q12.Where can I find the menu to eliminate the MOB or the Event mark? You need to execute [Menu] -> Recode -> Reset -> Voyage Log. Q13.A big letter of “XX” is displayed on the screen. What does this mark indicate? This mark indicates that the ARPA test is in progress. The ARPA test is included in [Main Menu] -> Initial Settings. Q14.The Inter-switch function does not work while in Chart Radar mode. The Inter-switch function works only while in Radar mode. Q15. What kind of functions do “Set Std Display” of [Main Menu] in ECDIS mode and “Set Base Display” of [Main Menu] in Radar/Chart Radar mode have? These items have the function of returning windows set by Standard, Other1, Other2, Target, Tracking, Route, and Mariner in the Chart Display menu to the basic window.

14-2

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q16.What do the settings of Off, Std, and Oth in the Chart Display menu mean? - Off: Used to turn OFF the function of the item selected. - Std: Used to turn ON the function of the item selected when Standard Display is valid. - Oth: Used to turn OFF the function of the item selected when Standard Display is valid. Q17.When I try to open the Installation Parameter menu, “Cannot read disk” is displayed. “FD: Authorizing Key Disk” is required to open this menu. You need to set this FD into the FDD. For your reference, this key disk is common to FCR-2xx7 and FEA-2xx7. Q18.“Unknown” is displayed in the Datum box under the position display box. You can make a change to Datum by Datum setting in [Menu] -> Initial Settings, or by putting the cursor on the Datum display and scrolling it. Basically, the chart should be used with the WGS-84 datum. Q19.Where can I set whether or not to make Gyro correction? I cannot set it by selecting [Menu] -> Sensor -> Other to “Gyro corr”. “Gyro corr” is used to display a set value. For setting, you need to select [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Navigation Parameters -> Ship and Route parameters to “Gyro correction”. Q20.Can I save Route Plan data to a floppy disk and further edit the saved dada on my PC? (2-52) You can save data by Backup and Restore menu in the Route, User Chart, and Pilot Data menu. Further, you can edit the Route data on your PC. For detail, refer to Appendix 6 in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL of the FEA-2xx7 series. Q21.Are Route, User Chart, and Pilot data displayed on Radar Mode window? (2-4) YES. You need to put the cursor on Route (User Chart, Pilot Data) in the status menu bar on the window and select data you want to display. Q22.Position data is displayed in red. What do letters inside the parentheses by the SOG and COG display represent? For detail, refer to AP2-34. Q23.How does the system draw echoes? It circulates echoes as data by 8x8 dots on the LAN. Consequently, when looking carefully, you will find that echoes are not smoothly drawn as the FAR-2xx7 series, but that echoes are drawn by block.

14-3

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q24.Can I make the cursor motion faster? You need to exit the Chart radar mode to return the display to Windows screen first, select Start -> Control Panel -> Mouse, open the Pointer Options page, and then make adjustment of the cursor motion. Q25.What is the Kalman filter? The objective of the Kalman filter is to continuously monitor the positions measured by individual sensors to determine the reliability of them. Gyro and speed log selected are included in this analysis. As the result of processing through the filter, you can smoothly monitor your ship position and use it as the final position of your ship. Even if there is a position jump in a sensor, the filter will eliminate this jump at the final position. (Position jumps are caused by the loss of differential signal with DGPS or else.) When the filter is set, an alarm will be given if the system has no effectively available position data. As long as the filter can forecast a reliable position based on position sensors selected, no alarms will be given even if a position jump takes place in the position measurement sensor selected to use through the filter.

14-4

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q26.Please let me know about charts. 1) S57 ENC Chart An electronic navigational chart (ENC) prepared under the S57 Standards (e.g. metric system) by using new technologies such as GPS. This navigational chart is an “Official Chart”, and obliged to be used for the ECDIS in sea areas for which the ENC has been prepared. The Hydrographic Office of each country is to take charge of preparing the relevant ENC for its sea area. However, the ENC is only available for part of sea areas and has not covered the whole world. European countries use PRIMAR in Norway to prepare their ENC. Japan has completed the ENC for its area. 2) ARCS Chart ENC service provided by the British Admiralty. This service has been computerized by taking paper hydrographic charts published by the B.A. as an image. The service covers sea areas all over the world except for some part of them. The service includes slightly over 3,000 charts (saved on 11 CD-ROMs), navigator service with weekly updating, and skipper service without updating (not available for the chart radar). 3) C-MAP Chart An ENC prepared by C-MAP Inc. in Norway through plotting the existing paper hydrographic charts. This Chart covers sea areas all over the world except for some part of them. The Chart includes slightly over 6,000 charts, which are classified into 9 global data zones and saved on 3 CD-ROMs. Types of charts

Data format

Data standard

Publisher

S57 ENC Chart

Vector

ARCS Chart

Raster (Image)

Hydrographic Office of each country British Admiralty

C-MAP Chart

Vector

C-MAP Inc.

S57 ed3

Chart selection method S57 ENC Chart and C-MAP Chart: Automatic selection (S57 is prioritized.) Vector chart and Image chart: Selection by menu Chart data conversion To display a Vector chart you purchased, you need to convert data loaded from the CD-ROM. The data converted is referred to as “SENC (System ENC)”. The Raster chart requires no data conversion.

14-5

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q27.The system freezes. What measures do I need to take when the system is slow in motion? Please try to delete the “C:¥ ants_system” folder and reinstall the program. However, since files such as Installation Parameters, Chart, Route, Pilot Data, and User Chart are also deleted, you need to back up the these data beforehand. Q28.Even if I turn ON the system power supply, the RPU-016 is not powered on. You need to check for the connection of the RADAR UNIT port (9 pin D-sub) of the EC-1000C. This signal is a contact signal and connected to the J602-#5 and #6 (PWR SW) signal of TB board in the RPU-016. Q29.Let me know what measures I need to take when I have replaced HD. (12-33) To use the HD for No.2 Chart Radar, you should rewrite IP addresses set for No. 1 Chart Radar into those for No. 2 Chart Radar. These addresses can be rewritten by reinstalling the program. It can be done by rewriting Registry, however, we cannot recommend this method because erroneous rewriting causes the system to malfunction. Furthermore, make sure that the program number of the LAN Adapter corresponds to that of the Chart Radar. If NOT, you need to update the program of the LAN Adapter. Q30.Let me know what measure I need to take when I have replaced the CPU board of the EC-1000C. (13-1) You need to check for BIOS settings as shown below. Initialize the BIOS settings with Load Optimized Defaults, and then set 1) Standard CMOS Features Halt on to “All, But Keyboard”; 2) Advanced BIOS Features to “First Boot Device: HDD-0” and “Second Boot Device: Floppy”; 3) Integrated Peripherals to “USB Keyboard Support: Enable”; 4) Integrated peripherals to “PWRON after PWR-Fail: Former-Sts”; and 5) Power Management Setup to “Soft-Off by PWR-BTTN: Delay 4 Sec”.

14-6

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q31.Sensor data such as position data are not entered. (Chapter 12) If no communication between the LAN Adapter and the EC-1000C, the error message “4064 LAN fail for LAN Adapter” will be displayed. In this case, you need to conduct the following; 1) Turn ON the LAN Adapter power supply again. In order to turn ON or OFF the power supply, you may insert and remove the power supply input terminal. 2) Does the LED of the LAN Adapter input port turn ON in response to receiving cycles? If NO, change the sensor connection port as a test. If the LED turns ON, this problem results from faulty input circuit of the relevant port. 3) Is the LED of the LAN2 port of the EC-1000C blinkng? If NO, this problem results from faulty LAN connection. In this case, check for the LAN cable (cross cable). 4) Check for the LED of the LAN module. This LED normally flashes at intervals of one second. While in program mode, the LED of the LAN mode is blinking at quick intervals. In this case, check the LAN Adapter for jumper setting. In addition, if the LED is kept ON or OFF, the problem results from the malfunction of the LAN Adapter. 5) Check the Installation Parameters such as Connect, Adapter Channel, Device Interface, and Talker for their setting. 6) Similarly, check for settings, such as sentences output from the sensor side and talker names. 7) Check for IP addresses. The IP address of the LAN2 is “10.0.0.184”, while that of the LAN Adapter is “10.0.0.194”. Use the Ping command to check for LAN connection. 8) Select Run from the Start menu, and then type “regedit” in the Open box to check for the Registry file. The device number of the LAN Adapter, i.e., “LAN if adapter 1 ID” will appear. If Not, try to reinstall the program of the Chart Radar. 9) Try to reinstall the LAN Adapter. Q32.Please let me know the method for checking of B-Adapter. (12-9) Connect the B-Adapter to CH4 of the LAN Adapter, and further set the “B-Adapter connected” to “YES” using the General Setting in the Installation Parameters menu. You can check for the state with the TX-4 LED and RX4 LED of the LAN Adapter flashing. In addition, conduct Self test on the EC-1000C, i.e., analog and alarm tests by selecting [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS(Bar menu) -> Selftest. Q33.Navigation parameters cannot be saved. You need to delete “C:¥ants_system¥params” folder, and then reinstall the program.

14-7

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q34.The VRM and EBL do not smoothly move. Does this problem result from faulty rotary encoder? Further, echoes do not smoothly switch when I make range setting change. This is not a failure. The Chart Radar is just slow in software processing. Q35.How many hours of life the LCD of the display unit has? The life of MU-201CE (CR) is 30,000 hours, and the life of MU-231CE (CR) is 35,000 hours, depending on its operating environments. You can consider the life of LCD modules same as that of backlights. Q36.Let me know how I can make setting and connection of alarm output on the RPU-016 side (ARPA). You need to use ARPA Alarm in the Installation Parameter menu. The alarm output set with this menu is given to the alarm terminal of the RPU-016. Q37.Since sensitivity seems to have degraded, I want to check for magnetron current. How can I check? You need to connect the control unit of the FAR-2xx7 to the RPU-016, replace the EC-1000C motor unit with the RPU-016, and then conduct Selftest according to the same procedure as that for the FAR-2xx7. Q38.I replaced magnetron. Then, what shall I do? You need to select [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page 2, and then reset Tx time in the menu on page 2 to “0”. Q39.The Radar displays no image. Further, the error message “Connection Lost to ARPA CPU” is displayed. Have you set the Dip SW1-#3 on SPU board of the RPU-016 to ON? You also need to check for the IP setting of the LAN1 port and the setting of “Radar Echo Overlay/ARPA Communication(LAN)” in the Installation Parameters menu. Q40.What are the differences between data on “Conning Position” setting made with the General setting in the Installation Parameters menu, GPS position set with Position Equipment, and Own Ship info shown on page 2 in the Radar Initialize menu? These settings are equivalent. Set values are incorporated regardless of setting methods. To avoid any confusion, you are requested to make settings using the Installation Parameters menu.

14-8

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q41.Can RPU-016 setting be made by selecting Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize menu? Both detailed ARPA setting and echo trail level setting are made on the RPU-016 side. Consequently, to make these settings, you need to connect the control unit and display unit of the FAR-2xx7 to the RPU-016. Reference: The detailed ARPA setting means [ARP DATAIL DATA] setting on the ACQ PRESET page included in the factory setting menu (1 -> 2, 3, and 4 keys). Q42.No setting can be made even by changing the Radar number with the Radar Initialize menu. You cannot save settings on the Radar side unless you turn OFF then ON the RPU-016 power supply again. When you made any Radar number setting change, you need to make network setting of LAN-1 of the EC-1000C. Q43.Where can I make adjustment of echo trail level? This adjustment is not included in the Chart Radar menu. This adjustment is made on the RPU-016 side. Consequently, you need to connect the Monitor and Control unit to the RPU-016 and then make adjustment on the Radar side using the same Trail iron menu as FAR-2xx7 series radars. Q44.Do I need to connect GYRO data to the LAN Adapter? The data cannot be connected to the LAN Adapter. You need to connect them to the RPU-016. The data are saved in the AD format or 38.4kbps(IEC61162-2) in case of serial data. Q45.Could the Chart, Installation Parameter, Route, UChart, and Pilot Data be deleted by updating the program? NO. But you need to back up these data just in case. Q46.ARPA targets are lost. Have HDG data saved in the AD format or IEC61162-2: 38.4kbps? If YES, you need to select [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> Radar Initialize -> Page 3 and change the parameters on page 3. For detail, refer to information in the SERVICE MANUAL for the FAR-2xx7 series. In addition, you can make further detail settings on the RPU-016 side. For this purpose, you need to put the system into Factory mode and then Initialize mode to select 6: ARP PRESET -> 7 [ACQ PRESET] -> 6 [ARP DETEL DATA]. However, you should not make any setting change to parameters in these menus unless otherwise specified. Q47.Let me know the method for checking the input of serial data in the LAN Adapter. If the relevant LED of the connection port of the LAN Adapter keeps blinking, the data have been input in the LAN Adapter.

14-9

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q48.Can I monitor Sensor data vs. Serial data? You need to press over the [TAB] key while pressing the [Alt] key on the keyboard, and then select “LANINS”. You will see the “LANINS: display 0 (Press S, D, or C)” window. You can monitor these data on this window. Q49.Let me know the method for checking the B Adapter. To check each port for the control, you need to select [Menu] -> Initial Settings -> INITIAL SETTINGS -> Selftest menu, and then conduct Alarm and Analog tests. Q50.I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify position data, but no position data are displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays echoes. Normally, the position data are displayed. If no position data is input in the RPU-016 side, signal processing cannot be done on RPU-016 side. In this case, you need to make sure that the OS POSN -> NAV AID menu is set to “INS”. Or, you need to select Factory menu to set [Menu] -> Initialize -> Network -> Network setting -> Radar -> INS ADDRESS to”000.000.000.000, or to the IP address of LAN-1 of the EC-1000C. Q51. I connected the monitor to the RPU-016 to verify AIS data, but no AIS targets are displayed. Is this normal? The Chart Radar displays as the AIS targets. Yes, it is normal. In this case, no AIS data are output from the EC-1000C Q52.Is there any method for verifying the Installation Parameter file on my PC? (5-6) The sensor.prm file for the Installation Parameter set cannot be opened on a PC. To open this file, you need to conduct the following operation. Copy C:¥ants_system -> bin -> ecbhiprm.exe files and C:¥ants_system -> params -> sensor.prm files to a removable disk. Create a folder under the name of “ants_system” on the desk top of your PC, and further create two folders under the name of “bin” and “params” respectively in the “ants_system” folder. Subsequently, past the copy of the ecbhiprm.exe file to the “bin” holder, and that of the sensor.prm file to the “ants_system” folder. Clicking on the ecbhiprm.exe file will enable you to view the Installation Parameter file. However, the color shade is poor, and you cannot open the Sensor Channel Usage window. Q53.When I turn ON the power supply, a keyboard error is caused. When I plug the keyboard and press [F1] key, the system normally boots up. (12-32) In this case, you need to change the setting of HALT ON of BIOS to “ALL But Keyboard”. Furthermore, you need to check whether the battery of the SBC-PCG-820 (CPU) board runs out.

14-10

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q54.AIS targets are displayed, but I cannot transmit AIS message from the chart radar. You need to check for the Tx- 5 LED of the LAN Adapter. This LED turns ON when data is transmitted. If the LED does not turn ON, the LAN adapter (TX circuit of CH-5) has got faulty. Q55.The key of the monitor unit does not work. This is normal. The reason is that the RS232C port of the Monitor unit is connected to the COM-1 port of the EC-1000C. To conduct key operation, you need to press any of other keys while pressing the [LOCK] key or pressing the [LOCK] and the [MENU] key at one time to display the menu and set the keypad lock to “off”. Q56.Why is the RS232C port of the Monitor unit connected to the COM-1 port of the EC-1000C? The reason is that brilliance and contrast adjustment needs to be made from menu. Q57.When I turn ON the power supply and connect DVI cable, no data are displayed. This is normal. You need to connect the DVI cable, and then turn ON the power supply. As to the selection of default monitor signal for the EC-1000C, the primary device is set to RGB signal, while the second device is set to Digital display. Q58.Can I use both RGB signal and DVI signal? Yes, you can. In this case, you need to select Display Properties -> Setting -> Advanced -> Intel Extreme Graphics -> Graphics Properties, and then check “Intel(R) Dual Display Clone”. Q59.Which do you recommend us to select DVI or RGB signal for the monitor signal? Select DVI signal. Q60.I registered the wrong Computer name. Let me know how to make registration change. Even if you register the wrong name on the Chart Radar, that will present no obstacle. However, if the ECDIS is set to Multi mode, a serial number following the hyphen like “EC1000C-xxxx” should be entered. If the configuration has an underscore like “EC1000C_xxxx”, no communications with the ECDIS will be enabled. To make registration change, you need to exit the Chart Radar to return the display to Windows screen. Subsequently, you need to select Start -> Control Panel -> System to open the Computer name page, and then click on the Change button to type a new name in the Computer name box. The computer name should be configured as “EC1000C-xxxx”.

14-11

Chapter 14. Q&A

Q61.How to communication between the RPU-016 and the EC-1000C? When the power supply is turned ON, data on set values of the RPU-016 will be loaded from the EC-1000C. If any change is made to the set values on the EC-1000C side, the change will be set to the RPU-016.

14-12

Listof of Navigation Alarms Appendix 1) AP1.1 List Alarms

Description of the Alarm Priority System The permanently visible alarm is the top most urgent alarm at any moment. Alarms have priority from 1 to 10 to control urgency. Priority 1 is the highest. The list of alarms chapters show these priorities for each alarm with following syntax: “/1” at the end first line means priority = 1, “/1/8” at the end of first line means that priority is = 1, if unacknowledged and priority = 8, if acknowledged but the state of alarm still exists. Unacknowledged alarm is shown in black text (or white depending on color scheme) on red background and acknowledged alarm which still exists is shown in orange text on white background. You may view the alarms in the Alarm Queue. Place the cursor on the alarm text and then push the right mouse button. See the example below. How to read the Alarm Queue (first row as an example): - First digit “2” indicates alarm priority. - Second four digits “5100” indicate alarm number. - Text indicates reason of alarm “Safety Contour”.

In the top alarm queue example, alarm priority changes from 1 to 8 after it is acknowledged. Then alarm 5100 is assigned highest priority. In the bottom alarm queue example, the priority of alarm 5100 is changed to 10 after it is acknowledged. Then alarm 5103 is assigned highest priority.

AP1-1

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms Alarm number 1101: REFTGT: NO FILE CHOSEN /7 -----------------------------------USE 'REFERENCE TARGET' BUTTON TO CHOOSE VALID REFERENCE TARGET FILE. Alarm number 1102: REFTGT: NEED 8 TARGETS /7 -----------------------------------FILE MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST 8 TARGETS IN ORDER TO UTILIZE REFERENCE TARGETS USE 'REFERENCE TARGET' BUTTON TO CHOOSE ANOTHER REF. TARGET. Alarm number 1200: DEPTH BELOW LIMIT /5/13 -----------------------------------ECHO SOUNDER INDICATES WATER DEPTH BELOW TRANSDUCER TO EXCEED SPECIFIED SAFE LIMIT. Alarm number 2000: FILTER: POSITION UNRELIABLE /1 -----------------------------------ECDIS IS NOT ABLE TO ESTIMATE A RELIABLE POSITION. VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED AND POSITION SENSORS THROUGH SENSORS’ FUNCTION . Alarm number 2001: NO SPEED AVAILABLE /1/8 -----------------------------------NO VALID SPEED SENSOR HAS BEEN FOUND. VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED SENSORS IN 'SENSORS' BUTTON. Alarm number 2002: NO HEADING AVAILABLE /1/8 -----------------------------------NO VALID HEADING SENSOR HAS BEEN FOUND. VERIFY AND CHOOSE HEADING SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. Alarm number 2004: GYRO DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8 -----------------------------------IF YOU HAVE BOTH GYRO1 AND GYRO2 CHOSEN AND IF THEY VALUE DIFFERS MORE THAN 5 DEGREES ALARM IS GENERATED. VERIFY AND CHOOSE HEADING SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION.

AP1-2

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 2005: LOG DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8 -----------------------------------LOG GIVES 0 KN SPEED, WHICH DOES NOT CORRESPOND WITH OTHER SPEED SENSORS. VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. Alarm number 2006: ROUTE:COURSE JUMP POSSIBLE /1 -----------------------------------SYSTEM HAS AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED TO DEAD RECKONING. IF YOU NOW CHOOSE “ON” A POSITION SENSOR YOU MAY GET A JUMP FOR COURSE. CHANGE FROM ROUTE STEERING TO MANUAL STEERING OR CHECK POSITION VERY CAREFULLY BEFORE CHOOSING “ON”. Alarm number 2007: POSITION DISCREPANCY /2/9 -----------------------------------SYSTEM HAS DETECTED MORE DIFFERENCE THAN SET LIMIT BETWEEN OWN SHIP PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POSITIONS OR BETWEEN OWN SHIP AND ANY SENSOR POSITION. CHECK POSITION SENSORS. Alarm number 2008: FILTER: SPEED BELOW xx KN /1/8 -----------------------------------KALMAN FILTER REQUIRED THAT THE SPEED OF THE OWN SHIP IS MORE THAN SPEED LIMIT SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS. IF ROUTE STEERING WAS NOT USED, THEN KALMAN FILTER HAS BEEN SET AUTOMATICALLY OFF BY THE SYSTEM. Alarm number 2009: POSITION SOURCE CHANGED /1 -----------------------------------POSITION SOURCE OF OWN SHIP PRIMARY POSITION HAS BEEN CHANGED AUTOMATICLLY TO ANOTHER SOURCE THAN BEFORE. VERIFY NEW SOURCE. Alarm number 2010: FILTER:POS SOURCE CHANGE /2 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR USED IN FILTER POSITIONING HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TONORMAL. Alarm number 2011: CHARTALING:OVER 30 MINUTES /2 -----------------------------------IF POSITION ALIGNMENT IS USED THEN USER IS REMINDED OF IT EVERY 30 MIN.

AP1-3

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 2013: SOG&COG DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8 -----------------------------------SOG AND/OR COG DATA FROM SENSORS IS UNRELIABLE. VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED/COURSE AND POS SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. IF REASON IS FAST MANOUEVRE, LIMIT CAN BE INCREASED BY SETTING “MAX RATE OF TURN” LIMIT OVER 150 DEG/MIN. Alarm number 2052: ROUTE:ILLEGAL ETA WAYPOINT /7 -----------------------------------ETA WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE FILE OR ETA WAYPOINT IS NOT BETWEEN NEXT AND FINAL WAYPOINT. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS CHOSEN. Alarm number 2053: ROUTE:ILLEGAL NEXT WAYPOINT /7 -----------------------------------NEXT WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE FILE. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS CHOSEN. Alarm number 2054: ROUTE:ILLEGAL FINAL WAYPOINT /7 -----------------------------------FINAL WAYPOINT DOES NOT EXIST IN ROUTE FILE. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS CHOSEN. Alarm number 2055: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 1 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS. Alarm number 2056: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 2 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS. Alarm number 2057: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 3 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS.

AP1-4

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 2058: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 4 VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS. Alarm number 2060: ROUTE: WP CHANGE DISABLED /7 -----------------------------------NEXT WAYPOINT CANNOT BE CHANGED DURING ROUTE STEERING. CHANGE FROM ROUTE STEERING MODE BEFORE CHOOSING A NEW NEXT WAYPOINT. Alarm number 2061: CHART ALIGN: EXECUTING /7 -----------------------------------IF CHART ALIGNMENT IS DONE BY MEANS OF SELESMAR ARPA RADAR, ALARM IS DISPLAYED WHEN YOU DEFINE ALIGNMENT. Alarm number 2063: ROUTE:CHOOSE DISABLED /7 -----------------------------------A NEW ROUTE CANNOT BE CHOSEN DURING ROUTE STEERING. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL' TO OVERRIDE ROUTE STEERING BEFORE CHOOSING A NEW ROUTE. Alarm number 2064: ROUTE:CANCEL DISABLED /7 -----------------------------------A ROUTE CANNOT BE CANCELED DURING ROUTE STEERING. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL' TO OVERRIDE ROUTE STEERING BEFORE CANCELING THE ROUTE. Alarm number 2067: MANUAL DRIFT DISABLED /7 -----------------------------------MANUAL DRIFT VALUE CAN ONLY BE INSERTED WHEN NO SENSORS PROVIDE SPEED OVER GROUND DATA. USE 'SENSORS' BUTTON TO VERIFY AND CHOOSE SENSORS TO BE USED. Alarm number 2072: CHARTALIGN: NO LINE AVAIL /1 -----------------------------------TO PERFORM CHART ALIGN WITH AN ARPA RADAR THERE MUST BE TRANSFERRED USER CHART'S LINES IN THE ARPA RADAR. CHECK THAT YOUR CURRENT USER CHART HAS LINES AND THAT THEY ARE VISIBLE ON ARPA RADAR DISPLAY.

AP1-5

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 2101: USER CHART: NEED POINTS /7 -----------------------------------USER CHART HAS MORE THAN 60 LINES OR 20 SYMBOLS AND IT DOES NOT CONTAIN ANY POINTS. USE 'USER CHART' MENU TO CHOOSE A VALID USER CHART OR ADD POINTS TO CURRENT USER CHART. Alarm number 2351: REFTGT: FORCED TO CANCEL /1 -----------------------------------YOU HAVE CHOSEN NEW REFERENCE TARGETS WITHOUT FIRST CANCEL OF CURRENT ONE. THE USE OF CURRENT REFERENCE TARGETS HAS BEEN CANCELLED. Alarm number 2352: REFTGT: LOST POSITION /1 -----------------------------------YOU HAVE CHOSEN REFERENCE TARGETS AS A POSITION SOURCE AND THE SYSTEM IS UNABLE TO SOLVE OWN SHIP POSITION BASED ON REFERENCE TARGETS CHECK YOUR REFERENCE TARGET POSITIONS AND THEIR TRACKING. Alarm number 2353: REFTGT: LOST GYRO CORR. /2 -----------------------------------LOST OF GYRO ERROR CORRECTION VALUE WHICH IS BASED ON REFERENCE TARGETS TRACKING. Alarm number 2354: REFTGT: TRACKING FULL /1 -----------------------------------IF CONNECTED ARPA RADAR HAS LESS THAN 8 FREE TRACKING CHANNELS AVAIL. Alarm number 2454: ROUTE: END REACHED /1 -----------------------------------YOU HAVE PASSED THE FINAL WAYPOINT OF YOUR MONITORED ROUTE. CURRENT MONITORED ROUTE HAS AUTOMATICALLY CANCELLED. Alarm number 2457: ROUTE: OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS /3/10 -----------------------------------SHIP IS OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS SPECIFIED FOR CURRENT LEG OF ROUTE. CHECK SHIP POSITION AND ROUTE.

AP1-6

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 3000: PARAM CHANGE DISABLED /3 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CANNOT BE CHANGED IF THE ROUTE STEERING IS ON OR THE KALMAN FILTER IS IN USE. CHECK THE SITUATION AND TRY AGAIN. Alarm number 3300: SENSOR DATAFLOW ERROR /1 ----------------------------------ECDIS HAS INTERNAL SENSOR MANAGEMENT ERROR ALL CONNECTION TO SENSOR DATA IS LOST. Alarm number 3500: AIS TARGET OVERFLOW /2/9 -----------------------------------MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS SET TO BE DISPLAYED ON ECDIS HAS BEEN EXCEEDED WITHIN DEFINED MAXIMUM RANGE. IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOME OF AIS TARGETS ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON ECDIS. TO GET ALL AIS TARGETS TO BE DISPLAYED, INCREASE MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS OR DECREASE VALUE OF MAXIMUM RANGE. Alarm number 3501: AIS TARGET STORAGE FULL /2/9 -----------------------------------MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS WHICH CAN BE STORED FOR DISPLAYING ON ECDIS HAS BEEN EXCEEDED. IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOME OF AIS TARGETS ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON ECDIS. Alarm number 3502: DANGEROUS AIS TARGET /3/10 -----------------------------------AIS TARGET HAS MET DANGEROUS TARGET LIMIT SET BY CPA AND TCA. Alarm number 3503: LOST AIS TARGET /3 -----------------------------------NO UPDATE INFORMATION RECEIVED FROM TRACKED AIS TARGET WITHIN DEFINED REPORTING INTERVAL OF SHIP TYPE. Alarm number 3505: AIS TARGET IN GUARD ZONE /3 -----------------------------------AIS TARGET HAS ENTERED TO GUARD ZONE AND BECOME AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVE AIS TARGET.

AP1-7

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4000: NO SENSOR PARAMETERS /2 -----------------------------------SENSOR PARAMETER FILES ARE MISSING. LOAD INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS. IF REQUIRED USE BACKUP COPY OF PARAMETERS. Alarm number 4001: B-ADAPTER ERROR /4/11 -----------------------------------B-ADAPTER DOES NOT OPERATE DUE TO A SYSTEM FAULT. SWITCH OFF MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER AND THEN ON AGAIN. CALL SERVICE IF FAILURE STILL EXISTS. Alarm number 4002: ENGINE CONTROL COMM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------CONNECTION TO ENGINE CONTROL HAS BEEN LOST. CHECK THAT CONNECTION IS OK. Alarm number 4005: GYRO ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------GYRO1 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'INITIAL SETTINGS' MENU TO SET GYRO AGAIN. IF FAILURE STILL EXISTS, USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID SENSORS. Alarm number 4006: GYRO ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------GYRO2 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID SENSORS. Alarm number 4008: LOG ERROR /3/10 ----------------------------------LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE TO CHOOSE VALID SENSORS. Alarm number 4008: DUAL AXIS LOG (WT) ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE SPEED/COURSE PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID SPEED SENSORS. Alarm number 4009: DUAL AXIS LOG (BT) ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE SPEED/COURSE PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID SPEED SENSORS.

AP1-8

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4010: ECHO SOUNDER ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECHO SOUNDER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. VERIFY ECHO SOUNDER OPERATION. Alarm number 4011: WIND SENSOR ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------WIND SENSOR DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. VERIFY WIND SENSOR OPERATION. Alarm number 4012: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 1 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR. Alarm number 4013: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 2 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR. Alarm number 4014: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 3 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR. Alarm number 4015: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 4 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR. Alarm number 4016: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION EQUIPMENT 5 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS' POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR. Alarm number 4018: ROT GYRO ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ROT GYRO DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. VERIFY ROT GYRO DEVICE.

AP1-9

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4019: PITCH&ROLL SENSOR ERROR 3/10 -----------------------------------PITCH&ROLL DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. VERIFY SENSOR FOR PITCH&ROLL DATA. Alarm number 4021: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR FROM CHANNEL 1 REPORT RADAR SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR. Alarm number 4022: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR FROM CHANNEL 2 REPORT RADAR SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR. Alarm number 4023: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR FROM CHANNEL 3 REPORT RADAR SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR. Alarm number 4024: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------RADAR FROM CHANNEL 1 REPORT RADAR SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON' ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR. Alarm number 4027: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR.

AP1-10

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4028: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. Alarm number 4029: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. Alarm number 4030: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. Alarm number 4031: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10 -----------------------------------DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR. Alarm number 4033: ARPA RADAR SPD/CRS ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ARPA RADAR CHOSEN AS SPD AND CRS SOURCE IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE TO CHOOSE VALID SPD/CRS SENSORS. Alarm number 4034: SPEEDPILOT RECEIVE ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------DATA FROM SPEEDPILOT IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. CHECK CONNECTION OF SPEEDPILOT.

AP1-11

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4035: B-ADAPTER INTERFACE ERROR /1/8 -----------------------------------B-ADAPTER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY DUE TO INTERNAL SOFTWARE ERROR IN COMMUNICATION PROGRAM. TO RESTART COMMUNICATION PROGRAM, OPEN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS AND CLICK OK WITHOUT CHANGING ANY PARAMETERS. OR RESTART ECDIS. Alarm number 4036: AMWSS COMM ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------COMMUNICATION WITH AMWSS FAILS. CHECK CONNECTION TO AMWSS Alarm number 4037: AIS RECEIVE ERROR /6/13 -----------------------------------DATA FROM AMWSS IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY. CHECK CONNECTION TO AMWSS Alarm number 4038: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4039: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4040: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4041: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM.

AP1-12

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4042: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5 OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION IN WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4044: DATUM CHANGE /1 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4045: DATUM CHANGE /3 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4046: DATUM CHANGE /3 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4047: DATUM CHANGE /3 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4048: DATUM CHANGE /3 -----------------------------------POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5 HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM. Alarm number 4050: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 ----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 1. Alarm number 4051: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 ----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 2.

AP1-13

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4052: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 ----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 3. Alarm number 4053: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13 ----------------------------------ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 4. Alarm number 4063: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR LANADA /3/10 -----------------------------------IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN ADAPTERS IS DIFFERENT BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL PANEL AND ECDIS. Alarm number 4064: LAN FAILURE FOR LANADAPT /3/10 -----------------------------------UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN CABLE OR HUB BROKEN/DISCONNECTED. ECDIS CONTINUE OPERATION WITHOUT INTERFACES. FIX THE PROBLEM AND RESTART THE ECDIS. CHECK IP ADDRESSES. Alarm number 4065: NO LAN ADATER INSTALLED /3/10 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. “NO LAN ADAPTER(S) DEFINED. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. Alarm number 4066: LAN ADATER 1 PARAM ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. Alarm number 4067: LAN ADATER 2 PARAM ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. Alarm number 4068: LAN ADATER 3 PARAM ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN. Alarm number 4069: LAN ADATER 4 PARAM ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS SW AGAIN.

AP1-14

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4070: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR LANRAD /3/10 -----------------------------------IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN RADAR IS DIFFERENT BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL PANEL AND ECDIS. CHECK IP ADDRESSES. Alarm number 4071: LAN FAILURE FOR LANRADAR /3/10 -----------------------------------UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN CABLE BROKEN/DISCONNECTED. FIX THE PROBLEM AND RESTART THE ECDIS. Alarm number 4072: LAN RADAR 1 CONN ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 1. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR. Alarm number 4073: LAN RADAR 2 CONN ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 2. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR. Alarm number 4074: LAN RADAR 3 CONN ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 3. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR. Alarm number 4075: LAN RADAR 4 CONN ERROR /3/10 -----------------------------------ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN RADAR 4. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR. Alarm number 4083: LAN ADATER PARAM CONFLICT /3/10 -----------------------------------ID OF LAN ADAPTER ON ECDIS IS INCORRECT OR PARAMETER "F" ON LAN ADAPTER IS INCORRECT. CHECK THE PARAMETERS. Alarm number 4201: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 1 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE.

AP1-15

AP1.1 List of Navigation Alarms

Alarm number 4202: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 2 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE. Alarm number 4203: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 3 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE. Alarm number 4204: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 4 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE. Alarm number 4205: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 5 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE. Alarm number 4206: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 6 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE. Alarm number 4207: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 7 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE. Alarm number 4208: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6 -----------------------------------NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN ALARM INPUT 8 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE.

AP1-16

AP1.2 Additional Navigation Alarms

AP1.2 Additional Navigation Alarms Alarm number 4057: Water current error Alarm number 4058: Water temperature error Alarm number 4059: LAN adapter 1 error Alarm number 4060: LAN adapter 2 error Alarm number 4076: Air temperature error Alarm number 4077: Air pressure sensor

AP1-17

AP1.3 List of Chart Alarms

AP1.3 List of Chart Alarms Alarm number 5001: NEW PILOT DATA /2/10 Alarm number 5100: SAFETY CONTOUR /2/10 Alarm number 5101: AREAS TO BE AVOIDED /2/10 Alarm number 5102: SPECIALLY PROTECTED AREAS /2/10 Alarm number 5103: USER CHART DANGER AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5104: TRAFFIC SEPARATION ZONE /2/10 Alarm number 5105: TRS CROSSING/ROUND ABOUT /2/10 Alarm number 5106: TRS PRECAUTIONARY AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5107: TWO WAY TRAFFIC ROUTE /2/10 Alarm number 5108: DEEP WATER ROUTE /2/10 Alarm number 5109: RECOMMEND TRAFFIC LANE /2/10 Alarm number 5110: INSHORE TRAFFIC ZONE /2/10 Alarm number 5111: FAIRWAY /2/10 Alarm number 5112: RESTRICTED AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5113: CAUTION AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5114: OFFSHORE PRODUCTION AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5115: MILITARY PRACTICE AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5116: SEAPLANE LANDING AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5117: SUBMARINE TRANSIT LANE /2/10 Alarm number 5118: ICE AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5119: CHANNEL /2/10 Alarm number 5120: FISHING GROUND /2/10

AP1-18

AP1.3 List of Chart Alarms

Alarm number 5121: FISHING PROHIBITED /2/10 Alarm number 5122: PIPELINE AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5123: CABLE AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5124: ANCHORAGE AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5125: ANCHORAGE PROHIBITED /2/10 Alarm number 5126: DUMPING GROUND /2/10 Alarm number 5127: SPOIL GROUND /2/10 Alarm number 5128: DREDGED AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5129: CARGO TRANSSHIPMENT AREA /2/10 Alarm number 5130: INCINERATION AREA /2/10

AP1-19

AP1.4 ARPA Alarms

AP1.4 ARPA Alarms Alarm number 6*12: ARPA dangerous target Alarm number 6*13: ARPA target in guard zone Alarm number 6*14: ARPA lost target Alarm number 6*15: Rad0v STBY Warning Alarm number 6*16: ARPA Auto acq full Alarm number 6*17: ARPA Man acq full Alarm number 6*18: ARPA System error Alarm number 6*19: RadOv ARPA CPU Warning

AP1-20

Appendix 2) NMEA and IEC AP1.1Sentences IEC61162 2 ED の概要 nd

AP2.1 List of Talker name

Talker AG AP AI CD CR CS CT CV CX DE DF EC EI EP ER GL GN GP HC HE HN II IN LC P RA SD SN SS TI VD VM VW VR YX ZA ZC ZQ ZV WI

Equipment name Heading Track Controller (Autopilot): General Heading Track Controller (Autopilot): Magnetic Automatic Identification System COMMUNICATIONS: Digital Selective Calling (DSC) COMMUNICATIONS: Data Receiver COMMUNICATIONS: Satellite COMMUNICATIONS: Radio-Telephone (MF/HF) COMMUNICATIONS: Radio-Telephone (VHF) COMMUNICATIONS: Scanning Receiver DECCA Navigator Direction Finder Electronic Chart System (ECS) Electronic Chart Display & Information System (ECDIS) Emergency Position Indicating Beacon (EPIRB) Engine room Monitoring Systems GLONASS Receiver Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Global Positioning System (GPS) HEADING SENSORS: Compass, Magnetic HEADING SENSORS: Gyro, North Seeking HEADING SENSORS: Gyro, Non-North Seeking Integrated Instrumentation Integrated Navigation Loran C Proprietary Code Radar and/or Radar Plotting Sounder, depth Electronic Positioning System, other/general Sounder, scanning Turn Rate Indicator VELOCITY SENSORS: Doppler, other/general VELOCITY SENSORS: Speed Log, Water, Magnetic VELOCITY SENSORS: Speed Log, Water, Mechanical Voyage Data Recorder Transducer TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Atomic Clock TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Chronometer TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Quarts TIMEKEEPERS, TIME/DATE: Radio Update Weather Instruments

AP2-1

AP2.1 List of Talker name

Reference: Symbol characters of data A a B C c D E F f G g H h I J K k L l M m N n P Q R S s T t U u V W x y Z

Status symbol; Yes; Data Valid; Warning Flag Clear, Auto; Ampere Alphabet character variable A through Z or a through z Bars (pressure, 1000 mb=1000kPa), Bottom Celsius (Degrees); Course-up Valid character, Calculating Degrees (of Arc) Error, East; Engine Fathoms Feet Great Circle; Green Good Compass Heading; Head-up; Hertz; Humidity Hours; HEX number Inches Input operation completed Kilometers; km/hour Kilograms Left; Local; Lost Target Latitude; Liters; Liters/second Meters; Meters/second; Magnetic; Manual; Cubic Meters Minutes; message Nautical miles; Knots; North; North-up; Newton Numeral; address Purple; Proprietary (only when following $); Position sensor, Percent; Pascal (pressure) Query; Target-Being-Acquired Right; Rhumb line; Red; Relative; Reference; Radar Tracking; Rev/min (RPM) South; Statute miles; Statute miles/hour; Shaft; Salinity in parts per thousand Seconds; Six bit number Time difference; True; Track; Tracked-Target Test Dead Reckoning Estimate Sign, if minus “-” (HEX 2D) Data invalid; No; Warning Flag Set; Manual; Volt West; Water; Wheelover Numeric character variable Longitude Time

AP2-2

AP2.2 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA to ECDIS

AP2.2 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA to ECDIS 1. OSD – Own Ship Data $RAOSD , x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , N *hh 1

2

3

4

5

Contents

6

7

8

Data 1 2 3 4

Reference

Heading, degrees true Heading status, A = valid Course

Course reference, B/M/W/R/P - SPEED - COURSE - HEADING

5 6

M = manually entered W = water referenced B = bottom tracking log R = RADAR tracking of fixed target P = position system ground reference

Speed

Speed reference, B/M/W/R/P

7 8 9

9

M = manually entered W = water referenced B = bottom tracking log R = RADAR tracking of fixed target P = position system ground reference

Drift course, manually entered Drift speed, manually entered Speed units, N = knots

2. PAESP – Position Adjust $PAESP , A , x.x , x.x *hh 1

2

3

Contents - POSITION ADJUST START - POSITION ADJUST END (RANGE, BEARING)

Data 1

Command, S/E

2 3

Range Bearing

AP2-3

Command S = position adjust start E = position adjust end

AP2.2 Configuration of the Sentence from ARPA to ECDIS

3. TTM – Target $RATTM , xx , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , a , c—c , a , a , hhmmss.ss , a *hh 1

2

3

4

Contents

5

6

7

8

Data

TARGET - BEARING - DIST - SPD - CRS - TCA - CPA - NUMBER - STATUS - REF_TARGET - TIME - ACQ TYPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

9 10

11

12

Target status/Reference tgt./Acquisition

Target number, 00 to 99 Target distance from own ship Bearing from own ship, True/Relative Target speed Target course, True/Relative CPA TCPA, min., "-" increasing User data (eg. name)

9

Q = query, target in the process of acquisition T = tracking, perfect 1 = tracking, but 1 miss in last 10 scan 2 = tracking, but 2 misses in last 10 scan | 9 = tracking, but 9 misses in last 10 scan L = lost, target has been lost, 10 misses in last 10 scan R = fix target, acquired by external computer null = normal target

Target status

10 Reference tgt. = R 11

UTC time of data A = automatic M = manual R = reported

12 Acquisition

4. RSD – Radar System Data $RARSD , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , a , a *hh 1

2

3

4

5

6

Contents - TRACK BALL BEARING RANGE - EBL BEARING - VRM RANGE - STATUS DISPLAY, TRANSMITTER, ANTENNA, TRACKING, ETC...

7

Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Origin1 range Origin1 bearing VRM1, range EBL1, degrees Origin2 range Origin2 bearing VRM2, range EBL2, degrees Cursor range Cursor bearing Range scale Range units

13

Disp. rota.

AP2-4

8

9

10

11

12 13

Disp. rota.

C = course up H = head up N = north up

AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA

AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA 1. GLL – Position $ECGLL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , hhmmss.ss , A *hh 1

2

3

Talker ID

4

Data 1 2 3 4

II or EC

Disp. rota.

latitude, N/S longitude, E/W UTC of position status: A = valid

2. GGA – Position $ECGGA ,, llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , x ,,,,,,, *hh 1

2

Talker ID

3

Data 1 2

quality=Pos quality indicator.

latitude, N/S longitude, E/W 0: pos invalid 1: pos valid 2: information from DGPS is included into position, pos valid 6: dead reckoning, pos valid

EI 3

quality, 0..8

3. FUGLL – Future Position $FUGLL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , hhmmss.ss , A , x.x *hh 1

2

3

Talker ID/Contents Talker ID: fixed value FU - FUTURE POSITION (LAT,LON) - FUTURE HEADING (COURSE)

4

5

Data 1 2 3 4 5

future latitude, N/S future longitude, E/W UTC of future position status: A = valid future heading

AP2-5

Note

AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA

4. DTM – Datum $ECDTM , aaa , xx.xxx , a , xx.xxx , a , xxxx.x , aaa *hh 1

2

3

4

Talker ID

5

Data 1 2 3 4 5

EI or EC

Note

local datum latitude offset, N/S longitude offset, E/W altitude offset reference datum

e.g) WGS84

5. OSD – Own Ship Data $ECOSD , x.x , A , x.x , a , x.x , a , x.x , x.x , N , x.x , A *hh 1

2

3

4

5

6

Talker ID/Contents

7

8

9

10

Data 1 2 3

Reference

heading, degrees true heading status, A = valid course M = manually entered W = water referenced B = bottom tracking log R = RADAR tracking of fixed target P = position system ground reference

Talker ID: EC - SPEED - COURSE - HEADING

4

course reference, B/M/W/R/P

5

speed M = manually entered W = water referenced B = bottom tracking log R = RADAR tracking of fixed target P = position system ground reference

- HEADING - ERROR (ANGLE) - SIMULATION (VALID)

11

6

speed reference, B/M/W/R/P

7 8 9 10 11

drift course (NOT USED) drift speed (NOT USED) speed units, N = knots heading error simulation: A = valid

6. ZDA – UTC Time $ECZDA , hhmmss.ss , dd , mm , yyyy , hhh , mm *hh 1

2

Talker ID/Contents Talker ID: EI or EC - UTC TIME - LOCAL TIME DIFFENRENCE

3

4

Data 1 2 3 4

UTC time UTC date local hours difference local minutes difference

AP2-6

Note

AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA

7. DPT - Depth $ECDPT , x.x , x.x *hh 1

2

Talker ID/Contents

Data

Talker ID: EI, II or EC - DEPTH (DEPTH)

1 2

Note

depth, meters offset from transducer (NOT USED)

8. MWV – Wind $ECMWV , x.x , T , x.x , N , A *hh 1

2

3

4

5

Talker ID/Contents

Data

Talker ID: EI, II or EC - WIND (TRUE SPEED, TRUE COURSE)

1 2 3 4 5

Note

wind angle, 0 to 360 degrees reference, T = true wind speed wind speed units, N = knots status: A = valid

9. PAESP – Position Adjust Acknowledge $PAESP , A , x.x , x.x *hh 1

2

3

Contents

Data 1 2 3

- POSITION ADJUST ACKNOWLEDGE

Note

command, A = acknowledge range bearing

10. PAESC – Curved EBL $PAESC , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , x.x , x.x , x.x , x.x , L *hh 1

2

Contents - CURVED EBL LAT LON CRS RAD DIST NEXT CRS LOCKED VALID

3

4

5

Data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

6

7

Mode

latitude, N/S longitude, E/W course radius [0.0 .. 2.0] distance next course mode, L/M/N

L = LOCKED (curved ebl starts from given lat/lon position) M = MOVING (curved ebl starts from own ship and own ship pushes it) N = NO DATA (curved ebl is not defined)

AP2-7

AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA

11. PAESF – Fix Target Acquire/Cancel $PAESF , A , x , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a *hh 1 2

3

4

Contents

Data

- FIX TARGET ACQUIRE

1

command type, A/C

(LAT,LON,NUMBER) - FIX TARGET CANCEL (NUMBER)

2 3 4

target number, 1 to 8 latitude, N/S longitude, E/W

Note A=TARGET ACQUIRE) C=TARGET CANCEL)

12. PLSPL – Chart Segment $PLSPL , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , a , xxx , a *hh 1

2

3

Contents

- CHART SEGMENT START LAT

4

Data 1 2 3 4

7

Note

C=continuous O=dotted D=dashed T=dot - dashed E=erase 1 -- 998: legal lines 999: erase all B=blue G=green R=red C=cyan M=magenta Y=yellow W=white L=black

5

linetype

6

number

7

color

END LON LINETYPE COLOR NUMBER

6

start latitude, N/S start longitude., E/W end latitude, N/S end long., E/W

START LON END LAT

5

AP2-8

AP2.3 Configuration of the Sentence from ECDIS to ARPA

13. PLSPS – Chart Symbol $PLSPS , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , xxx , c—c , a *hh 1

2

Contents

3

4

5

Data

- CHART SYMBOL LAT

Note

1 2

latitude, N/S longitude, E/W

3

number

4

label

5

color

1..998 legal symbols 999 erase all ASCII string, 1 to 8 characters legal ASCII values from hexadecimal 20h to 7Fh B=blue G=green R=red C=cyan M=magenta Y=yellow W=white L=black E=erase

LON LABE NUMBER

14. PAESW – Waypoint List $PAESW , llll.lll , a , yyyyy.yyy , a , c—c , x , x.x , x.x , a *hh 1

2

3

Contents - WAYPOINT LIST ARRAY OF [LAT, LON, RADIUS, CHANNEL, NUMBER, MODE]

4

5

6

Data

7

Note

1 2 3 4 5 6

latitude, N/S longitude, E/W waypoint identifier number, 1 to 6 radius, 0.1 to 2.0 channel

7

mode, C/L/E

ASCII string, 1 to 8 characters

A = valid V = no waypoint L = valid and last waypoint

15. PAESN - Notebook $PAESN , A , c—c *hh 1

2

Contents NOTEBOOK (TEXT, VALID)

Data 1

status: A = valid

2

text string, 0 to 71 chars

AP2-9

Note

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces (Extracted from FEA-2107 service manual) AP2.4.1 Trackpilot When trackpilot is EMRI SEM 200 or FURUNO FAP-2000 EMRI interface is two-way and it uses similar techniques as standard NMEA V1.5, but it has special proprietary messages. Message format Use of checksum Transmitting interval Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Proprietary 4800 bit/s yes nominal is 0.4 seconds As defined in introduction. Timeout is 10 seconds.

AP2.4.2 GYRO1 AP2.4.2.1. When source is a direct gyro with analog synchro or stepper interface

Compatible devices

Operation principle Resolution

synchro stepper all alternatives are sampled using optocouplers 1/6° = 0.167°

Max rate of turn

48V, 1:360 only synchro uses reference and then timeout is 2 seconds

missing reference Detected errors

90-115V, 50Hz, 1:360 90-115V, 60Hz, 1:360 90-115V, 400Hz, 1:360 24V, 1:360

all phase lines has no signal or low signal all phase lines has high signal unexpected transition of phase lines with 50/60 Hz reference with 400 Hz reference with stepper

AP2-10

timeout is 2 seconds timeout is 2 seconds timeout is 2 seconds 500 °/min 1000 °/min 1000 °/min

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.2.2. When source is a direct gyro Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 HDT $HEHDT,359.9,T Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 15 seconds. min 1 message/second max 5 messages/second

Used fields Field 1+2

Field name Heading, degrees, true

AP2.4.2.3. When source is a trackpilot Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

NMEA V1.5 SSA $PESSA,000.0,,,,,,,,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 15 seconds. min 1 message/second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1

Field name Heading, degrees

AP2-11

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.3 GYRO2 AP2.4.3.1. When source is a trackpilot Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

NMEA V1.5 SSA $PESSA,000.0,,,,,,,,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 15 seconds. min 1 message/second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1

Field name Heading, degrees

AP2.4.4 Rate of Turn AP2.4.4.1. When source is a direct gyro Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 ROT $IIROT,-000.0,A Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 15 seconds. min 1 message/second max 5 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 2

Field name Rate of turn, degrees/min, “-“ bow turns to port Validity of Rate of turn

AP2-12

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.4.2. When source is a trackpilot Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

NMEA V1.5 SSA $PESSA, ,,,,P,,P,000.0,P,AAAA Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 15 seconds. min 1 message/second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 8

Field name Rate of turn, degrees/min, “-“ bow turns to port

AP2.4.4.3. When source is a dual axis log with internal rate of turn gyro Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

NMEA V1.5 DRU $PKDRU,,M,000.0,A, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 message / 2 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 3

Field name Rate of turn, degrees/min, “-“ bow turns to port

AP2-13

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.5 Ground speed from a dual axis log (=DAX) AP2.4.5.1. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 VBW $VDVBW,,,,10.95,2.85,A,,,,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 4 5 6

Field name Longitudinal ground speed, knots, “-” astern. Transverse ground speed, knots, “-” port. Validity flag.

AP2.4.5.2. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

NMEA V1.5 based KRUPP ATLAS proprietary VBW $PKVBW,,,,10.95,2.85,B Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 4 5 6

Field name Longitudinal ground speed, knots, “-” astern. Transverse ground speed, knots, “-” port. Validity flag.

AP2-14

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.5.3. When source is a dual axis log with transverse bow and stern measurement using PSALL message Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

NMEA V1.5 PSALL $PSALL,s00.00,s00.00,s00.00,X Talker is fixed for this proprietary message. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 2 3 4

Field name Longitudinal ground speed, knots, “-” astern. Transverse bow ground speed, knots, “-” port. Transverse bow ground speed, knots, “-” port. Mode flag.

AP2.4.6 Water speed AP2.4.6.1. When source is a pit log with closed contact interface Compatible devices Operation principle Smallest detected speed Highest detected speed Detected errors

200 pulses / NM 500 pulses /NM

pulse output closed contact is sampled using optocoupler 200 pulses / NM 500 pulses /NM 200 pulses / NM 500 pulses /NM missing pulses

AP2-15

0.7 kt 0.3 kt 35 kt 25 kt Missing pulses are detected, if the speed was over 5 kt before a state of no pulses for 30 seconds or more started.

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.6.2. When source is a dual axis log using VBW message Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 VBW $VDVBW,10.95,2.85,A,,,,,,,,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 2 3

Field name Longitudinal water speed, knots, “-” astern. Transverse water speed, knots, “-” port. Validity flag.

AP2.4.6.3. When source is a dual axis log using PKVBW message Message format Used message identifier Example of a message

NMEA V1.5 based KRUPP ATLAS proprietary VBW $PKVBW,10.95,2.85,W,,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier.

Use of talker identifier Use of checksum As defined in introduction Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 2 3

Field name Longitudinal water speed, knots, “-” astern. Transverse water speed, knots, “-” port. Validity flag.

AP2-16

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.7 Position, datum, SOG and COG from a DGPS AP2.4.7.1. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GGA $GPGGA,,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,E,2,,,,,,,, System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted.

Use of talker identifier

Use of checksum As defined in introduction Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 interruption or at no more received messages seconds. min 1 message per 5 second Receiving interval minimum and maximum max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 2+3 4+5 6

Field name Latitude Longitude GPS quality indicator

AP2.4.7.2. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GLL $GPGLL,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,,A,A System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message per 5 second max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 1+2 3+4 6 7

Field name Latitude Longitude Status Mode indicator

AP2-17

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.7.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 DTM $GPDTM,W84,,,,,,W84 Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 90 seconds. min 1 message / 30 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1

Field name Local datum. Any other alternative than “W84” create datum error

AP2.4.7.4. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 VTG $GPVTG,000.0,T,000.0,M,00.0,N,00.0,K System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 3 5 7

Field name Course, degrees, true. Course, degrees, magnetic. Speed, knots. Speed, km/h

AP2-18

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.7.5. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 VTG $GPVTG,000.0,T,000.0,M,00.0,N,00.0,K,A System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 3 5 7 9

Field name Course, degrees, true. Course, degrees, magnetic. Speed, knots. Speed, km/h Position system mode indicator. The content of this must be identical to GGA message GPS quality indicator.

AP2.4.8 Position, datum, SOG and COG from any other source than DGPS Typical examples are such as GPS, LORAN.

AP2.4.8.1. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 GLL $GPGLL,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,,A System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message per 5 second max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 1+2 3+4 6

Field name Latitude Longitude Status

AP2-19

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.8.2. Position (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GLL $GPGLL,0000.00000,N,0000.00000,,A,A System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message per 5 second max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 1+2 3+4 6 7

Field name Latitude Longitude Status Mode indicator

AP2.4.8.3. Datum (only IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 DTM $GPDTM,W84,,,,,,W84 Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 90 seconds. min 1 message / 30 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1

Field name Local datum. Any other alternative than “W84” create datum error

AP2-20

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.8.4. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.1) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 VTG $GPVTG,000.0,T,000.0,M,00.0,N,00.0,K System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 3 5 7

Field name Course, degrees, true. Course, degrees, magnetic. Speed, knots. Speed, km/h

AP2.4.8.5. SOG and COG (IEC 61162-1 Ed.2) Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 VTG $GPVTG,000.0,T,000.0,M,00.0,N,00.0,K System accepts either only selected talker or any talker is accepted. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 2 messages/second

Used fields Field 1 3 5 7 9

Field name Course, degrees, true. Course, degrees, magnetic. Speed, knots. Speed, km/h Position system mode indicator. The content of this must be identical to GLL message mode indicator.

AP2-21

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.9 System time from a GPS AP2.4.9.1. System time Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum

Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 ZDA $GPZDA,000000.00,,,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction For checksum as defined in introduction. The system doesn’t require that ZDA messages are received. ZDA message is only used to synchronise system clock if the difference is more than 5 seconds and if the system is not part of steering and if the system doesn’t have active Kalman filter. No minimum rate of messages max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 1

Field name UTC

AP2.4.10 Water depth AP2.4.10.1. When source is an echosounder Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 DBT $IIDBT,20.0,f,6.1,M,3.3,F Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message / 5 second max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 1+2 3+4 5+6

Field name Water depth, feet Water depth, meter Water depth, fathom

AP2-22

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.11 Wind AP2.4.11.1. When source is a wind sensor Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 MVW $WIMWV,000.0,R,00.0,N,A Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message / 10 second max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 1 2 3 4 5

Field name Wind angle Reference Wind Speed Wind speed units Status

AP2.4.12 Water temperature AP2.4.12.1. When source is a water temperature sensor Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 MTW $WIMTV,00.0,C Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds. min 1 message / 10 second max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 1 2

Field name temperature Temperature, degrees

AP2-23

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.13 ARPA targets AP2.4.13.1. When source is a radar using TTM message Typical examples are FURUNO and other radar using generic IEC 61162-1 Ed.1. Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum

Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 TTM $RATTM,00,0.000,0.00,T,0.0,0.0,T,,,N,,T,R,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted withany talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Note1: System doesn’t supervise reception of TTM messages, but system supervises ARPA target life. Basis of target life supervise is the target number. System can receive up to 40 targets, which are numbered from 1 to 40. TTM message can inform an ECDIS about a target measurement, but TTM message cannot tell an ECDIS about lost or cancelled target. Thus system internally cancels ARPA targets, which have been silent for last 15 seconds. Here silent is “no TTM message with given target number received”. Note2: If system has received from ARPA radar at least one OSD message, then system assumes that existence of OSD message is a mandatory requirement to accept TTM messages. Timeout is in this case 20 seconds. For all TTM messages: no min number of messages per time unit max 4 messages / second For TTM messages from a numbered target: min 1 message / 10 seconds max 1 message / 2 seconds Note: 40 targets and max 4 messages per second is equal to 1 message / 10 seconds for each target

AP2-24

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

Used fields Field 1 2 3+4 5 6+7 8 9 10 12 13

Field name Target number Target distance from own ship Bearing from own ship, degrees True/relative Target speed Target course, degrees True/relative Distance to closest point of approach Time to CPA Speed / distance units Target status Reference target

AP2.4.13.2. When source is a Furuno radar with ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface Furuno Voyager interface uses similar techniques as standard IEC 61162-1, but it has special additional messages and a little bit different interpretation of some standard message. Message format Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Proprietary 4800 bit/s As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds.

AP2.4.14 Speed and course from an ARPA radar AP2.4.14.1. When source is a radar using OSD message Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 OSD $RAOSD,,,000.0,B,00.0,B,,, Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 message / 5 seconds max 1 message/second

Used fields Field 3+4 5+6

Field name Vessel course, degrees true Course reference Vessel speed, Speed reference

AP2-25

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.14.2. When source is a Furuno radar with ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface Furuno Voyager interface uses similar techniques as standard IEC 61162-1, but it has special additional messages and a little bit different interpretation of some standard message. Message format Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Proprietary 4800 bit/s As defined in introduction. Timeout is 20 seconds.

AP2.4.15 Optional signals for Conning Display from Engine Control AP2.4.15.1. When source is simulated SINDEL Engine Control Simulated SINDEL Engine Control uses proprietary messages based on standard NMEA V1.5. Message format Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Proprietary 4800 bit/s As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds.

AP2.4.15.2. When source is NORCONTROL Engine Control NORCONTROL Engine Control uses proprietary messages based on standard NMEA V1.5. Message format Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Proprietary 4800 bit/s As defined in introduction. Timeout is 30 seconds.

AP2-26

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.16 Transmitted messages to an ARPA radar When ARPA radar uses standard messages AP2.4.16.1. Datum Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 DTM $EIDTM,W84,,00.000,N,00.000,E,0000.0,W84 EI yes once before WPL messages

Used fields Field 1

Field name local datum “W84”

AP2.4.16.2. Own ship position Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 GLL $ECGLL,0000.000,N,00000.000,E,,A,A EC. yes nominal is 0.8 seconds

Used fields Field 1+2 3+4 6

Field name latitude in WGS 84 datum longitude in WGS 84 datum Status

AP2-27

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.16.3. Depth below transducer Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 DPT $ECDPT,1234.5, EC. yes nominal is 4.8 seconds

Used fields Field 1 2

Field name Water depth relative to the transducer Offset from transducer

AP2.4.16.4. Wind Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 MWV $ECMWV,000.0,T,00.0,N,A EC. yes nominal is 4.8 seconds

Used fields Field 1 2 3 4 5

Field name Wind angle Reference Wind speed Wind speed units Status

AP2.4.16.5. When ARPA radar uses Furuno ”Voyager” Integrated Bridge System interface Furuno Voyager interface uses similar techniques as standard IEC 61162-1 Ed.1, but it has special additional messages. Message format

Proprietary 4800 bit/s

AP2-28

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.16.6. When ARPA radar is a Selesmar radar Selesmar interface uses proprietary binary format Message format

Proprietary binary

AP2.4.17 AIS Targets AP2.4.17.1. When source is AIS Transponder Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Use of talker identifier Use of checksum

Behaviour at checksum miss match, at line interruption or at no more received messages

Receiving interval minimum and maximum

IEC 61993-2 Ed.1 38400 bit/s !AIVDM Only message types 1,2,3 and 5 are used. !AIVDO !AIVDM,….. Talker is don’t care for system. Messages are accepted with any talker identifier. As defined in introduction As defined in introduction. Note that message !AIVDO is used to check that the AIS transponder itself is fully operative. If no !AIVDO messages are received then no !AIVDM message is accepted. Timeout is 20 seconds. min 1 !AIVDO message / 10 second max full line load without interruption

AP2.4.18 Route backup to external device AP2.4.18.1. Datum Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 DTM $EIDTM,W84,,00.000,N,00.000,E,0000.0,W84 EI yes once before WPL messages

Used fields Field 1

Field name local datum “W84”

AP2-29

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.18.2. Waypoint Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 WPL $EIWPL,00 00.000,N,000 00.000,E,1 EI yes Once a burst of WPL messages after DTM message. Max number of transmitted waypoints is 30.

Used fields Field 1+2 3+4 5

Field name latitude in WGS 84 datum longitude in WGS 84 datum number of waypoint

AP2.4.18.3. Route Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 RTE $EIRTE,1,1,C,1,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 EI yes once a burst of RTE messages after WPL messages

Used fields Field 1 2 3 4 5….15

Field name total number of messages transmitted message number message mode is “C” = complete route identifier 15 number of waypoint

F

AP2-30

AP2.4 FEA-2107 Interfaces

AP2.4.19 Route restore from external device AP2.4.19.1. Waypoint Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 WPL $EIWPL,00 00.000,N,000 00.000,E,1 EI yes Once a burst of WPL messages . Max number of received waypoints is 200.

Used fields Used fields Field 1+2 3+4 5

Field name latitude in WGS 84 datum longitude in WGS 84 datum number of waypoint

AP2.4.19.2. Route Message format Used message identifier Example of a message Used of talker identifier Use of checksum Transmitting interval

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 RTE $EIRTE,1,1,C,1,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 EI yes once a burst of RTE messages after WPL messages

Used fields Field 1 2 3 4 5…15

Field name total number of messages transmitted message number message mode is “C” = complete route identifier number of waypoint

AP2-31

AP2.5 Sensor Data

AP2.5 Sensor Data AP2.5.1 Sensor and Installation parameter diagram

Gyro Analog

synchro or stepper

DCODRIVE gyro1:if_type=Stepper/Synchro (uses B-Adapter) CMPRXPRO gyro1:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxHDT)

$xxHDT

GYRO IEC 61162-1 Ed2 or Ed.1

$xxR

OT

GYRO1

$PES

yro2)

SA

(gy

fa Ind

GYRO2

APLDRIVE gyro2:if_type= Trackpilot (double gyro2) APLDRIVE rot:if_type= Trackpilot (double gyro1&2)

ROT

SA (g

ES

ica

tio

APLDRIVE gyro2:if_type= Trackpilot

$PESSA (gyro)

$P

no

APLDRIVE gyro1:if_type= Trackpilot (double gyro1)

calculation

TRACKPILOT (Only EMRI) NMEA V1.5

1)

yro

A (g

SS

$PE

APLDRIVE gyro1:if_type= Trackpilot

(

A

SS

E $P

)

ro gy

cti ve

CMPRXPRO rot:if_type= Gyro1:IEC 61162-1 ($xxROT)

ro2

)

$P

ES

SA

APLDRIVE rot:if_type= Trackpilot

or VBW

SAL

$PS

DAXRXPRO dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxVBW)

$PK

DAX or LOG NMEA V1.5

$PKVBW

DAXRXPRO dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($PSALL)

$PK

DAX Ground Speed

DRU

DAXRXPRO dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxVBW) DAX or LOG IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or Ed.1

$xxVBW

DAXRXPRO dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxVBW)

$xx

VBW

LOG Water Speed

DAXRXPRO dax:if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxVBW) LOG Analog

200p/nm

AIS TRANSPONDER IEC 61993-2 Ed.1

!xxVDO and !xxVDM

ROUTE BACKUP IEC 61162-1 Ed2

$EIDTM, $EIWPL and $EIRTE

DCODRIVE log:if_type=Analog Pulses (uses B-Adapter)

AISDRIVE if_type= IEC 61162-2 (38400bit/s)

AIS TARGETS

EXTTRPRO if_type= Route backup IEC 61162-1

ECHOSOUNDER IEC 61162-1 Ed2 or Ed.1

$xxDPT

ECHRXPRO if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxDPT)

DEPTH

WIND SENSOR IEC 61162-1 Ed2 or Ed.1

$xxMWV

WNDRXPRO if_type= IEC 61162-1 ($xxMWV)

WIND

AP2-32

AP2.5 Sensor Data

ARPA RADAR (SELESMAR) binary serial

SELDRIVE if_type= Selesmar Status 12 bytes, Selesmar Status 13bytes, Selesmar Status 14 bytes or Selesmar New Checksum

proprietary binary 9600 bit/s proprietary binary 9600 bit/s $xxOSD, $xxTTM and $PAESP

ARPA RADAR (FURUNO) IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

ARPA RADAR (FURUNO) IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

RADRIVE if_type= FURUNO IEC 61162-1 ( talker ID=II) $IIDTM,$IIGLL,$IIMVW,$IIDPT, $FUGLL,$PLSPL,$PLPSP,$PAESC, $PAESF,$PAESN,$PAESP and $PAESW

ARPA TARGETS

$xxOSD, $xxTTM and $PAESP

RADRIVE if_type= FURUNO IEC 61162-1 ( talker ID=EC)

$ECDTM,$ECGLL,$ECMVW,$ECDPT, $FUGLL,$PLSPL,$PLPSP,$PAESC, $PAESF,$PAESN,$PAESP and $PAESW ARPA RADAR (IMO compliant) IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or Ed.1

SPEED & COURSE from ARPA

$xxOSD and $xxTTM

RADRIVE if_type= FURUNO IEC 61162-1 ( talker ID=EI)

$EIDTM,$EIGLL,$EIMVW and $ECDPT $AMACK ALARXPRO if_type= IEC 61162-1 (AMWSS)

AMWSS $PNEDA,$PNEDB,$PNEAL and $PNERI

A

GG

rom

LL

GL m

$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

D

fro

DGPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

a

G

fro

ta

$xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

m

at

VT

Da

DGPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

G

an

fro

$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

GPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

GPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

LORAN IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

$xxDTM,$xxGLL and $xxVTG

LORAN IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

$xxGLL and $xxVTG

LORAN IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

$xxDTM,$LCGLL and $LCVTG

LORAN IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

$LCGLL and $lcVTG

POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 ident=GLL talker=GP spd talker=GP POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 ident=GLL talker=xx spd talker=xx POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 ident=GLL talker=LC spd talker=LC

AP2-33

A

GPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 ident=GLL talker=xx spd talker=xx

ZD

A

Data

from

ZDA

UTC TIME

Data from ZDA

om

a fr

$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

ZD

m

Dat

GPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

m

POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or ident=GLL talker=GP spd talker=GP

ta

fro

$xxDTM,$xxGLL,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

Da

a

DGPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or ident=GLL talker=xx spd talker=xx

at

D

$xxDTM,$xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 ident=GGA talker=GP spd talker=GP

VT

d

f ata

D

DGPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

DGPS POSITION SOG & COG

G

d an

G

$xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

VTG

A and

om GG

Data fr

VT

DGPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

POSDRIVE f_type=IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 ident=GGA talker=xx spd talker=xx

nd

$xxDTM,$xxGGA,$xxVTG and $xxZDA

La

DGPS IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

ZDA

A

m

ta

ZD

fro

Da

Dat

a fr

om

GLL

and

Data from GLL and VTG

VTG

GPS POSITION SOG & COG

LORAN POSITION SOG & COG

AP2.5 Sensor Data

AP2.5.2 Source of Position The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The Kalman filter uses all position sensors which have either primary or secondary as input for its calculation. DGPS and SYLEDIS position sensors are considered more accurate than other position sensors. The latitude and longitude position is shown at the upper right corner on the chart radar display, and in the example below the position source is DGPS. Other indications which may be displayed in the position area are as follows: - NO POSIT: Appears (in red) when no dead reckoning sensors are chosen and valid. - DEAD REC: Shown (in red) when position source is dead reckoning. - DGPS, GPS, LORAN: Name of position source. - LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the user-selected DGPS device has lost the DGPS signal. - FIL LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the Kalman filter is in use and the user-selected DGPS device has lost the DGPS signal. - FILTER HIGH: Shown when the position source is the Kalman filter with high-precision position sensor. - FILTER: Shown when position source is the Kalman filter without high-precision position sensor. - BAD FILTER: Shown (in red) when position source is the Kalman filter and the filter has excluded at least one of the chosen sensors because of poor accuracy. Selected and position exists

KALMAN filter Not selected or no position GPS in diff.

Selected and position exists

Mode selected as

Not selected or no position GPS in diff. Mode selected as SECONDARY

Selected and position exists

Not selected or no position Any other than GPS in diff. Mode selected as

Not selected or no position Any other than GPS in diff. Mode selected as SECONDARY

Selected and position exists

Selected and position exists

Not selected or no position Selected and no position

Backup Dead Reckoning

AP2-34

Position used by the system

AP2.5 Sensor Data

AP2.5.3 HDG Data

Manual COURSE Not selected GYRO 1 Not selected or no value GYRO 2

Selected Selected and value exists

Selected and value exists

Heading used by system

Not selected or no value GYRO from RADAR

Available

Not available Alarm 2002 No Course Available

AP2.5.4 ROT Data ROT used by system is shown in the Spd/Cse page of SENSORS dialog box. The Rate Gyro field shows the text “(calc.)” when the system calculates ROT from movement of heading. No text is shown when the value is received from an ROT gyro.

Calculated ROT from movement of Heading Not selected in Installation parameters

Selected in Installation parameters

Value exists

ROT Gyro No value Alarm 4018 ROT gyro error

AP2-35

ROT used by system

AP2.5 Sensor Data

AP2.5.5 SOG/COG Data SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the chart radar display. Text which denote SOG/COG source are; - bot: Bottom tracking dual-axis log - wat: Water tracking log - pos: Average of chosen position sensors - filter: KALMAN filter Average of SOG/COG from all selected DGPS, GPS

- arpa: Combined data of COG and SOG - calc: speed calculated from SOG - man: Manual entry

Selected and value exists

Not selected or no value DUALLOG (Bottom track of dual axis Doppler log

Selected and value exists

Not selected or no value RADAR (measures SOG/COG from target = Auto drift)

Selected and value exists

Not selected or no value Average of SOG/COG from all selected Decca, Loran or Ref.Target

Selected and value exists

Not selected or no value KALMAN filter calculation result from the movement of position

Selected and value exists

Not selected or no value Water speed and Gyro heading

AP2-36

SOG/COG used by the system

AP2.5 Sensor Data

AP2.5.6 Source of Docking speed components: Conning and Docking Docking speed components are bow speed (transversal), stern speed (transversal) and center speed (longitudinal).

Installation parameter offset values ROT used by the system SOG/COG used by the system

Calculator

Speed (water speed) used by the system

Bow and stern speed used by the system

Heading used by the system

AP2.5.7 Source of Drift Drift used by the system is shown in the “Other page” of the Sensors dialog box. Text which may appear to show source of set and drift are; - log: Log or dual axis log - posit: Position sensor - filter: KALMAN filter - man: Manual entry Selected Manual DRIFT

Not selecte

Drift used by the system

SOG/COG used by the system Speed (water speed) used by the system

Calculator

Heading used by the system

AP2-37

AP2.5 Sensor Data

AP2.5.8 Source of Water Speed for drift calculation “SOG, COG” is speed over ground and course over ground, respectively. “Speed” is speed over water, “Drift” is the difference between speed over water and speed over ground. The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation. Manual SPEED

Selected

Not selected LOG (Water track of dual axis doppler log OR Pilot log)

Selected and value exist

Not selected or no value RADAR (measures water speed)

Selected and value exist

Not selected or no value SOG, if available from any of selected position receiver

Available

Not available Alarm 2001 No Speed Available

AP2-38

Speed used by the system (Water Speed)

Alternative

Default

Alternative 1 Alternative 2

Default

Default

Alternative 1 Alternative 2 Alternative 3

Default

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Alternative 3 Alternative 4 Alternative 5 Alternative 6 Alternative 7

Interface

Gyro

Gyro Gyro

Trackpilot

Log

Log Log Log

Position 1

Position 1

Position 1

Position 1 Position 1 Position 1 Position 1 Position 1

Yes

Yes

Yes Yes

Option

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 NMEA V1.5 NMEA V1.5 Pulse

Serial 4800bit/s

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 Stepper Synchro

Signal type

AP2-39

GGA, DTM, VTG, ZDA GGA, DTM, VTG GLL, DTM, VTG, ZDA GLL, DTM, VTG GGA, VTG, ZDA GGA, VTG GLL, VTG, ZDA GLL, VTG

Proprietary PKVBW Proprietary PSALL

VBW

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

HDT

Received message

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Transmitted message

For any EPFS For DGPS For DGPS For other than DGPS For other than DGPS

For any EPFS

For DGPS

For DGPS

Min 1 message per 2 second Min 1 message per 2 second 200 pulses / NM

Min 1 message per 2 second

For EMRI SEM 200 trackpilot

1 step per 1/6°, requires B-Adapter Synchro 1:360, requires B-Adapter

min 1 message per second

Notes

The tables below contain description of interfaces and optional components usable in the system. Alternatives, which might be available from the installation parameters, are not recommended for the system. “Default” is recommended.

AP2.5.9 Summary of interfaces and optional components

AP2.5 Sensor Data

Alternative 2

Alternative 3 Alternative 4 Alternative 5 Alternative 6 Alternative 7

Default

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Alternative 3 Alternative 4 Alternative 5 Alternative 6 Alternative 7

Default

Position 2

Position 2 Position 2 Position 2 Position 2 Position 2

Position 3

Position 3

Position 3

Position 3 Position 3 Position 3 Position 3 Position 3

ARPA radar 1

ARPA radar 1

Alternative 1 FURUNO VOYAGER Alternative 2 SELESMAR

Alternative 1

Position 2

ARPA radar 1

Default

Position 2

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Serial 9600bit/s

Serial 4800bit/s

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

AP2-40

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA Proprietary binary messages

TTM, OSD

GGA, DTM, VTG, ZDA GGA, DTM, VTG GLL, DTM, VTG, ZDA GLL, DTM, VTG GGA, VTG, ZDA GGA, VTG GLL, VTG, ZDA GLL, VTG GGA, DTM, VTG, ZDA GGA, DTM, VTG GLL, DTM, VTG, ZDA GLL, DTM, VTG GGA, VTG, ZDA GGA, VTG GLL, VTG, ZDA GLL, VTG GLL, DTM, MWV, DPT Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5 Proprietary binary messages

For SELESMAR ARPA radar

For FURUNO ARPA radar with VOYAGER Integrated Bridge System interface

For any ARPA radar

For any EPFS For DGPS For DGPS For other than DGPS For other than DGPS

For any EPFS

For DGPS

For DGPS

For any EPFS For DGPS For DGPS For other than DGPS For other than DGPS

For any EPFS

For DGPS

For DGPS

AP2.5 Sensor Data

Route backup for external device Route backup and restore for Furuno GP-80

AMWSS

Water Temperature sensor AIS transponder

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

Yes

Yes

AP2-41

EIWPL, EIRTE

Send once after selection of Monitored Route Send once after selection of Monitored Route Received once after Route import from external device

EIDTM, EIWPL, EIRTE EIDTM, EIWPL, EIRTE

This interface is required for Lloyds Register class notation NAV1 IBS

Serial 4800bit/s

Proprietary ASCII messages based on IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

Yes

Min 1 !AIVDO per 10 seconds

!AIVDM, !AIVDO

IEC 61993-2 Ed.1 Serial 38400bit/s

Min 1 message per 10 second

Min 1 message per 10 second

Min 1 message per 10 second

For SELESMAR ARPA radar

For FURUNO ARPA radar with VOYAGER Integrated Bridge System interface

For any ARPA radar

For SELESMAR ARPA radar

For FURUNO ARPA radar with VOYAGER Integrated Bridge System interface

For any ARPA radar

Yes

Proprietary ASCII messages based on IEC 61162-1 Ed.2

GLL, DTM, MWV, DPT Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5 Proprietary binary messages GLL, DTM, MWV, DPT Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5 Proprietary binary messages

MTW

DBT

MWV

TTM, OSD + proprietary messages Proprietary binary messages

TTM, OSD

TTM, OSD + proprietary messages Proprietary binary messages

TTM, OSD

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1 IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

Serial 9600bit/s

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

Serial 9600bit/s

IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

IEC 61162-1 Ed.2 or IEC 61162-1 Ed.1

Yes

Yes

Echo sounder

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Alternative 1 FURUNO VOYAGER Alternative 2 SELESMAR

Default

Alternative 1 FURUNO VOYAGER Alternative 2 SELESMAR

Default

Wind sensor

ARPA radar 3

ARPA radar 3

ARPA radar 3

ARPA radar 2

ARPA radar 2

ARPA radar 2

AP2.5 Sensor Data

Yes

Navigation sensor alarm

Engine start air pressure

Alternative 2

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Buzzer stop

Radar echo overlay Engine start air pressure

Yes

Alarm Ack

Alternative 1

Yes

Depth below limit

Any ECDIS alarm IEC 62065 Backup navigator alarm Operator fitness

Contact output

Yes

Outside channel limits

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

See separate table

Contact input

Contact input

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

AP2-42

From NORCONTROL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

Requires Radar Echo Overlay card

Closed when a key is pressed on control panel Closing of this acknowledge current alarm Closing of this mute buzzer but do not acknowledge current alarm

Open when backup navigator alarm

Contact output

Contact output

Open when any ECDIS alarm

Open when ECDIS failure Open when outside, requires either 2nd LAN-Adapter EC-1010 or B-Adapter EC-1020 Open when below limit, requires Echosounder and either 2nd LAN-Adapter EC-1010 or B-Adapter EC-1020 Open when any navigation sensor alarm, requires either 2nd LAN-Adapter EC-1010 or B-Adapter EC-1020

Contact output

Contact output

Contact output

Contact output

ECDIS failure

AP2.5 Sensor Data

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Alternative 3

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Alternative 3

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Alternative 3

Air pressure

Air pressure

Fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

Rudder 1

Rudder 1

Rudder 1

Rudder 2

Rudder 2

Rudder 2

Propeller 1 RPM

Propeller 1 RPM

Propeller 1 RPM

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

NMEA V1.5

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

AP2-43

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5 Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5 Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5 Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

From NORCONTROL Engine control

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From Engine control

From EMRI SEM 200 or FURUNO FAP-2000 track pilot

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From Engine control

From EMRI SEM 200or FURUNO FAP-2000 track pilot

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From NORCONTROL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

AP2.5 Sensor Data

Alternative 2

Thruster 1 (stern)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Alternative 1

Thruster 1 (stern)

Yes

Alternative 3

Alternative 2

Propeller 2 Pitch

Yes

Yes

Alternative 1

Propeller 2 Pitch

Yes

Alternative 2

Alternative 2

Propeller 2 RPM

Yes

Yes

Alternative 1

Propeller 2 RPM

Yes

Yes

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Propeller 1 Pitch

Thruster 1 (stern) Azimuth Thruster 1 (stern) Azimuth Thruster 1 (stern) Azimuth

Alternative 1

Propeller 1 Pitch

NMEA V1.5

2 x Analogue voltage

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

AP2-44

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

2 separate voltage signals, which represent sine and cosine of angle. Requires B-Adapter Ec-1020

Single linear voltage from 0° to 360° Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

AP2.5 Sensor Data

Alternative 2

Alternative 3

Thruster 3 (bow) Azimuth

Thruster 3 (bow) Azimuth

Alternative 1

Alternative 2

Thruster 3 (bow)

Thruster 3 (bow) Thruster 3 (bow) Azimuth

Alternative 1

Thruster 3 (bow)

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

NMEA V1.5

2 x Analogue voltage

Analogue voltage

Analogue voltage

NMEA V1.5

Analogue voltage

AP2-45

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

Proprietary ASCII messages based on NMEA V1.5

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020 Single linear voltage from 0° to 360° Requires B-Adapter EC-1020 2 separate voltage signals, which represent sine and cosine of angle. Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

From simulated SINDEL Engine control

Requires B-Adapter EC-1020

AP2.5 Sensor Data

Appendix 3) Specifications Appendix 3) Specifications 1. GENERAL 1.1 Model Model

Frequency Band

FCR-2117 FCR-2127 FCR-2817 FCR-2827 FCR-2117-BB FCR-2127-BB FCR-2827W FCR-2137S FCR-2837S FCR-2837SW

20.1" X-band

23.1" User supply 23.1" 20.1"

S-band

23.1"

Output Power 12 kW 25 kW 12 kW 25 kW 10 kW 25 kW 25 kW

30 kW

User supply

FCR-2137S-BB

1.2 Display Unit - Display - Scan system - Picture

Display

Transceiver location

In Antenna unit

TR unit In Antenna unit TR unit In Antenna unit

Radiator

204 cm, 255 cm

309 cm, 377 cm

Raster scan, daylight bright, single or multicolor (32) Interlace (horizontal, 48.3 kHz, vertical 60 Hz)

Size Display range Resolution Effective display area

- Display mode - Presentation mode

FCR-2107 series 20.1-inch LCD 408×306 1280×1024 pixel 250 mm

FCR-2807 series 23.1-inch LCD 470.4×352.8 1600×1200 pixel 340 mm

Radar mode, Chart radar mode, ECDIS mode Head-up, Heading-up TB, Course-up, Course-up true, North-up, North-up true

AP3-1

Appendix 3) Specifications

2. RADAR/CHART RADAR 2.1 Antenna unit - Type Slotted waveguide array Antenna Radiators - Polarization Horizontal - Wind resistance Relative wind 100 kt - Beam width and side lobe attenuation X-band XN20AF XN24AF 204 cm 255 cm 1.23° 0.95° 20° -28 dB -32 dB

Length Beam width(H) Beam width(V) Sidelobe within ±10° Sidelobe outside ±10°

- Rotation

S-band SN30AF SN36AF 309 cm 377 cm 2.3° 1.8° 25° -24 dB -30 dB

FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827: 24 rpm or 42 rpm FCR-2137S/2837S : 21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz)/ 45 rpm (High Speed Craft) FCR-2827W : 24 rpm FCR-2837SW : 21 rpm (50 Hz)/26 rpm (60 Hz)

2.2 Transceiver - Frequency

X-band: 9410 MHz ± 30 MHz S-band: 3050 MHz ± 30 MHz - Output power FCR-2117/2817: 12 kW FCR-2127/2827: 25 kW FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW: 30 kW Unwanted emissions comply with ITU-R RR. - Pulse length, PL, PRR and range

Pulselength

S1

S2

M1

M2

M3

L

PL (µs) PRF (Hz)

0.07 3000* 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5

0.15 3000*

0.3 1500

0.5 1000

0.7 1000

1.2 600**

0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3

0.75, 1.5, 3, 6

3, 6, 12, 24

3, 6, 12, 24

6, 12, 24, 48, 96

Range scale(nm)

*: 2200 Hz with ARPA on 32 nm range **: 450 Hz on 96 nm range

AP3-2

Appendix 3) Specifications

- IF - Noise figure - Duplexer

60 MHz X-band: 6 dB, S-band: 4 dB Ferrite circulator with diode limiter: FCR-2117/2127/2137S/2817/2827/2837S Ferrite circulator with TR limiter: FCR-2827W/2837SW

2.3 Display-related specifications - Minimum range 20 m w/raw video + 0 - 2 m w/digitize error - Range discrimination 20 m w/raw video + 0 - 6 m w/digitize error -Range scales (nm), range ring interval 0.125 (0.025), 0.25 (0.05), 0.5 (0.1), 0.75 (0.25), 1.5 (0.25), 3(0.5), 6 (1), 12 (2), 24 (4), 48 (8), 96 (16) - Range accuracy Within 1% or 10 m, whichever is greater - Bearing discrimination 1.5° (XN20AF), 1.2° (XN24AF), 2.5° (SN30AF), 2.0° (SN36AF) - Bearing accuracy ±1° - Radar map Route, coastline, buoy, etc. 20,000 pts. in radar mode, 6,000 pts. in chart mode (using IC card) - ARPA/ATA Acquisition: 0.1 - 32 nm, 100 targets (auto and/or manual, selectable from menu) Vector time: 7 times (OFF to 30 m) Time from acquisition to display: within 60 s at 24 rpm Trail maneuver available - AIS Complies with IMO SN CIRC. 217, IEC60936-5 - Max. no of targets 200 targets; Safety messages: 100 - Safety msg input Address-specific, all ships - Data display Ship's name, call sign, L/L, range, heading, course, speed, CPA/TCPA, BCR/BCT, ROT, IMO no., MMSI no, etc.

3. ECDIS 3.1 Display contents - Chart materials - Own ship display - Other ship display

- Other data

IHO/IMO S57 edition-3 ENC vectorized material Own ship mark and numeral indication or lat/lon, speed and course ARPA target mark and numerical data (range and bearing from own ship, course, speed, CPA,TCPA) Route, waypoint, nav line, electronic chart, various alarms

AP3-3

Appendix 3) Specifications

3.2 Other display features - Cursor - One-touch restore - Chart data

Chart zoom in and zoom out EBL, VRM, parallel cursor One-touch restore of standard mode Select to show applicable data

3.3 User interface - Position fixing

- Navigation by position from external EPFS - Dead reckoning by gyro, log - Kalman filter determines best position from gyro data and EPFS - Navigation planning - Planning by Rhumb line, Great circle - Route creation - Route data may be transferred to radar - Route data may be transferred from ECDIS - Route monitoring - Off-track display - Waypoint arrival alarm - Shallow depth alarm - User chart User chart creation (Max. 2000 lines, 1000 symbols), with overlay - MOB (Man Overboard) Position, etc. at time of man overboard are recorded and MOB mark is displayed on the screen.

4. I/O 4.1 Heading data

Built-in interface (option) for sync signal (20 - 135 VAC, 50 - 400 Hz), or stepper signal (20 - 100 VDC), any polarity, for gyrocompass, GPS compass SC-60/120 by IEC 61162-2

4.2 Speed signal

IEC 61162-1

4.3 AIS interface

IEC 61162-1, ABM, BDM, etc.

4.4 Input sentences

BWC, BWR, DBS, DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, HDT, RMA, RMB, RMC, RTE, VBW, VDR, VHW, VWR, VTG, VWT, MTW, MWV, WPL, ZDA (IEC 61162-1)

4.5 Output sentences TLL, RSD, TTM, AAM (IEC 61162-1)

AP3-4

Appendix 3) Specifications

5. POWER SUPPLY 5.1 Display unit

100-230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz, 0.6-0.3 A

5.2 Radar units

FCR-2117/2817/2117-BB - 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 2.6 A1/3.0 A2 - 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.6 A1/1.7 A2 FCR-2127/2827/2127-BB - 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 A1/3.4 A2 - 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.8 A1/1.9 A2 FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2137S-BB - 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 3.0 A1/3.0 A2 - 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.7 A1/1.7 A2 FCR-2827W - 100 - 115 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 3.2 A (24 rpm) - 220 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.8 A (24 rpm) 1 24 rpm, 2 42 rpm

5.3 Chart processor unit

100 - 230 VAC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 1.5 A-0.5 A

5.4 Switching hub

100 - 230V AC, 1ø, 50/60 Hz: 0.1 A

5.5 S-band antenna Model

FCR-2137S(BB) FCR-2837S FCR-2837SW

Antenna voltage input (at wind speed 100 kt) 380 VAC, 200 VAC, 220 VAC, 220 VAC, 440 VAC, 3ø, 50 Hz/ 3ø, 50 Hz/ 3ø, 50 Hz 3ø, 60 Hz 3ø, 60 Hz 440 VAC 220 VAC, (HSC) (HSC) (HSC) 3ø, 60 Hz 3ø, 60 Hz 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.5 A 3.5 A 1.7 A 3.0 A 1.5 A -

AP3-5

Appendix 3) Specifications

6. ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 6.1 Useable temperature range - Antenna unit -25°C to +55°C (storage +70°C) - Display unit, processor units, control unit, power supply, transceiver -15°C to +50°C 6.2 Relative humidity

93 ± 3 % at 40°C

6.3 Waterproofing - Antenna unit IPX6 (IEC 60529) - Display unit, processor units, control unit, power supply: IPX0 (IEC 60529) - Switching hub IPX0 (IEC 60529) 6.4 Vibration

- From 2 Hz to 5 Hz to up to 13.2 Hz with an excursion of ±1 mm ± 10% -13.2 Hz to 100 Hz with a constant maximum acceleration of 7 m/s2

7. COLOR 7.1 Display unit

Chassis: 2.5GY/1.5, Panel: N3.0

7.2 Chart processor unit

2.5GY/1.5

7.3 Control unit/Switching hub N3.0 7.4 Antenna unit

N9.5

7.5 Power processor unit

2.5GY/1.5

8. PERFORMANCE MONITOR 8.1 PM-31 (X-band) - Frequency - Input power - Power output - Power output - Level difference

9365 - 9455 MHz Min. +8 dBm, Max., +28 dBm -36 dBm (2-phase pulse max output) -56 dBm (2-phase pulse max output) 9.0 - 11.0 dB (1-phase pulse, 2-phase pulse)

AP3-6

Appendix 3) Specifications

8.2 PM-51 (S-band) - Frequency - Input power - Power output - Power output - Level difference

3020 - 3080 MHz Min. +5 dBm, Max., +15 dBm -15 dBm (2-phase pulse max output) -35 dBm (2-phase pulse max output) 9.0 - 11.0 dB (1-phase pulse, 2-phase pulse)

9. SWITCHING HUB 9.1 Access

CSMA/CD

9.2 Transmission speed

Half duplex: 100 Mbps/100 Mbps Full duplex: 20 Mbps/200 Mbps

9.3 Necessary cabling

10BASE-T: STP cable, category 3 or better 100BASE-TX: STP cable, category 5 or better

9.4 No. of ports

8 ports, all ports comply with Auto-MDIX

AP3-7

Ref-1) Installation of C-Map Note; As of now (March 2003), the FCR-2107 series has not supported the C-Map Ed.3 Chart. This document describes the procedure for installing the C-Map Ed.3 Chart on the FEA-2107 series as reference.

1. Mounting corresponding kit Insert the dongle (eToken) of the C-Map Ed.3 in any of the USB ports. Then, connect the corresponding kit to the USB port located on the back of the ECDIS to facilitate inserting and removing the dongle from the front. Note: Before mounting the corresponding kit to the EC-1000C, remove the dongle (eToken) once. Insert it to install the C-MAP.

2. Enabling installation of C-Map According to the program updating procedure, check “Enable C-Map features” on the “C-Map ed3 Settings” window. For detail, refer to information on page 8-7.

To use the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, check “Enable C-Map ed3 features”.

X

Ref1-1

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

1. Verifying version through installing and verifying C-Map Ed.3 The following chart shows the work flow from the verification of the ECDIS and LAN Adapter versions after starting the ECDIS through the installation of C-Map Ed. 3 Chart and the verification of its operation.

Work Flow 2 Conduct the following for the number of EC-1000C units.

Items required for verification

Start the ECDIS.

Verify the ECDIS and LAN Adapter versions.

Are the versions the same?

Conduct “Preparation for updating LAN Adapter” and “Updating of LAN Adapter” again.

The LAN Adapter version is different.

YES Install the eToken driver. (See ∗1)

∗1: Individually install the eToken

Load the C-Map Ed. 3 Chart. (See ∗2)

∗2: Load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart into each EC-1000C.

Load the C-Map Ed. 3 License. (See ∗3)

∗3: Load the corresponding license into each eToken.

Verify the display of the C-Map Ed.3 Chart.

∗Option: See Appendix 2 for detail. End

Ref1-2

- Floppy disk (used to save license) - C-Map Ed.3 License (to be prepared for the number of EC-1000C units by customer) - C-Map Ed.3 Chart CD (to be prepared by customer)

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

Important; ∗1 Individually install the eToken driver. ∗2 Even if the ECDIS system are operated in Multi < - > Multi mode, load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart into each EC-1000C. ∗3 Load the corresponding license into each eToken.

2. Verifying ECDIS and LAN Adapter versions Restarting the ECDIS will initiate rebuilding the chart. Time required for rebuilding varies with the volume of the chart loaded into each ECDIS. (It may take 30 minutes or more to load the chart if a large volume of data such as S57 chart or Ed.2 chart is loaded.) Upon completion of rebuilding the data and starting the ECDIS, verify at the location shown in the window below whether the ECDIS software and the LAN Adapter are normally updated.

Verify the version number.

Note: If the version number of the ECDIS software is different from that of the LAN Adapter, the ECDISD will generate “LAN Adapter 1(or 2) Version Error” alarm. In this case, referring to information in Chapter 9, update the LAN Adapter.

Ref1-3

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

3. Installing eToken driver Install the eToken drive according to the procedure shown below.

Precautions; - If the system is operated in Multi mode, change the mode to Single mode. (The driver can be installed only in Single mode.) - Even if the system is operated in Multi mode, the eToken driver needs to be installed individually. Procedure (1) Make sure that the eToken is removed. (2) Clear the Single mode and LAN radar overlay setting, and then set the system to S57 mode. (3) Insert a key disk in the floppy disk drive, and then select Main Menu -> Initial Settings -> “C-Map Ed.3 installation”.

Main Menu -> Initial Settings -> C-Map Ed3 installation

(4) The ECDIS software will automatically stop running and the window shown below will be displayed in the place in which the “Initial Settings” window was displayed. Make sure that the button located in the lower center of the window displays “Install”, and then click this “Install” button. (Note that the button is actually difficult to be seen.)

Click this button.

Ref1-4

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(5) After the following message is displayed, insert the eToken in the USB port of the corresponding kit (i.e., the position in which the eToken was originally inserted).

When this message is displayed insert the eToken.

(6) When the eToken is inserted, “Hardware Wizard” of the Windows will be displayed. Click the “Cancel” button at this time. (If the eToken is already installed, the windows of Step 6 to 9 will not appear.)

Click the “Cancel” button.

(7) Cancel the “Hardware Wizard” shown above, and then click “Yes”.

Click “Yes”.

Ref1-5

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(8) After the following message is displayed, remove the eToken from the USB port once. After that, click “OK”. Remove the eToken, and then click “OK”.

(9) After the following message is displayed, insert the eToken in the USB port once again. After that, click “OK”. Insert the eToken, and then click “OK”.

(10) Click “Yes”.

Click “Yes”.

(11) Click “Yes”. Note that clicking “No” will not complete the installation.

Click “Yes”.

Ref1-6

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(12) Start the installer, and then click the “Next” button.

Click the “Next” button.

(13) Click the “Next” button.

Click the “Next” button.

(14) Click the “Next” button.

Click the “Next” button.

Ref1-7

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(15) Installation will be initiated.

(16) When the installation is complete, click the “Close” button.

Click the “Close” button.

Ref1-8

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(17) The installer will be closed, and the window shown below will be displayed. Make sure that the button located in the lower center of the window displays “Uninstall”. (Note that the button is actually difficult to be seen.) Press the “×” button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to close the window. When the window is closed, the ECDIS software will automatically restart running.

“Uninstall” must be displayed.

∗Do not click this button. Be sure to click the “×” to close this window.

Important; At this time, NEVER click the “Uninstall” button. Clicking the “Uninstall” button will initiate deleting the driver. Accidentally clicking this button will start the uninstaller. In this case, select “Remove”, not “Repair”, delete the driver, and then reinstall the eToken driver once again according to the procedure shown above.

(18) Restart the ECDIS software, and then remove the key disk from the driver.

Ref1-9

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

4. Loading C-Map Ed.3 Chart Precautions; To load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, pay particular attention to the following. (For detail, refer to information in page Ref1-18 Appendix 1.) - The C-Map Ed.3 Chart needs to be loaded individually into the EC-1000C processor units equipped. (Unlike the Ed.2 Chart, this Chart cannot be copied by Harmonize.)

Procedure (1) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-Map Ed3 ->“Load and register for use”. (2) The ECDIS software will automatically stop running and the window shown below will be displayed. Insert the C-Map Ed.3 Chart CD in the CD-ROM drive, and then click the “Copy Database to HD” button located in the center of the window.

Insert the Chart CD, and then click this button.

(3) You will be asked a copy destination. Select “Local Disk (M)” (“M” drive), and then click “OK”.

Select “M” drive.

After selecting, click ”OK”.

Ref1-10

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(4) Click “Yes”.

Click “Yes”.

(5) Copying of the database will be initiated. (The copying takes approximately 10 minutes.)

(6) Upon completion of copying the database, the dialog box shown below will be displayed. Then, click “OK”.

Click ”OK”.

(7) After the completion of copying the database, the window shown below will be displayed again. The version number of the Chart copied will be displayed in the left-hand column. Then, verify that the displayed version number corresponds to that of the original Chart.

Click “×” to close the window. Verify the version number.

After verifying the version number, click the “×” button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to close the window. When the window is closed, the ECDIS software will automatically start up. (At this point, the Chart will not be displayed.)

Ref1-11

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

5. Loading C-Map Ed.3 license Load the C-Map Ed.3 license. The following two methods are available for loading the license. The loading method varies with the format in which the license was ordered. - Loading the license in a file - Loading the license in a license string. Precautions; To load the license, pay particular attention to the following. (1) A license corresponding to the eToken needs to be loaded. (No different license can be loaded.) (2) It needs to be verified that the license of each EC-1000C is a license belonging to the same guard zone in the Multi operation. (If different, inform customer that the licenses must belong to the same guard zone, and then exit from loading of the license.

5.1 Loading license in a file Procedure (1) The save the relevant license to a floppy disk. (Be sure to prohibit writing in the floppy disk after saving the license to it.) After the completion of loading the license, return the floppy disk to the customer, and properly control the license. (2) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-Map Ed3 -> Licenses. The ECDIS software will automatically stop running, and the window shown below will be displayed. The ID of eToken will be displayed in the “System ID” area in the upper left of the window. Then, verify that the System ID is corresponding to that of the eToken connected.

Verify the “System ID” and the ID of the eToken.

Ref1-12

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(3) Click the “Add Licenses from file” button.

Click the ”Add Licenses from file” button.

(4) You are asked the license file destination. Then, insert the previous floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Subsequently, select (A) (“A” drive) and the “password.usr” file, and then click “OK”.

Select the “password.usr” file.

Click “OK”.

(5) Click “Yes”

Click “Yes”.

Ref1-13

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(6) License loading will be initiated.

(7) When license loading succeeds, the dialog box shown below will be displayed. Then, click the “Close” button.

Click the “Close” button.

(8) Click the “License List” button. (9) The “License List” will be displayed. Verify that the license has been registered. Click the “License list” button Click “×” to close the window. Verify the license.

(10) Click the “×” button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to close the window.

Ref1-14

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

5.2 Loading license in License String Procedure ∗Obtain the License String code from customer. (1) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-Map Ed3 ->“Licenses”. (2) The ECDIS software will automatically stop running, and the window shown below will be displayed. (3) Click the “Add License manually” button. (4) Type a code in the “License String” box at the lower right of the window, and then click the “Add License” button.

Click the “Add License manually” button.

Type a code.

Click the “Add License” button.

(5) If the code typed is correct, the dialog box shown below will be displayed. Then, click “OK”.

Click “OK”.

Ref1-15

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(6) The “License List” will be displayed. Verify that the license has been registered.

Verify the license.

Click “×” to close the window.

(7) Click the “×” button in the upper right-hand corner of the window to close the window.

Ref1-16

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

6. Verifying the display of C-Map Ed.3 Chart Verify that the C-Map Ed.3 Chart is displayed.

Procedure (1) Select Main Menu -> Chart Menu ->“Chart Catalogue”. (2) The “Chart Catalogue” will be displayed. Then, check “C-Map” in the “Source of Chart Catalogue” menu. Verify that checking “C-Map” turns the cells green as shown below.

Cells to be turned green frame.

“Cell Name” and ”Green - Permit and SENC OK” to be displayed.

(3) Select any cell in the catalogue, and then verify that “Cell Name” and “Green Permit and SENC OK” are displayed in the Selected Chart column. (4) Click the “Open” button to verify that the relevant cell opens. (5) Use “Chart Legend” (displayed by moving the cursor to the sidebar, right-clicking the cursor to select “Chart Legend” from the menu, and then clicking the wheel) or Cell “Info” in the Chart Catalogue to verify the cell name. Conduct this verification in a sea area having no S57 Chart. Not doing so will prioritize the S57 Chart, thus causing the Ed.3 Chart not to be displayed. ∗The C-Map Ed.3 Chart is displayed in priority to the Ed.2 Chart.

Selected cell to open

The proper display of the Chart indicates that the setting of the C-Map Ed.3 Chart is complete. ∗After the completion of loading the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, conduct the operation specified in Appendix 2 with the permission of customer. (This is not an essential operation.)

Ref1-17

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

Appendix 1. Precautions for C-Map Ed.3 Chart in Multi operation To load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart into the EC-1000C that is being operated in Multi < - > Multi operation, particular attention needs to be paid. The following section describes precautions.

1. Loading S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts To use the S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts in Multi operation, follow the procedure shown below. (1) Use the EC-1000C No.1 to load the S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts. (2) Set the EC-1000C No.1 and No.2 to Multi mode. (3) Harmonization will be initiated. (4) Chart loaded into the EC-1000C No. 1 will be copied into No. 2. ∗If the time stamp of “global_catalog.cat” of No. 1 is newer than that of No. 2: S57、C-Map Ed.2などの場合 For S57, C-Map Ed.2, etc. EC-1000C No.1

EC-1000C No.2 ②Multi

e Harmonized ③Harmonizeされる c Load the S57, ①S57、C-Map Ed.2を C-Map, and Ed.2 ロードする

f Copied ④コピーされる

Charts.

Ref1-18

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

As shown above, for the S57, C-Map Ed.2, and ARCS Charts, loading the Chart into one EC-1000C unit could copy the Chart into the other unit. However, for the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, loading operation comes to an end as shown below.

2. Loading C-Map Ed.3 Chart (1) Use the EC-1000C No.1 to load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart. (2) Set the EC-1000C No.1 and No.2 to Multi mode. (3) Harmonization will be initiated. (4) Chart loaded into the EC-1000C No. 1 is not copied into No. 2. Even if the C-Map Ed.3 Chart is a multiple chart, it cannot be harmonized (copied). In other words, in case of the C-Map Ed.3 Chart, the Chart must be loaded into all EC-1000C units. * However, loading the C-Map Ed.3 Charts requires very short time and completes in a period of approximately 10 minutes. C-Map Ed.3の場合 For C-Map Ed.3 Chart EC-1000C No.1

EC-1000C No.2 ②Multi

e Harmonized ③Harmonizeされる ④コピーされない f Not copied ①C-Map Ed.3のチャ c Load the S57, C-Map, and Ed.2 ートをロードする Charts.

Ref1-19

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

Furthermore, connecting the EC-1000C units with a license for different Zone of the C-Map Ed.3 Chart in Multi operation loads the Chart as shown below.

3. License for different zone of C-Map Ed.3 Chart (1) Load the Zone license incorporated in the EC-1000C No.1. (2) Load a license different from that of the EC-1000C No.1 into No.2. (3) Set the EC-1000C No.1 and No.2 to Multi mode. (4) Harmonization will be initiated. (5) Due to different licenses, only the Chart corresponding to each license can be displayed even in Multi mode. For C-Map C-MapEd.3の場合 Ed.3 Chart EC-1000C No.1

EC-1000C No.2 ③Multi

④Harmonize

それぞれのライセンスに相当 Only the portion corresponding to each する部分のみ表示

c Load a license for ①あるZoneのライセンス

license will be displayed. ②別のZoneのライセン d Load a license for スをロードする a different zone.

a certain zone. をロードする

The situation comes to as shown above. In other words, to load the C-Map Ed.3 Chart into Multi operation system, attention needs to be paid to the following two points. - The C-Map Ed.3 Chart need to be individually loaded into the EC-1000C units equipped. - Be sure to load a license for the same Zone into the EC-1000C units operating in Multi mode (except for cases where different licenses are intentionally loaded).

Ref1-20

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

Appendix 2. Deletion of C-Map Ed.2 Chart Important Conducting the operation shown below produces effects such as saving disk space and also reducing time needed to rebuild the Chart. However, conduct the operation only when customer does not need the C-Map Ed.2 Chart. (At the same time, conducting the cleanup of disk and defragmentation will produce further effect.)

1. Deleting C-Map Ed.2 Chart Procedure (1) Stop the ECDIS software running. (2) Start Windows Explorer from the “START” menu, and then move to “C:¥ants_system¥s57_system¥charts”. (3) Delete all folders and files contained in the “NON_HO” folder.

Delete the “NON_HO” folder.

(4) Restart the EC-1000C.

Ref1-21

Ref-1) Installation of C-MAP

(5) Restart the ECDIS software, and then execute Main Menu -> Char Menu -> System ->“Refresh Chart after backup”.

With that, the deletion of the C-Map Ed.2 Chart is complete.

Ref1-22

Installation of Driver PP-510 Driver Ref-2) Installation ofRef-2) PP-510

To print the Details Log, Voyage Log, Alarms Log, and others on PP-510 through selecting [Menu] -> Record, a printer driver needs to be installed. Connect the printer to the USB port. For connection, USB/Printer converter cable shown below is required. The EC-1000C has a printer port. However, note that the port is not available for printing.

Centronics 36pin

USB

USB/Printer converter cable

Step-1: Installing driver 1. Exit the Chart Radar, and then move to Windows screen. 2. Open the Start -> Control Panel menus to select “Printer and Fax”. 3. Click the Add Printer icon.

Ref2-1

Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver

4. The Add Printer Wizard will boot up. Then, click the Next button.

5. Check the radio button of “Local printer attached to this computer”, and then click the Next button.

Check “Local printer attached to this computer”.

Ref2-2

Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver

6. Check the radio button of “Use the following port”, select “USB001 (Virtual printer port for USB)”, and then click the Next button.

Check “Use the following port”.

Select “USB001 (Virtual printer port for USB)”.

7. On the window shown below, select “IBM” in the [Manufacture] box and “IBM Proprinter II” in the [Printers] box, and then click the Next button.

Select “IBM Proprinter II”. Select “IBM”.

Ref2-3

Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver

8. Click the radio button of “Keep existing driver (recommended)”, and then click the Next button.

Check “Keep existing driver (recommended)”.

9. On the window shown below, “Printer name” will be set to “IBM Proprinter II”. Then, click the Next button.

“IBM Proprinter II” is set.

Ref2-4

Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver

10. On the Printer Sharing window, check the radio button of “Do not share this printer”, and then click the Next button.

Check “Do not share this printer”.

11. On the Printer Test Page, check the radio button of “No”, and then click the Next button.

12. Click the Finish button. The installation is complete.

“IBM Proprinter II” is added.

Ref2-5

Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver

Step-2: IBM Proprinter II setting procedure 1. Open the Start -> Control Panel menus to select “Printers and Faxes”. 2. Select “IBM Proprinter II”, and then open “Printing Preferences..” from the File menu.

Open “Printing Preferences..”

3. Press the “Paper/Quality” tab, and then select “Automatically Select” in the Paper Source box to press the Advanced.. button.

Select “Automatically Select”.

Ref2-6

Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver

4. Select “A4” in the Paper/Output: Paper Size box. Subsequently, click “Graphic: Printer Quality” to select “120 × 144 dots per inch”, and then click OK button to return the display to the “Printers and Faxes” window.

Select “A4” in the Paper Size box. Select “120 × 144 dots per inch” in the Print Quality box.

5. Select “IBM Proprinter II”, and then open “Properties”.

Open “Properties”.

Ref2-7

Ref-2) Installation of PP-510 Driver

6. Press the “Device Setting” tab, select “A4” in the Tractor Feed box, and then press OK button. With that, the setting is complete.

Select “A4” in the Tractor Feed box.

Point: On the IBM Proprinter ll Document Properties window, Press the “Paper Quality” tab, and then select Paper Source -> Automatically Sheet Advanced: Paper size -> A4, Print Quality -> 120 x 144 dots per inch.

Typical printing of Alarm:

Ref2-8

Updating of HDD Firmware Ref-3) Updating of Ref-3) HDD Firmware

If the Revision (Ver) of MHV2040AC firmware for 2.5-inch HDD is “00900005”, the program may freeze. In this case, be sure to rewrite the firmware referring to the revision verification procedure and information on Ref. 3-3 page. Rewriting it will not erase installed charts and set values.

Preparation Disconnect the LAN Adapter (LAN2) and the LAN (LAN1) from the radar. In addition, connect the mouse and the service keyboard to the EC-1000C. 1. Rewriting procedure

1.1 While pressing the [DEL] key, turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C. Press and hold the [DEL] key until the BIOS Setup screen appears. 1.2 Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features“ on the BIOS Setup screen, make changes to the settings shown below, and then save the change. Make these setting changes using the [Pg Up] or [Pg Dn] key. The objective of these settings is to select a drive from which the device is booted. - First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy - Second Boot Device: Change from Floppy to HDD-0

- First Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy - Second Boot Device: Change from FDD to HDD-0

1.3 Insert a floppy disk for firmware change in the floppy disk drive of the EC-1000C, and then turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C

Ref3-1

Ref-3) Updating of HDD Firmware

1.4 The MS DOS will start up, and the software will automatically start running to make a floppy disk firmware change. 1.5 When updating is complete, the window shown below will be displayed.

1.6 Upon completion of successful verification of the window shown above, turn OFF the power supply of the EC-1000C. 1.7 While pressing the [DEL] key, turn ON the power supply of the EC-1000C. Press and hold the [DEL] key until the BIOS Setup screen appears. 1.8 Open the setting of “Advanced BIOS Features“ on the BIOS Setup screen, and then return the changed setting to the original setting to save the setting. - First Boot Device: Change from Floppy to HDD-0 - Second Boot Device: Change from HDD-0 to Floppy

Ref3-2

Ref-3) Updating of HDD Firmware

2. Rewrite verification procedure 2.1 Start the EC-1000C, and then exit the Chart Radar. Exiting procedure: 1) While pressing the [Alt] key, press over the [Tab] key to select “ECAWATCH”. 2) Click the [Shutdown the Chart Rader] button on the ECAWACH window. 3) While pressing the [Alt] key, press the [F4] key. Windows screen will appear. 2.2 Open the Settings -> Control Panel -> System menus from the Start menu, and then press the “Hardware” tab. 2.3 Open Device Manager window to select Disk drives. 2.4 Right-click the “FUJITSU MHV2040AC” icon to open “Properties”.

Ref3-3

Ref-3) Updating of HDD Firmware

2.5 Press the “Details” tab on the Properties window, and then enter the pull down menu to select “Hardware lds”. 2.6 A firmware revision number will be displayed. Then, verify that the number is set to the updated revision number, i.e., “004A0005”.

Ref3-4

E-1 ﾌｧﾝ FAN AD0812LB-A73GL (000-165-008)

EC-1000C

ﾊﾟﾜｰｽｲｯﾁ POWER SWITCH KM01.1105.11 (000-165-004)

I/Oｶｰﾄﾞﾌﾞﾗｹﾂﾄ CARD BRACKET 427-059700E (000-165-045-10)

①

ﾋｭｰｽﾞ GLASS TUBE FUSE FGMB 250V 5A PBF (000-157-570-10) ﾋｭｰｽﾞﾎﾙﾀﾞｰ FUSE SOCKET 4301.1403 (000-165-046)

① ②③

CPUﾎﾞｰﾄﾞｹﾝｻｽﾐﾋﾝ CPU BOARD ASSY (INSPECTED)

PCG820GV/CPU/M/C (001-047-000)

ﾏｻﾞｰﾎﾞｰﾄﾞ BACKPLANE BOARD PCI-5S-RS-R40(ROHS) (000-170-056-10)

DDR SDRAM DIMM BOARD 旧 old

新 new

KVR400X64C3A/512

77.G1136.44G (000-164-603-10)

512MB/1piece

1024MB/1piece

2

COM2ﾚｰﾀﾞｰｹｰﾌﾞﾙ COM2 CABLE 24-010-9011 (000-164-997)

L=310

②

EMCﾌｨﾙﾀ EMC FILTER FN2080-6-06 (000-165-007)

USBｹｰﾌﾞﾙS USB CABLE (S) GU2007-0031-I1 (000-164-996-10)

③

DVI-Dｹｰﾌﾞﾙ DVI-D CABLE 24-010-9012 (000-165-001)

ﾊﾟﾜｰｻﾌﾟﾗｲ POWER SUPPLY UPF250-AA-BG(ROHS) (000-165-006-11)

1

CPUｸｰﾗｰ CPU COOLER ASSY Z7H7Y49214 (ROHS) (000-169-086-10)

EC-1020

EC-1010 BATT(LI) LITHIUM BATTERY CR2032 (000-159-662-10)

LANｺﾝﾊﾞｰﾀｹﾝｻﾋﾝ LAN CONV.ASSY (INSPECTED) I-7188EX-512/X506/S (000-165-666)

PCB(Bｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ) PCB(B-ADAPTER) 24P0093 (001-046-960)

HDﾎﾞｳｼﾝｻﾞｲﾌｸﾛﾋﾝ HD ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER

EC-1000C

HDｿﾌﾄｶｷｺﾐﾋﾝ HD W/SOFTWARE INSTALLED

ﾎﾞｳｼﾝｻﾞｲ1 ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER1

ｺｳｼﾞｻﾞｲﾘｮｳ INSTALLATION MATERIALS ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｹｰﾌﾞﾙ POWER CABLE K15031H5183BR (000-164-998) ﾌｿﾞｳﾋﾝ ACCESSORIES ｷｰﾎﾞｰﾄﾞ KEYBOARD WK750P (000-168-795-10) ﾏｳｽ MOUSE LYNX M9 MOUSE (000-165-011) PS/2ﾌﾞﾝﾊﾟｲｹｰﾌﾞﾙ PS/2 KEYBOARD/MOUSE Y CABLE

0C501P0104151000 (000-164-999)

24-005-5107-1 (100-336-921-10)

4

PCB(POWER-ON) 24P0092 (001-046-980)

ﾎﾞｳｼﾝｻﾞｲ2 ANTI-VIBRATION RUBBER2

24-005-5108-0 (100-336-930-10)

MHV2040AC(EC-1000C) (001-008-110)

4

DVD-ROMﾄﾞﾗｲﾌﾞ DVD-ROM DRIVE GDR-H30N (000-160-935-10)

MODEL

L=520

USBｹｰﾌﾞﾙL USB CABLE (L) GU2007-0052-I1 (000-164-995-10)

FDD(3.5) FLOPPY DISC DRIVE (3.5)

FD-235HF (000-165-010)

APPROVED

PCB(ｺﾈｸﾀ) PCB (CONNECTOR) 24P0095 (001-046-990)

ｺﾈｸﾀ CONNECTOR 1803633 (000-165-002)

PCB(LAN) 24P0091 (001-046-970)

FEA-2107/2107-BB/2807 FCR-2117/2127/2117-BB/2127-BB/2137S/2137S-BB FCR-2817/2827/2827W/2837S/2837SW CHECKED

DRAWN

18 Sep.2008

18 Sep .2008

18 Sep.2008

Y.Kamba

T.Yoshida

S.Kubota

UNIT

DWG.NO.

PROCESSOR UNIT

EC-1000C

制御部

EC-1010 EC-1020

ECDIS LANｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ ECDIS Bｱﾀﾞﾌﾟﾀ

Sinfer

ECDIS LAN ADAPTER ECDIS B ADAPTER

ｹｰｽ CASE 03-163-9611-2 (100-319-972-10)

03P9364(LF) (008-554-830)

PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD

HUBﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ

ﾁﾖｳﾅﾂﾄ ﾅﾐﾋﾝ WING NUT M4 MFNI2 (000-863-320) ｺﾈｸﾀ(NR) RECEPTACLE NR-203-RM (000-160-149-10)

ﾋｭｰｽﾞﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ FUSE MOUNTING PLATE 03-163-9613-0 ROHS (100-319-990-10)

CHECKED 28 Mar.2008 T.Yoshida

28 Mar.2008 Y.Kamba

S.Kubota

28 Mar.2008

DRAWN

DWG.NO.

UNIT

C3519-E10-A

HUB-100

E-2

SWITCHING HUB

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞﾊﾌﾞ

FAR-21X7/28X7 series FCR-21X7/28X7 series FEA-2107/2807/2107-BB APPROVED

MODEL

ﾋｭｰｽﾞﾎﾙﾀﾞｰ FUSE HOLDER FH-001AF (000-157-349-10)

M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-518-10)

WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK*

+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK

FL-VHｺﾈｸﾀ NOISE FILTER W/CONNECTOR 03-2169(ﾌｨﾙﾀ-3P) (008-543-900)

M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-518-10) M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-190-10)

WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK*

+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK

ﾎｺﾞｼｰﾄFIL PROTECTION SHEET FIL 03-163-9616-1 (100-320-401-10)

WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*

ｷﾞﾔﾂﾌﾟﾊﾟﾂﾄﾞ GAP PAD GP1-4.0-013019 (000-162-654-10)

ｹｲｺｸﾗﾍﾞﾙ(1) WARNING LABEL 1 86-003-1011-3 (100-236-233-10)

HUBﾎｳﾈﾂｲﾀ HUB HEAT SINK 03-163-9614-2 (100-320-002-10)

M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-190-10)

WASHER HEAD SCREW *B*

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB

+ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｺﾈｼﾞ BINDING HEAD SCREW M3X8 C2700Wﾎﾟﾘｼｰﾙ (000-163-651-10)

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB

16-018-3206-0 (100-297-770-10)

HIGH VOLTAGE WARNING LABEL

ｺｳｱﾂﾏｰｸ(2)

ﾎｺﾞｼｰﾄHUB PROTECTION SHEET HUB 03-163-9617-0 ROHS (100-320-410-10)

ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(FPC) FLAT CABLE SML2CD30X230AD6P.5S4 (000-150-306-10)

HUBLEDﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 03P9365(LF) (008-554-860)

ﾌﾀ LID 03-163-9612-1 (100-319-981-10)

LEDﾌｲﾙﾀｰ LED FILTER 03-163-9615-0 (100-320-010-10)

ﾊﾞﾂｸﾗｲﾄ ﾕﾆﾂﾄ BACKLIGHT UNIT 201LHS02 (000-151-540)

ﾊﾟﾜ-ｻﾌﾟﾗｲ AC/DC CONVERTER BOARD HYPERION OBL03 131 (000-151-543) ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝﾌｲﾙﾀFILTER W/AC INLET & FUSES 5220.0123.1 (000-151-544) PCB(DVI I/F) DVI I/F BOARD FPI NO SW (000-151-542) LCDﾊﾟﾈﾙ LCD MODULE NL128102AC31-02 (000-151-537)

PCB(ﾊﾞﾂｸﾗｲﾄINV) BACKLIGHT INVERTER BOARD AC1458 (000-151-523)

KEY BOAD I/F

PCB PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD AC1457 (000-151-539)

INVｸﾐﾋﾝ BACKLIGHT INVERTER ASSEMBLY AC1457/1458 (000-161-037)

ﾌｿﾞｸﾋﾝ ACCESSORIES FP03-09810 部品 Parts

MODEL

+ﾄﾗｽﾀﾂﾋﾟﾝﾈｼﾞ1ｼﾕ SELF TAPPING SCREW 6X30 SUS304 (000-162-614-10)

4

ﾊﾟﾈﾙﾌｯｸ PANEL HOOK 03-163-1102-0 (100-305-120)

2

ﾊﾟﾈﾙｶﾊﾞｰ PANEL COVER 03-163-1101-1 (100-305-111)

4

FEA-2107 FCR-2117/2127/2137S CHECKED

DRAWN

25 May.2007

25 May.2007

25 May.2007

H.Kuwamura

T.Yoshida

S.Kubota

APPROVED

構成数 Include

UNIT

DWG.NO.

MU-201CE

表示部 MONITOR UNIT

C4122-E03-B E-3

ｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ GROMMET G-49 (000-166-406-10)

+ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽ F BINDER HEAD SCREW M3X8 C2700W MBCR2 (000-163-538-10) ｶﾊﾞｰ COVER 03-163-7802-2 (100-305-672-10)

ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ CABLE CLAMP 03-163-7804-2 (100-305-502-10) +-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ A WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* M4X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-177-10)

ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ) CABLE ASSEMBLY RCU-015/016

XH10P-W-6P L=10M (000-149-747)

RCU-015A

XH10P-W-6P L=2.3M (000-150-000)

RCU-015FEA

XH10P-DS-5P L=10M (000-149-744)

XH-PADｺﾈｸﾀ XH-PAD CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 03-2123(12-16P) (008-536-710)

ｷﾞｬｯﾌﾟﾊﾟｯﾄﾞ GAP PAD GP1-0.5-011016 (000-147-983-10)

ｽﾍﾟｰｻ SPACER 03-163-7806-0 (100-305-520)

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* M3X6 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-189-10)

ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ CLAMP CK-07H (000-570-244-10)

ｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽ SHIELD CASE 03-163-7805-4 (100-305-514-10)

ｽﾍﾟｰｻ SPACER SQ-8 (000-159-319-10)

ｽﾍﾟｰｻ SPACER SQ-25 (000-159-306-10)

ｻﾝﾀﾝｼｵｻｴｲﾀ 3-PORT CLAMP PLATE 03-163-7803-0 (100-305-490-10)

ｽﾍﾟｰｻ SPACER CZ-413 (000-165-638-10)

ｺｷﾕｳｼｰﾄ RESPIRATION SHEET 03-163-7511-2 (100-305-432-10)

KEYTBﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(KEYTB) 03P9344(LF) (008-555-940)

ﾗﾊﾞｰｷｰ(E) RUBBER KEY (E) 03-163-7851-2 (100-305-562-10)

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-190-10)

ｽﾍﾟｰｻ SPACER SQ-25 (000-159-306-10) ｿｳｻﾊﾟﾈﾙ CONTROL PANEL 03-163-7801-1 (100-305-661-10)

RCU-016

ﾎﾞﾀﾝｶﾊﾞｰ BUTTON COVER 03-163-7841-1 (100-305-571-10)

RCU-015

ﾃﾞｲｽﾄﾚｽｶﾊﾞ-ﾌｸﾛ DISTRESS SWITCH COVER 05-085-1011/2/3/4 (005-950-570)

ﾄﾗｯｸﾎﾞｰﾙ TRACK BALL TA4726N1 (000-147-139-02)

MODEL

FEA-2107/2107-BB/2807 FAR-2XX7 series

APPROVED

CHECKED

DRAWN

6 Oct.2008

6 Oct.2008

6 Oct.2008

Y.Kamba

T.Yoshida

A.Yabuta

FCR-2XX7 series UNIT RCU-015/A/FEA, RCU-016 操作部 CONTROL UNIT

DWG.NO.

C4122-E02-B E-4

ﾏｸﾂｷｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ GROMMET MG-16 (000-166-459-10)

ｶﾊﾞｰ REAR COVER 03-163-7502-3 (100-305-653-10)

ﾏｸﾂｷｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ GROMMET MG-14 (000-166-457-10) ｸﾞﾛﾒﾂﾄ GROMMET G-39 (000-166-401-10)

+ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽ F BINDER HEAD SCREW M4X10 C2700W MBCR2 (000-163-543-10) ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｶﾅｸﾞ CLAMP FIXTURE 03-163-7506-0 (100-305-390-10)

+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽA WASHER HEAD SCREW *A* M4X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-177-10)

ｸﾗﾝﾌﾟﾀﾞｲ CLAMP PLATE 03-163-7505-0 (100-305-380-10)

ｹｰﾌﾞﾙ(ｸﾐﾋﾝ) CABLE ASSEMBLY XH10P-DS-5P L=10M (000-149-744)

+ﾅﾍﾞSﾀｲﾄUIｻﾞﾂｷ PAN HEAD S-TIGHT UI SCREW 3X8 SWRM10 (000-158-070-10)

ﾎｺﾞｼｰﾄ PROTECTION SHEET 03-163-7507-2 (100-305-402-10)

XH-PADｺﾈｸﾀ XH-PAD CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 03-2118(12-16P) (008-534-740)

+ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽBK WASHER HEAD SCREW *BK* M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-518-10)

PNLﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(PNL) 03P9343(LF) (008-555-910)

ﾎｳﾈﾂｼｰﾄ(1) HEAT SINK RUBBER(1) 10-071-2007-2 (100-285-702-10) ﾌﾞｻﾞｰｺﾃｲｺﾞﾑ BUZZER FIXING RUBBER 03-163-7512-1 (100-305-461-10)

ﾗﾊﾞｰｷｰ(E) RUBBER KEY (E) 03-163-7551-3 (100-305-443-10)

BUZﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(BUZ) 03P9362(LF) (008-554-810)

ﾃﾞｲｽﾄﾚｽｶﾊﾞ-ﾌｸﾛ DISTRESS SWITCH COVER 05-085-1011/2/3/4 (005-950-570)

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-190-10) ｺｷﾕｳｼｰﾄ RESPIRATION SHEET 03-163-7511-2 (100-305-432-10)

ｿｳｻﾊﾟﾈﾙ CONTROL PANEL 03-163-7501-5 (100-305-645-10)

ｴﾝｺｰﾀﾞﾀﾞｲｱﾙ ENCODER DIAL 03-163-7503-1 (100-305-161-10) ﾂﾏﾐ KNOB 03-163-7504-1 (100-305-171-10) ﾚｸﾄﾗDｽﾌﾟﾘﾝｸﾞ LECTRA D SPRING #6601-P (000-161-413-10) ｽﾗｲﾄﾞｼｰﾄ SLIDE SHEET 03-163-7509-0 (100-305-420-10)

ﾄﾗｯｸﾎﾞｰﾙ TRACK BALL TA4726N1 (000-147-139-02)

MODEL APPROVED

FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2827W/2137S-BB CHECKED DRAWN UNIT RCU-020

6 Oct.2008

6 Oct.2008

6 Oct.2008

Y.Kamba

T.Yoshida

A.Yabuta

操作部 CONTROL UNIT

DWG.NO. C3559-E03-A

E-5

03P9339B(LF) (008-555-790) 03P9339C(LF) (008-555-820) 03P9339D(LF) (008-555-840)

AC100V 24RPM AC100V 42RPM AC220V 24RPM AC220V 42RPM

ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｵｻｴｶﾅｸﾞ CABLE FIXING PLATE 03-163-8055-1 (100-304-811-10)

ｷｬｯﾌﾟｽﾍﾟｰｻ CAP SPACER CS-10S (000-164-960-10)

ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｵｻｴｲﾀ CABLE SUPPORTING PLATE 03-163-8054-2 (100-304-802-10) ｹｰﾌﾞﾙｸﾗﾝﾌﾟ CABLE CLAMP 03-163-8053-2 (100-304-792-10)

+ｱﾌﾟｾｯﾄUIｾﾑｽB WASHER HEAD SCREW M6X30 SUS304 (000-163-760-10)

ﾇｹﾄﾞﾒﾜｯｼｬ WASHER TM-147-2 (000-801-833-10)

TBﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(TB) 03P9342A(LF) (008-555-880)

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽ B WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* M3X8 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-190-10)

ｹｰｽﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ CASE MOUNTING PLATE 03-163-8052-2 (100-304-782-10)

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* M4X15 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-208-10)

HICﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(HIC) 03P9375(LF) (001-025-840)

HVｶﾊﾞｰ HV COVER 03-163-8016-0 (100-304-610-10)

BL-SMｺﾈｸﾀ FAN 03-2082(ﾌｧﾝ-R2P) (008-534-870)

ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｶﾊﾞｰ POWER SUPPLY CLAMP COVER 03-163-8021-0 (100-304-650-10)

ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｸﾗﾝﾌﾟｲﾀ POWER SUPPLY CLAMPING PLATE 03-163-8018-1 (100-304-631-10)

PWR HICﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(HIC) 03P9340(LF) (008-555-870)

03P9339A(LF) (008-555-760)

PWRﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY

ﾃﾞﾝｹﾞﾝｶﾊﾞｰ POWER SUPPLY COVER 03-163-8015-1 (100-304-601-10)

ﾌｱﾝﾀﾞｸﾄ FAN DUCT 03-163-8017-2 (100-304-622-10)

ｶﾊﾞｰ COVER 03-163-8001-3 (100-304-553-10)

Y.Kamba

7 Oct.2008

APPROVED

MODEL

ﾇｷｻｼﾁｮｳﾊﾞﾝｶｺｳﾋﾝ HINGE ASSY 03-163-8065-0 (100-308-130-10)

ｶﾊﾞｰｵｻｴｸﾞ COVER FIXTURE 03-163-8023-1 (100-304-671-10)

ﾁﾖｳﾊﾞﾝﾅﾂﾄｻﾞｲ HINGE NUT PLATE 03-163-8057-0 (100-304-830)

ｹｰｽ(ｼﾀ) CASE (LOWER) 03-163-8051-4 (100-304-774-10)

ｽﾄﾂﾊﾟｰ STOPPER 03-163-8056-1 (100-304-821-10)

ﾁｮｳﾊﾞﾝ(ｽﾌﾟﾘﾝｸﾞ) HINGE TH-61SUS-3 (000-166-427-10)

ｹｰｽ(ｳｴ) CASE (UPPER) 03-163-8011-1 (100-304-561-10)

RPU013/A(LF)*AC220V* (008-571-600) AC220V

ﾋﾗｶﾞﾀﾜﾝﾀﾂﾁｽﾃｰ STAY B-38-3-R (000-162-809-10)

RPU013/A(LF)*AC100V* (008-571-580) AC100V

+ｻﾗｺﾈｼﾞ FLAT HEAD SCREW M3X12 C2700W (000-163-619-10)

T.Yoshida

A.Yabuta

DWG.NO.

C3559-E01-A E-6

FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2827W/2137S-BB CHECKED DRAWN UNIT 制御部 RPU-016 7 Oct.2008 7 Oct.2008 PROCESSOR UNIT (1/2)

ｴﾝｻﾞﾝﾌﾞﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 64P1106A(LF) (004-655-910)

HV-9017B (001-048-060) FCR-2127/2137/2827/2837

ﾋｰﾄｼﾝｸ(R) HEAT SINK (R) 03-163-8022-4 (100-304-664-10)

HV-9017A (001-048-050)

AC FIL AC FILTER ASSEMBLY

SPUﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(SPU) 03P9337A(LF) (008-567-360)

ｽﾍﾟｰｻ SPACER SQ-16 (000-159-300-10)

SPUﾄﾘﾂｹｲﾀ SPU MOUNTING PLATE 03-163-8012-5 (100-304-575-10)

FCR-2117/2817

PCB(HV)

ﾁｮｳﾊﾞﾝ HINGE TH-TM-5(TG) (000-166-422-10)

ﾅｯﾄｻﾞｲ NUT PLATE 10-071-6308-0 (100-289-380-10)

NET100ﾌﾟﾘﾝﾄ PCB(NET) 03P9332(LF) (008-555-450)

SPUｼｰﾙﾄﾞｹｰｽ SPU SHIELD CASE 03-163-8025-1 (100-308-301-10)

GCｶﾊﾞｰ GYRO CONVERTER COVER 80-0665 (008-537-030)

+-ﾅﾍﾞｾﾑｽB WASHER HEAD SCREW *B* M4X35 C2700W MBNI2 (000-163-197-10)

ﾌｲﾝｶﾞｰｶﾞｰﾄﾞ FINGER GUARD FG-06ULB (000-161-414-10)

+-ﾊﾞｲﾝﾄﾞｾﾑｽ F WASHER HEAD SCREW M4X8 C2700W MBCR2 (000-168-313-10)

E-7 GYRO COMPASS

SERIAL I/F

Ext. A-D CONVERTER CONNECTOR 232-304/026-FUR (000-147-405-11)

CONNECTOR 231-107/026-FUR (000-147-413-11)

CONNECTOR 232-306/026-FUR (000-147-408-11)

CONNECTOR 232-303/026-FUR (000-147-407-11)

HDS SENSOR

LOG

EXT ALARM IN/OUT

NAVIGATOR ECDIS

CONNECTOR 232-312/026-FUR (000-147-409-11)

CONNECTOR 231-607/019-FUR (000-147-414-11)

VH CONNECTOR ASSY 03-2090(3P) (008-534-660)

RS-232C

VH CONNECTOR ASSY 03-2089(5P) (008-534-650) NH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 03-2091(5P) (008-534-670)

GC-10 64P1106A

CARD I/F

CONNECTOR 232-305/026-FUR (000-147-406-11)

CONNECTOR 734-202-FUR (000-147-410-11)

AIS

CONNECTOR 232-302/026-FUR (000-147-403-11)

SLAVE DISPLAY 1 SLAVE DISPLAY 2

MASTER RADAR

CONNECTOR 232-312/026-FUR (000-147-409-11)

CONNECTOR TMP-W-1.5C-L700 (000-147-545)

CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY HIF6-80D-AA-66 (000-147-755-10)

CONNECTOR 231-632-FUR (000-147-412-11) CONNECTOR 734-205-FUR (000-147-411-11)

HV HV9017 A,B

XH-PH CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY 03-2088(6-14P) (008-534-640) VH CONNECTOR 03-2087(10-10P) (008-534-920)

SCANNER UNIT

KEY

TB 03P9342

VH CONNECTOR 03-2086(2-2P) (008-534-910)

VH CONNECTOR 03-2085(3-3P) (008-534-900) XH CONNECTOR 03-2084(15-15P) (008-534-890)

SHIP'S MAIN 100-115/220-230V AC AC FIL 03P9341 03P9341A

PSU-004

TRACK_CONTROL

AC PWR 03P9339 A,B,C,D

SPU 03P9337

XH-SM CONNECTOR 03-2083(4-P2,P2P) (008-534-880)

NET 100 03P9332

MODEL

FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827/2117-BB/2127-BB FCR-2137S/2837S/2837SW/2827W/2137S-BB CHECKED

DRAWN

6 Oct.2008

6 Oct.2008

6 Oct.2008

Y.Kamba

T.Yoshida

A.Yabuta

APPROVED

UNIT

DWG.NO.

RPU-016 (2/2)

制御部 PROCESSOR UNIT

C3559-E02-A

回路図目次 Contents of Drawings

Name

Interconnection diagram

Type

Drw. No.

Page

FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827

C3559-C01

S-1

FCR-2137S/2837S CCN-003/004 (FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827) CCN-003/004 (FCR-2137S/2837S)

C3561-C01

S-2

C3559-C03

S-3

C3561-C02

S-4

EC-1010/1020

C3559-C02

S-5

C3559-C04

S-6

C3519-K01

S-7

C3527-K01

S-8

C3527-K02

S-9

C3521-K01

S-10

C3528-K02

S-11

C3528-K01

S-12

Transceiver unit (S - 30kW/Down)

PSU-007

C3521-K02

S-13

Power supply unit

HUB-100

C3519-K13

S-14

24P0091

C4122-K01

S-15

HUB unit EC-1010 (LAN Adapter)

24P0093 (1/2)

C4122-K02

S-16

24P0093 (2/2)

C4122-K03

S-17

03P9342 (1/3)

C3519-K20

S-18

03P9342 (2/3)

C3519-K21

S-19

03P9342 (3/3)

C3519-K22

S-20

03P9344 (1/5)

C3519-K35

S-21

03P9344 (2/5)

C3519-K36

S-22

03P9344 (3/5)

C3519-K37

S-23

03P9344 (4/5)

C3519-K38

S-24

03P9344 (5/5)

C3519-K39

S-25

64P1106 (1/2)

C4340-K01

S-26

64P1106 (2/2)

C4340-K02

S-27

EC-1010/1020 (CCN-003/004) FAR-2107/2807/-BB series FAR-2827W FAR-2137S/2837S/-BB series FAR-2837SW

Circuit diagram

S-0

Remark

LAN Adapter, B-Adapter LAN Adapter, B-Adapter Scanner unit (X - 12/25kW/UP) Scanner unit (X - 25kW/Down) Scanner unit (S - 30kW/UP)

EC-1020 (B- Adapter) RPU-013 Terminal board

RCU-015 Control board

AD-100 GC-10/8/7

D 100/115/ 220/230VAC 1φ,50-60Hz *1 DPYC-1.5

24VDC

整流器 *2 RECTIFIER (+) 5 PR-62 (-)

6

注記 ＊１）造船所手配。 ＊２）オプション。 ＊３）最長 100m (延長するときは接続箱RJB-001が必要 ) ＊４）船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用。 ＊５）保護アース用ケーブルは緑／黄の絶縁線を使用のこと。 ＊６）LANアダプタおよびB-アダプタの外部接続は別図参照。 *1 DPYC-1.5

1 2 3 *1 IV-2sq. J9 +24V_IN 24R_IN

DPYC-1.5

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 *2

LAN ADAPTER EC-1010 *6

*1 1 2 3 POWER AC AC PE

*1 IV-2sq.

表示部 MONITOR UNIT

J5 RX5+ RX5TX5 LAN ADAPTER EC-1010 *2 *6 GND J9 +24V_IN 24R_IN

DPYC-1.5 *2 NFKVV-SB0.3 -2PL700A

*1 IV-2sq. TS13 RX+ RXTX+ TX-

24V 24R

*1

NOTES *1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. *2: OPTION. *3: 100m MAX. JUNCTION BOX RJB-001 IS REQUIRED FOR EXTENSION. *4: USE 3A BREAKER IN SHIP'S MAINS SWITCH BOX. *5: USE GRN/YEL WIRE FOR PROTECTIVE EARTH. *6: REFER TO ANOTHER DIAGRAM FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTION OF LAN ADAPTER AND B-ADAPTER. *2 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

MU-201CE(FCR-2117/2127) MU-231CE(FCR-2817/2827) PE *1 IV-8sq.

B-ADAPTER EC-1020

*2 *6

(+) (-) *1 IV-2sq.

NC NC

10m

DSUB9P-DSUB9P -L5.0M,5m

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 5 9

VGA1 R_VIDEO G_VIDEO B_VIDEO NC NC GND GND GND NC GND GND NC H_SYNC Y_SYNC NC SCALE

DWG.No.

DRAWN

Feb. 27 '07 CHECKED Feb. 27 '07 APPROVED

C3559-C01-A REF.No.

VCC DD+ GND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

J608 AD_DATA-H AD_DATA-C AD_CLK-H AD_CLK-C J601 NC RX TX NC GND NC NC NC NC

T.YAMASAKI TYPE

T.TAKENO 名 称

Mar.14'07 R.Esumi MASS NAME

kg

03-173-6001-0

J618(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_2 2 GND 3 OP_BP_2 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_2 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_2 8

J617(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_1 2 GND 3 OP_BP_1 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_1 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_1 8

J616(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_IN 2 GND 3 OP_BP_IN 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_IN 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_IN 8

J612 ALARM1_0 1 ALARM1_1 2 ALARM2_0 3 ALARM2_1 4 ACK_OUT_0 5 ACK_OUT_1 6 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7 OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9 GND 10 SYS_FAIL-H 11 SYS_FAIL-C 12

J606 NAV-A 1 NAV-B 2 NC 3 J607 LOG-A 1 LOG-B 2 NC 3 J619 ARPA-A 1 ARPA-B 2 NC 3 J620 TRK_TD-A 1 TRK_TD-B 2 TRK_RD-A 3 TRK_RD-B 4 GND 5 J621 RSV1_TD-A 1 RSV1_TD-B 2 GND 3 RSV2_TD-A 4 RSV2_TD-B 5 GND 6 J611 AIS_TD-A 1 AIS_TD-B 2 AIS_RD-A 3 AIS_RD-B 4 AIS_GND 5

J605 HDG-A 1 HDG-B 2 HDG_C0MMON 3

J602 KEY_TXD-B KEY_TXD-A KEY_RXD-B KEY_RXD-A PWR_SW GND +12V GND SYS_FAIL-H SYS_FAIL-C J622 SYS_ACK-H SYS_ACK-C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J680 GYRO_R2 GYRO_R1 GYRO_S1 GYRO_S2 GYRO_S3 GYRO_T GYRO_FG

P

P

P

P

P

P

*1 TTYCS-7

RW-4864,φ9.5

RW-4864,φ9.5

RW-4864,φ9.5

P

*1 TTYCS-1T

SUB DISPLAY2 (SEMI-LOG)

SUB DISPLAY1 (FULL-LOG)

MASTER RADAR

ALARM SYSTEM

(IEC-61162-2)

HDG SENSOR

PC

A-D CONVERTER

GYROCOMPASS

*1 RS-232C CABLE

*1 TTYCS-4

*1 MPYC-7

4

USB4

VCC DD+ GND

USB3

VCC DD+ GND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LAN TXP TXN RXP RXN

レーダー制御部 RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-016

USB2

VCC DD+ GND

USB1

KEYBOARD(AT) CLOCK DATA NC GND +5V CONTROL HEAD TXD+ TXDMOUSE/KEYB RXD+ KEYBOARD_DATA RXDPWRIN MOUSE_DATA GND GND +5V_FUSED +12VDC GND KEYBOARD_CLOCK NC MOUSE_CLOCK

COM1 DCD RXD TXD GND RI

チャート制御部 CHART PROCESSOR UNIT EC-1000C

操作部

J502/J522 J501/J521 TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1 TD_DN-C TO_UP-C 2 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3 RD_DN-C RD_UP-C 4 PWR_SW 5 NC GND GND 6 +12V +12V 7 GND GND 8 NC SYS_FAIL-H 9 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10 J507/J527 SYS_FAIL-H 1 SYS_FAIL-C 2 SYS_ACK-H 3 SYS_ACK-C 4

1 2 3 5 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

LAN1 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC POWER 1 AC 2 AC 3 PE

RS232 NC TXD RXD GND NC

DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND NC NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

DVI-D/D SINGLELINK5M,5m

1 2 3 6

TB801 TX_HV NC 24V_PLUS 24V_MINUS MOTOR(+) MOTOR(+) MOTOR(-) MOTOR(-) SPU_RF_D-A SPU_RF_D-B RF_SPU_D-A RF_SPU_D-B SG GND TB802 IF_VIDEO GND

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

15-565,1.5m

RS-232C

10m

100-230VAC 1φ,50-60Hz LAN2 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC RADAR UNIT DVI1 J204 DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND PWR_SW_OUT NC PWR_SW_GND NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

RJ45

ORG[B] YEL[B] BLU[B] GRY[B] PPL[B] WHT[B] RED GRN BLK WHT GRN[B] RED[B]

ダイ(太) キ(太) アオ(太) ハイ(太) ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) シロ(太) アカ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ クロ シロ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ(太) アカ(太)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

PE *1 IV-2sq.

1 2 3 6 8

*1 IV-2sq. PE *1 IV-8sq.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

RJ45

P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

B

TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m 1 2 3 6 8

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 1 2 3 6 8

RJ45

1 2 3 6

TXP TXN RXP RXN RJ45

J3

1 2 3 6 TXP TXN RXP RXN

RJ45 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

STP CABLE(CAT5) RJ45

*1 IV-8sq. 1 2 3 6

トランス TRANSFORMER RU-1803 *2

TXP TXN RXP RXN

*1

AC AC GND

440VAC DPYC-1.5 1φ,50-60Hz PE *1 IV-8sq.

1 2 3 6 8

RADAR *1 DPYC-2.5 BRN

1

TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

C 1 2 3

100-115/ 200-230VAC 1φ,50-60Hz チャ

空中線部 ANTENNA UNIT RSB-096/097

15-563,1.5m

NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m

TB1 1 H 2 C

RW-4747 *1 IV-3.5sq. 保護ｱｰｽ PE *5

*3 RW-9600,φ22 15/30/40/50m

TB901 1 100VAC-H 2 100VAC-C 3 NC

A

J613 TX_HV 1 NC 2 J610 24V_PLUS 1 24V_MINUS 2 MOTOR(+) 3 MOTOR(+) 4 MOTOR(-) 5 MOTOR(-) 6 SPU_RF_D-A 7 SPU_RF_D-B 8 RF_SPU_D-A 9 RF_SPU_D-B 10 SG 11 GND 12 J609 IF_VIDEO GND

*1 110/115/ *2 220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 RU-3305 1φ,50-60Hz DPYCY-1.5 *1 100VAC,1φ, 50-60Hz 氷結防止用 FOR DE-ICER *4

S-1

5 6

パフォーマンスモニター PERFORMANCE MONITOR

PM-31

NOT USED

XH10P-DS9P,2m

CONTROL UNIT RCU-020 OR RCU-015FEA

操作部 CONTROL UNIT RCU-016 *2

FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827 自動衝突予防援助レーダー

相互結線図

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

D 100/115/ 220/230VAC 1φ,50-60Hz NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m

*1 IV-2sq.

*1 DPYC-2.5

注記 ＊１）造船所手配。 ＊２）オプション。 ＊３）最長 100m (延長するときは接続箱RJB-001が必要 ) ＊４）船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用。 ＊５）保護アース用ケーブルは緑／黄の絶縁線を使用のこと。 ＊６）LANアダプタおよびB-アダプタの外部接続は別図参照。 整流器 RECTIFIER (+) 5 PR-62 (-)

6 PE *1 IV-2sq.

NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m

100-230VAC 1φ,50-60Hz

1 2 3 *1 DPYC-1.5

*1 IV-2sq. J9 +24V_IN 24R_IN

DPYC-1.5 J3

15-565,1.5m 1 2 3

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 *2

LAN ADAPTER EC-1010 *6

*1 POWER AC AC PE

*1 IV-2sq.

表示部 MONITOR UNIT

J5 RX5+ RX5TX5 LAN ADAPTER EC-1010 *2 *6 GND J9 +24V_IN 24R_IN

DPYC-1.5 *1 *2 NFKVV-SB0.3 -2PL700A

*1 IV-2sq.

NOTES *1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. *2: OPTION. *3: 100m MAX. JUNCTION BOX RJB-001 IS REQUIRED FOR EXTENSION. *4: USE 3A BREAKER IN SHIP'S MAINS SWITCH BOX. *5: USE GRN/YEL WIRE FOR PROTECTIVE EARTH. *6: REFER TO ANOTHER DIAGRAM FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTION OF LAN ADAPTER AND B-ADAPTER. TS13 RX+ RXTX+ TX-

*2 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

MU-201CE(FCR-2137S) MU-231CE(FCR-2837S) PE *1 IV-8sq.

B-ADAPTER EC-1020

*2 *6

24V 24R *1 IV-2sq.

NC NC

XH10P-DS-5P,10m

DSUB9P-DSUB9P -L5.0M,5m

03S9657,5m

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 5 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

VGA1 R_VIDEO G_VIDEO B_VIDEO NC NC GND GND GND NC GND GND NC H_SYNC Y_SYNC NC

DRAWN

Feb. 27 '07 CHECKED Feb. 27 '07 APPROVED

SCALE

DWG.No.

C3561-C01-A REF.No.

VCC DD+ GND

USB4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

T.YAMASAKI

T.TAKENO

MASS kg

03-173-6002-0

P

P

P

P

P

P

*1 TTYCS-7

*1 TTYCS-1T

RW-4864,φ9.5

RW-4864,φ9.5

RW-4864,φ9.5

P

TYPE

名 称

Feb.16'07 R.Esumi NAME

SUB DISPLAY2 (SEMI-LOG)

SUB DISPLAY1 (FULL-LOG)

MASTER RADAR

ALARM SYSTEM

(IEC-61162-2)

HDG SENSOR

PC

A-D CONVERTER

GYROCOMPASS

*1 RS-232C CABLE

*1 TTYCS-4

*1 MPYC-7

ORG[B] YEL[B] BLU[B] GRY[B] PPL[B] WHT[B] RED GRN BLK WHT GRN[B] RED[B]

TB801 1 TX_HV 2 NC 3 24V_PLUS 4 24V_MINUS 5 6 7 8 9 SPU_RF_D-A 10 SPU_RF_D-B 11 RF_SPU_D-A 12 RF_SPU_D-B 13 SG 14 GND TB802 IF_VIDEO GND

5

J618(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_2 2 GND 3 OP_BP_2 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_2 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_2 8

J617(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_1 2 GND 3 OP_BP_1 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_1 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_1 8

J616(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_IN 2 GND 3 OP_BP_IN 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_IN 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_IN 8

J612 ALARM1_0 1 ALARM1_1 2 ALARM2_0 3 ALARM2_1 4 ACK_OUT_0 5 ACK_OUT_1 6 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7 OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9 GND 10 SYS_FAIL-H 11 SYS_FAIL-C 12

J606 NAV-A 1 NAV-B 2 NC 3 J607 LOG-A 1 LOG-B 2 NC 3 J619 ARPA-A 1 ARPA-B 2 NC 3 J620 TRK_TD-A 1 TRK_TD-B 2 TRK_RD-A 3 TRK_RD-B 4 GND 5 J621 RSV1_TD-A 1 RSV1_TD-B 2 GND 3 RSV2_TD-A 4 RSV2_TD-B 5 GND 6 J611 AIS_TD-A 1 AIS_TD-B 2 AIS_RD-A 3 AIS_RD-B 4 AIS_GND 5

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4

J608 AD_DATA-H AD_DATA-C AD_CLK-H AD_CLK-C J602 KEY_TXD-B J601 KEY_TXD-A NC KEY_RXD-B RX KEY_RXD-A TX PWR_SW NC GND GND +12V NC GND NC SYS_FAIL-H NC SYS_FAIL-C NC J622 SYS_ACK-H J605 SYS_ACK-C HDG-A HDG-B HDG_C0MMON

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J680 GYRO_R2 GYRO_R1 GYRO_S1 GYRO_S2 GYRO_S3 GYRO_T GYRO_FG

ダイ(太) キ(太) アオ(太) ハイ(太) ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) シロ(太) アカ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ クロ シロ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ(太) アカ(太)

*3 RW-9600,φ22,15/30/40/50m チャ BRN

4

VCC DD+ GND

USB3

VCC DD+ GND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

LAN TXP TXN RXP RXN

レーダー制御部 RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-016

USB2

VCC DD+ GND

USB1

KEYBOARD(AT) CLOCK DATA NC GND +5V CONTROL HEAD TXD+ TXDMOUSE/KEYB RXD+ RXDKEYBOARD_DATA MOUSE_DATA PWRIN GND GND +12VDC +5V_FUSED GND KEYBOARD_CLOCK NC MOUSE_CLOCK

COM1 DCD RXD TXD GND RI

チャート制御部 CHART PROCESSOR UNIT EC-1000C

操作部

J502/J522 J501/J521 TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1 TD_DN-C TO_UP-C 2 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3 RD_DN-C RD_UP-C 4 NC PWR_SW 5 GND GND 6 +12V +12V 7 GND GND 8 NC SYS_FAIL-H 9 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10 J507/J527 SYS_FAIL-H 1 SYS_FAIL-C 2 SYS_ACK-H 3 SYS_ACK-C 4

1 2 3 5 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

LAN2 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC RADAR UNIT DVI1 J204 DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND PWR_SW_OUT NC PWR_SW_GND NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

LAN1 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC POWER 1 AC 2 AC 3 PE

RS232 NC TXD RXD GND NC

DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND NC NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

1 2 3 6 8

1 2 3 6

J613 TX_HV 1 NC 2 J610 24V_PLUS 1 24V_MINUS 2 MOTOR(+) 3 MOTOR(+) 4 MOTOR(-) 5 MOTOR(-) 6 SPU_RF_D-A 7 SPU_RF_D-B 8 RF_SPU_D-A 9 RF_SPU_D-B 10 SG 11 GND 12 J609 IF_VIDEO GND

3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 PE *1 IV-8sq. RJ45

*1 DPYC-2.5

RS-232C

XH10P-W-5P-A

TXP TXN RXP RXN P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

RJ45

TB1 1 H 2 C

TB902 1 U 2 V 3 W

2

J501 KEY_TXD-B 1 KEY_TXD-A 2 KEY_RXD-B 3 KEY_RXD-A 4 PWR_SW 5 GND 6 +12V 7 GND 8 NC 9 NC 10

STP CABLE(CAT5) 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 6 8

1 2 3 6 8

RADAR RJ45 RJ45

TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

*1 IV-8sq.

トランス TRANSFORMER RU-1803 *2 RJ45

RU-5466-1

1 2 3 6

RU-6522

440VAC,3φ,50Hz P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

1 2 3 6 8

*1 DPYC-1.5 PE *1 IV-8sq.

TXP TXN RXP RXN

100-115/200-230VAC, 1φ,50/60Hz J604 1 ANT_12V_ON 2 GND

15-563,1.5m

440VAC 1φ,50-60Hz RU-5693

P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

220VAC,3φ,50Hz

RJ45

200/380VAC,3φ,50Hz 220/440VAC,3φ,60Hz (FOR RSB-098/099) 110VAC,3φ,60Hz DPYC-1.5 *1

電源 制御部 TB1 POWER +12V 1 SUPPLY ANT_ON_N 2 UNIT PSU-007

1 2 3 6

PE *1 IV-8sq. *1 TPYCY-2.5

*1 IV-3.5sq. RW-4747 保護ｱｰｽ PE *5

TXP TXN RXP RXN

B XK1 U 1 V 2 W 3

空中線部 ANTENNA UNIT RSB-098/099/100/101/102

AC AC GND

K2 1 U 2 V 3 W

1

TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

1 2 3

C TB901 1 100VAC-H 2 100VAC-C 3 NC

A

*1 TPYC-2.5

110/115/ *1 *2 220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 RU-3305 1φ,50-60Hz DPYCY-1.5 *1 100VAC,1φ, 50-60Hz 氷結防止用 FOR DE-ICER *4

S-2

6

パフォーマンスモニター PERFORMANCE MONITOR

PM-51

NOT USED

XH10P-DS9P,2m

CONTROL UNIT RCU-020 OR RCU-015FEA

操作部 CONTROL UNIT *2 RCU-016

FCR-2137S/2837S 自動衝突予防援助レーダー

相互結線図

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

D TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

1 2 3 6 8

CCN-003/004

注記 ＊１）造船所手配。 ＊２）オプション。 ＊３）最長 100m (延長するときは接続箱RJB-001が必要 ) ＊４）船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用。 ＊５）保護アース用ケーブルは緑／黄の絶縁線を使用のこと。 ＊６）LANアダプタおよびB-アダプタの外部接続は別図参照。 TB4 1 2 3 4 5 6 NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m

整流器 RECTIFIER (+) 5 PR-62 (-)

6 1 2 3 15-565,1.5m

*1 IV-8sq. 1 2 3 POWER AC AC PE

J4 RX4+ RX4LAN ADAPTER TX4 EC-1010 *6 GND J9 J9 +24V_IN +24V_IN 24R_IN 24R_IN

表示部 MONITOR UNIT

*2 B-ADAPTER NFKVV-SB0.3 TS13 EC-1020 -2PL700A *2 *6 RX+ RXTX+ TX-

保護ｱｰｽ *1 PE *5 IV-8sq.

100-230VAC または OR

24V 24R

NOTES *1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. *2: OPTION. *3: 100m MAX. JUNCTION BOX RJB-001 IS REQUIRED FOR EXTENSION. *4: USE 3A BREAKER IN SHIP'S MAINS SWITCH BOX. *5: USE GRN/YEL WIRE FOR PROTECTIVE EARTH. *6: REFER TO ANOTHER DIAGRAM FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTION OF LAN ADAPTER AND B-ADAPTER.

MU-201CE(FCR-2117/2127) MU-231CE(FCR-2817/2827) *2 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

LAN ADAPTER EC-1010(No.2)

J9 *2 *6 +24V_IN 24R_IN

J501/J521 J502/J522 TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1 TD_DN-C TO_UP-C 2 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3 RD_DN-C RD_UP-C 4 NC PWR_SW 5 GND 6 GND +12V 7 +12V GND 8 GND NC SYS_FAIL-H 9 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10 J507/J527 SYS_FAIL-H 1 SYS_FAIL-C 2 SYS_ACK-H 3 SYS_ACK-C 4

RS232 NC TXD RXD GND NC

DSUB9P-DSUB9P -L5.0M,5m

03S9657,5m

1 2 3 5 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

XH10P-DS-5P,2.3m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 NC 9 NC

1 2 3 5 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

1 2 3 6

TXP TXN RXP RXN

RJ45

VGA1 R_VIDEO G_VIDEO B_VIDEO NC NC GND GND GND NC GND GND NC H_SYNC Y_SYNC NC

DRAWN

Jul. 23 '07 CHECKED Jul. 23 '07 APPROVED

SCALE

DWG.No.

C3559-C03- B REF.No.

VCC DD+ GND

USB4 1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 6

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4

J608 AD_DATA-H AD_DATA-C AD_CLK-H AD_CLK-C

T.YAMASAKI

T.TAKENO

MASS kg

03-173-6006-0

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

RW-4864,φ9.5

RW-4864,φ9.5

SUB DISPLAY2 (SEMI-LOG)

SUB DISPLAY1 (FULL-LOG)

MASTER RADAR

ALARM SYSTEM

(IEC-61162-2)

HDG SENSOR

RW-4864,φ9.5

*1 TTYCS-7

*1 TTYCS-1T

PC

A-D CONVERTER

GYROCOMPASS

*1 RS-232C CABLE

*1 TTYCS-4

*1 MPYC-7

ORG[B] YEL[B] BLU[B] GRY[B] PPL[B] WHT[B] RED GRN BLK WHT GRN[B] RED[B]

5

TYPE

名 称

Jul.24'07 R.Esumi NAME

J618(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_2 2 GND 3 OP_BP_2 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_2 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_2 8

J617(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_1 2 GND 3 OP_BP_1 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_1 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_1 8

J616(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_IN 2 GND 3 OP_BP_IN 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_IN 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_IN 8

J612 ALARM1_0 1 ALARM1_1 2 ALARM2_0 3 ALARM2_1 4 ALARM3_0 5 ALARM3_1 6 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7 OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9 GND 10 SYS_FAIL-H 11 SYS_FAIL-C 12

J606 NAV-A 1 NAV-B 2 NC 3 J607 LOG-A 1 LOG-B 2 NC 3 J619 ARPA-A 1 ARPA-B 2 NC 3 J620 TRK_TD-A 1 TRK_TD-B 2 TRK_RD-A 3 TRK_RD-B 4 GND 5 J621 RSV1_TD-A 1 RSV1_TD-B 2 GND 3 RSV2_TD-A 4 RSV2_TD-B 5 GND 6 J611 AIS_TD-A 1 AIS_TD-B 2 AIS_RD-A 3 AIS_RD-B 4 AIS_GND 5

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J680 GYRO_R2 GYRO_R1 GYRO_S1 GYRO_S2 GYRO_S3 GYRO_T GYRO_FG

J602 KEY_TXD-B J601 KEY_TXD-A NC KEY_RXD-B RXD KEY_RXD-A TXD PWR_SW NC GND GND +12V NC GND NC SYS_FAIL-H NC SYS_FAIL-C NC J622 J605 SYS_ACK-H SYS_ACK-C HDG-A HDG-B HDG_GND

LAN TXP TXN RXP RXN

ダイ(太) キ(太) アオ(太) ハイ(太) ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) シロ(太) アカ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ クロ シロ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ(太) アカ(太)

TB801 TX_HV NC 24V_PLUS 24V_MINUS MOTOR(+) MOTOR(+) MOTOR(-) MOTOR(-) SPU_RF_D-A SPU_RF_D-B RF_SPU_D-A RF_SPU_D-B SG GND TB802 IF_VIDEO GND

4

VCC DD+ GND

USB3

VCC DD+ GND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

RJ45

レーダー制御部 RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-016

USB2

VCC DD+ GND

USB1

KEYBOARD(AT) CLOCK DATA NC GND +5V CONTROL HEAD TXD+ TXDMOUSE/KEYB RXD+ KEYBOARD_DATA RXDMOUSE_DATA PWRIN GND GND +5V_FUSED +12VDC KEYBOARD_CLOCK GND MOUSE_CLOCK NC

COM1 DCD RXD TXD GND RI

LAN2 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC DVI1 RADAR UNIT J204 DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND PWR_SW_OUT NC PWR_SW_GND NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

RJ45 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

チャート制御部 CHART PROCESSOR UNIT EC-1000C

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

C J3

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 1 2 3 6 8

1 2 3 6

TXP TXN RXP RXN

TXP TXN RXP RXN LAN1 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC POWER 1 AC 2 AC 3 PE

XH10P-W-5P-A 10/20m,φ9

*1 DPYC-1.5 TB1 1 2 1 2 3 6

3

操作部 CONTROL UNIT *2 RCU-016

J501 KEY_TXD-B 1 KEY_TXD-A 2 KEY_RXD-B 3 KEY_RXD-A 4 PWR_SW 5 GND 6 +12V 7 GND 8 NC 9 NC 10

トランス TRANSFORMER RU-1803 *2 RJ45 1 2 3 6 8

RS-232C

1 2 3 6 8

440VAC 1φ,50-60Hz *1 DPYC-2.5

2

TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

100-115/ 200-230VAC 1φ,50-60Hz STP CABLE(CAT5) P5E-4PTX-BL,2m RJ45

DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND NC NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

RADAR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

空中線部 ANTENNA UNIT RSB-096/097

AC AC GND

B TB1 1 H 2 C

1

P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

1 2 3

03S9778,1.5m

RW-4747 *1 IV-3.5sq. 保護ｱｰｽ PE *5

*3 RW-9600,φ22 15/30/40/50m チャ BRN

TB901 1 100VAC-H 2 100VAC-C 3 NC

A

J613 TX_HV 1 NC 2 J610 24V_PLUS 1 24V_MINUS 2 MOTOR(+) 3 MOTOR(+) 4 MOTOR(-) 5 MOTOR(-) 6 SPU_RF_D-A 7 SPU_RF_D-B 8 RF_SPU_D-A 9 RF_SPU_D-B 10 SG 11 GND 12 J609 IF_VIDEO GND

*1 110/115/ *2 220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 RU-3305 1φ,50-60Hz DPYCY-1.5 *1 100VAC,1φ, 50-60Hz 氷結防止用 FOR DE-ICER *4

S-3

6

パフォーマンスモニター PERFORMANCE MONITOR

PM-31

NOT USED

XH10P-DS9P,2m

操作部

CONTROL UNIT RCU-020 OR RCU-015FEA

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 *2

CCN-003/004 (FCR-2117/2127/2817/2827) 自動衝突予防援助レーダー

相互結線図

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

1 2 3 6 8

D

注記 ＊１）造船所手配。 ＊２）オプション。 ＊３）最長 100m (延長するときは接続箱RJB-001が必要 ) ＊４）船内配電盤では3Aのブレーカを使用。 ＊５）保護アース用ケーブルは緑／黄の絶縁線を使用のこと。 ＊６）LANアダプタおよびB-アダプタの外部接続は別図参照。

CCN-003/004

C TB4 1 2 3 4 5 6 NR203PF-VVS1.25,3.5m

15-565,1.5m

*1 IV-8sq.

整流器 RECTIFIER (+) 5 PR-62 (-)

6 1 2 3 1 2 3 POWER AC AC PE

表示部 MONITOR UNIT

*2 B-ADAPTER J4 NFKVV-SB0.3 TS13 EC-1020 -2PL700A *2 *6 RX4+ RX+ RX4RXTX+ LAN ADAPTER TX4 TXEC-1010 *6 GND J9 J9 +24V_IN +24V_IN 24V 24R_IN 24R_IN 24R

保護ｱｰｽ *1 PE *5 IV-8sq.

100-230VAC

NOTES *1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. *2: OPTION. *3: 100m MAX. JUNCTION BOX RJB-001 IS REQUIRED FOR EXTENSION. *4: USE 3A BREAKER IN SHIP'S MAINS SWITCH BOX. *5: USE GRN/YEL WIRE FOR PROTECTIVE EARTH. *6: REFER TO ANOTHER DIAGRAM FOR EXTERNAL CONNECTION OF LAN ADAPTER AND B-ADAPTER. または OR

MU-201CE(FCR-2137S) MU-231CE(FCR-2837S) *2 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

LAN ADAPTER EC-1010(No.2) J9 *2 *6 +24V_IN 24R_IN

DSUB9P-DSUB9P -L5.0M,5m

1 2 3 5 9

DRAWN

Jul. 23 '07 CHECKED Jul. 23 '07 APPROVED

SCALE

DWG.No.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

XH10P-DS-5P,2.3m 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 NC NC

1 2 3 5 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

RJ45

VGA1 R_VIDEO G_VIDEO B_VIDEO NC NC GND GND GND NC GND GND NC H_SYNC Y_SYNC NC

C3561-C02- B REF.No.

T.YAMASAKI

T.TAKENO

MASS kg

03-173-6007-0

VCC DD+ GND

USB4

VCC DD+ GND

USB3

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

1 2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1 2 3 4

J608 AD_DATA-H AD_DATA-C AD_CLK-H AD_CLK-C

TYPE

名 称

Jul.24'07 R.Esumi NAME

P

P

P

P

P

P

P

SPU_RF_D-A SPU_RF_D-B RF_SPU_D-A RF_SPU_D-B SG GND TB802 IF_VIDEO GND

TB801 TX_HV NC 24V_PLUS 24V_MINUS

RW-4864,φ9.5

RW-4864,φ9.5

SUB DISPLAY2 (SEMI-LOG)

SUB DISPLAY1 (FULL-LOG)

MASTER RADAR

ALARM SYSTEM

(IEC-61162-2)

HDG SENSOR

PC

A-D CONVERTER

RW-4864,φ9.5

*1 TTYCS-7

*1 TTYCS-1T

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

GYROCOMPASS

ORG[B] YEL[B] BLU[B] GRY[B] PPL[B] WHT[B] RED GRN BLK WHT GRN[B] RED[B]

*1 RS-232C CABLE

*1 TTYCS-4

*1 MPYC-7

ダイ(太) キ(太) アオ(太) ハイ(太) ﾑﾗｻｷ(太) シロ(太) アカ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ クロ シロ ﾐﾄﾞﾘ(太) アカ(太)

*3 RW-9600,φ22 15/30/40/50m チャ BRN

5

J618(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_2 2 GND 3 OP_BP_2 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_2 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_2 8

J617(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_1 2 GND 3 OP_BP_1 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_1 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_1 8

J616(NH) GND 1 OP_HD_IN 2 GND 3 OP_BP_IN 4 GND 5 OP_TRIG_IN 6 GND 7 OP_VIDEO_IN 8

J612 ALARM1_0 1 ALARM1_1 2 ALARM2_0 3 ALARM2_1 4 ALARM3_0 5 ALARM3_1 6 OPERATOR_FITNESS_0 7 OPERATOR_FITNESS_1 8 EXT_ALM_ACK_N 9 GND 10 SYS_FAIL-H 11 SYS_FAIL-C 12

J606 NAV-A 1 NAV-B 2 NC 3 J607 LOG-A 1 LOG-B 2 NC 3 J619 ARPA-A 1 ARPA-B 2 NC 3 J620 TRK_TD-A 1 TRK_TD-B 2 TRK_RD-A 3 TRK_RD-B 4 GND 5 J621 RSV1_TD-A 1 RSV1_TD-B 2 GND 3 RSV2_TD-A 4 RSV2_TD-B 5 GND 6 J611 AIS_TD-A 1 AIS_TD-B 2 AIS_RD-A 3 AIS_RD-B 4 AIS_GND 5

1 2 3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

J680 GYRO_R2 GYRO_R1 GYRO_S1 GYRO_S2 GYRO_S3 GYRO_T GYRO_FG

J602 KEY_TXD-B J601 KEY_TXD-A NC KEY_RXD-B RXD KEY_RXD-A TXD PWR_SW NC GND GND +12V NC GND NC SYS_FAIL-H NC SYS_FAIL-C NC J622 SYS_ACK-H J605 SYS_ACK-C HDG-A HDG-B HDG_GND

LAN TXP TXN RXP RXN

レーダー制御部 RADAR PROCESSOR UNIT RPU-016

VCC DD+ GND

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6

1 2 3 4 5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

1 2 3 6

J613 TX_HV 1 NC 2 J610 24V_PLUS 1 24V_MINUS 2 MOTOR(+) 3 MOTOR(+) 4 MOTOR(-) 5 MOTOR(-) 6 SPU_RF_D-A 7 SPU_RF_D-B 8 RF_SPU_D-A 9 RF_SPU_D-B 10 SG 11 GND 12 J609 IF_VIDEO GND

TB902 1 U 2 V 3 W

4

USB2

VCC DD+ GND

USB1

KEYBOARD(AT) CLOCK DATA NC GND +5V CONTROL HEAD TXD+ TXDMOUSE/KEYB RXD+ RXDKEYBOARD_DATA PWRIN MOUSE_DATA GND GND +5V_FUSED +12VDC GND KEYBOARD_CLOCK NC MOUSE_CLOCK

COM1 DCD RXD TXD GND RI

LAN2 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC RADAR UNIT DVI1 J204 DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND PWR_SW_OUT NC PWR_SW_GND NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

RJ45

TB1 1 H 2 C

2ABVT1202D-L2000T0

RJ45 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

チャート制御部 CHART PROCESSOR UNIT EC-1000C

J502/J522 J501/J521 TD_DN-H TO_UP-H 1 TD_DN-C TO_UP-C 2 RD_DN-H RD_UP-H 3 RD_DN-C RD_UP-C 4 NC PWR_SW 5 GND GND 6 +12V +12V 7 GND GND 8 SYS_FAIL-H 9 NC SYS_FAIL-C 10 NC J507/J527 SYS_FAIL-H 1 SYS_FAIL-C 2 SYS_ACK-H 3 SYS_ACK-C 4

RS232 NC TXD RXD GND NC

DVI0TX2_N DVI0TX2_P A_GND NC NC NC NC NC DVI0TX1_N DVI0TX1_P A_GND NC NC VCC GND NC DVI0TXD_N DVI0TXD_P A_GND NC NC A_GND DVI0TXC_P DVI0TXC_N

03S9657,5m

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 1 2 3 6 8

1 2 3 6

TXP TXN RXP RXN LAN1 TXP TXN RXP RXN NC POWER 1 AC 2 AC 3 PE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

TB1 1 2 1 2 3 6 1 2 3 6 8

XH10P-W-5P-A 10/20m,φ9

*1 DPYC-1.5 RJ45 P5E-4PTX-BL,2m RJ45

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

STP CABLE(CAT5) TXP TXN RXP RXN

RU-6522

1 2 3 6

440VAC,3φ,50Hz RU-5466-1

3

操作部 CONTROL UNIT *2 RCU-016

J501 KEY_TXD-B 1 KEY_TXD-A 2 KEY_RXD-B 3 KEY_RXD-A 4 PWR_SW 5 GND 6 +12V 7 GND 8 NC 9 NC 10

トランス TRANSFORMER RU-1803 *2 3ACVT214029 YM-L1500 TB2 1 2 3 J604 1 ANT_12V_ON 2 GND RS-232C

1 2 3 6 8

440VAC 1φ,50-60Hz *1 DPYC-2.5

電源 制御部 TB1 POWER SUPPLY +12V 1 ANT_ON_N 2 UNIT PSU-007

TXP TXN RXP RXN NC

100-115/ 200-230VAC 1φ,50-60Hz

2

J3

RADAR 3ACVT214029 MM-L1500

TXP TXN RXP RXN

220VAC,3φ,50Hz *1 TPYCY-2.5

空中線部 ANTENNA UNIT RSB-098/099/100/101/102

AC AC GND

*1 200/380VAC,3φ,50Hz TPYC-2.5 220/440VAC,3φ,60Hz (FOR RSB-098/099) 110VAC,3φ,60Hz RU-5693 TB3 1 2 3

RW-4747 *1 IV-3.5sq. 保護ｱｰｽ PE *5

03S9778,1.5m

B XK1 U 1 V 2 W 3

A TB901 1 100VAC-H 2 100VAC-C 3 NC

1

P5E-4PTX-BL,2m

1 2 3

K2 1 U 2 V 3 W

*1 110/115/ *2 220/230VAC, DPYC-1.5 RU-3305 1φ,50-60Hz DPYCY-1.5 *1 100VAC,1φ, 50-60Hz 氷結防止用 FOR DE-ICER *4

S-4

6

パフォーマンスモニター PERFORMANCE MONITOR

PM-51

NOT USED

XH10P-DS9P,2m

操作部

CONTROL UNIT RCU-020 OR RCU-015FEA

ｽｲｯﾁﾝｸﾞ ﾊﾌﾞ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100 *2

CCN-003/004 (FCR-2137S/2837S) 自動衝突予防援助レーダー

相互結線図

MARINE RADAR/ARPA

INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

1

2

4

3

5

S-5

6

スイッチングハブ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100

J2 RX2+ RX2-

J9

(+) +24V_IN (-) 24R_IN (+) +24V_IN (-) 24R_IN

GND

P

J6 RX6+ RX6RL1NC RL1C RL1NO GND

P

Bアダプタ B-ADAPTER EC-1020 *2

P P

Jun. 11 '07 CHECKED Jun. 11 '07 APPROVED

T.YAMASAKI T.TAKENO MASS kg

DWG No.

C3559-C02- B

J34 ST11 GND ST12 GND ST13 GND ST14 GND

J37 ST05+ ST05ST06+ ST06ST07+ ST07ST08+ ST08-

J35 ST15 GND ST16 GND ST17 GND ST18 GND

P P

J32 ST19 GND ST20 GND NC NC NC NC

J28-31 REF+ A IN SG REFREF+ A IN SG REF-

J33 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC

TITLE

EC-1010/1020

名称

LANアダプタ、B-アダプタ 相互結線図

NAME

LAN ADAPTER, B-ADAPTER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

Jun.12'07 R.Esumi FCR-2117SER.

SCALE

P

(NORMAL CLOSE)

(NORMAL CLOSE)

OPERATOR FITNESS TTYCS-1 *1 (OPEN=OPERATOR NOT ACTIVE) ANY RADAR ALARM TTYCS-1 *1

(NORMAL CLOSE)

(NORMAL CLOSE)

NAVIGATION SENSOR ALARM TTYCS-1 *1

P

OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS

D

DRAWN

P

WAYPOINT APPROACH TTYCS-1 *1 (NORMAL CLOSE) DEPTH BELOW LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1

P

J38 S0 S1 S2 S3 R1H R1L R2 NC

(200P/NM)

*3 TTYCS-4 *1 LOG

P

J39 A1OUT A1GND A2OUT A2GND LOG+ LOGFA+ FA-

TTYCS-1 *1

C

J36 ST01+ ST01ST02+ ST02ST03+ ST03ST04+ ST04-

BUZZER STOP TTYCS-1 *1

TS13 (+) +24V (-) 24R

P

NOTE *1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. *2: OPTION. *3: WHEN NMEA LOG DATA IS NOT AVAILABLE.

*1 IV-2sq.

TX GND

*1 DPYC-1.5

RX+ RXRXRET TX+ TXRET

注記 ＊１）造船所手配。 ＊２）オプション。 ＊３）NMEAのLOGが使用不可のとき。

J8 RX8+ RX8RL3NC RL3C RL3NO GND

TTYCS-1 *1

*1 IV-2sq.

*1 DPYC-1.5

J4 RX4+ RX4TX4+ TX4TX4 GND GND GND

ALARM ACK

24VDC

P

J7 RX7+ RX7RL2NC RL2C RL2NO GND

RX+ RX-

J8 RX8+ RX8RL3NC RL3C RL3NO GND

P

P

DEPTH BELOW LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1

P

P

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

P

J6 RX6+ RX6RL1NC RL1C RL1NO GND

*2 J5 RX5+ RX5TX5+ TX5TX5 GND GND GND

J1

P

P

P

P

EC-1010(No.2) J3 RX3+ RX3TX3+ TX3TX3 GND GND GND

OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1

B

GND

J4 RX4+ RX4TX4+ TX4TX4 GND GND GND

P

P

LAN ADAPTER

J1 RX1+ RX1TX1+ TX1TX1 GND GND GND

WAYPOINT APPROACH TTYCS-1 *1

(+) +24V_IN (-) 24R_IN +24V_IN 24R_IN

P

P

LANアダプタ

NFKVV-SB0.3-2PL700A

*1 DPYC-1.5

J2 RX2+ RX2-

P

P

LAN CONVERTER RJ45 E1 1 TXP 2 TXN 3 RXP 4 NC 5 NC 6 RXN 7 NC 8 NC

SPEED PILOT TTYCS-4 *1

24VDC

NAV EQUIPMENT (No.1) TTYCS-1 *1

P

P

P

J7 RX7+ RX7RL2NC RL2C RL2NO GND

ROUTE BACKUP TTYCS-4 *1

J9

P

J5 RX5+ RX5TX5+ TX5TX5 GND GND GND

ECHO SOUNDER TTYCS-1 *1 ANY RADAR ALARM TTYCS-1 *1 TTYCS-1 *1 LOG/DAX LOG

P

EC-1010(No.1) J3 RX3+ RX3TX3+ TX3TX3 GND GND GND

AIS TTYCS-4 *1 NAV EQUIPMENT (No.2) TTYCS-1 *1 TTYCS-1 *1 OPERATOR FITNESS

P

P

NFKVV-SB0.3-2PL700A

P

LAN ADAPTER

J1 RX1+ RX1TX1+ TX1TX1 GND GND GND

B-ADAPTER (LANアダプタが1台のとき) (WHEN A LAN ADAPTER ONLY USED)

A

LANアダプタ

ANEMOMETER TTYCS-1 *1

P

LAN CONVERTER RJ45 E1 1 TXP 2 TXN 3 RXP 4 NC 5 NC 6 RXN 7 NC 8 NC

*1 IV-2sq.

P

P

J9 P

*1 DPYC-1.5

(+) +24V_IN (-) 24R_IN +24V_IN 24R_IN

B

J4 RX4+ RX4TX4+ TX4TX4 GND GND GND

P P

P P

J5 RX5+ RX5TX5+ TX5TX5 GND GND GND J6 RX6+ RX6RL1NC RL1C RL1NO GND

P P

J7 RX7+ RX7RL2NC RL2C RL2NO GND

スイッチングハブ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100

P

P

P

P

P

J8 RX8+ RX8RL3NC RL3C RL3NO GND

LANアダプタ

LAN CONVERTER RJ45 E1 1 TXP 2 TXN 3 RXP 4 NC 5 NC 6 RXN 7 NC 8 NC J9

P

*1

24VDC DPYC-1.5

LAN ADAPTER

J1 RX1+ RX1TX1+ TX1TX1 GND GND GND

(+) +24V_IN (-) 24R_IN +24V_IN 24R_IN

P

J2 RX2+ RX2-

GND

P

P

EC-1010 J3 RX3+ RX3TX3+ TX3TX3 GND GND GND

P P

J4 RX4+ RX4TX4+ TX4TX4 GND GND GND

P P

J5 RX5+ RX5TX5+ TX5TX5 GND GND GND J6 RX6+ RX6RL1NC RL1C RL1NO GND

P P

P

J7 RX7+ RX7RL2NC RL2C RL2NO GND

J8 RX8+ RX8RL3NC RL3C RL3NO GND

注記 ＊１）造船所手配。 ＊２）オプション。 ＊３）NMEAのLOGが使用不可のとき。 NOTE *1: SHIPYARD SUPPLY. *2: OPTION. *3: WHEN NMEA LOG DATA IS NOT AVAILABLE.

DRAWN Jun. 11 '07 CHECKED Jun. 11 '07 APPROVED

P P

T.YAMASAKI T.TAKENO MASS kg

DWG No.

C3559-C04- B

J34 ST11 GND ST12 GND ST13 GND ST14 GND

J37 ST05+ ST05ST06+ ST06ST07+ ST07ST08+ ST08-

J35 ST15 GND ST16 GND ST17 GND ST18 GND

P P

J32 ST19 GND ST20 GND NC NC NC NC J33 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC

TITLE

EC-1010/1020 (CCN-003/004)

名称

LANアダプタ、B-アダプタ 相互結線図

NAME

LAN ADAPTER, B-ADAPTER INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM

Jun.12'07 R.Esumi FCR-2117SER.

SCALE

P

(NORMAL CLOSE)

OPERATOR FITNESS TTYCS-1 *1 TTYCS-1 *1 ANY RADAR ALARM

P

J38 S0 S1 S2 S3 R1H R1L R2 NC

(OPEN=OPERATOR NOT ACTIVE)

P

J39 A1OUT A1GND A2OUT A2GND LOG+ LOGFA+ FA-

TTYCS-1 *1

P

J8 RX8+ RX8RL3NC RL3C RL3NO GND

J36 ST01+ ST01ST02+ ST02ST03+ ST03ST04+ ST04-

TTYCS-1 *1 ALARM ACK BUZZER STOP TTYCS-1 *1

P

TX GND

J1 P

(NORMAL CLOSE)

GND

P

P

(NORMAL CLOSE)

J6 RX6+ RX6RL1NC RL1C RL1NO GND

RX+ RXRXRET TX+ TXRET

WAYPOINT APPROACH TTYCS-1 *1 (NORMAL CLOSE) DEPTH BELOW LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1

J4 RX4+ RX4TX4+ TX4TX4 GND GND GND

Bアダプタ B-ADAPTER EC-1020 *2

TTYCS-1 *1

J2 RX2+ RX2-

P

J7 RX7+ RX7RL2NC RL2C RL2NO GND

(NORMAL CLOSE)

J5 RX5+ RX5TX5+ TX5TX5 GND GND GND

NAVIGATION SENSOR ALARM

D

J3 RX3+ RX3TX3+ TX3TX3 GND GND GND

OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS

(+) +24V_IN (-) 24R_IN +24V_IN 24R_IN

J1 RX1+ RX1TX1+ TX1TX1 GND GND GND

TS13 (+) +24V (-) 24R

(200P/NM)

*1 DPYC-1.5

ROUTE BACKUP TTYCS-4 *1

J9

C

*1 DPYC-1.5

*2

*3 LOG TTYCS-4 *1

P

P

EC-1010(No.2)

DEPTH BELOW LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1

P

P

LAN ADAPTER

OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMIT TTYCS-1 *1

P

LANアダプタ

WAYPOINT APPROACH TTYCS-1 *1

P

LAN CONVERTER RJ45 E1 1 TXP 2 TXN 3 RXP 4 NC 5 NC 6 RXN 7 NC 8 NC

RX+ RX-

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

HUB-100

J2 RX2+ RX2-

GND

NAV EQUIPMENT (No.1) TTYCS-1 *1

24VDC

P

EC-1010(No.1) J3 RX3+ RX3TX3+ TX3TX3 GND GND GND

EC-1020 ADDED

TTYCS-1 *1 ECHO SOUNDER ANY RADAR ALARM TTYCS-1 *1 LOG/DAX LOG TTYCS-1 *1

P

LAN ADAPTER

J1 RX1+ RX1TX1+ TX1TX1 GND GND GND

EC-1020を追加するとき

S-6

6

AIS TTYCS-4 *1 NAV EQUIPMENT (No.2) TTYCS-1 *1 TTYCS-1 *1 OPERATOR FITNESS

A

LANアダプタ

5

ANEMOMETER TTYCS-1 *1 NFKVV-SB0.3-2PL700A

P

LAN CONVERTER RJ45 E1 1 TXP 2 TXN 3 RXP 4 NC 5 NC 6 RXN 7 NC 8 NC

2

ECHO SOUNDER TTYCS-1 *1 TTYCS-1 *1 ANY RADAR ALARM LOG/DAX LOG TTYCS-1 *1

スイッチングハブ SWITCHING HUB HUB-100

EC-1010 ADDED

AIS TTYCS-4 *1 NAV EQUIPMENT (No.2) TTYCS-1 *1 TTYCS-1 *1 OPERATOR FITNESS

EC-1010を追加するとき

4

3

ANEMOMETER TTYCS-1 *1

1

2

NAV EQUIPMENT (No.1) TTYCS-1 *1

1

J28-31 REF+ A IN SG REFREF+ A IN SG REF-

S-7

S-8

S-9

S - 10

S - 11

S - 12

S - 13

S - 14

S - 15

S - 16

S - 17

S - 18

S - 19

S - 20

S - 21

S - 22

S - 23

S - 24

S - 25

S - 26

S - 27